Sei sulla pagina 1di 327

e Aviation Theory Course for

rline Transport Pilot

Compiled by Li Weidong
Hao Jingsong He Qiuzhao
Airline Transport Pilot
Compiled by Li Weidong Hao Jingsong He Qiuzhao
Southwest Jiaotong University Press
Chengdu, China
f!l=tU:Eit&Uii El ( C I P )
Aviation Theory
Course for Airline Transport Pilot I *:E.*,
tiHtH, 2004.3
(2006.3 :W:EP)
ISBN 7-81057-835-9
I. AA; ... II . CD* .. ... @foJ... m.
IV. V21
ClP ( 2004) jjl 010658 %
The Aviation Theory Course for
Airline Transport Pilot

..i.!J, .t
-t1tA44 i.t.
1-,.hii i9: it *-7t _j:_
IDiW13:c illi::k::!f: tl:Ht& U ll ff
Ill -% 610031 87600564)
http: //
tmJ II E'] $ijlj
185 mmX260 mm 20.375
2004 l:f 3 PJ I /1& 2006 3 PJ 5
ISBN 7-81057-835-9N 022
}:E-Ifl' : 29.80 5f;

Regulations 1
Section A
Section B
Section C
Section E
Section H
Section I
Applicable Regulations I
The ATP Ce.rtificate I
Flight Engineer Requirements
Ill 2
Flight Attendants 3
Experience and Training Requirements .. ... ... 4
Flight Crew Duty' Time Limits 6
Dispatching and Flight Release 19
Fuel Requirements 20
Carriage of Passengers and Cargo 21
Section J Emergency Equipment and Operations ... .. .. .. ....... 23
Chapter 2 Equipment, Navigation and Facilities 27
Section A
Section B
Section C
Section E
Section F
Section G
Section H
Section I
Section J
Section K
Inoperative Eq_uipment 27
Pitot-static lnstrllments 27
Safety of Flight Equipment 30
Communications 32
Navigation Equipment 32
Horizontal Situ.ation Indicator 34
Radio Magnetic Indicator (R.MI) 3 7
Long Range Navigation Systems 38
Approach Systems 39
Global Positioning System
... .... 43
Airport Lighting an.d Marking 44
Section L Approach Lighting
........................................................................ 47
Aerodynamics 49
Section A Lift and Drag
........... 49
Section B
Section C
Section E
Section F
Stability 53
Flight Controls 54
High-lift Devices 56
........................... 57
............. ...... 58
High Speed Fligh.t 59
Chapter 4 Perfonnance .. 6 I
Section A Engine performance ... .. 61
Section B Take-off Perforn1ance 64
Section C Climb Performance .. .. 78
Section D Cruise Perforn1ance .. 90
Section E Landing Performance ........ .. .. ................................................... ... 91
Section F Miscellaneous Perforn1ance ........ . .......... .. ............................ ........ 103
Section G Engine-out Procedures .. .. .. .... .... .............. 108
Section H Flight Planning Graphs and Tables .. .. .. .. ............ Ill
Section I Typical Flight Logs ............ .... ........... .... ...... .... .. .... .......... 115
Chapter 5 Weight and Balance .......... .. .. .. ...................... .......................... ... 132
Section A Introduction .................. ...... .... ........ .. ..................................... 132
Section B Weight and Balance Principle ............ ..................... ..................... 133
Section C Center of Gravity Computation and Stabilizer Trim Setting" .... ... 137
Section D Changing Loading Condition ............... .. ........................................ 148
Section E Floor Loading Limits ....... .. ... .. ............................ ........... . ............ 150
Chapter6 FlightOperations ................................. .. ..... ... ........... .................. 151
Section A Airspaces .. .. .............. .... .... .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. ........ .. .... .. 151
Section B NOTAMs (Notices To Airmen) ....................... .................. .... ...... 152
Section C Items on the Flight Plan ................. .. ... .... .. ...................... .. ........... 154
Section D Selecting an Alternate Airport .... ..... .. ... ........ ... .. ........................... 156
Section E ATC Clearances........... ....... .................. ...... .............................. 158
Section F Take-off Procedures ........ .. .. ........ .. ...... ... ...... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. 159
Section G Instrument Approaches ..................... .... ...................................... 161
Section H Landing..................................... ............................................ 168
Section I Communications .................................. .. ... .. ............................ 168
Section J Speed Adjustments . .. ......... .................. .. .................................. 169
Section K Holding .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .... ...... ........ .. ........ .. ...... .... .... 170
Section L Charts for Instrument Flight .... .......... .......... .. ........ .... .... .. ...... .. 173
Chapter 7 Emergency, Physiology and Crew Resource Management ...... ..... .. ...... .. .. 196
Section A Flight Emergency and Hazards...................................................... 196
Section B Flight Physiology .... .. .. .. .......... ........ ...... .. .. .... ........ .. 209
Section C Situation Awareness, Communication, Leadership and Decision Making .. .. 224
Chapter 8 Aviation Meteorology .. .... .. .... ............ ...... .. ............ .. ..... ...... ... 236
Section A Basic Theories ...... ................... ........ .......... .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .... 236
Section B Hazard Weather. .. .. .. .. ... ...... .. ............ .......... ...... .. ........ .... 256
Section C Aviation Weather Services .................... .. ............ ........ .... .. .. ... 275
Appendix ..................... ...... ...... ...... ...... ........................ ...... ..................... 315
References .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .............. ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. ...... 319
1 . Et!. -TW:-l\.d: 2002
2 2001
3 tJ:I IE
4 Airbus 320 FCOM. Airbus Industry/Flight Safety, 1998
5 Airline Transportation Pilot test Prep 2004. ASA, Inc, 2003
6 Instrument Flying Handbook. ASA, Inc, 1980
7 Boeing 737-300 Operating Manual Boeing Company, 1996
8 China Civil Aviation Regulations.
9 Dale R Cundy, Rick S Brown. Introduction to Avionics. The Prentice--Hall, 1997
10 EHJ Pallett Aircraft Instruments & Integrated System. Longman Group UK Limited,
11 FAA. Airman's Information ManuaL 1994
12 Harry W Orlady, Linda M Orlady. Human Factors in Multi-Crew Flight Operations.
Ashgate Publishing Ltd, 1999
13 Ian B Suren. Aeroplane Perfonnance, Planning & Loading for the Transport Pilot.
Aviation Theory Centre Pty Ltd, 1998
14 J Powell. Aircraft Radio Systems. Pitman, 1986
15 Instrument/Commercial Manual. Jeppesen Sanderson. Inc, 1994
16 Private pilot manual. Jeppesen Sanderson. Inc, 1988
17 K D Campbell, M Bagshaw. Human Perfonnance and Limitations in Aviation. Second
Edition. Blackwell Science Ltd, 1999
18 Martin B Bshelby. Aircraft Performance Theory and Practice. American Institute of
Aeronautics and Astronautics, Inc, 2000
19 The Pilot's Reference to ATC Procedures and Phraseology. California: Reavco Publishing,
Congratulations on you to continue your pilot training and welcome to The Aviation Theory
Course for Airline Transport Pilot. This book is designed as a textbook and a reference for the
Civil Aviation Administration of China (CAAC) knowledge Test about Airline Transport Pilot
License (ATPL). The important points are summarized in the course; it is based on the
study/review concept of learning. So, it has been helping pilots prepare for the test with great
All of the knowledge for the ATP is included here, and has been arranged into 8 chapters
based on each subject matter. They are Chapter 1, Regulations; Chapter 2, Equipment, Navigation
and Facilities; Chapter 3, Aerodynamics; Chapter 4, Performance; Chapter 5, Weight and Balance;
Chapter 6, Flight Operations; Chapter 7, Flight Emergency and Hazards, Flight Physiology and
Crew Resource Management; and Chapter 8, Meteorology and Weather Services. Each chapter
includes main knowledge about the subject
Airman knowledge about ATP requires applicants to understand it. All of the knowledge is
faced with ATPL examination. It is designed that user will have two sets of learning,
understanding and reviewing the basic knowledge appropriately. The intent is that all applicants
keep on eye on basic concepts, procedures and methods made from the whole chapters. These
are important to ainnan for transport aircraft fly.
Some of the information may seem basic. There are two reasons for this: Many prospective
private and commercial pilots and instrument rating knowledge are learned before, so some review
is helpful; also, the airline transport knowledge is based on them but deeper than them. However, we
are not going to cover all of the information, because the pilot's basic knowledge for initial pilot
would be presumed up to know. If it has been a long time since you reviewed the knowledge
requirements of the initial information, it might benefit you to review the Aeronautical Theory
Course for Pilot (Chinese Edition, pressed by Southwest Jiaotong University Press, March, 2004).
This course is the key element in airman knowledge materials for ATPL. Although it can be
studied alone, we still suggest the user to join the teaching training. You may get many more
understanding from your instructors. You may learn from other materials such as CAAC aviation
regulations, Flight courses and other teaching materials provided by ATP training organizations.
Then, you will be excellent to pass the theory test for ATPL.
This introduction has implied a heavy emphasis on knowledge exams, but that is not our
style as an instructor. What you need to know for the knowledge test represents less than the
course text - the rest is solid information you must study from the Chinese Civil Aviation
Regulations (CCAR, i.e. CCAR 61, CCAR 91, CCAR 121 and so on) and other reference books.
You will also note an emphasis on computer-based training system (CBT). Most pilots are to
some extent technically oriented, and it is estimated that well over all pilots use airline computers
for flight planning, acquiring weather information, maintaining their logbooks, etc. Accordingly,
we have included access information wherever it is appropriate. As CBT surfers know. if you can
find one-by-one question showed on the computer, then you choice only one correct answer for
the question with clicking the mouse button. And then you will get hold of all of the ATP
knowledge gradually.
Finally, we shall give thanks to the writers of this course; they are Ma Zhigang, L uo Jun, Hao
Jingsong, Wei Lin, Liu Duhui, Xiang Xiaojun, Yang Junli, Fang Xuedong, Jiang Bo, He Qiuzhao,
Li Weidong, Mou Haiying, Huang Yifang, Zou Bo and Chen Huizhi. This course is compiled by
Li Weidong, Hao Jingsong and He Qiuzhao. All of the writers are the experts about a\iation
theory and come from the Civil Aviation Flight University of China. We believe it is a great
contribution for CAAC.
We wish this book will provide a good reference to you. We are confident that \\ith proper
use of this book, you will score very well on any of the Airline Transport Pilot tests.
"CCAR" is used as the acronym for "China Civil Aviation Regulations". Those regulations or
rules are very important for operations of aircraft, and other aspects in that field. The regulations
change frequently, and answer all questions in compliance with the most current regulations.
Two different China Civil Aviation Regulations can apply to operations of aircraft covered
by this chapter: CCAR 91, 121. CCAR 91 encompasses the general operations and flight rules for
all aircraft operating within the Peoples' Republic of China. Often the rules of CCAR 121
supplement or even supersede CCAR 91. When an aircraft is not operated for compensation, only
the CCAR 91 rules apply. For the test, assume CCAR 121 rules apply unless the question
specifically states otherwise. CCAR 121 applies to air carriers (airlines) engaged in China or
overseas air transportation. Carriers which operate under CCAR 121 are engaged in common
carriage. This means that they offer their services to the public and receive compensation for
those services.
CCAR 121 operators are subdivided into three categories. Carriers authorized to conduct
scheduled operations within China are domestic air carriers. Flag carriers conduct scheduled
operations inside and outside China A supplemental carrier conducts its operations anywhere that
its operations specifications permit but only on a non-scheduled basis. There is a fourth category,
commercial operators of large aircraft, but they must comply with the rules covering supplemental
carrier and the distinction is unimportant to this discussion.
Other parts of the regulations apply as well. CCAR 61 governs certifications of pilots and
fl ight instructors. CCAR 67 covers the issuing and standards for medical certificates. CCAR 65
prescribes the requirements for issuing certificates and associated ratings and the general operating
rules for the holders of those certificates and ratings.
The pilot-in-command of an air carrier flight must hold an Airline Transport Pilot (ATP)
certificate with the appropriate type rating. The co-pilot on an air carrier flight that requires only
two pilots need only hold a Commercial Pilot certificate (with an Instrument rating) with the
appropriate category and cl$5 ratings.
A person must hold a type rating to act as pilot-in-command of a large aircraft (over 5 700 kg
gross take-off weight), or of a mrbojet-powered airplane.
Any type rating(s) on the pilot certificate of an applicant who successfully complete an ATP
checkride will be included on the ATP Certificate with the privileges and limitations of the ATP
Certificate, provided the applicant passes the checkrjde in the same category and class of aircraft for
which the applicant holds the type rating(s). However, if a type rating for that category and class of
aircraft on the superseded pilot certificate is limited to VFR, that limitation will be carried forward
to the person's ATP Certificate level.
An airline transport pilot may instruct other pilots in air transportation service in aircraft of the
category, class and type for which he/she is rated. However, the ATP may not instruct for more than
8 hours in one day.
A person who has lost an Airman's Certificate may obtain a temporary certificate from the
CAAC. The temporary certificate is valid no more than 120 days.
A crewmember is a person assigned to duty in the aircraft during flight This includes pilots,
flight engineers, navigators, flight attendants or anyone else assigned to duty in the airplane. A flight
crewmember is a pilot, flight engineer or flight navigator assigned to duty in the aircraft during
No person may serve as a pilot on an air carrier after that person has reached his/her 60th
birthday. Note that this rule applies to any pilot position in the aircraft, but it does not apply to other
flight crew positions such as flight engineer or navigator.
To exercise ATP privileges (such as pilot-in-command of an air carrier flight) a pilot must hold
a First-Class Medical Certificate issued within the preceding 6 or 12 calendar months. To exercise
commercial pilot privileges (e.g., co-pilot on a two-pilot air carrier flight) a pilot must hold either a
First- or Second-Class Medical Certificate issued within the preceding 12 or 24 calendar months.
The applicant is not required to hold a medical certificate when taking a test or check for a
certificate, rating, or authorization conducted in a flight simulator or flight trainillg device.
Many air carrier aircraft have a flight engineer as a required flight crewmember. The aircraft
"type certificate" states whether or not a flight engineer is required. On each flight requiring a flight
engineer at least one flight crewmember, other than the flight engineer, must be qualified to provide
emergency performance of the flight engineer's functions for the safe completion of the flight if the
flight engineer becomes ill or is otherwise incapacitated. A pilot need not hold a Flight Engineer's
Certificate to perform the flight engineer's functions in such a situation.
One or more flight attendants are required on each passenger-carrying airplane that has more
than 19 passenger seats. The number of flight attendants is determined by the number of installed
passenger seats - not by the actual number of passengers on board. Each certificate holder shall
provide at least the minimum number of flight attendants on each passenger-carrying airplane. For
airplanes having a seating capacity of more than 20 but less than 50 passengers: at least one flight
attendant. For airplanes having a seating capacity of more than 51 but less than 100 passengers: at
least two flight attendants. For airplanes having a seating capacity of more than 100 passengers: at
least two flight attendants plus one additional flight attendant for each unit (or part of a unit) of 50
passenger seats above a seating capacity of 100 passengers.
If, in conducting the emergency evacuation demonstration required under CCAR 121, the
certificate holder used more flight attendants than is required under the paragraph above of this section
for the maximum seating capacity of the airplane, he may not, thereafter, take off that airplane in its
maximum seating capacity configuration with fewer flight attendants than the number used during the
emergency evacuation demonstration; or in any reduced seating capacity configuration with fewer
flight attendants than the number required by the paragraph above of this section for that seating
capacity plus the number of flight attendants used during the emergency evacuation demonstration
that were in excess of those required under the paragraph above of this section.
The number of flight attendants approved under the paragraphs above of this section is set
forth in the certificate holder's operations specifications. During take-off and landing, flight
attendants required by this section shall be located as near as practicable to required floor level
exists and shall be uniformly distributed throughout the airplane in order to provide the most
effective egress of passengers in event of an emergency evacuation. During taxi, flight attendants
required by this section must remain at their duty stations with safety belts and shoulder harnesses
fastened except to perform duties related to the safety of the airplane and its occupants.
At stops where passengers remain on board, and on the airplane for which a flight attendant is
not required by CCAR 121, the certificate holder must ensure that a person who is qualified in the
emergency evacuation procedures for the airplane as required in CCAR 121, and who is identified
to the passengers, remains on board the airplane, or nearby the airplane, in a position to adequately
monitor passenger safety; and the airplane engines are shut down; and at least one floor level exit
remains open to provide for the deplaning of passengers.
On each airplane for which flight attendants are required by CCAR 121, but the number of
flight attendants remaining aboard is fewer than required by CCAR 121, the certificate holder shall
ensure that the airplane engines are shut down, and at least one floor level exit remains open to
provide for the deplaning of passengers; and the number of flight attendants on board is at least half
the number required by CCAR 121, rounded down to the next lower number in the case of fractions,
but never fewer than one. The certificate holder may substitute for the required flight attendants
other persons qualified in the emergency evacuation proced:!:res fir th:!:t .,.;- as required in
CCAR 121, if these persons are identified to the passengers roe a:tendant or other
qualified person is on board during a stop, that flight anendant or 0<!1-er q-..:al.i:jed person shall be
located in accordance with the certificate holder's CA.AC-approved ;:ocedures. If more
than one flight attendant or other qualified person is on board, the a=endants or other
qualified persons shall be spaced throughout the cabin to provide the mosr effective assistance for
the evacuation in case of an emergency.
For these definitions of training, aircraft are divided into two "groups". Group I aircraft are
propeller driven. Turbojet aircraft are Group ll. Initial training is the training required for
crewmembers and dispatchers who have not qualified and served in the same capacity (i.e., flight
engineer, co-pilot, pilot-in-command) on another aircraft of the same group. Transition training is
the training required for crewmembers or dispatchers who have qualified and served in the same
capacity on another aircraft of the same group. Upgrade training is the training required for
crewmembers who have qualified and served as second-in-command or flight engineer on a
particular airplane type (e.g., Boeing 737) before they can serve as pilot-in-command or
second-in-command, respectively, on that airplane. Differences training is the training required for
crewmembers or dispatchers who have qualified and served on a particular type of airplane before
they can serve in the same capacity on a variation of that airplane. For example, a crewmember who
is qualified on a Boeing 737-300 would need differences training to serve on a Boeing 737-400.
For a person to serve as pilot-in-command he/she must have had a proficiency check within
the preceding 12 calendar months. In addition, within the preceding 6 calendar months the
pilot-in-command must have either passed a proficiency check or completed an approved simulator
training course. No certificate holder may use any person nor may any person serve as
pilot-in-command of an airplane unless, within the preceding 12 calendar months that person has
passed a line check in which he/she satisfactorily performs the duties and responsibilities of a
pilot-in-command in one ofthe types of airplanes to be flown.
Pilots other than the PIC (pilot-in-command) must have either passed a proficiency check or
completed "line oriented" simulator training within the last 24 calendar months. In addition, the
co-pilot must have had a proficiency check or any other kind of simulator training within the last 12
calendar months.
Whenever a crewmember or aircraft dispatcher who is required to take recurrent trainings, a
flight check, or a competency check, takes the check or completes the training in the calendar
month before or after the month in which that training or check is required, he/she is considered to
have taken or completed it in the calendar month in which it was required.
When a pilot has not made 3 take-offs and landings within the preceding 90 days, the pilot
must make at least 3 take-offs and landings in the type of airplane in which that person is to setve or
in an advanced simulator. These take-offs and landings must include:
A. At least 1 take-off with a simulated failure of the most critical powerplant;
B. At least 1 landing from an ILS (Instrument Landing System) approach to the lowest ILS
minimum authorized for the certificate holder; and
C. At least 1 landing to a full stop.
No pilot may act as pilot-in-command under IFR (Instrument Flight Rule) unless he/she has,
within the preceding 6 calendar months in the aircraft category for the instrument privileges sought,
logged at least 6 instrument approaches, performed holding procedures, and intercepted and tracked
courses through the use of navigation systems, or passed an instrument competency check in the
category of aircraft involved.
A pilot may log as instrument flight time only that time during which he/she operates the
aircraft solely by reference to the instruments, under actual or simulated instrument flight conditions.
If the pilot-in-command has not setved 100 hours as pilot-in-command in operations under
CCAR 121 in the type of airplane he/she is operating, the MDA (minimum descent altitude) or DH
(decision height) and visibility landing minimums in the certificate holder's operations
specifications for regular, provisional, or refueling airports are increased by 1 00 feet and 800 m [or
the RVR (runway visual range) equivalent]. If the pilot-in-command has not setved 100 hours as
PIC under CCAR 121 operations in the airplane type, the MDA or DH visibility minimums are
increased by 30 m and 800 m above the published minimums. If a flight goes to an alternate airport,
the minimums do not have to be raised by 30- 800 m, but they can not be less than 100-1 600 m.
In addition, Category II (CAT II) minimums and the sliding scale do not apply. If a pilot has at least
100 hours PIC in another aircraft under CCAR 121 operations, he/she may reduce the current
restriction by 1 hour for each landing, up to 50 hours maximum.
To be eligible for Category II authorization, a pilot must have made at least 6 ILS approaches
since the beginning of the 6th month before the test These approaches must be under actual or
simulated instrument flight conditions down to the minimum landing altitude for the ILS approach
in the type aircraft in which the flight test is to be conducted. However, the approaches need not be
conducted down to the decision heights authorized for Category II operations. At least 3 of these
approaches must have been conducted manually, without the use of an approach coupler.
Upon original issue, a Category II authorization contains a limitation for Category II
operations of 1 600 feet RVR and a 150-foot decision height. This limitation is removed when the
holder shows that since the beginning of the 6th preceding month he/she has made 3 Category II
ILS approaches to a landing under actual or simulated instrument conditions with a 150-foot
decision height
No domestic or flag air carrier may use any person as an aircraft dispatcher unless, within the
preceding 12 calendar months, he/she has satisfactorily completed operating familiarization
consisting of at least 5 hours obsetving operations from the flight deck under CCAR 121 in one of
the types of airplanes in each group he/she is to dispatch.
The time limits in this section count all commercial flying done by the crewmember in any
flight crew position, not just the time flown with the air carrier. Besides the limits on flight time,
there are required periods of rest based on the amount of flying done within a 24-hour period. There
is also a requirement that a flight crewmember be given at least 36 consecutive hours of rest in any
7 consecutive days periods. A person cannot be assigned to any ground or flight duties during
required rest periods. The term "deadhead" is used to describe the transportation of crewmembers
by the air carrier to or from their flight assignments when that transportation is not local in character.
Time spent in deadhead air transportation cannot be considered part of a required rest period.
No pilot of a supplemental carrier may be on flight deck duty for more than 8 hours in any 24
consecutive hours. If three pilots are assigned to a flight, the crew can be aloft no more than 16
hours in any 24 consecutive hours.
Two Pilots Crews
A crewmember's total duty period should not exceed 14 hours, and the flight time in the duty
period should not exceed 8 hours. The flight time may be extended to 9 hours if there are no more
than 2 segments in the flight After the duty period the crewmember must be given a scheduled rest
period of at least 10 consecutive hours. This rest period must occur between the completion of the
scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty period. In case of any delays
happening in the operation, the rest period may be reduced to 9 hours, if the actual duty period
doesn't exceed the 14 hours' limitation. ln case of any delays happening in the operation, the duty
period may be extended to 16 hours at most, but the rest period there after must not be reduced.
Three Pilots Crews, Including a Second- in-commander Pilot
A crewmember's total duty period should not exceed 16 hours, and the flight time in the duty
period should not exceed 10 hours. The flight time may be extended to 9 hburs if it is a nonstop
flight. After the duty period the crewmember must be given a scheduled rest period of at least 14
consecutive hours. This rest period must occur between the completion of the scheduled duty period
and the commencement of the subsequent duty period. In case of any delays happening in the
operation, the rest period may be reduced to 12 hours, if the actual duty period doesn't exceed the
16 hours' limitation. In case of any delays happening in the operation, the duty period may be
extended to 18 hours at most, but the rest period there after must not be reduced.
Three Pilots Crews, Including a Second-in-commander Pilot, and an Approved Area
of Sleep for Crewmembers During the Flight
A crewmember's total duty period should not exceed 18 hours, and the flight time in the duty
period should not exceed 14 hours, provided each crewrnember could have chances to take a rest in
the approved area of sleep during the whole flight After the duty period the crewmember must be
given a scheduled rest period of at least 18 consecutive hours. This rest period must occur between
the completion of the scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty period.
In case of any delays happening in the operation, the rest period may be reduced to 16 hours, if the
actual duty period doesn't exceed the 18 hours' limitation. In case of any delays happening in the
operation, the duty period may be extended to 20 hours at most, but the rest period there after must
not be reduced.
Four Pilots Crews, Including a Second-in-commander Pilot, and an Approved Area
of Sleep for Crewmembers During the Flight
A crewmember's total duty period should not exceed 20 hours, and the flight time in the duty
period should not exceed 17 hours, provided each crewmember could have chances to take a rest in
the approved area of sleep during the whole flight. After the duty period the crewmember must be
given a scheduled rest period of at least 22 consecutive hours. This rest period must occur between
the completion of the scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty period.
In case of any delays happening in the operation, the rest period may be reduced to 20 hours, if the
actual duty period doesn't exceed the 20 hours' limitation. In case of any delays happening in the
operation, the duty period may be extended to 22 hours at most, but the rest period there after must
not be reduced.
Duty Period Limitations and Requirements for a Crew with One Navigator, One
Flight Engineer, or One Batman
A crewmember's total duty period should not exceed 14 hours, and the flight time in the duty
period should not exceed 9 hours. After the duty p'!riod the crewmember must be given a scheduled
rest period of at least 10 consecutive hours. This rest period must occur between the completion of
the scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty period. In case any delays
occur during the operation, the rest period may be reduced to 9 hours, if the actual duty period
doesn't exceed the 14 hours' limitation; the duty period may be extended to 16 hours at most, but
the 10 hours' rest period there after must not be reduced.
A certificate holder may assign a navigator, a flight engineer, or batman to a scheduled duty
period of more than 14 hours, but no more than 16 hours. The fljght time during the duty period
should not exceed 12 hours. After the duty period the crewmember must be given a scheduled rest
period of at least 14 consecutive hours. This rest period must occur between the completion of the
scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty period. In case any delays
occur during the operation, the rest period may be reduced to 12 hours, if the actual duty period
doesn't exceed the 16 hours' limitation; the duty period may be e::-..'tended to 18 hours at most, but
the 14 hours' rest period there after must not be reduced.
Duty Period Limitations and Requirements for a Crew with Two Navigators, Two
Flight Engineers, or Two Batmen
A certificate holder may assign navigators, flight engineers, or batmen to a scheduled duty
period of more than 16 hours, but no more than 18 hours. The flight time during the duty period
should be no more than 14 hours, provided each crewmember could have chances to take a rest in
the approved area of sleep during the whole flight. After the duty period the crewmember must be
given a scheduled rest period of at least 18 consecutive hours. This rest period must occur between
the completion ofthe scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty period.
In case any delays occur during the operation, the rest period may be reduced to 16 hours, if the
actual duty period doesn't exceed the 18 hours' limitation; the duty period may be extended to 20
hours at most, but the 18 hours' rest period there after must not be reduced.
A certificate holder may also assign navigators, flight engineers, or batmen to a scheduled duty
period of more than 18 hours, but no more than 20 hours. The flight time during the duty period
should be no more than 17 hours, provided each crewmember could have chances to take a rest in
the approved area of sleep during the whole flight. After the duty period the crewmember must be
given a scheduled rest period of at least 22 consecutive hours. This rest period must occur between
the completion ofthe scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty period.
In case any delays occur during the operation, the rest period may be reduced to 20 hours, if the
actual duty period doesn't exceed the 20 hours' limitation; the duty period may be extended to 22
hours at most, but the rest period there after must not be reduced.
No certificate holder conducting operations may schedule any flight crewmember and no flight
crewmember may accept an assignment for flight time in scheduled air transportation or in other
commercial flying if that crewmember's total flight time in all commercial flying will exceed 1 000
hours in any calendar year, or 90 hours in any calendar month, or 35 hours in any 7 consecutive
calendar days (this period of time may be extended to 40 hours, provided each crewmember could
have a chance to take a rest in an approved area of sleep during each period of flight).
A flight crewmember is not considered to be scheduled for duty time in excess of duty time
limitations if the flights to which he is assigned are scheduled and normally terminate within the
limitations, but due to circumstances beyond the control of the certificate holder (such as adverse
weather conditions), are not at the time of departure expected to reach their destination within the
scheduled time. In this case, the duty period and flight time limitations should also be consistent
with those stated in CCAR 121, and the excess part of duty time should not in any circumstances
exceed 2 hours.
A flight crewmember is not considered to be scheduled for flight time in excess of flight time
limitations if the flights to which he is assigned are scheduled and normally terminate within the
limitations, but due to circumstances beyond the control of the certificate holder (such as adverse
weather conditions), are not at the time of departure expected to reach their destination within the
scheduled time.
If a flight crewmember is assigned to serve for more than one certificate holder, or is assigned
to serve in more than one type of flight crew, the total duty time and flight time limitations should
be consistent with those stated in CCAR 121.
Time spent before departure due to delay is considered part of the duty time.
No certificate holder may assign a flight crewmember to perform any duty with the certificate
holder during any required rest period. The rest period stated in this section may be included in
other rest periods.
Only when a delay occurs in an operation, may a crewmember's rest period be reduced
according to those stated in CCAR 121. The reducing must not be assigned ahead of time.
Each certificate holder shall relieve each flight crewmember engaged in scheduled air
transportation from all further duty for at least 36 consecutive hours during any 7 consecutive
When a certificate holder assigned other duty for a flight crewmember, the time spent in the
duty may or may not be considered as part of the flight duty time. When it is not considered as part
of the flight duty time, the flight crewmember must be assigned a rest period of at least 8
consecutive hours before commencement of the subsequent duty period.
If there is a jetlag of 6 hours or more between the time zone where the flight operation
terminates and the time zone where the flight crewmember's home station locates, the certificate
holder should assigned a rest period of at least 48 consecutive hours for the flight crewmember after
he or she is back to the borne station. This rest period must occur before the commencement of the
subsequent duty period. The home station stated in this section refers to the place where flight
crewmembers are stationed, and flight crewmembers' duty times are assigned there.
Time spent in transportation, not local in character, that a certificate holder requires of a flight
crewmember and provides to transport the flight crewmember to an airport at which that flight
crewmember is to serve on a flight as a crewmember, or from an airport at which the flight
crewmember was relieved from duty to return to the flight attendant's home station, is not
considered part of a rest period.
Calendar day means the period of elapsed time, using Coordinated Universal Time or local
time, which begins at midnight and ends 24 hours later at the next midnight. Duty period means the
period of elapsed time between reporting for an assignment involving flight time and release from
that assignment by the certificate bolder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations. The
time is calculated using either Coordinated Universal Time or local time to reflect the total elapsed
time. Flight attendant means an individual, other than a flight crewmember, who is assigned by a
certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations, in accordance with the
required minimum crew complement under the certificate bolder's operations specifications or in
addition to that minimum complement, to duty in an aircraft during flight time and whose duties
include but are not necessarily limited to cabin-safety-related responsibilities. Rest period means the
period free of all restraint or duty for a certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental
operations and free of all responsibilities for work or duty should the occasion arise.
A certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations may assign a duty
period to a flight attendant only when the following applicable duty period limitations and rest
requirements are met.
A. Except as provided in paragraphs D, E, and F of this section, no certificate holder
conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations may assign a flight attendant to a
scheduled duty period of more than 14 hours.
B. Except as provided in paragraph C of this section, a flight attendant scheduled to a duty
period of 14 hours or less as provided under paragraph A of this section must be given a
scheduled rest period of at least 9 consecutive hours. This rest period must occur between
the completion ofthe scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty
C. The rest period required under paragraph B of this section may be scheduled or reduced to
8 consecutive hours if the flight attendant is provided a subsequent rest period of at least 10
consecutive hours; this subsequent rest period must be scheduled to begin no later than 24
hours after the beginning of the reduced rest period and must occur between the completion
of the scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty period.
D. A certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations may assjgn a
flight attendant to a scheduled duty period of more than 14 hours, but no more than 16
hours, if the certificate holder has assigned to the flight or flights in that duty period at least
one flight attendant in addition to the minimum flight attendant complement required for
the flight or flights in that duty period under the certificate holder' s operations
E. A certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations may assign a
flight attendant to a scheduled duty period of more than 16 hours, but no more than 18
hours, if the certificate holder has assigned to the flight or flights in that duty period at least
two flight attendants in addition to the minimum flight attendant complement required for
the flight or flights in that duty period under the certificate holder's operations
F. A certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations may assign a
flight attendant to a scheduled duty period of more than 18 hours, but no more than 20
hours, if the scheduled duty period includes one or more flights that land or take off outside
China, and if the certificate holder has assigned to the flight or flights in that duty period at
least three flight attendants in addition to the minimum flight attendant complement
required for the flight or flights in that duty period under the domestic certificate holder's
operations specifications.
G Except as provided in paragraph H of this section, a flight attendant scheduled to a duty
period of more than 14 hours but no more than 20 hours, as provided in paragraphs D, E
and F of this section, must be given a scheduled rest period of at least 12 consecutive hours.
This rest period must occur between the completion of the scheduled duty period and the
commencement of the subsequent duty period.
H. The rest period required under paragraph G of this section may be scheduled or reduced to
10 consecutive hours if the flight attendant is provided a subsequent rest period of at least
14 consecutive hours; this subsequent rest period must be scheduled to begin no later than
24 hours after the beginning of the reduced rest period and must occur between the
completion of the scheduled duty period and the commencement of the subsequent duty
I. Notwithstanding paragraphs D, E, and F of this section, if a certificate holder conducting
domestic, flag, or supplemental operations elects to reduce the rest period to 10 hours as
authorized by paragraph H of this section, the certificate holder may not schedule a flight
attendant for a duty period of more than 14 hours during the 24-hour period commencing
after the beginning of the reduced rest period.
J. No certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations may assign a
flight attendant any duty period with the certificate holder unless the flight attendant has
had at least the minimum rest required under this section.
K. No certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations may assign a
flight attendant to perfonn any duty with the certificate holder during any required rest
period ..
L. Time spent in transportation, not local in character, that a certificate bolder conducting
domestic, flag, or supplemental operations requires of a flight attendant and provides to
transport the flight attendant to an airport at which that flight attendant is to serve on a
flight as a crewmember, or from an airport at which the flight attendant was relieved from
duty to return to the flight attendant's home station, is not considered part of a rest period.
M. Each certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations must relieve
each flight attendant engaged in air transportation and each commercial operator must
relieve each flight attendant engaged in air commerce from all further duty for at least 24
consecutive hours during any 7 consecutive calendar days.
N. A flight attendant is not considered to be scheduled for duty in excess of duty period
limitations if the flights to which the flight attendant is assigned are scheduled and
normally terminate within the limitations but due to circumstances beyond the control of
the certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or supplemental operations (such as
adverse weather conditions) are not at the time of departure expected to reach their
destination within the scheduled time.
Domestic Operations: All Flight Crewmembers
No certificate holder conducting domestic operations may schedule any flight crewmember
and no flight crewmember may accept an assignment for flight time in scheduled air transportation
or in other commercial flying if that crewmember's total flight time in all commercial flying will
exceed 1 000 hours in any calendar year, or 90 hours in any calendar month, or 35 hours in any 7
consecutive calendar days (but this period of time may be extended to 40 hours, provided each
crewmember could have a chance to take a rest in an approved area of sleep during each period of
flight), or 8 hours between required rest periods.
1) Except as provided in paragraph 2) of this section, no certificate holder conducting
domestic operations may schedule a flight crewmember and no flight crewmember may accept
an assignment for flight time during the 24 consecutive hours preceding the scheduled
completion of any flight segment without a scheduled rest period during that 24 hours of at
least the following:
A. 9 consecutive hours of rest for less than 8 hours of scheduled flight time.
B. 10 consecutive hours of rest for 8 or more but less than 9 hours of scheduled fl ight time.
C. 11 consecutive hours of rest for 9 or more hours of scheduled flight time.
2) A certificate holder may schedule a flight crewmember for less than the rest required in
paragraph l) of this section or may reduce a scheduled rest under the following conditions:
A. A rest required under paragraph 1) A of this section may be scheduled for or reduced to a
minimum of 8 hours if the flight crewmember is given a rest period of at least 10 hours that
must begin no later than 24 hours after the commencement of the reduced rest period.
B. A rest required under paragraph 1) B of this section may be scheduled for or reduced to a
minimum of 8 hours if the flight crewmember is given a rest period of at least 11 hours that
must begin no later than 24 hours after the commencement of the reduced rest period.
C. A rest required under paragraph 1) C of this section may be scheduled for or reduced to a
minimum of 9 hours if the flight crewmember is given a rest period of at least 12 hours that
must begin no later than 24 hours after the commencement of the reduced rest period.
D. No certificate holder may assign, nor may any flight crewmember perform any flight time
with the certificate holder unless the flight crewmember has had at least the minimum rest
required under this passage.
3)Each certificate holder conducting domestic operations shall relieve each flight crewmember
engaged in scheduled air transportation from all further duty for at least 36 consecutive hours
during any 7 consecutive days.
4) No certificate holder conducting domestic operations may assign any flight crewmember
and no flight crewmember may accept assignment to any duty with the air carrier during any
required rest period.
5) Time spent in transportation, not local in character, that a certificate holder requires of a
flight crewmember and provides to transport the crewmember to an airport at which he is to serve
on a flight as a crewmember, or from an airport at which he was relieved from duty to return to his
home station, is not considered part of a rest period.
6) A flight crewmember is not considered to be scheduled for flight time in excess of flight
time limitations if the flights to which he is assigned are scheduled and normally terminate within
the limitations, but due to circumstances beyond the control of the certificate holder (such as
adverse weather conditions), are not at the time of departure expected to reach their destination
within the scheduled time. In this case, the excess part of duty time should not in any circumstances
exceed 2 hours.
Flag Operations
One or 1\vo Pilot Crews
A certificate holder conducting flag operations may schedule a pilot to fly in an airplane that
has a crew of one or two pilots for 8 hours or less during any 24 consecutive hours without a rest
period during these 8 hours.
If a certificate holder conducting flag operations schedules a pilot to fly more than 8 hours
during any 24 consecutive hours, it shall give him an intervening rest period, at or before the end of
8 scheduled hours of flight duty. This rest period must be at least twice the number of hours flown
since the preceding rest period, but not less than 8 hours. The certificate holder shall relieve that
pilot of all duty with it during that rest period.
Each pilot who has flown more than 8 hours during 24 consecutive hours must be given at
least 18 hours of rest before being assigned to any duty with the certificate holder.
No pilot may fly more than 35 hours during any 7 consecutive days, and each pilot must be
relieved from all duty for at least 36 consecutive hours at least once during any 7 consecutive days.
No pilot may fly as a member of a crew more than 90 hours during any one calendar month. No
pilot may fly as a member of a crew more than 1 000 hours during any 12-calendar-month period.
Two Pilots and One Additional Flight Crewmember
No certificate holder conducting flag operations may schedule a pilot to fly, in an airplane that
has a crew of two pilots and at least one additional flight crewmember, for a total of more than 12
hours during any 24 consecutive hours.
If a pilot has flown 20 or more hours during any 48 consecutive hours or 24 or more hours
during any 72 consecutive hours, he must be given at least 18 hours of rest before being assigned to
any duty with the air carrier. In any case, he must be given at least 36 consecutive hours of rest
during any 7 consecutive days.
No pilot may fly as a flight crewmember more than 120 hours during any 30 consecutive days
or 300 hours during any 90 consecutive days, or 1 000 hours during any 12-calendar-month period.
Three or More Pilots and an Additional Flight Crewmember
Each certificate holder conducting flag operations shall schedule its flight hours to provide
-adequate rest periods on the ground for each pilot who is away from his base and who is a pilot on
an airplane that has a crew of three or more pilots and an additional flight crewmember. It shall also
provide adequate sleeping quarters on the airplane whenever a pilot is scheduled to fly more than 12
hours during any 24 consecutive hours.
The certificate holder conducting flag operations shall give each pilot, upon return to his base
from any flight or series of flights, a rest period that is at least twice the total number of hours he
flew since the last rest period at his base. During the rest period required by this paragraph, the air
carrier may not require him to perform any duty for it. If the required rest period is more than 7
days, that part of the rest period in excess of 7 days may be given at any time before the pilot is
again scheduled for flight duty on any route.
No pilot may fly as a flight crewmember more than 350 hours during any 90 consecutive days,
or 1 000 hours during any 12-calendar-month period.
Pilots Not Regularly Assigned
A. Except as provided in paragraphs B through E of this part, a pilot who is not regularly
assigned as a flight crewmember for an entire calendar month may not fly more than 90
hours in any 30 consecutive days.
B. The monthly flight time limitations for a pilot who is scheduled for duty aloft for more than
20 hours in two-pilot crews in any calendar month, or whose assignment in such a crew is
interrupted more than once in that calendar month by assignment to a crew consisting of
two or more pilots and an additional flight crewmember, are those set forth in the passage
above titled "One or Two Pilot Crews".
C. Except for a pilot covered by paragraph B of this part, the monthly and quarterly flight time
limitations for a pilot who is scheduled for duty aloft for more than 20 hours in two-pilot
and additional flight crewmember crews in any calendar month, or whose assignment in
such a crew is interrupted more than once in that calendar month by assignment to a crew
consisting of three pilots and additional flight crewmember, are those set forth in the
passage above titled "Two Pilots and One Additional Flight Crewmember".
D. The quarterly flight time limitations for a pilot to whom paragraphs Band C of this part do
not apply and who is scheduled for duty aloft for a total of not more than 20 hours within
any calendar month in two-pilot crews (with or without additional flight crewmembers) are
those set forth in the passage above titled ''Three or More Pilots and an Additional Flight
E. The monthly and quarterly flight time limitations for a pilot assigned to each of two-pilot,
two-pilot and additional flight crewmember, and three-pilot and additional flight
crewmember crews in a given calendar month, and who is not subject to paragraph B, C, or
D of this part, are those set forth in the passage above titled "Two Pilots and One
Additional Flight Crewmember".
No pilot that is employed as a pilot by a certificate holder conducting flag operations may do
any other commercial flying if that commercial flying plus his flying in air transportation will
exceed any flight time limitation in this part Time spent in deadhead transportation to or from duty
assignment is not considered to be a part of a rest period.
In any operation in which one flight engineer or flight navigator is required, the flight time
limitations in the passage above titled "Two Pilots and One Additional Flight Crewmember"
apply to that flight engineer or flight navigator. In any operation in which more than one flight
engineer or flight navigator is required, the flight time limitations in the passage above titled
"Three or More Pilots and an Additional Flight Crewmember'' apply to those flight engineers or
flight navigators.
Supplemental Operations
Pilots: Airplanes
A certificate holder conducting supplemental operations may schedule a pilot to fly in an
airplane for 8 hours or less during any 24 consecutive hours without a rest period during those 8
If the flight is in an airplane with a pressurization system that is operative at the beginning of
the flight, and the flight crew consists of at least two pilots and a flight engineer, and the certificate
holder uses, in conducting the operation, an air/ground communication service that is independent
of systems operated by China, and a dispatch organization, both of which are approved by the
Administrator as adequate to serve the terminal points concerned, the certificate holder may, in
conducting a nonstop flight, schedule a flight crewmember for more than 8 but not more than 10
hours of continuous duty aloft without an intervening rest period.
Each pilot who has flown more than 8 hours during any 24 consecutive hours must be given at
least 16 hours of rest before being assigned to any duty with the certificate holder.
Each certificate holder conducting supplemental operations shall relieve each pilot from all
duty for at least 36 consecutive hours at least once during any 7 consecutive days.
No pilot may fly as a crewmember in air transportation more than 90 hOl;lfS during any 30
consecutive days. No pilot may fly as a crewmember in air transportation more than 1 000 hours
during any calendar year.
In any operation in which one flight engineer is serving, those flight time limitations above in
this section are also applied to that flight engineer.
Two Pilot Crews: Airplanes
If a certificate holder conducting supplemental operations schedules a pilot to fly more than 8
hours during any 24 consecutive hours, it shall give him an intervening rest period at or before the
end of 8 scheduled hours of flight duty. This rest period must be at least twice the number of hours
flown since the preceding rest period, but not less than 8 hours. The certificate holder conducting
supplemental operations shall relieve that pilot of all duty with it during that rest period. No pilot of
an airplane that has a crew of two pilots may be on duty for more than 16 hours during any 24
consecutive hours.
In any operation in which one flight engineer is serving, those flight time limitations above in
this section are also applied to that flight engineer.
Three Pilot Crews: Airplanes
No certificate holder conducting supplemental operations may schedule a pilot for flight deck
duty in an airplane that has a crew of three pilots for more than 8 hours in any 24 consecutive hours,
or to be aloft in an airplane that has a crew of three pilots for more than 12 hours in any 24
consecutive hours.
No pilot of an airplane that has a crew of three pilots may be on duty for more than 18 hours in
any 24 consecutive hours.
Four Pilot Crews: Airplanes
No certificate holder conducting supplemental operations may schedule a pilot for flight deck
duty in an airplane that has a crew of four pilots for more than 8 hours in any 24 consecutive hours,
or to be aloft in an airplane that has a crew of four pilots for more than 16 hours in any 24
consecutive hours.
No pilot of an airplane that has a crew of four pilots may be on duty for more than 20 hours in
any 24 consecutive hours.
In any operation in which more than one flight engineer is serving and the flight crew contains
more than two P.ilots, those flight time limitations above in this section are also applied to the flight
No airman may be aloft as a flight crewmember for more than J 000 hours in any 12-calendar
-month period.
No airman who is employed by a certificate holder conducting supplemental operations may
do any other commercial flying, if that commercial flying plus his flying in operations under this
part will exceed any flight time limitation in this part.
Time spent by an ainnan in deadhead transportation to or from a auty assignment is not
considered to be part of any rest period.
Crew of Two Pilots and One Additional Airman as Required
No certificate holder conducting supplemental operations may schedule an ainnan to be aloft
!S ! ::nember of the flight crew in an airplane that has a crew of two pilots and at least one additional
cre'w\'Dlember for more than 12 hours during any 24 consecutive hours.
If an airman has been aloft as a member of a flight crew for 20 or more hours during any 48
consecutive hours or 24 or more hours during any 72 consecutive hours, be must be given at least
l8 hours of rest before being assigned to any duty with the certificate holder. In any case, he must
be relieved of all duty for at least 24 consecutive hours during any 7 consecutive days.
No airman may be aloft as a flight crewmember for more than 120 hours during any 30
consecutive days, or 300 hours during any 90 consecutive days.
Crew ofThree or More Pilots and Additional Airmen as Required
No certificate holder conducting supplemental operations may schedule an airman for flight
deck duty as a flight engineer, a navigator or a batman in a crew of three or more pilots and
additional ainnen for a total of more than 14 hours during any 24 consecutive hours.
Each certificate holder conducting supplemental operations shall schedule its flight hours to
provide adequate rest periods on the ground for each airman who is away from his principal
operations base. It shall also provide adequate sleeping quarters on the airplane whenever an airman
is scheduled to be aloft as a flight crewmember for more than 12 hours during any 24 consecutive
No certificate holder conducting supplemental operations may schedule any flight
crewmember to be on continuous duty for more than 30 hours. Such a crewmember is considered to
be on continuous duty from the time he reports for duty until the time he is from duty for a
rest period of at least 10 hours on the ground. If a flight crewmember is on continuous duty for
more than 24 hours (whether scheduled or not) during any scheduled duty period, he must be given
at least 16 hours for rest on the ground after completing the last flight scheduled for that scheduled
duty period before being assigned any further flight duty.
If a flight crewmember is required to engage in deadhead transportation for more than 4 hours
before beginning flight duty, one half of the time spent in deadhead transportation must be treated
as duty time for the purpose of complying with duty time limitations, unless be is given at least 10
hours of rest on the ground before being assigned to flight duty.
Each certificate holder conducting supplemental operations shall give each airman, upon return
to his operations base from any flight or series of flights, a rest period that is at least twice the total
number of hours he was aloft as a flight crewmember since the last rest period at his base, before
assigning him to any further duty. If the required rest period is more than 7 days, that part of the rest
period that is more than 7 days may be given at any time before the pilot is again scheduled for
flight duty.
No ainnan may be aloft as a flight crewmember for more than 350 hours in any 90 consecutive
Pilots Serving in More Than One Kind of Flight Crew
This passage applies to each pilot assigned during any 30 consecutive days to more than one
type of flight crew.
The flight time limitations for a pilot who is scheduled for duty aloft for more than 20 hours in
two-pilot crews in 30 consecutive days, or whose assignment in such a crew is interrupted more
than once in any 30 consecutive days by assignment to a crew of two or more pilots and an
additional flight crewmember, are those listed in the passage titled "Pilots: Airplanes" through the
passage titled "Four Pilot Crews: Airplanes" in the part of "Supplemental Operations", as
Except for a pilot covered by the paragraph above of this passage, the flight time limitations
for a pilot scheduled for duty aloft for more than 20 hours in two-pilot and additional flight
crewmember crews in 30 consecutive days or whose assignment in such a crew is interrupted more
than once in any 30 consecutive days by assignment to a crew consisting of three pilots and an
additional flight crewmember, are those set forth in the passage titled "Crew of Two Pilots and One
Additional Airman As Required" in the part of "Supplemental Operations".
The flight time limitations for a pilot to whom paragraphs above of this section do not apply,
and who is scheduled for duty aloft for a total of no more than 20 hours within 30 consecutive days
in two-pilot crews (with or without additional flight crewmembers) are those set forth in the passage
titled "Crew of Three or More Pilots and Additional Airmen As Required" in the part of
"Supplemental Operations".
The flight time limitations for a pilot assigned to each of two-pilot, two-pilot and additional
flight crewmember, and three-pilot and additional flight crewmember crews in 30 consecutive days,
and who is not subject to the paragraphs above of this passage, are those listed in the passage titled
"Crew of Three or More Pilots and Additional Airmen As Required" in the part of "Supplemental
No domestic or flag carrier may schedule a dispatcher to be on duty for more than 10
consecutive hours. If a dispatcher is scheduled for more than 10 hours of duty in 24 consecutive
hours, he/she must be given at least 8 hours of rest at or before the end of 10 consecutive hours of
duty. A dispatcher must be relieved of all duty with the carrier for at least 24 consecutive hours in
any 7 consecutive days.
Each certificate holder conducting domestic or flag operations shall establish the daily duty
period for a dispatcher so that it begins at a time that allows him or her to become thoroughly
familiar with existing and anticipated weather conditions along the route before he or she dispatches
any airplane. He or she shall remain on duty until each airplane dispatched by him or her has
completed its flight, or has gone beyond his or her jurisdiction, or until he or she is relieved by
another qualified dispatcher.
Except in cases where circumstances or emergency conditions beyond the control of the
certificate holder require otherwise, no certificate holder conducting domestic or flag operations
may schedule a dispatcher for more than 10 consecutive hours of duty. If a dispatcher is scheduled
: - -::Jre than 10 hours of duty in 24 consecutive hours, the certificate holder shall provide him or
; rest period of at least 8 hours at or before the end of 10 hours of duty. Each dispatcher must be
ed of all duty with the certificate holder for at least 24 consecutive hours during any 7
-=u..:;...."1:utive days or the equivalent thereof within any calendar month.
paragraphs above of this section, a certificate bolder conducting flag
may, if authorized by the Administrator, schedule an aircraft dispatcher at a duty station
China, for more than 10 consecutive hours of duty in a 24-hour period if that aircraft
is relieved of all duty with the certificate bolder for at least 8 hours during each 24-hour
: -=::c-d.
Operational control with respect to a flight, means the exercise of authority over initiating,
:c.:ducting or terminating a flight.
For operations of supplemental air carriers or commercial operators, the pilot-in-command and
:::: director of operations are jointly responsible for the initiation, continuation, diversion, and
!::llination of a flight.
Each flag and domestic flight must have a dispatch release on board. The dispatch release of a
domestic air carrier may be in any form but must contain at least the following information
; ::::erning the flight:
A. The identification number of the aircraft;
B. The trip number;
C. The departure, destination, intermediate and alternate airports;
D. The type of operation (IFR or VFR);
E. The minimum fuel supply.
It may include any additional available weather reports or forecasts that the pilot-in-command
:: :he aircraft dispatcher considers necessary or desirable.
Each supplemental carrier or commercial operator flight must have a flight release on board.
:-.1e flight release can be in any form but must contain the following information:
A. The company or organization name;
B. Make, model and registration number of the aircraft used;
C. The flight or trip number and the date of the flight;
D. The name of each flight crewmember, flight attendant and the pilot designated as pilot-in-
E. The departure, destination, intermediate and alternate airports and route;
F. The type of operation (e.g., IFR or VFR);
G. The minimum fuel supply;
H. The latest weather reports and forecasts for the complete flight (may be attached to the
release rather than be part of it).
The aircraft dispatcher must provide the pilot-in-command with all available current reports or
information on airport conditions and irregularities of navigation facilities that may affect the safety
of flight; must provide the pilot-in-command with all available weather reports and forecasts of
weather phenomena that may affect the safety of flight including adverse weather; and must update
this information during a flight.
When a domestic flight lands at an intermediate airport named in its original dispatch release
and departs again within 1 hour, it does not need a new dispatch release. lf it remains on the ground
for more than 1 hour, a redispatch release must be issued.
When a flag flight lands at an intermediate airport named in its original dispatch release and
departs again within 6 hours, it does not need a new dispatch release. If it remains on the ground for
more than 6 hours, a redispatch is required. No person may continue a flag air carrier flight from an
intermediate airport without redispatch if the airplane has been on the ground for more than 6 hours.
The pilot-in-command shall carry in the airplane to its destination: load manifest, flight release,
airworthiness release, pilot route certification, and flight plan. The air carrier must keep copies of
these documents for at least 3 months.
Each certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or commuter operations must obtain
operations specifications containing authorization and limitations for routes and areas of operations.
A provisional airport is defined as an airport approved by the Administrator for use by a
certificate holder for the purpose of providing service to a community when the regular airport used
by the certificate holder is not available.
Each certificate holder conducting domestic, flag, or conunuter operations must obtain
operations specifications containing, among many other provisions, the kinds of operations
A supplemental air carrier must retain a copy of each load manifest, flight release and flight
plan at its principal operations base for at least 3 months.
All domestic flights must have enough fuel to:
A. Fly to the airport to which the flight was dispatched;
B. Thereafter, fly to and land at the most distant alternate airport (if an alternate is required)
for the airport to which dispatched; and
C. Thereafter, fly for 45 minutes at noonal cruising fuel consumption.
Certificate holders who are authorized by CAAC can determine the fuel requirement by means
of flying from specified airport to alternate. No person may dispatch or take off an airplane unless it
has enough fuel to fly from the specified airport to and land at an alternate airport, and thereafter fly
for 45 minutes at normal cruising fuel consumption. But the fuel quantity is not less than the
to fly to destination dispatched, and thereafter fly for 2 hours at normal cruising fuel

The fuel required for a flag flight landing within the contiguous China is the same as for
::J: :::estic flights.
and turbo-propeller-powered airplanes flight (with an alternate available) landing
:..::side the contiguous China must have enough fuel to:
A. Fly to and land at the airport to which it is dispatched;
B. Thereafter, fly to and land at the most distant alternate airport specified in the dispatch
release; and
C. Thereafter, fly for 30 minutes plus 15 percent of the total time required to fly at normal
cruising fuel consumption to the airports specified in paragraphs 1 and 2 of this section or
to fly for 90 minutes at normal cruising fuel consumption, whichever is less.
No person may dispatch a nonturbine or turbo-propeller-powered airplane to an airport for
.vhlch an alternate is not specified, unless it has enough fuel, considering wind and forecast weather
conditions, to fly to that airport and thereafter to fly for 3 hours at normal cruising fuel
Turbojet-engine-powered air carrier airplanes, other than turbo propeller, flight (with an
alternate available) landing outside the contiguous China must have fuel to:
A. Fly to the destination, then
B. Fly 10% of the total time required to fly to the destination, then
C. Fly to and land at the most distant alternate, then
D. Fly for 30 minutes at holding speed at 1 500 feet above the alternate.
No person may release a turbine-engine powered airplane (other than a turbo-propeller
airplane) to an airport for which an alternate is not specified unless it has enough fuel, considering
wind and other weather conditions expected, to fly to that airport and thereafter to fly for at least 2
hours at normal cruising fuel consumption.
Before take-off all the passengers must be briefed on:
A. Smoking;
B. The location of emergency exits;
C. The use of seatbelts;
D. The location and use of any required means of emergency flotation.
After the seatbelt sign has been turned off in flight, the passengers must be briefed to keep
their seatbelts fastened while seated. In addition to the required briefings, passengers must be
provided with printed cards that contain diagrams of and methods of operating the emergency exits
and the use of other emergency equipment. Before flight is conducted above FL250, a crewmember
must instruct the passengers on the necessity of using oxygen in the event of cabin depressurization,
and must point out to them the location and demonstrate the use of the oxygen dispensing
Each passenger two years old and older must have their own seat or berth and approved
seatbelt During take-off and landing, all passengers must be in their seat with their seatbelts
fastened. A child under two may be held by an adult. During the en route portion of a flight, two
passengers may share a seatbelt while seated in a multiple lounge or divan seat.
There are certain persons who have to be admitted to the flight deck in flight (such as
crewmembers, CAAC inspectors, etc.) and certain others who may be admitted (e.g., deadheading
crew), but the pilot-in-command has emergency authority to exclude any person from the flight
deck in the interest of safety.
Law enforcement officers may carry firearms on board an air carrier flight if their duties so
require. Except in an emergency, the carrier should be given at least one hour prior notice that a
person carrying a deadly weapon is going to be on the flight. If a passenger is carrying a firearm in
their checked baggage, the weapon must be unloaded and the bag locked. The passenger must retain
the key to the bag. The bag must be stowed in a portion of the aircraft that is inaccessible to both the
passenger and to crewmembers in flight.
Prisoners are sometimes carried on air carrier flights. The prisoners are always escorted and no
more than one prisoner who is classified as "maximum risk" can be allowed on the aircraft. Certain
rules apply to the carriage of prisoners. These include:
A. The prisoner and escort must be boarded before all other passengers and must stay on
board until all other passengers have deplaned.
B. The prisoner and escort must sit in the most rearward passenger seats and the escort must
sit between the prisoner and the aisle.
C. The carrier may serve the prisoner and the escort food and beverages, but neither of them
may be served alcohol.
If a person who appears to be intoxicated creates a disturbance on a flight, a report of the
incident must be made to the Administrator (the CAAC) within 5 days.
Certain passengers may be carried on an all-cargo flight without the carrier having to comply
with all the passenger-carrying rules. Passengers carried on an all-cargo flight must have a seat with
an approved seatbelt in the cargo compartment. They must have access to the pilot compartment or
to an exit. The pilot-in-command must be able to notify them when they must have their seatbelt
fastened and when smoking is prohibited. They must receive an emergency briefmg from a
crewmember prior to take-off. The pilot-in-command may authorize the passenger to be admitted to
the flight crew compartment
Cargo (including carry-on baggage) may be carried in the passenger compartment of an
aircraft if certain conditions are met If the cargo is carried in an approved cargo bin, it can be
located anywhere in the passenger compartment. The bin:
A. Must withstand the load factor required of passenger seats multiplied by 1.15;
B. May not be installed in a position that restricts access to or use of any required emergency
exit, or of the aisle in the passenger cabin;
C. Must be completely enclosed and made of material that is at least flame resistant.
If the cargo is not placed in an approved cargo bin it must be located aft of a bulkhead or
divider (i.e., not aft of a passenger) and it must meet certain other requirements. These include:
A. It must be properly secured by a safety belt or other tie down.
B. It must be packaged or covered in a manner so as to avoid injury to occupants of the
passenger cabin.
C. It must not impose an excessive load on the floor or seat structures of the aircraft.
D. Its location must not restrict access to or use of the aisle, any regular exit or any required
emergency exit.
E. Its location must not obscure any passenger's view of the "seatbelt", "no smoking" or
required "exit" signs unless an auxiliary sign is installed.
Each person who has duties concerning the handling or carriage of dangerous articles or
magnetized materials must have completed a training course within the preceding 12 calendar
Certain emergency equipment must be carried on every air carrier airplane. This equipment
includes fire extinguishers, megaphones, first aid kits and a crash ax. All this equipment must:
A. Be inspected regularly.
B. Be readily accessible to the crew and, for items carried in the passenger cabin, to the
C. Be clearly identified and marked with its method of operation (this applies to any
containers in which the equipment is carried).
Only one crash ax is required on the airplane and must be carried on the flight deck. At least
one hand fire extinguisher must be carried on the flight deck. The number of extinguishers carried
2 the cabin is determined by the number of installed passenger seats. The following table applies.
Minimum Number ofHand Fire Extinguishers in the Passenger Cabin
Passenger Seating Capacity Extinguishers Required
6 through 30 1
31 through 60
61 through 200
201 through 300 4
301 through 400 5
401 through 500 6
501 through 600
601 or more
The number of megaphones carried on the airplane is determined by the number of installed
passenger seats. On airplanes with a seating capacity of 60 through 99 passengers, one megaphone
must be carried in the most rearward location in the passenger cabin that is readily accessible to a
normal flight attendant seat. On airplanes with a seating capacity of 100 or more seats, one
megaphone must be carried at the rear of the cabin and another megaphone must be carried at the
front of the cabin.
Passenger carrying airplanes must have an emergency exit light system. This system must be
operable manually from both the flight crew station and from a point in the passenger compartment
readily accessible to a flight attendant When the system is armed it must come on automatically with
the interruption of the airplane's nonnal electrical power. The exit lights must be armed or turned on
during taxiing, and landing. Every emergency exit (other than an over wing exit) that is more
than 6 feet from the ground must have a means of assisting occupants to the ground in the event of an
emergency evacuation. The most common means of complying with this requirement is an inflatable
slide that deploys automatically when the door is opened. If such an automatic escape slide is
installed, it must be armed during taxiing, take-off and landing. If any required emergency exit for
passengers is located in other than the passenger compartment (such as the flight deck), the door
separating the compartments must be latched open during take-off and landing.
A public address system and a separate crewmember interphone system must be installed on
all airplanes with a seating capacity of more than 19 seats.
Each crewmember on a flight must have a flashlight in good working order readily available.
When operating at flight altitudes above 10 000 feet there must be enough oxygen for all
crewmembers for the entire flight at those altitudes, and in no event less than a supply.
When operating at flight altitudes above FL250 each flight crewmember on flight deck duty
must have an oxygen mask, within immediate reach, so designed that it can be rapidly placed on
his/her face. This is commonly referred to as a "quick -donning" oxygen mask. To meet the
requirements, regulations require that the mask be designed so that it can be put on the user's face
within 5 seconds. If, while operating above FL250, one pilot leaves his/her station, the other pilot
must put on his/her oxygen mask.
Above FL41 0 one pilot must wear his/her mask at all times. Notice that the rule applies only to
the pilots. Above FL250 the flight engineer need only have a quick-donning mask readily available.
The oxygen requirements for passengers vary with the type of aircraft but oxygen must be
provided to all passengers for the entire time the cabin altitude is above 15 000 feet
Passengers on turbine powered airplanes must be supplied oxygen according to the following
A. For flights at cabin pressure altitudes above 10 000 feet, up to and including 14 000 feet,
there must be enough oxygen to supply 10% of the passengers for any time at those
altitudes in excess of 30 minutes.
..... ?or flights at cabin pressure altitudes above 14 000 feet, up to and including 15 000 feet,
:1ere must be enough oxygen for 30% of the passengers for the entire time of flight at
:hose altitudes.
C For flights at cabin pressure altitudes above 15 000 feet there must be enough oxygen for
all the passengers for the entire time of flight at those altitudes.
amount of oxygen carried for passengers in the event of loss of pressurization varies
on the ability of the airplane to make an emergency descent. If the aircraft can make a
to 14 000 feet within 4 minutes it may caoy less oxygen than would otherwise be required .
.-\ certain amount of first aid oxygen must be carried for passengers on flights that operate
FL250. The amount of oxygen is determined by the actual number of passengers but in no
may there be less than 2 oxygen dispensing units.
On extended over-water flights (more than 50 nautical miles from the shoreline) the airplane
=.m have a life preserver for each occupant of the aircraft, and enough life rafts to accommodate
:he occupants. This equipment must be easily accessible in the event of a ditching.
A. Each life raft and each life vest must be equipped with a survivor locator light.
B. A survival kit, appropriate for the route flown, must be attached to each life raft.
C. There must be at least one portable emergency radio transmitter carried on the airplane.
When flag or supplemental carriers or commercial operators fly over uninhabited terrain, the
:""o:Iowing survival equipment must be carried on the airplane:
A. Suitable pyrotechnic signaling devices;
B. A survival-type emergency locator transmitter;
C. Enough survival kits, appropriate for the route flown, for all the occupants of the airplane.
In an emergency situation that requires immediate decision and action, the pilot-in-command
u:ay take any action that he/she considers necessary under the circumstances. In such a case the PIC
::1ay deviate from prescribed procedures and methods, weather minimums and regulations to the
;:x1ent required in the interest of safety. In an emergency situation arising during flight that requires
decision and action by an aircraft dispatcher, the dispatcher must advise the
:ilot-in-command of the emergency, shall ascertain the decision of the pilot-in-command and shall
-:ave that decision recorded. If the dispatcher cannot communicate with the pilot, he/she shall
:eclare an emergency and take any action he/she considers necessary under the circumstances.
Each certificate holder (airline) must, for each type and model of airplane, assign to each
::ategory of crewmember, as appropriate, the necessary functions to be performed in an emergency
: in a situation requiring emergency evacuation. The certificate holder must describe those duties
..:: its manual.
Crewmembers must receive emergency training annually on several subjects. Besides the they must perform emergency drills in:
A. The operation of emergency exits;
B. Hand fire extinguishers;
C. The emergency oxygen system and protective breathing equipment;
D. Donning. inflation and use of individual flotation equipment; and
E. Ditching.
Crewmembers who serve above 25 000 feet must receive instruction in hypoxia, respiration
and decompression. Crewmembers must actually operate certain emergency equipment in their
recurrent training at least once every 24 months.
The pilot-in-command must make a report to the ATC and dispatcher of the stoppage of an
engine's rotation in flight (due either to failure or intentional shutdown) as soon as practicable and
must keep the ATC and dispatcher infonned of the progress of the flight. As a general rule, when an
engine fails or is shutdown, the pilot-in-command must land the aircraft at the nearest suitable
airport, time-wise, at which a safe landing can be made. There is an exception to the rule for
airplanes with 3 or more engines. If only 1 engine has failed, the pilot-in-command may elect to
continue to a more distant airport (possibly the original destination) if this is considered as safe as
landing at the nearest suitable airport.
The certificate holder must provide a cockpit check procedure (checklist) for each type of
aircraft it operates. The procedures must include each item necessary for flight crewmembers to
check for safety before starting engines, taking-off or landing, and in engine and systems
emergencies. The procedures must be designed so that a flight crewmember will not need to rely on
memory for items to be checked. The flight crew must use the approved check procedure.
Whenever a pilot-in-command exercises emergency authority, he/she shall keep the
appropriate ATC (Air Traffic Control) facility and dispatch centers fully infonned of the progress of
the flight. A pilot-in-command declaring the emergency must send a written report to the air
carrier's operations manager after the flight is completed. The operation's manager must send this
report to the CAAC within 10 days after the pilot returning to his/her home base.
When ATC gives priority to an aircraft in an emergency, the chief of the ATC facility involved
may ask the pilot-in-command to submit a report. If asked, the pilot-in-command must submit a
detailed written report to the ATC facility manager within 48 hours. This is required whether or not
there was a deviation from regulations.
Each certificate holder's manual must contain en route flight, navigation, and communication
::ocedures for the dispatch, release or continuance of flight if any item of equipment required for
":-1e particular type of operation becomes inoperative or unserviceable en route.
When any required instrument or equipment in an aircraft is inoperative, the airplane cannot be
:lown unless that aircraft's minimum equipment list (MEL) allows such a flight.
No person may take off any aircraft with inoperable instruments or equipment installed unless
2..."1 approved MEL exists for the aircraft. The MEL must provide for the operation of the aircraft
-ith instruments and equipment in an inoperable condition.
The pilot-in-command of an aircraft operating IFR in controlled airspace shall report to ATC
..:::1111ediately any malfunction of navigational, approach or communication equipment that occurs in
:':ight The report must include:
Aircraft identification;
Equipment affected;
Degree to which the capability of the aircraft to operate IFR in the ATC system is impaired; and
Nature and extent of assistance desired from ATC.
Modem jet transports usually have three pitot-static systems. There are separate systems for
:be captain's and co-pilot's instruments plus an auxiliary system that provides a backup for either of
:be two primary systems. The instruments that require static pressure input are airspeed, Mach,
and vertical speed indicators. In addition, the airspeed and Mach indicators need a source of
;-itot pressure. Besides the flight instruments, static pressure and pitot input is required for all those
except for cabin differential pressure. The usual source for these non-flight instruments is
:ie auxiliary pitot-static system. See Figure2- l in the following.
Altimeters compare the sea
level pressure setting in pressure
window with the outside air pressure
sensed through the static system. The
difference is displayed as the altitude
above sea level. Part of the preflight
check is to verify the accuracy of the
altimeters. An altimeter should be
considered questionable if the
indicated altitude varies by more
than 75 feet from a known field
The altimeter setting used by
Figurel-1 Typical Pltot-statlc System
pilots is always the station pressure of the reporting station corrected to sea level. Station pressure
is the actual pressure at field elevation. The pressure measured at a station or airport is "station
pressure, or the actual pressure at field elevation.
True altitude is the actual height of the aircraft above se.J level. This is the same as indicated
altitude when standard temperatures exist. When the temperature is warmer than standard, true
altitude is higher than indicated altitude (approximately true altitude) that can be calculated but it is
neither practical nor useful to do so in most situations. When setting an altimeter, a pilot should just
use the appropriate altimeter setting and disregard the effects of nonstandard atmospheric pressures
and temperatures.
True altitude is indicated altitude corrected for the fact that nonstandard temperatures will
result in nonstandard pressure lapse rates. In warm air, you fly at a true altitude higher than
indicated. In cold air, you fly at a true altitude lower than indicated. Pressure altitude is the altitude
indicated when the altimeter is set to the standard sea level pressure (29.92"Hg). In the United
States, altimeters are always set to 29.92"Hg at and above 18 000 feet. This question assumes the
difference between the pressure altitude and the indicated altitude (local altimeter setting) is not
significant enough to reverse the effects of the temperature.
Pressure altitude is the altitude indicated when the altimeter is set to the standard sea level
pressure of 29.92"Hg. Density altitude is used in aircraft performance computations. It is pressure
altitude corrected for nonstandard temperatures. If the temperature is warmer than standard, density
altitude will be higher than pressure altitude.
The local altimeter setting is used when flying below FL180 and the altimeter 31.00"Hg or less.
Special procedures apply when the local pressure is more than 3l.OO"Hg because most altimeters
cannot be set higher than that In the United States, all altimeters are set to 29.92"Hg when climbing
through FL180. Caution: outside the United States the transition altitude is often something other
-.. : .:-rnmon reason for altimeter errors is incorrect setting of the altimeter. If the setting in the
is higher than the actual sea level pressure, the altimeter will read higher than the actual
If the setting is too low, the altimeter will read lower than it really is. As a rough rule of
;::c::: :he magnitude of the error is about 1 000 feet for each 1 "Hg that the altimeter is off.
O::e inch ofHg pressure is equal to about 1 000 feet of altitude. In the United States, altimeters
!:"e !..\\ays set to 29.92"Hg at and above 18 000 feet If the altimeter is not reset when descending
:c::, area with a local altimeter setting of 30.57"Hg, an error of 650 feet will result
.:o 5-- 29.92 = 0.65"Hg = 650 feet). If the altimeter is set lower than the actual setting, it will read
ei than the actual altitude.
Pilots should disregard the effect of nonstandard atmospheric temperatures and pressures
:, . .:ept that low temperatures and pressures need to be considered for terrain clearance purposes.
The airspeed indicators compare pitot pressure with static pressure and display the
: _:Ierence as indicated airspeed. This indicated airspeed equals the aircraft's actual speed through
:::e air (True Airspeed) only under standard day conditions at sea level. Under almost all flight
:vnditions, true airspeed will be higher than indicated airspeed because of the lower ambient
at altitude.
The Mach meter displays aircraft speed as a percentage of the speed of sound. For example,
aircraft cruising at a Mach number of 0.82 is flying at 82% of the speed of sound. The Mach
works in a manner similar to the airspeed indicator in which it compares pitot and static
;::-essure, but these inputs are corrected by an altimeter mechanism.
If a pitot tube becomes blocked, the airspeed and Mach indicators will read inaccurately. If
is trapped in the pitot line, the airspeed will read inaccurately high as the aircraft climbs,
.Jw as it descends, and will be unresponsive to changes in airspeed. The airspeed indicator acts as
l:: altimeter because only the static pressure changes. This situation occurs in icing conditions if
:vth the ram air inlet and the drain bole of the pitot tube become completely blocked by ice.
If the pitot tube is blocked but the static port and the pitot drain hole remain open, the indicated
:mspeed will drop to zero. The pitot tube drain hole allows the pressure in the pitot line to drop to
=::nospheric and therefore there is no difference between the static and pitot pressures.
If both the ram air input and the drain hole are blocked, the pressure trapped in the pitot line
:.a1not change and the airspeed indicator may read as an altimeter. The airspeed will not change in
-;vel flight even when the actual airspeed is varied by large power changes. During a climb the
.:... -s;>eed indication will increase. During a descent the airspeed indication will decrease.
If the pitot tube becomes blocked but pressure is not trapped in the pitot lines, the indicated
will drop to zero since the pitot pressure will be approximately equal to the static pressure.
Pitot tubes and static ports are electrically heated to prevent ice formations that could interfere
.:=!proper operation of the systems. They are required to have "power on indicator lights to show
operation. In addition, many aircraft have an ammeter that shows the actual current flow to
c::: ;.'itot and static ports.
Since the magnetic compass is the only direction-seeking instrument in most airplanes, the
pilot must be able to turn the airplane to a magnetic compass beading and maintain this heading. It
is influenced by magnetic dip which causes northerly turning error and acceleration/deceleration
error. When northerly turning error occurs, the compass will lag behind the actual aircraft heading
whlle turning through headings in the northern half of the compass rose, and lead the aircraft' s
actual heading in the southern half. The error is most pronounced when turning through north or
south, and is approximately equal in degrees to the latitude.
The acceleration/deceleration error is most pronounced on beadings of east and west When
accelerating, the compass indicates a turn toward the north, and when decelerating it indicates a turn
toward the south.
No errors are apparent whlle on east or west headings, when turning either north or south.
Airborne weather radar is used to detect and avoid areas of heavy precipitation such as
thunderstorms. With few exceptions, all air carrier aircraft must be equipped with an approved
airborne weather radar unit. The radar must be in satisfactory operating condition prior to dispatch
on an IFR or night VFR flight if thunderstorms (or other hazardous weather) that could be detected
by the radar are forecast along the intended route of flight. An aircraft may be dispatched with an
inoperative radar unit if one of two conditions is met:
A. The flight will be able to remain in day VFR flight conditions, or
B. Hazardous weather is not forecast
An air carrier' operations manual must contain procedures for the flight crew to follow if the
weather radar fails in flight.
No person may dispatch an airplane under IFR or night VFR conditions when current weather
reports indicate that thunderstorm, or other potentially hazardous weather conditions that can be
detected with airborne weather radar, may reasonably be expected along the route to be flown,
unless the weather radar is in satisfactory operating condition. If the airborne radar becomes
inoperative en route, the airplane must be operated in accordance with the approved instructions and
procedures specified in the operations manual for such an event.
Return to the departure airport upon malfunction of airborne weather detection radar would be
the correct action if it were the procedure specified in the air carrier's operations manual. However,
it is not required by regulation.
A ground proximity warming system (GPWS) must be installed on all large turbine-
powered airplanes. The GPWS gives aural and visual warnings when an aircraft too close to the
terrain is in an improper configuration for landing, or when it deviates below glide slope on an ILS
approach. No person may operate a turbine-powered airplane unless it is equipped with a ground
--'--c glide slope deviation alerting system.
IC -\.5 I (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System) provides proximity warning only, to
:.:,.: :: _.:: in the visual acquisition of intruder aircraft. No recommended avoidance maneuvers
- :e=. ::or authorized as a result of a TCAS I warning. TCAS ll provides traffic advisories
...... !.. ' .::: :-;solution advisories (RAS). Resolution advisories provide recommended maneuvers in
- ,__,. .:.:-ection to avoid conflicting traffic. TCAS does not alter or diminish the pilot's basic
.:.::d responsibility to ensure safe flight After the conflict, return to the ATC clearance in
:: ::. occurs, contact ATC as soon as practicable.
:;ilot who deviates from an ATC clearance in response to a TCAS n RAS shall notify
-: deviation as soon as practicable and expeditiously return to the current ATC clearance
=:".;! :;affic conflict is resolved.
Coch.-pit voice recorders are required on large turbine engine powered airplanes and large four
e:-::-.a ".:.:'iprocating powered airplanes. The recorder must operate from before the start of the
- -; checklist to the completion of the secure cockpit checklist. Although the recorder
-:::::::: :':: ::1e entire flight, only the most recent 30 minutes of information need be retained on the
"::.::1 a cockpit voice recorder is required on an airplane, it must be operated continuously
=c :::e start of the use of the check list (before starting engines for the purpose of flight), to
of the final checklist at the termination of flight Information recorded more than 30
wlier may be erased or otherwise obliterated .
. .:....:: ;pproved flight recorder must be installed on all airplanes certified for operations above
:= 0:( :'eet and on all turbine-powered airplanes. Whatever the flight recorder must varies from
'!::::::: :o airplane, but at a minimum it must record:,

\'ertical acceleration,
Heading, and
:-ime of each radio transmission to or from ATC .
.l.. !Otal of 1 hour of recorded data may be erased for the purpose of testing flight recorder
:::;.;t recorder system. Any erasure must be of the oldest recorded data accumulated at the
-! ::testing.
:.:::ormation obtained from flight data and cockpit voice recorders is used to assist in
:::r.:=-=:." the cause of accidents or occurrences in connection with investigation under NTSB Transportation Safety Board) Part 830. The Administrator does not use the cockpit voice
record in any civil penalty or certificate action.
::: the event of an accident or occurrence requiring immediate notification to NTSB Part
: . . .:..."1d that results in the termination of a flight, any operator who has installed approved
flight recorders and approved cockpit voice recorders shall keep the recorded information for at
least 60 days.
Each domestic and flag air carrier must show that a two-way air/ground radio
communications system is available at points that will ensure reliable and rapid
communications under normal operating conditions over the entire route (either direct or via
approved point to point circuits) between each airplane and the appropriate dispatch office, and
between each airplane and the appropriate air traffic control unit.
The En Route Flight Advisory Service (Flight Watch) is a weather service on a common
frequency of 122.0 MHz from selected FSS's (Flight Service Stations). This service is dedicated
specifically to providing weather information to en route pilots and taking and disseminating pilot
Aeronautical weather and operational information may be displayed in the cockpit through the
use of FAA FISDL (Federal Aviations Administration's Flight Information Services Data Link),
and is designed to provide coverage throughout the continental U.S. from 5 000 feet AGL (above
ground level) to 17 500 feet MSL (sea level), except in those areas where this is unfeasible due to
mountainous terrain.
FAA FISDL provides free of charge, the following basic products: METARS, SPECIS, TAFs
and their amendments, SIGMETS, Convective SIGMETs, AIRMETs, PIREPs and, A WWs issued
by the FAA or NWS (National Weather Service).
FISDL products, such as ground-based radar precipitation maps, are not appropriate for use in
tactical severe weather avoidance, such as negotiating a path through a weather hazard area (an area
where a pilot cannot reliably divert around hazardous weather, such as a broken line of
thunderstorms), but FISDL supports strategic weather decision making such as route selection to
avoid a weather hazard area in its entirely flight. The misuse of information beyond its applicability
may place the pilot and his/her aircraft in great jeopardy. In addition, FISDL should never be used
in lieu of an individual preflight weather and flight planning briefing.
When an aircraft is flown IFR or VFR Over-the-Top it must have a dual installation of the
navigation radios required to fly that route. This means that an aircraft flying Victor airways or jet
routes must have two operable VOR systems. Only one ILS system and one marker beacon system
are required.
"'o person may operate IFR or VFR Over-the-Top unless the airplane is equipped with the
equipment necessary for the route, and is able to satisfactorily receive radio navigational
_ -:- s from all primary en route and approach navigational facilitates intended for use, by either of
- : systems.
\\ben an aircraft is navigating over routes using low frequency, ADF or Radio Range, it only
one receiver for those NAVAIDS. If it is also equipped with two VOR receivers, if that is the
'2-.;e. me VOR stations must be located such that the aircraft could complete the flight to a suitable
=:-:v:-t and make an instrument approach if the low frequency system fails. The airplane must also
=-= ::.!eled to allow for such a failure.
In the case of IFR operation over routes in which navigation is based on low-frequency radio
.....-;::e or automatic direction finding, only one low-frequency radio range or ADF receiver need be
- s:alled if the airplane is equipped with two VOR receivers, and VOR navigational aids are so
:.:a:ed and the airplane is fueled so that, in the case of failure of the low-frequency radio range or
.:..:>X: receiver, the flight may proceed safely to a suitable airport by means of VOR aids and
:.:::::plete an instrument approach by use of the remaining airplane radio system.
Whenever a different VOR station is tuned, the pilot must listen to the Morse code
.:::!Jtification. This will ensure that the correct frequency has been tuned and that a usable signal
:;:.:: is not reliable enough off or the indent will be changed to the letters T-E-S-T. Other than the
.:;:}ti.fier, the station may appear to be broadcasting a normal signal.
During periods of routine or emergency maintenance, coded identification (or code and voice,
applicable) is removed from certain FAA NAVAIDS. During periods of maintenance, VHF
very High Frequency) ranges may radiate a periods of maintenance. VHF ranges may radiate a
:--E-S-T code.
No person may operate an aircraft under IFR using the VOR system of radio navigation unless
:::e VOR equipment of that aircraft has been operationally checked within the preceding 30 days.
::1e pilots may check the accuracy of the VORs in one of several ways.
A. The VORs may be checked using a VOT test facility on an airport. The VOT broadcasts
the 360 radial and so the CDI (Course Deviation Indicator) needle should center either on a
setting of360 with a FROM indication or on 180 with a TO indication. A deviation of 4 is
acceptable for a VOT check.
B. If a VOT is not available, a VOR checkpoint may be used instead. The aircraft must be
moved to the checkpoint and the designated radial set in the CDI course. The acceptable
variation for a ground check is 4. For an airborne check the allowable variation is 6.
C. If no VOT or VOR checkpoint is available, the VORs may be checked against each other.
This is called a "dual VOR check". Turn the VORs to the same station and check the
difference in indicated bearing. If they are within 4 of each other, the check is satisfactory.
And this check can be performed on the ground or in the air.
If a dual system VOR (units independent of each other except for the antenna) is installed in
the aircraft., the person checking the equipment may check one system against the other. The
maximum permissible variation between the two indicated bearings is 4.
The person making a VOR check must make an entry in the aircraft log or other record. A
proper entry includes the date, place and bearing error. The checker must sign the entry. Besides the
VOR check, the altimeter system and the transponder must have been checked within the last 24
calendar months.
Whenever VOR receivers are required on board an aircraft operating, it must also have at least
one DME (Distance Measuring Equipment) receiver on board as well. If the DME fails in flight,
the pilot must inform ATC as soon as possible.
DME indicates the actual distance from the station to the receiving aircraft in nautical
miles. That is different from the horizontal distance because the aircraft is always higher than
the DME ground station altitude which is included in the slant range. As a practical matter, the
difference between the horizontal distance and the "slant range" is insignificant at distances of
more than 10 miles from the station. There is a considerable error close to the station when the
aircraft is at high altitudes. In such a situation, almost all of the slant range distance is vertical.
When an aircraft passes over a DME station, the distance indicated at station passage is the
altitude of the aircraft above the station in nautical miles. For example, if an airplane flew over
a VORTAC (Collocated VOR and TACAN navaids) site 12 000 feet above the station, the DME
would indicate 2.0 NM.
If an aircraft was flying a perfect 10 DME arc to the left in no wind conditions, the RMI
bearing would remain on the left wing-tip reference mark indicating that the VOR was exactly 90
to the left of the aircraft's heading. With a left crosswind, the pilot would have to tum the aircraft
toward the wind to compensate for the drift to the right. That would place the bearing to the VOR
less than 90, and the bearing pointer would be ahead of the wing-tip reference.
No person may operate an airplane in controlled airspace under IFR unless within the
preceding 24 calendar months, each static pressure system, each altimeter instrument, and each
automatic pressure altitude reporting system have been tested and inspected. No person may use an
ATC transponder required by regulations unless, within the preceding 24 calendar months it has
been tested and inspected.
The horizontal situation indicator (HSI) is a combination of two instruments: the heading
indicator and the VOR (see Figure 2-2).
The aircraft heading displayed on the rotating azimuth card under the upper lubber line in
Figure 2-2 is 330. The course-indicating arrowhead that is shown is set to 300. The tail of the
course-indicating arrow indicates the reciprocal, or 120.
SeleCted heading
Course select I Compass card
poinrerv --:--;--;;:i;:-- --i- 1- ----.
To I From pointer
Figure 2-2 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
The course deviation bar operates with a VORILOC (localizer) navigation receiver to indicate
~ i t h e r left or right to deviations from the course that is selected with the course-indicating arrow. It
;noves left or right to indicate deviation from the centerline in the same manner that the angular
movement of a conventional VORILOC needle indicates deviation from course.
The desired course is selected by rotating the course-indicating arrow in relation to the azimuth
card by means of the course set knob. This gives the pilot a pictorial presentation. The fixed aircraft
symbol and the course deviation bar display the aircraft relative to the selected course as though the
pilot was above the aircraft looking down.
The TO/FROM indicator is a triangular-shaped pointer. When this indicator points to the head
of the course arrow, it indicates that the course selected, and if properly intercepted and flown, will
rake the aircraft TO the selected facility, and vice versa
The glide slope deviation pointer indicates the relationship of the aircraft to the glide slope.
When the pointer is below the center position, the aircraft is above the glide slope and an increased
rate of descent is required.
To orient where the aircraft is in relation to the facility, first determine which radial is selected
look at the arrowhead). Next, determine whether the aircraft is flying to or away from the station
1ook at the TO/FROM indicator) to fmd which hemisphere the aircraft is in. And then determine
how far from the selected course the aircraft is (look at the deviation bar) to find which quadrant the
3.ircraft is in. Last, consider the aircraft heading (under the lubber line) to determine the aircraft's
?OSition within the quadrant
Aircraft displacement from course is approximately 200 feet per dot per nautical mile. For
example, at 30 NM from the station 1-dot deflection indicates approximately 1 NM displacement of
tile aircraft from the course centerline. Therefore a 2.5-dot deflection at 60 NM would mean the
ilicraft is approximately 5 NM from the course centerline.
Several IDS presentations and the relevant aircraft position and direction of flight are shown
by Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-3 HSI Presentations
<iJ cS>
Figure 2-4 Aircraft Position and Direction of FUgbt
HSI indicator "A" is set up with the head of the arrow pointing to 270 (normal sensing). The
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) is centered; therefore, the aircraft is on the extended centerline
of runway #9 and #27. With a heading of 360, indicator "A" represents an aircraft at position #6
HSI indicator ''B" is set up with the head of the arrow pointing to 090 (reverse sensing). The
CDI indication is deflected right, which means the aircraft is actually to the south of the extended
centerline. Indicator ''B'' then, with the aircraft flying on a heading of090, could be at position #13
and #5. Remember that the local receiver does not know where you are in relationship to the
antenna site.
HSI indicator "C" is set up with the head of the arrow pointing to 090 (reverse sensing). With
the CDI centered the aircraft is on the extended centerline. And with a heading of090 position #12
::=:e : ::lly one which would have that indication.
HSI indicator ''D" is set up with the head of the arrow pointing to 090 (reverse sensing). The
'-' ...::dication is deflected right, which means the aircraft to the south of course. On a beading of
: : ;osition #2 is the only choice.
:iSI indicator "E" is set up with the head of the arrow pointing to 090 (reverse sensing).With
c.:.= .::>I deflected right, the aircraft is to the south of the extended centerline. On a heading of045,
-s:::on #8 or #3 are the only answer.
HSI indicator "F' is set up with the head of the arrow pointing to 090 (reverse sensing). The
.:::;: mdication is deflected; tl.erefore, the aircraft is on the extended centerline of runway #9 and
=:- With a heading of270 indicator "F" represents an aircraft at position #4.
HSI indicator "G" is set up with the bead of the arrow pointing to 270 (reverse sensing).The
_:::): indication is deflected left; therefore, the aircraft is right of the extended centerline of runway
=- :!-'ld #27. With a heading of270 indicator "G" represents an aircraft at position #7 or #11.
HSI indicator "H" is set up with the head of the arrow pointing to 270 (reverse sensing). The
::>I indication is deflected left; therefore, the aircraft is right of the extended centerline of runway
:.: #27. With a heading of215 indicator "H" represents an aircraft at position #I.
HSI indicator "P' is set up with the head of the arrow pointing to 090 (reverse sensing).The
OI indication is deflected left; therefore, the aircraft is right of the extended centerline of runway
::. md #27. With a heading of 270 indicator "P' represents an aircraft at position #7 or # 11.
The compass card shows the aircraft heading
!: ill times under the lubber line. The two needles
the bearings TO and FROM the number 1
number 2 VCRS. The thin needles can be
:;.::ected to display ADF bearing information .The
..Jead of each needle shows the magnetic bearing
: 15 TO the station (330 radial) and the number
: :::eedle shows 255 10 the station (075 radial).
5.:-e Figure 2-5.
To orient where the aircraft is in relation to
=e facility, first determine which radial is
;e.ected to find which quadrant you are in (look
!: :he tail of the needle, if you are tying to orient
Figure 2-5 Radio Magnetic Indicator
. c-'JI'Selfrelative to the VOR, make sure you are using the VOR needle). Next, consider the aircraft
(under the lubber line) to determine the aircraft's position within the quadrant.
The magnetic beading of the aircraft is always directly under the index at the top of the
instrument. The bearing pointer displays bearings TO the selected station and the tail displays
bearings FROM the station.
When an air carrier operates on routes outside of the 48 contiguous states where the aircraft's
position cannot be reliably fixed for more than one hour, special fuel applies. The aircraft must
either be equipped with a "specialized means of navigation" (inertial navigation system or Doppler
Radar). Or one of the flight crewmembers must have a current flight navigator certificate. The FAA
may also require either a navigator or the specialized navigation routes which meet the one-hour
fuel if they feel it's necessary. All routes that require either the navigator or specialized mean:> of
navigation must be listed in the air carrier's operations specifications.
Certain routes over the North Atlantic Ocean between North America and Europe require
better than normal standards of navigation. Administrator (the FAA) has authority to grant a
deviation from the navigation standards if an operator requests one.
Inertial Navigation System (lNS) is the primary system used by air carriers for over-water
navigation. Prior to flight, the pilots enter the present latitude and longitude of the aircraft and the
fixes that make up the desired route. The INS constantly updates its position by signals from
self-contained gyros and accelerometers. The unit then computes the direction and distance to the
next fix and displays this information on the aircraft's navigational source. If the INS gets input
of the aircraft's heading and airspeed, it can compute and display the wind and any drift angle.
When INS is used as the navigation system, the aircraft must have either two INS and Doppler
Radar units.
INS is a totally self-contained navigation system, comprised of gyros, accelerometers, and a
navigation computer, which provides aircraft position and navigation information in response to
signals resulting from inertial effects on system components, and does not require infom1ation from
external references.
If a certificate holder elects to use Inertial Navigation System it must be at least a dual system.
At least 2 systems must be operational at take-off. The dual system may consist of either 2 INS
units, or 1 INS unit, or 1 INS unit and 1 doppler radar unit.
LORAN-Cis a pulsed, hyperbolic system operating in the 90 to 110KHz frequency band. The
system is based on measurement of the difference in time of arrival of pulses of RF energy radiated
by a "chain" of transmitters located hundreds of miles apart Within a chain, one station is
designated as the Master (M) and the others are called secondaries, Whiskey CW), X-ray(X), Yankee
(Y) and Zulu (z). Each chain is identified by its unique Group Repetition Interval (GRI).
NOTAM (Notice to Airmen) information on the status of any LORAN-C chain or station
in the United States can be found in NOTAM (D)S under the identifier 'LRN''.
:be LORAN-C receiver in the aircraft converts the time difference (TD) information into
coordinates. Using this information, it generates a course and distance to a designated
-- "X'int fix. LORAN-C installation is approved on an individual basis. If a particular aircraft
.:;::::"2-.ation is approved for IFR operations, there will be an entry in the airplane's Flight Manual
: -:-: .ement or the aircraft will have an FAA Form 337 (major repair or alteration) approving the

: ORAN-C originally developed as a marine navigational aid has gained wide acceptance in
co= ::: iation community in recent years. The chains were set up in the U.S. coastal areas. Originally
was a gap in suitable coverage in the midwest and southwestern U.S., and this gap has been
= :-.: with the commissioning of an additional chain. LORAN is approved for IFR in the 48
.:-::_guous states. During the approach phase, the receiver must detect a lost signal or a signal blink
::::.'110 seconds of the occurrence and warn the pilot of the event.
LORAN-e is approved for VFR navigation. It is also approved for IFR navigation, but is
on an individual basis. A pilot may determine if a LORAN-e receiver is autl}orized for
:?erations by consulting the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement or an FAA Form 337 (major
alteration), in aircraft maintenance records, or possibly by a placard installed near or on the
ax:::ol panel. Pilots must familiarize themselves with the above referenced documents to verify the
a .. _val level of the LORAN-C receiver they are operating.
The primary instrument approach system in the United States is the Instrument Landing
SyHem (ILS). The system can be divided operationally into three parts: guidance, range and
information (approach lights, touchdown and centerline lights, runway lights). If any of the
:: :::.ents is unusable, the approach minimums may be raised or the approach may not be
::... '1orized at all.
The guidance information consists of the localizer for horizontal guidance and the glide slope
f.:- \ertical guidance. The localizer operates on one of 40 frequencies. The localizer transmitter
on one of 40 lLS channels within the frequency range of 108.10 to 111.95 MHz. The
\i::5e code identifier of the localizer is the letter "I" ()followed by three other letters unique
1: :.:at facility. The portion of the localizer used for the ILS 3J'proach is called the front course.
--e ;:>ortion of the localizer extending from the far end of the runway is called the back course.
--= back course may be used for missed approach procedures or for a back course approach if one
!:! ..:blished.
Range information is usually provided by 75 MHz marker beacons or. occasionally, by D?v.tE.
--=:e are four types of marker beacons associated with ILS approaches-the outer marker. the
=- ::!e marker, the inner marker and the back course marker. Flying over any marker beacon will
result in both visual and aural indications. The outer marker is identified by a blue light and
continuous dashes in Morse code at a rate of 2 per second. The middle marker is indicated by a
flashing amber light and alternating dots and dashes at a rate of 2 per second. The inner marker
flashes the white light and sounds continuous dots at 6 per second. The back course marker will also
flash the white light and sound a series of 2-dot combinations. See Figure 2-6.
-""" ......
101 1010 \tiiShtHL. RlcMIM

901011150Ht.-doj>tl ..

SO'I) p:"'""'"' ..... -
_,.,_.., __

tnd.AMenna is on ct:'Ctdne aM
...--- 11'-
2.5 vs
g) <(XI
no 1 a SlS
1:10 ; m ao
150 6S! 130
160 i 7UI 178



Conopooo - ... ,_., 25 ....

M .... OUiif and WRrid:le
-...A<IO!Hr .. &t 02)Hl1orw,
-... ...... __ h
..,....., ... w ...
It& EbtOlOfbcn:lr
Md N .... ....... tadclt
- Al-"""'--

conlfOI h'IWtt ttO ptCM:Jod. tWtl
IAJIOprialofiiCUcliooln- :lon
.... _.


ModllllloMOC 95S

Figure 2-6 IDstrwnent Landing System (ILS)
1\vo code and light identifications of marker beacons are as follows:
Marker Code Light
Often, an ADF facility (called a compass locator) is associated with an ILS approach. Usually
it is located at the outer marker, but occasionally it is co-located with the middle marker. An outer
compass locator is identified with the first 2 letters of the localizer identification group. A middle
compass locator is identified with the last 2 letters of the localizer.
_.! =.:.:.e marker is out of service, the middle compass locator or PAR (Precision Approach
::::- :-;; substituted. The middle marker being inoperative does not affect minimums during a
-m-;::-: : =-s approach. The visual information portion of the ILS consists of approach lights,
*" _ ;.::j centerline lights and runway lights.
--: . ::!lizer is very narrow. In fact a full scale deflection (CDI moving from the center to full
,..:. :: :ight) is only about 700 feet at the runway threshold.
:.._=:--:::: aircraft will require different rates of descent to stay on glide slope. A good rule of
..; :::at the vertical speed in feet per minute will require a descent rate of about 700 feet per
:.! : J( 5 = 700).
--= .Jwest approach minimums that can be used for a normal (Category I) ILS approach are a
:F - : : feet and 1 800 feet RVR. A Category ll ILS approach will have minimums as low as a
:.C: : : : : : feet and a visibility requirement of 1 200 feet RVR. The approach has to be approved for
:.:::!';::: II minimums. In addition to suitable localizer, glide slope and marker beacons, the
!!.I_ .:_:-: light system, High Intensity Runway lights (IDRL), Touchdown Zone Lights (TDZL),
-=-= l. Centerline Lights (CL) and Runway Visual Range (RVR), Radar, VAS! and Runway End
(REIL) are not required components of a Category II approach system.
:-: ctescend below the DH from a Category II approach, the pilot must be able to see one of the
.: __ : the runway threshold, the threshold markings, the threshold lights, the touchdown zone
- ::: :vuchdown zone markings, the touchdown zone lights, or the approach light system, except
=.:: : may not descend below l 00 feet above the touchdown zone unless the red terminating
-z.."""' :::.he red side row bars are distinctly visible and identifiable.
5Jme airports have Category IliA approaches. This type of approach has a required visibility
: .:ttle as 700 feet RVR, and no DH.
:be simplified directional facility (SDF) and the localizer-type directional air (LDA) are
systems that give a localizer-type indication to the pilot, but with some significant
:.=::ences. The LOA is essentially a localizer, but it is not aligned within 3 of the runway as a
:-:2iizer must be. The localizer can be any width from 3to 6wide. If the LDA is within 30 ,
:-::-;.ight-in minimums will be published for it; if not, only circling minimums wiU be published. The
s:::; : may or may not be aligned with the runway. The main difference between it and a localizer is
at either 6 or 12.
The Microwave Landing System (MLS) is envisioned as the eventual replacement for the
5 system. It gives an ILS-like indication of azimuth and glide slope but has several advantages
_ . ;: the older ILS. See Figure 2-7 below. The MLS provides azimuth, elevation and distance
to aircraft. In addition, it has expansion capability to include selectable back azimuth
==.: jata transmission. It also has the operational flexibility to include selectable glide slope angles
::..: boundaries to provide obstruction clearance in the tenninal area The usable coverage area is
- greater than an ILS. Azimuth coverage includes at least 40 either side of the centerline out to
: . '\:vt and up to 20 000 feet altitude. If a back azimuth is installed, it covers similar dimensions out
-: - The glide slope extends out to similar distances and elevations and can be extended up to
15. The identifier of the present MLS systems (Interim Standard :VU..S) is the letter M (--)
followed by a unique three-letter code. If data transmission is included with the :MLS, it will include
MLS status, airport conditions and weather.
Coverage Volumes
' f
'Wh4n lr>Stallad '

,, '
' -
Figure 2-7 MIS Coverage Areas
The front azimuth coverage extends:
A. Laterally, at least 40 on either side of the runway;
B. In elevation, up to an angle of 15 and to at least 20 000 feet;
C. In range, to a distance of at least 20 NM.
The back azimuth provides coverage as follows:
A. Laterally, at least 40 on either side of the runway;
B. In elevation, up to an angle of 15;
C. In range, to a distance of at least 7 NM from the runway stop end.
20 NMI
The MLS provides precision navigation guidance for exact alignment and descent of aircraft
on approach to a runway. It provides azimuth, elevation, and distance.
Standard MLS configuration can be expanded by adding one or more of three following
functions or characteristics: back azimuth, auxiliary data transmissions, and larger proportional
The MLS back azimuth transmitter is essentially the same as the approach azimuth transmitter.
However, the equipment transmits at a somewhat lower data rate because the guidance accuracy
requirements are not as stringent as for the landing approach.
A great deal of data can be transmitted over the MLS. This includes MLS status, airport
conditions and weather.
The MLS has capability which allows curved and segmented approaches, selectable glide path
angles, accurate 3-D positioning of the aircraft in space, and the establishment of boundaries to
ensure clearance from obstructions in the terminal area
:he Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based radio navigational, positioning, and
=--= ::ansfer system. The GPS receiver verifies the integrity (usability) of the signals received form
.";PS constellation through RAIM, to determine if a satellite is providing corrupted information.
- ::.:Jut RAIM capability, the pilot has no assurance of the accuracy of the GPS position. TfRAIM
..... -:: available, another type of navigation and approach system must be used, another destination
- or the trip delayed until RAIM is predicted to be available on arrival. The authorization to
_.: GPS to fly instrument approaches is limited to U.S airspace. The use of GPS in any other
-:;-ace must be expressly authorized by the FAA Administrator.
If a visual descent point (VDP) is published, it will not be included in the sequence of
.. ::.-points. Pilots are expected to use normal piloting techniques for beginning the visual descent.
:- ; database may not contain all of the transitions or departures from all runways and some GPS
-e-:eivers do not contain DPS in the database. The GPS receiver must be set to terminal (1 NM)
: ..rse deviation indicator (COl) sensitivity and the navigation routes contained in the database in
-:er to fly published IFR charted departures and DPS. Terminal RAIM should be automatically
:-:vided by the receiver. Terminal RAIM for departure may mot be available unless the waypoints
.:! part of the active flight plan rather than proceeding direct to the flfSt destination. Overriding an
:...:.Jmatically selected sensitivity during an approach will cancel the mode annunciation. The RAIM
== CDI sensitivity will not ramp down, and the pilot should not descend to lviDA, but fly to the
- ssed approach waypoint (MA WP) and execute a missed approach.
It is necessary that helicopter procedures be flown at 70 knots or less since helicopter departure
:-:-cedures and missed approaches use a 20:1 obstacle clearance surface (OCS), which is double the
:: ;;d-wing OCS, and turning areas are based on this speed as well.
The GPS operation must be conducted in accordance with the FAA-approved aircraft flight
(AFM) or flight manual supplement Flight crewmembers must be thoroughly fan1iliar with
:e particular GPS equipment installed in the aircraft, the receiver operation manual, and the AFM
_- flight manual supplement. Air carrier and the commercial operators must meet the appropriate
;:Jvisions of their approved operations specifications.
The pilot must be thoroughly familiar with the activation procedure for the particular GPS
t.:eiver installed in the aircraft and must initiate appropriate action after the MA WP. Activating the
=:ssed approach prior to the MA WP will cause CDI sensitivity to immediately change to terminal
=: )JM) sensitivity and the receiver will continue to navigate to the MAWP. The receiver will not
: _Jt action to sequence past the MA WP. Turns should not begin prior to the MA WP. A GPS missed
!::;roach requires pilot action to sequence the receiver past the MA WP to the missed approach
:.: :tion of the procedure. If the missed approach is not activated, the GPS receiver will display an
: .::ension of the inbound final approach course and the ATD will increase from the MA WP until it is
- sequenced after crossing the MA WP.
Any required alternate airport must have approved instrument approach procedure other than
GPS, which is anticipated to be operational and available at the estimated time of arrival and with
which the aircraft is equipped to fly. Missed approach routings in which the track is via a course
rather than direct to the next waypoint require additional action by the pilot to set the course. Being
familiar with all of the inputs required is especially. critical during this phase of flight
Properly certified GPS equipment may be used as a supplemental means ofiFR navigation for
domestic en route, terminal operations and certain instrument approach procedures (lAPS). This
approval permits the use of GPS in a manner that is consistent with current navigation requirements
as well as approved air carrier operations specifications.
Use of a GPS for IFR requires that the avionics necessary to receive aU of the ground based
facilities appropriate for the route to the destination airport and any required alternate airport must
be installed and operational.
A rotating beacon not only aids in locating an airport at night or in low visibility, but also helps
to identify which airport is seen. Civilian airports have a beacon that alternately flashes green and
white. A military airport has the same green and white beacon but the white beam is split to give a
dual flash of white. A lighted heliport has a green, yellow and white beacon.
Figure 2-8 shows the basic marking and lighting for a runway with a non-precision approach.
The threshold is marked with 4 stripes on either side of the centerline. 1 000 feet from the threshold,
a broad "fiXed distance .. marker is painted on either side of the centerline (A). The runway lights are
white for the entire length of the runway (as are the centerline lights if installed). The threshold Is lit
with red lights.

. ,""
' -.
- = -.
0 --<' ....(). -0 -o- -o- -o- -o- -o- ::;
- .
- = - .
r) 0 0 C.' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ') ()
Figure 2-8 Basic Marking and Lighting for a Ruoway
Figure 2-9 shows the somewhat more elaborate ICAO marking for a non-precision runway. In
addition to the fixed distance marker, there are stripes painted on the runway every 500 feet to a
distance of 3 000 feet from the threshold. This runway has either high intensity runway lights
(HIRL) or medium intensity runway lights (MIRL) installed. These lights are amber rather than
white in the areas within 2 000 feet of the threshold. This gives the pilot a "caution zone" on
..... , ......... .... ,.,
I .;.; ... t .. l
C) .... !&. ..,.
Ap;-.t:.xun:ne r <:t oll Httrncunnr;
r., r:> r:> o O<l:l: G> <J><I:l c.<>) c

- .

- . 4
0 tl 0 0 C G) G) G> G> I (; : c: C'
B C 0
Figure 2-9 ICAO Marking for a Non-precision Runway
;ze 2-10 shows the lighting and marking for a precision instrument runway. The runway
-:-: has been modified to make it easier to fell exactly how much runway remains. The stripes
_-: :-__ at 500 feet intervals for the 3 000 feet from the threshold. The HIRL or MIRL turns amber
::- = 2 000 feet closest to the threshold. The centerline lighting has alternating red and white
= :: :::om 3 000 feet to 1 000 feet to go, and has all red lights in the 1 000 feet closest to the
-.:-: :.::id.
' o-nloltll,...,hll
.. ,..,., .., ... . ,
ovn ..
. , ..
.,., ........
0 :) 0
0 t
- -
- .
0 ..... --o - --o - -<> ...... -<> ..... -
o I o
o o o l Cl <D Cl
Figure 2-10 The Lighting aod Marking for a Precision Instrument Runway
In addition to the markings discussed above, some runways have distance remaining markers.
:- are simply signs showing the remaining runway in thousands of feet. Taxi leadoff lights
:.: :Jciated with runway centerline lights are green and yellow alternating lights, curving from the
: -;-:-.!erline of the runway to a point on the exit Some runways have runway end identifier lights
?.Ell..) installed at the threshold. These are synchronized flashing lights (usually strobes) placed
.:.:erally at either side of the runway threshold. Their purpose is to facilitate identification of a
-.::1way surrounded by numerous other lighting systems.
Holding position signs are mandatory instruction signs, and mandatory instruction signs have a
background with a white inscription.
Information signs have a yellow background with a black inscription. They are used to provide
: 1e pilot with information on such things as areas that cannot be seen from the control tower,
;.pplicable radio frequencies and noise abatement procedures.
Runway holding position signs are located at the holding position signs on taxiways that
intersect a runway or on runways that intersect other runways.
Holding position markings for ta.'<iway/runway intersection consist of four yellow lines-two
solid and two dashed. The solid lines are always on the same side where the aircraft is to bold.
The runway boundary sign bas a yellow background with a black inscription and with a
graphic depicting the pavement holding position. This sign, which faces the runway and its visible
to the pilot exiting the runway, is located adjacent to the holding position making on the pavement.
The sign is intended to provide pilots with another visual cue which they can use as a guide in
deciding when they are "clear of the runway". An aircraft is not "clear of the runway'' until all parts
have crossed the applicable holding position marking.
When the ILS critical area is being protected the pilot should stop the aircraft, so no part of the
aircraft extends beyond the holding position marking.
Runway edge lights (HIRL or MIRL) are white, but on instrument runways, amber replaces
white on the last 2 000 feet or half the runway length, whichever is less, to fonn a caution zone for
Touchdown Zone Lighting (TDZL) consists of two rows of transverse light bars disposed
symmetrically about the runway centerline in the runway touchdown zone.
Centerline lighting systems consist of alternating red and white lights from 3 000 feet
remaining to the 1 000-foot point, and all red lights for the last I 000 feet of the runway.
Taxiway leadoff lights extend from the rw1way centerline to a point on an exit taxiway to
expedite movement of aircraft from the runway. These lights alternate green and yellow from the
runway centerline to the runway holding position or the ll..SIMLS critical area. as appropriate.
Runway distance remaining markers are signs located along the sides of a runway to indicate
the remaining runway distance in increments of 1 000 feet.
Runway End Identifier Lights (REU..) are effective for:
A. Identification of a runway surrounded by numerous other lighting systems.
B. Identification of a runway which lacks contrast with surrounding terrain, or
C. Identification of a runway during reduced visibility.
The REll.. system consists of a pair of synchronized flashing Jights located laterally on each
side of the runway threshold.
LAHSO is an acronym for ''Land And Hold Short Operations". These operations include
landing and holding short of an intersecting runway, an intersecting taxiway, or some other
designated point on a runway other than an intersecting runway or taxiway. At controlled airports,
ATC may clear a pilot to land and hold short The pilot-in-command has the final authority to accept
or decline any land and bold short clearance. The safety and operation of the aircraft remain the
responsibility of the pilot To conduct LAHSO, pilot should become familiar with all available
infonnation concerning LAHSO at their destination airport. Pilots should have, readily available,
the published available landing distance (ALD) and runway slope information for all LAHSO
at each airport of intended landing.
:... ::::tionally, knowledge about landing performance data permits the pilot to readily determine
::;.: .-\LD for the assigned runway is sufficient for safe LAHSO. lf, for any reason, such as
.......::._ _ -: in discerning the location of a LAHSO intersection, wind conditions, aircraft condition,
c:::::.. elects to request to land on the full length of the runway, to land on another runway, or
,::e.: ..:..e LAHSO, the pilot is expected to promptly infonn ATC, ideally even before the clearance
5".:;-.:. :\ LAHSO clearance, once accepted, must be adhered to just as any other ATC clearance,
1:: amended clearance is obtained or an emergency occurs. However, a LAHSO clearance
e5: -:: : preclude a rejected landing. The airport marking, signage and lighting associated with
(;. :..: .S consist of a three-part system of yellow hold-short marking, red and white signage and, in
:ases, in-pavement lighting.
.;:: airplane approaching to land on a runway served by a Visual Approach Slope Indicator
- :nust remain on or above the glide slope (except for normal bracketing) until a lower
is necessary for a safe landing .
.; \:--\SI gives the pilot a visual glide slope to follow when landing on certain runways. A VAS!
::- ;.vpe is nonnally about 3 (the same as an ILS) and the aim point is about 1 000 feet down the
-..:::-. :i: 5-om the threshold. The angle and aim point of the VASI can be adjusted as necessary to
.!r:- =.=.odate the runway conditions. If a pilot of a high perfonnance airplane is flying a VASI with
:- :e slope steeper than 3S, he/she should be aware that a longer than normal roll-out may result
::::C:. :..-e flare maneuver required by the steep angle.
runways used by air carrier aircraft have a three-bar VASI system to accommodate
_ wi!h a high cockpit such as Boeing 747 or DC-1 0. These aircraft need a glide slope that has
c. point further down the runway to ensure adequate clearance for the landing gear at the
-...:::- :_: :hreshold. The pilot of such an airplane must use the two upwind lights (middle and far bars:
:'M;- : -:=e slope infonnation.
:-:-::-ee-bar VASI installations provide two visual glide paths. The lower glide path is provided
_ :.:e ::ear and middle bars and is normally set at 3, while the upper glide path provided by the
- ....>::.: a..:d far bars is normally (114t higher. This higher glide path is intended for use only by high
::.:cc : aircraft to provide a sufficient threshold crossing height
.!. ::-!-color VASI consists of one light projector with three colors: red, green and amber. A
....... _:-- T.dication is amber, an "on glide slope" is green and a "low" is red. A tri-color VASI can be
:::: of 1/2 to 1 mile in daylight and up to 5 miles at night.
--e Precision Approach Path indicator (PAPI) approach light system consists of a row of
_ ;:.::5 perpendicular to the runway. Each light can be either red or white depending on the
aircraft's position relative to the glide slope. The glide slope indications of a PAPI are as follows:
Hlgh 4 white lights
Slightly high
On glide path
Slightly low
1 red, 3 white lights
2 red, 2 white lights
1 white, 3 red lights
4red lights
Pulsating visual approach slope indicators normally consist of a single light unit projecting a
two-color visual approach path into the final approach area of the runway upon which the indicator
is installed. The below glide path indication is normally pulsating red, and the above glide path
indication is normally pulsating white. The "on glide path indication" for one type of system is a
steady white light, while for another type system, the on glide path indication consists of an
alternating red and white.
This chapter establishes the basic knowledge elements of aerodynamics. We have 7 parts: lift
!::i drag, stability, flight controls, high-lift devices, tum, VMc and high speed flight.
Bernoulli's equation is effectively the explanation for how an airplane is able to fly. It is in
;:.ility a special case of the First Law of Thermodynamics. In other words, it states that Energy can
v ~ be created or destroyed. However, fortunately for those of us who like to fly, energy can be
:.:nverted from one form into another,
:ere: k p'Vl- Dynamic Pressure;
P-Static Pressure;
Po- Total Pressure.
Bernoulli's equation is simply a special case of the above equation. In the case of a fluid or gas,
::e potential energy is represented by the static pressure. The Kinetic energy is a function of the
=otion of the air, and of course it's mass. It is generally more convenient to use the density of the
1:: as the mass representation.
In words, Bernoulli's equation is usually stated "Static pressure plus dynamic pressure is
.:onstant" When a gas is accelerated, its pressure decreases (see Figure 3-1). As the wing moves
Figure 3-1 Variation in Velocity and Pressure through a Venture
through the air, the air stream is divided, part of it flowing over one surface while the remainder
flowing under the other surface. The air flowing over the upper cambered surface flow faster than
the air over the opposite surface to reach the trailing edge. Thus the pressure on the upper wing
surface is lower than that on the lower surface and lift is produced.
An airfoil is a surface which provides aerodynamic force when it interacts with a moving
stream of air. A wing generates a lifting force only when air is in motion about it. Some of the terms
used to describe the wing, and the interaction of the airflow about it, are listed here.
Leading edge - The part of airfoil meets the airflow ftrst.
Trailing edge - This is the portion of the airfoil where the airflow over the upper surface
rejoins the lower surface airflow.
Chord line - The chord line is an imaginary straight line drawn through an airfoil from the
lading edge to the trailing edge.
Camber - The camber of an airfoil is the characteristic curve of its upper and lower surfaces.
The upper camber is more pronounced, while the lower camber is comparatively flat. This causes
the velocity of the airflow immediately above the wing to be much higher than that below the wing.
Relative wind - This is the direction of the airflow with respect to the wing. If a wing moves
forward horizontally, the relative wind moves backward horizontally. Relative wind is parallel to
and opposite the flight path of the airplane.
Angle of attack must not be confused with an airplane's attitude in relation to the earth's
surface, or with "angle of incidence" (the angle at which the wing is attached relative to the
longitudinal axis of the airplane). Angle of attack is defined as the angle between the chord line of
the wing. and the relative wind. The coefficient of lift is revealed to be the same at a given angle of
attack, regardless of the velocity, air density, wing area, etc.
Angle of attack has a large effect on the lift generated by a wing. During take-offs, the pilot
applies as much thrust as possible to make the airplane roll along launch rail. But just before lifting
off, the pilot "rotates" the aircraft. The nose of the airplane rises, increasing the angle of attack and
producing the increased lift needed for take-off.
There are four forces acting on an airplane all the time in flight: weight, lift, drag and thrust If
the airplane does not accelerate, then we know that the four forces add up to zero. Conversely, if the
aircraft is accelerated, then the forces are not in balance. Thrust and drag act opposite each other
and parallel to the relative wind.
- ::g.n is a force which acts down. The concept of weight in fact defmes the term "down". So,
_ what "down" means, then you understand the direction weight acts. Weight always acts
toward the center of the earth, because it is caused by the downward pull of gravity.
is a force which acts perpendicular to the relative wind within the plane of symmetry.
--=-= 3 :1othing in the definition which requires lift to be opposite to weight. In fact in many cases
..- _ :- .:t opposite to weight The air flowing over the upper surface of the wing is deflected further
l::i!::::. ::-..;t flowing across the lower surface and therefore is accelerated. Bernoulli's principle states
-.e:l a gas is accelerated, its pressure decreases. Thus the pressure on the upper wing surface is
:-- :::an that on the lower surface and lift is produced,
L = CL2 pV"S
-::: : L -Lift;
CL- Coefficient of Lift;
A: zero angle of attack, the
.::e on the upper surface of
-::.= .ving is still less than
but the wing is
: _.:ing minimum lift. As the
-:: :of attack is increased, the lift
by the wing increases
:-::: rrionately. This is true until
-::e of attack exceeds a
=:::::a! value, when the air flowing
:he top of the wing breaks up
..::::: 3 rurbulent flow and the wing
-..:o...5 (see Figure
.a -t12" +18" +20"
Angle of attack and indicated
Figure Effect of Angle of Attack on CL
determine the total lift. An increase in either indicated airspeed or angle of attack increases
::... lift (up to the stalling angle of attack) and a decrease in either decreases total lift. To maintain
"..:= same total lift (i.e. maintain level flight), a pilot has to change the angle of attack anytime
.:.::cated airspeed is changed. For example, as indicated airspeed is decreased, the angle of attack
= be increased to compensate for the Joss of lift. The relationship between indicated airspeed and
_ :or a given angle of attack involves the law of squares. If the angle of attack does not change,
lift varies with the square of the indicated airspeed. For example, if the airspeed doubles, the
_ "': will increase by four times.
Indicated airspeed can be thought of as having two elements-the actual speed of the
!.. -plane through the air (true airspeed) and the density of the air. As altitude increases, air density
::-.:reases. To maintain the same indicated airspeed at altitude, an aircraft must fly at a higher true
airspeed. To produce the same amount of lift at altitude, a higher true airspeed is required for a
given angle of attack.
Drag is a force which acts in the same direction as the relative wind. But it is not necessarily
opposite to thrust. The definition is the equivalent of saying that drag is a force in the opposite
direction to flight. It is also true that drag is by definition at right angles to lift.
A curve comparing total drag to parasite and induced drag reveals an airspeed at which drag is
at a minimum value. At higher airspeeds, total drag increases because of increasing parasite drag. At
lower airspeeds, induced drag increases which increases the total drag.
Since the lift stays constant (equal to weight), the low point on the curve is the airspeed that
produces the best lift to drag (LID) ratio. This point is referred to as LIDmax (see Figure 3-3).
I Induced drag (Wl)
Figure 3-3 Effect of Change in Weight on Drag
A change in weight changes the LID curve. The amount of parasite drag is mainly a function of
indicated airspeed. The amount of induced drag is a function of angle of attack. When an aircraft's
weight is increased, any indicated airspeed will require a higher angle of attack to produce the
required lift. This means that induced drag will increase with increases in weight while there will be
little change in parasite drag.
We know that we must increase coefficient of lift as we reduce velocity. But we also know that
there is a maximum coefficient of lift value for any given airfoil. Thus, we can conclude that there
will be a speed below which we can not fly.
The definition of stall speed is: The minimum speed at which the aircraft can produce
sufficient lift for level fljght. In this case, since we are specifying that we are also flying straight
_ we know that lift must equal weight Thus, we can make a special case definition that
a::d level stall speed is the minimum speed at which the wings can produce lift equal to
-:: ;:: :-fthe airplane,
v. -A I 2W
S1a1l- \j CLmax P S
;r - Weight;
:: maximum coefficient of lift;
_., _air density;
5 -Wmgarea..
:-:-:ere are four factors detennining the stall speed of our airplane: weight. maximum
- -: :":::ient oflift, wing area, air density .
.;. wing will always stall at the same angle of attack. The load factor, weight and density
_::-_ie will cause the stalling true airspeed to vary, but the stall angle of attack will always be the
"';\"eight is in the denominator, therefore as weight increases so does the stall speed. We have
: - . -;bly already guessed that, but now we can see that the relationship is between the stall speed
!::.-: :he square root of the weight. Thus, if the airplane weighs twice as much the stall speed will
by the square root of two (1.41).
coefficient of lift is in the numerator, therefore a higher maximum coefficient of lift
.: result in a lower stall speed. We can see why designers like wings with high max. lift
. _
Wmg area is also in the numerator. Therefore, a larger wing is one of the easiest ways to give
.:.:.. airplane a lower stall speed.
Air density is also in the numerator. Therefore, we lmow that the stall speed will increase as
:..:e air density decreases. In other words, stall speed will increase as altitude increases.
Stability refers to how an aircraft responds to changes in angle of attack, slip or bank. Control
refers to the ability to initiate and sustain changes in angle of attack, slip or bank. In other words,
stability and control are opposites.
An aircraft without sufficient stability will be difficult, even dangerous to fly. On the other
hand, if the aircraft is so stable that it cannot be controlled that will also be dangerous.
Static stability refers to the air.craft's initial response when disturbed from a given angle of
attack, slip or bank. Positive static stability is an initial tendency to return to its original anirude of
equilibrium. When iL continues to diverge, it has ncgath c static SU!'tilit: . If an aircraft tends to
remain in its new disturbed state. it has neutral static stahilit: . \lost airplanes have positive static
stability in pitch and ya\\, and arc clu!>c to neutrally in roll. The .erticu.l tail is the primary
source of direction stability (yaw). ami the horizontal tail is the: prima;:. source of pitch stability.
Dynamic stabil ity refers to the aircrafl. response over time v.hen disn!rbcd from a given nnglc
of attack, slip or bank. Wl1en an aircraft is disturbed from equilibrium :..-.a :hen Lries ro return, it will
invariably overshoot the original attitude and then pitch back. This rem:lS in a series of oscillations.
If the oscillations become weak with time, the aircraft has positiYe dynami.: If the aircraft
diverges further away from its original attitude with each oscillation. it has negative dynamic
st1bili ty.
The center of gravity (CG) is by definition the point about which all gra; ltational moments
add up to zero. If the CG is toward its rearward limit, the aircraft ''ill t-e stable in both roll and
pitch. As the CG moved forward, the E\cm though an airplane \\ill be less
stable with a rearward CG. it will have some desirable aerodynamic due to reduced
aerodynamic loading of horizontal tail surface. This type of an airplane "iU h:m; a slightly lower
c;tall speed and will cruise faster for a given power setting.
When an aircraft flies in ground ciT eel, the ground interferes '' ith :.he tip \ Ol.>!:'\. This reduces
the induced drag. If the wing Oev. right at ground level there would be no all and thcretore
a large reduction in induced drag. I his ground effect reduces induced dra; (and :_t..,ereo:e total drug)
and increases lif\. As an airplane nics out of ground ciTcct on take-off. the increased induced drag
will require a higher angle of attack. The ground eflcct falls ''ith Jltirude
lt is very dillicull to move the night control surfaces of jet aircraft with just me\:hanical and
aerodynamic forces. Flight controls are usually mo,cd b) hydraulic actuators and divided into
primary flight controls and secondary or atL'\iliru: night controls. The most common control
arrangement on the conventional airplane is ailerons on the main wing for roll control and a
horizontal tai l known as the stnbililcr with moveable elevators for pitch control. There is also a
vertical fin with u rudder for directional or yaw control. (or auxiliary) flight controls
include tabs, trailing-edge flaps, leading-edge flaps, and slats.
Roll Control is provided by the ailerons and flight spoilets. When the ailerons are deflected the
down going aileron increases the camber of one wing. The up-going aileron decreases camber on
the other wing. The result is an asymmetric lift betwee.n the wings. This causes the roll rate to
increase away from the wing with the greater lift
It is important to note that as long as a net moment (lift times distance) exists between the two
wings the aircraft will roll faster and faster. The exact mhc of controls is determined by the aircraft's
flight regime. In low speed flight all control surfaces op,!rate to provide the desired roll control.
When the aircraft moves into higher speed operations, control surface movement is reduced to
provide approximately the same roll response to a given irtput through a wide range of speeds.
Many aircraft have two sets of ailerons-inboard and outboard. The inboard ailerons operate
in all flight regimes. The outboard ailerons work only when the wing flaps are extended and are
automatically locked out when flaps are retracted. This makes good roll response in low speed flight
with the flaps extended and prevents excessive roll and wing bending at high speeds when the flaps
:ll'e retracted.
The spoiler will disrupt (separate) the boundary layer, thereby increasing drag and "spoiling"
.!ft on the part of the wing affected by the spoiler. If raised on only one wing, they aid roll control
:y causing the lift of that wing drop. If the spoilers raise symmetrically in flight, the aircraft can
=::her be slowed in level flight or can descend rapidly without an increase in airspeed. When the
:?oilers rise on the ground at hlgh speeds, they destroy the wing's lift that puts more of the aircraft's
\'eight on its wheels which makes the brakes more effective.
Often aircraft have both flight and ground sr,oilers. The flight spoilers are available both in
J ght and on the ground. However, the ground spoilers can only be raised when the weight of the
l::'craft is on the landing gear. When the spoilers deploy on the ground, they decrease lift and make
brakes more effective. In flight, a groun.d-sensing switch on the landing gear prevents
: : ?loyment of the ground spoilers .
The vortex generators is designed to stick up out of the boundary layer into the free stream. It
:::1erates turbulence which re-energizes the boundary layer and prevents flow separation and the
.:.endant pressure drag (review drag as required). When located on the upper surface of a wing, the
. ::ex generators prevent shock-induced separation from the wing as the aircraft approaches its
=:!cal Mach number. This increases aileron effectiveness at high speeds.
Another way of changing the amount of force the pilot must apply to the control column is
through servo and anti-servo tabs.
In this system the control column is directly connected to the control surface but a tab is geared
to the movement of the control surface .so that it either assists the movement of the control, or
counters the movement of the control. Thus, the controls can be made to feel heavier or lighter than
they would otherwise. Servo tabs are on the trailing edge of the control surface and are
mechanically linked to move opposite the direction of the surface. If the tab moves up, the surface
moves down.
The use of trimming tabs is one method of relieving aerodynamic load by means of a
secondary control surface attached to t h t ~ end of the primary surface. Trimming tabs must be
operated by a control mechanism in the required direction. This may be done manually by cables
connected to a control wheel in cockpit, or electrically by servomotors attached to the cable. Trim
tabs must be moved in the opposite direction to that of the primary control surface.
Anti-servo tabs move in the same direction as the primary control surface (see Figure 3-4).
This means that as the control surface deflects, the aerodynamic load is increased by movement of
the anti-servo tab. This helps to prevent the .control surface from moving to a full deflection. It al;o
makes a hydraulically-boosted flight com'rol more aerodynamically effective than it would
otherwise be.
Figure 3-4 Anti-servo Tabs Opposes Further Movement and Provides "Feel"
Some jet aircraft have control tabs for use in the event of loss of all hydraulic pressure.
Movement of the control wheel moves the control 1t.ab which causes the aerodynamic movement of
the control surface. The control tab is used only during manual reversion, that is, with the loss of
hydraulic pressure. They work the same as a servo ta1? but only in the manual mode.
Swept wing jet aircraft are equipped with some hig:h-lift devices including leading edge flaps,
slots or slats, and trailing edge flaps. All of the high-lift devices are to increase lift at low airspeeds
~ :o delay stall until a higher angle of attack.
The two most common types of leading-edge devices are slats and Krueger flaps. The Krueger
:":ap extends from the leading edge of the wing, increasing the camber of the wing. The slat also
e:\."tends from the wing's leading edge but it creates a gap or slot This slot allows high energy from
.:z1der the wing to flow over the top of the wing that delays stall to a higher angle of attack than
would otherwise occur. It is common to find Krueger flaps and slats on the same wing.
The primary purpose of flaps is to increase the camber of the wing. A flap which increases the
wing camber without forming a slot, as described below, is called a plain flap. A flap which moves
back opening a slot when extended is called a fowler flap.
When an airplane is in a level turn it is in a state of acceleration. However, all the acceleration
is confined to a plane parallel to the horizon. Therefore, the vertical component of the lift vector
must completely balance the weight vector which is vertical by definition (see Figure 3-5). When
the pilot rolls the airplane into a turn, he must increase the total lift of the wing so that the vertical
component is equal to the airplane's weight by increasing the angle of attack. If no compensation is
made for the loss of vertical component of lift in a turn, the aircraft will sink.
w w
Bank Angle
r ? ~
Bank Angle
Figure 3-5 Tile Steeper the Bank, the Greater the Lift Force Required from the Wings
Load factor is the ratio of the weight supported by the wings to the actual weight of the aircraft.
On the ground or in unaccelerated flight the load factor is one. Conditions which can increase the
load factor are vertical gusts (turbulence) and level turns. In a level turn, the load factor is
dependent only on the angle of bank. Airspeed, turn rate or aircraft weight have no effect on load
factor. Rate of turn is the number of degrees per second at which the aircraft turns,
w = ~
g tany
where: w-rate of tum;
T- time to tum;
y-angle of bank;
V- velocity.
The time to tum is proportional to velocity and inversely proportional to angle of bank. In
other words, it takes longer time to tum at a high speed, but less time to turn at a large angle of
Radius of turn depends on three variables: g, velocity squared (V"), angle of bank. Notice in
the development of the radius of turn equation that the weight (J) canceled out of the equation.
This is a very important observation since it means that the size of the aircraft has no effect on the
radius of tum. Thus, two aircraft flying at the same angle of bank and velocity will make the same
radius of tum even if one is 1 000 times larger than the other. Radius of tum depends on velocity
squared and is inversely proportional to the tangent of the angle of bank.
When the aircraft slows down,
the angle of attack must increase.
When this happens the plane of
rotation of the propellers is no
longer at right angles to the TAS.
As a result the downgoing blade
and upgoing blade on the propeller
each operate at a different angle of
The downgoing blade will be
at a greater angle of attack and
therefore will produce more thrust
(see Figure 3-6).
Relabv. Aknow
UpgomQ Blade
Figure 3-6 Down Going Prop Blade Produces More Thrust
with the Tail on the Ground
Because of''P-Factor'' on most propeller-driven airplanes, the loss of one particular engine at
high angles of attack would be more detrimental to performance than the loss of the other. One of
the engines has its thrust line closer to the aircraft centerline. The loss of this engine would more
adversely affect the performance and handling of the aircraft; therefore this is the "critical engine".
For unsupercharged engines, VMc decreases as altitude is increased. Stalls should never be
practiced with one engine inoperative because of the potential for loss of control. Engine out
approaches and landings should be made the same as normal approaches and landings.
Banking at least 5 into the good engine ensures that the airplane will be controllable at any
speed above the certificated VMc, that the airplane will be in a minimum drag configuration for best
climb performance, and that the stall characteristics will not be degraded. Engine out flight with the
ball centered is never correct.
The blue radial line on the airspeed indicator of a light, twin-engine airplane represent
maximum single-engine rate of climb.
Mach number is the ratio of TAS and the speed of sound. Therefore, if you are traveling at
exactly the speed of sound your Mach number is l.O. Mach 8 means your speed is 80 % of the
speed of sound, etc.
The drag increase largely when the air flows around the rurcraft exceeds the speed of sound
(Mach 1.0). Because lift is generated by accelerating air across the upper surface of the wing, local
air flow velocities will reach sonic speeds while the aircraft Mach number is still considerably
below the speed of sound.
With respect to Mach cruise control, flight speeds can be divided into three regimes-subsonic,
transonic and supersonic. Subsonic-all flow evei)'Where on the rurcraft is less than the speed of
sound. Transonic flow begin at critical Mach number and some but not all the local air flow velocities
are Mach 1.0 or above. When all the local Mach numbers surrounding an aerofoil exceeds Mach 1.0,
then the flow at that time is considered to be supersonic. In general tenns the subsonic band extends
up to about Mach 0.75, the transonic regime between Mach 0.75 and Mach 1.20.
A limiting speed for a subsonic transport rurcraft is its critical Mach number (McRir). That is
the speed at which air flow over the wing first reaches, but does not exceed, the speed of sound. At
MCRlr there may be sonic but no supersonic flow.
The less airflow is accelerated across the wing, the higher the critical Mach number (i.e., the
maximum flow velocity is closer to the aircraft's Mach number). Two ways of increasing MeRIT in
jet transport designs are to give the wing a lower camber and increase wing sweep. A thin airfoil
section (lower camber) causes less air flow acceleration. The sweptwing design has the effect of
creating a thin airfoil section by inducing a span wise flow, thus increasing the effective chord
As the aircraft moves into supersonic flight, the aerodynamic center and center of pressure,
both move back. The nose of the aircraft always tends to pitch nose down as the aircraft transitions
from subsonic to supersonic speed. This tendency is called the "Mach Tuck". This tendency is
further aggravated in sweptwing aircraft because the center of pressure moves aft as the wing roots
shock stall. When an airplane exceeds its critical Mach number, a shock wave forms on the wing
surface that can cause a phenomenon known as shock stall. If the wing tips of a sweptwing airplane
shock stall first, the wing's center of pressure would move inward and forward causing a pitch up
Although a sweptwing design gives an airplane a higher critical Mach number (and therefore a
higher maximum cruise speed), it results in some undesirable flight characteristics. One of these is a
reduced maximum coefficient of lift. This requires that sweptwing airplanes extensively employ
high lift devices, such as slats and slotted flaps, to get acceptably low take-off and landing speeds.
Another disadvantage of the sweptwing design is the tendency, at low airspeeds. for the wing
tips to stall frrst. This results in loss of aileron control early in the stall: and in very little
aerodynamic buffet on the tail surfaces.
Dutch roll tendency is typical of sweptwing designs. If such an airplane yaws, the advancing
wing is at a higher angle of attack and presents a greater span to the au- stream than the retreating
wing. This causes the aircraft to roll in the direction of the initial yaw and simultaneously to reverse
its direction ofyaw. When the yaw reverses, the airplane then reverses its direction of roll and yaw
again. This roll-yaw coupling is usually damped out by the vertical stabilizer. But at high speeds
and in turbulence, this may not be adequate, so most aircraft are also equipped with a yaw damper
to help counteract any Dutch roll tendency.
In the following chapter we will present the conception required to understand the
performance of transportation aircrafts. Furthermore, this chapter will concentrate on the methods
to calculate the performance of transportation aircrafts. The exams will include both conception test
and method test. In the exams, all questions are single-choice test, in which you should ftnd out the
only one right choice from three answers.
In terms of an aircraft, performance can be defined as a measure of the ability of the aircraft to
carry out a specified task. In this chapter the expression "performance" will be taken to refer to
tasks relating to the flight path of the aircraft mostly rather than to those involving its stability,
control or handling qualities. For a civil transport flight operation, the flight path consists of a
number of elements, or maneuvers, which make up the total mission but which can be analyzed
separately, these are, take-off, climb, cruise, descent and landing, with additional maneuvers such as
turning or flying a holding pattern.
Performance can be used as a measure of the capability of the aircraft in many ways. In the
case of a civil transport aircraft it determines an element of the cost of the operation of the aircraft
and hence it contributes to its economic viability as a transport vehicle. Performance can also be
regarded as a measure of safety. an aircraft has an excess of thrust over drag it can increase
its energy by either climbing or accelerating; if the drag exceeds the thrust then it will be losing
energy as it either decelerates or descends. In safe flight, the aircraft must not be committed to a
decrease of energy that would endanger it so that, at all critical points in the mission, the thrus1
available must exceed the drag; this is a consideration of the performance aspect of the
airworthiness of the aircraft. Airworthiness and performance are intimately associated. However, in
any conflict between efficiency and flight safety the airworthiness criterion relating to the safety of
the aircraft must be considered to be dominant In this chapter, we wiU mainly consider Part 25 of
China Civil Aviation Regulations (CCAR 25) which is almost identical to Part 25 of the AmericaiJ
counterpart of Federal Aviation Regulations (FAR 25), both of which relate to large civil transpor1
There are two basic forms of engine used for aircraft propulsion: the power-producing engine,
which produces shaft power that is then turned into a propulsive force by a propeller, and the
thrust-producing engine, which produces its propulsive force directly by increasing the momentum
of the airflow through the engine.
Obviously, the power-producing engine includes both reciprocating engine and turboprop
engine. Meanwhile, the usual form of thrust-producing engine is the turbojet engine, although
rockets could be included in this category. The type of engine selected for a particular airplane
design depends primarily on the speed range of the aircraft. The reciprocating engine is most
efficient for aircraft with cruising speeds below 250 MPH (miles per hour), while the turboprop
engine works best in the 250 MPH to 450 MPH range and the turbojet engine is most efficient
above 450 MPH.
Manifold pressure (MAP) is a measurement of the power output of a reciprocating engine. It
is basically the pressure in the engine's air inlet system. In a normally-aspirated (unsupercharged)
engine, the MAP will drop as the aircraft climbs to altitude. This severely limits a piston-powered
airplane's altitude capability.
Most piston-powered airplanes flown by air carriers are turbocharged. On this type of engine,
exhaust gas from the engine is used as a power source for a compressor that in tum raises the MAP
at any given altitude. The flow of exhaust gas to the turbocharger is controlled by a device called a
waste gate.
Turbocharging allows an aircraft to fly at much higher altitudes than it would be able to with
normally-aspirated engines. The term critical altitude is used to describe the effect of
turbocharging on the aircraft's performance. The critical altitude of a turbocharged reciprocating
engine is the highest altitude at which a desired manifold pressure can be maintained.
The pilots of reciprocating-engine-powered aircraft must be very careful to observe the
published limits on manifold pressure and engine RPM. In particular, high RPM and low MAP can
produce severe wear, fatigue and damage.
Both turboprop engines and turbojet engines are types of gas turbine engines. All gas turbine
engines consist of an air inlet section, a compressor section, the combustion section, the turbine
section and the exhaust. Air enters the inlet at roughly ambient temperature and pressure. As i1
passes through the compressor the pressure increases and so does the temperature due to the heat o1
compression. Bleed air is tapped off the compressor for such accessories as air conditioning and
thermal anti-icing.
The section connecting the compressor and the combustion sections is called the diffuser. In
the diffuser, the cross sectional area of the engine increases. This allows the air stream from the
compressor to slow and its pressure to increase. In fact, the highest pressure in the engine is attainec
at this point.
Next, the air enters the combustion section where it is mixed with fuel and the mixture i!
ignited. Note that there is no need for an ignition system that operates continuously (such as th(
spark plugs in a piston engine) because the uninterrupted flow of fuel and air will sustair
combustion after an initial "light off''. The combustion of the fuel-air mixture causes a grea
increase in volume and because there is higher pressure at the diffuser, the gas exits through the
turbine section. The temperature of the gas rises rapidly as it passes from the front to the rear of
the combustion section. It reaches its highest point in the engine at the turbine inlet. This turbine
inlet temperature (TIT) is usually the limiting factor in the engine operation. In many engines,
TIT is measured indirectly as exhaust gas temperature (EGT). The maximum turbine inlet
temperature is a major limitation on turbojet performance, and without cooling, it could easily
reach up to 4 000 op, far beyond the limits of the materials used in the turbine section. To keep the
temperature down to an acceptable 1 100 "F to 1 500 "F, surplus cooling air from the compressor
is mixed aft of the burners.
The purpose of the turbine (s) is to drive the compressor (s) and they are connected by a drive
shaft. Since the turbines take energy from the gas, both the temperature and pressure drop.
The gases exit the turbine section at very high velocity into the tailpipe. The tailpipe is shaped
so that the gas is accelerated even more, reaching maximum velocity as it exits into the atmosphere
(see Figure 4-1 below).
o:s.. F>J""I' t aJ
Figure 4-1 Turbojet Engine
Combinations of slow airspeed and high engine RPM can cause a phenomenon in turbine
engines called compressor stall. This occurs when the angle of attack of the engine's compressor
blades becomes excessive and they stall. If a transient stall condition exists, the pilot will hear an
intermittent "bang" as backfires and flow reversals in the compressor take place. If the transient
condition develops into a steady state stall, the pilot will hear a loud roar and experience severe
engine vibrations. The steady state compressor stall has the most potential for severe engine damage,
which can occur literally within seconds of the onset of the stall.
If a compressor stall occurs in flight, the pilot should reduce fuel flow, reduce the aircraft's
angle of attack and increase airspeed. That means, recovery must be accomplished quickly by
reducing throttle setting, lowering the airplane angle of attack, and increasing airspeed.
The turboprop is a turbine engine that drives a conventional propeller. It can develop much
more power per pound than can a piston engine and is more fuel efficient than the turbojet engine.
Compared to a turbojet engine, it is limited to slower speeds and lower altitudes (25 000 feet to the
tropopause). The term equivalent shaft horsepower (ESHP) is used to describe the total engine
output This term combines its output in shaft horsepower (used to drive the propeller) and the jet
thrust it develops.
As the density altitude is increased, engine performance will decrease. When the air becomes
less dense, there is not as much oxygen available for combustion and the potential thrust output is
decreased accordingly. Density altitude is increased by increasing the pressure altitude or by
increasing the ambient temperature. Relative humidity will also affect engine performance.
Reciprocating engines in particular will experience a significant loss of brake horsepower (BHP).
Turbine engines are not affected as much by high humidity and will experience very little loss of
All conventional aircraft flights start at the point of departure with a take-off. In this phase, the
aircraft is transferred from its stationary, ground-borne, state into a safe airborne state. Since the
maneuver takes place in close proximity to the ground, and at low airspeed, there is relatively high
risk to the safety of the aircraft. The maneuver must be carried out in a manner that will reduce the
risk of an incident occurring to an acceptably low level of probability.
In the conventional take-off maneuver, the aircraft is accelerated along the runway until it
reaches a speed at which it can generate sufficient aerodynamic lift to overcome its weight It can
then lift off the runway and start its climb. During the take-off, consideration is given to the need to
ensure that the aircraft can be controlled safely and the distances required for the maneuvers do not
exceed those available.
In this section, we will discuss take-off performance terminology, which mainly includes the
definitions of some distances and airspeeds, and the methods to calculate "V'' speeds and take-off
The space available for take-off is limited by the dimensions of the runway and the area
beyond the runway in the take-off direction. The runway is defined as a rectangular area of ground
suitably prepared for an aircraft to take off or land. At the end of the runway, there may be a
stopway or clearway.
Clearway- a plane beyond the end of a runway which does not contain obstructions and can
be considered when calculating take-off performance of turbine-powered transport category
airplanes. The first segment of the take-off of a turbine-powered airplane is considered complete
when it reaches a height of 35 feet above the runway and has achieved V
speed (take-off safety
speed). Clearway may be used for the climb to "35 feet (see Figure 4-2).
For turbine-powered airplanes, a clearway is an area beyond the end of the runway, centrally
located about the extended centerline and under the control of the airport authorities. Clearway
distance may be used in the calculation of take-off distance.
Stopway -an area designated for use in decelerating an aborted take-off. It cannot be used as
a part of the take-off distance but can be considered as part of the accelerate-stop distance (see
Figure 4-2 below).
Figure 4-l Take-off Runway Definitions
A stopway is an area beyond the take-off runway, not any less wide than the runway, centered
upon the extended centerline of the runway, and able to support the airplane during an aborted
Regulation requires that a transport category airplane's take-off weight be such that, if at any
time during the take-off run the critical engine fails, the airplane can either be stopped on the
runway and stopway remaining, or that it can safely continue the take-off. This means that a
maximum take-off weight must be computed for each take-off. Factors that determine the
maximum take-off weight for an airplane include runway length, wind, flap position, runway
braking action, pressure altitude and temperature.
In addition to the runway-limited take-off weight, each take-off requires a computation of a
climb-limited take-off weight that will guarantee acceptable climb performance after take-off with
an engine inoperative. The climb-limited take-off weight is determined by flap position, pressure
altitude and temperature.
When the runway-limited and climb-limited take-off weights are determined, they are
compared to the maximum structural take-off weight. The lowest of the three weights is the limit
that must be observed for the take-off. If the airplane's actt;al weight is at or below the lowest of the
three limits, adequate take-off performance is ensured. If the actual weight is above any of the limits
a take-off cannot be made until the weight is reduced or one or more limiting factors (runway, flap
setting, etc.) is changed to raise the limiting weight
After the maximum take-off weight is computed and it is determined that the airplane's actual
weight is within the limits, then V
decision speed), VR (rotation speed) and V
computed. These take-off speed limits are
contained in performance charts and tables of the
airplane flight manual, and are observed on the
captain's airspeed indicator. By definition they
are indicated airspeeds (see Figure 4-3).
Figure 4-3 Take-off Speeds
When the aircraft starts the take-off at rest on the runway, take-off thrust is set and the brakes
released. The excess thrust accelerates the aircraft along the runway and, initially, the directional
control needed to maintain heading along the runway would be provided by the nose-wheel steering
This is because the rudder cannot provide sufficient aerodynamic yawing moment to give
directional control at very low airspeeds. As the airspeed increases the rudder will gain
effectiveness and will take over directional control from the nose-wheel steering. However, should
an engine fail during the take-off run the yawing moment produced by the asymmetric loss of thrust
will have to be opposed by a yawing moment produced by the rudder. There will be an airspeed
below which the rudder will not be capable of producing a yawing moment large enough to provide
directional control without assistance from either brakes or nose-wheel steering or a reducing in
thrust on another engine. This airspeed is known as the Min.imum Control Speed, Ground, VMcG
If an engine failure occurs before this airspeed is reached, the take-off run must be abandoned.
During the ground run the nose wheel of the aircraft is held on the runway to keep the pitch
attitude, and hence the angle of attack in the ground run, ag, is low. This will keep the lift produced
by the wing to a small value so that the lift-dependent drag is minimized and the excess thrust
available for acceleration is maximized. As the aircraft continues to accelerate, it will approach the
lift-off speed, Vwy, at which it can generate enough lift to become airborne. Just before the lift-off
speed is reached, the aircraft is rotated into a nose-up attitude equal to the lift-off angle of attack.
The rotation speed, VR.. must allow time for the aircraft to rotate into the lift-off attitude before the
lift-off airspeed and becomes airborne; this is the end of the ground run distance, S
. The lift-off
speed must allow a sufficient margin over the stalling speed to avoid an inadvertent stall, and a
consequent loss of height This may be caused by turbulence in the atmosphere or any loss of
airspeed during the maneuvering of the aircraft after the lift-off. The lift-off speed will usually be
taken to be not less than 1.2 Vs
, where Vs
is the stalling speed of the aircraft in the take-off
configuration. This will give a lift coefficient at lift-off of about 0.7 Ctmax and provide an adequate
margin of safety over the stall. If the aircraft is over-rotated to a greater angle of attack at the
rotation speed then lift-off can occur too soon and the aircraft start the climb at too low an airspeed.
This can occur if, for example, the elevator trim control is set incorrectly or turbulence produces an
unexpected nose-up pitching moment. The minimum speed at which the aircraft can become
airborne is known as the minimum unstuck speed, VMu It occurs when extreme overrotation pitches
the aircraft up to the geometry limited angle of attack with the tail of the aircraft in contact with the
runway. Tests are usually required to measure the take-off performance in this condition.
During the take-off run, should an engine fail between the minimum control speed (ground)
and the rotation speed, the decision either to abandon or continue the take-off will have to be made.
This decision is based on the distances required either to stop the aircraft or to continue to
accelerate to the lift-off speed with one engine inoperative. There will be a point during the
acceleration along the runway at which the distances required by the two options are equal. This
point is recognized by the indicated speed of the aircraft and is known as the take-otT decision
speed, V
The decision speed also determines the minimum safe length of runway from which the
aircraft can take off. If an engine fails before the decision speed is reached then the take-off is
abandoned, otherwise the take--off must be continued.
Once the lift-off has been achieved the aircraft must be accelerated to the tak&-e>ff safety
speed (V
). This is the airspeed at which both a safe climb gradient and directional control can be
achieved in the case of an engine failure in the airborne state; this phase of the take-off path is
known as the transition. The ability to maintain directional control in the climb is determined by the
Minimum Control Speed, Airborne, VMcA The minimum control speed, airborne, will be greater
than the minimum control speed, ground, VMcG, since the aircraft is not restrained in roll by the
contact between the landing gear and the runway. In the event of an engine failure in the climb, the
aircraft will depart in yaw, which will cause the aircraft to roll and enter a spiral dive if the yaw
cannot be controlled. The take-off is complete when the Lowest part of the aircraft clears a screen
height of 35ft above the extended take-off surface. The distance between the lift-off point and the
point at which the screen height is cleared is known as the airborne distance, SA.
The total take-off distance required will be the sum of the ground run distance, So, and the
airborne distance, SA. To ensure that the take-off is performed safely, the take-off distances will be
suitably factored to allow for statistical variation in the take-off performance of the individual
aircraft and in the ambient conditions.
(tak&-e>ff decision speed) is the speed during the take-off at which the airplane can
experience a failure of the critical engine and the pilot can abort the take-off and come to a full safe
stop on the runway and stopway remaining, or the pilot can continue the take-off safely. If an
engine fails at a speed less than Vh the pilot must abort; if the failure occurs at a speed above VI> the
pilot must continue the take-off.
The take-off decision speed, VI> is the calibrated airspeed on the ground at which, as a result of
engine failure or other reasons, the pilot is assumed to have made a decision to continue or
discontinue the take-off. V
is also the speed at which the airplane can be rotated for take-off and
shown to be adequate to safely continue the take-off, using normal piloting skill, when the critical
engine is suddenly made inoperative. VEF is the calibrated airspeed at which the critical engine is
assumed to fail. VEF must be selected by the applicant but must not be less than 1.05 VMc or, at the
option of the applicant, not less than VMcG
It is important to know that the critical engine failure speed is an obsolete term for V
which is
now called take-off decision speed.
Va (rotation speed) is the lAS at which the aircraft is rotated to its take-off attitude with or
without an engine failure. VR is at or just above V

(tak&-e>ff safety speed) ensures that the airplane can maintain an acceptable climb gradient
with the critical engine inoperative.
VMv (minimum unstick speed) is the minimum speed at which the airplane may be flown off
the runway without a tail strike. This speed is determined by manufacturer's tests and establishes
minimum V
and VR speeds. The flight crew does not normally compute the VMU speed separately.
(see Figure 4-3).
is computed using the actual airplane gross weight, flap setting. pressure altitude and
temperature. Raising the pressure altitude, temperature or gross weight will all increase the
computed V
speed. Lowering any of those variables will lower the V
A wind will change the take-off distance. A headwind will decrease it and a tailwind will
increase it While a headwind or tailwind component does affect the runway limited take-off weight,
it usually has no direct effect on the computed V
speed. The performance tables for a few airplanes
include a small correction to V
for very strong winds. For those airplanes, a headwind will increase
and a tailwind will decrease it
A headwind, in effect, gives an airplane part of its airspeed prior to starting the take-off roll.
This allows the airplane to reach its take-off speed after a shorter take-off roll than in no wind
conditions. High rotation speeds and lower air density (high density altitude) both have the effect of
increasing the take-off distance.
A runway slope has the same effect on take-off performance as a wind. A runway that slopes
uphill will increase the take-off distance for an airplane and a downslope will decrease it. A
significant slope may require an adjustment in the V
speed. An upslope will require an increase in
and a downslope will require a decrease.
An uphill runway will have the effect of decreasing an airplane's rate of acceleration during
the take-off roll thus causing it to reach its take-off speeds (V
and V R) further down the runway
than would otherwise be the case. An uphill runway will also necessitate an increased V
speed in
some airplanes.
If there is slush on the runway or if the antiskid system is inoperative, the stopping
performance of the airplane is degraded .. This requires that any aborted take-off be started at a lower
speed and with more runway and stopway remaining. This means that both the runway-limited
weight and the V
used for take-off be lower than normal.
Although the method to calculate Boeing 737 "V'' speeds (including V
, VR and V
) is similar
to Airbus 320 to some extent, it is still necessary to discuss the two methods respectively.
Boeing 737 "V" Speeds
The table in Figure 4-4 is used in several problems to determine the pressure altitude from the
indicated altitude and the local altimeter setting. The table uses the local altimeter setting to indicate
the proper correction to field elevation. For example, assume the local altimeter setting is 29.36" Hg.
Enter the table in the left-hand column labeled "QNH lN. HG", and then find the range of altimeter
settings that contains 2936" Hg. Read the correction to elevation in the center column. In this case,
add 500 feet to the field elevation to determine the pressure altitude. If the altimeter setting is given
in millibars, enter the table in the right-hand column.
Using operating conditions R-1 (see Figure 4-5), follow the steps for determining the "V''
speeds (see Figure 4-6). Enter the table at the top left in the row appropriate for the pressure altitude
and go across until in a column containing a temperature range which includes the given value. In
fo18S 1000 FT
r ALTIME'"" .;-; .... J
- -
- - -
- -
28.81 1000 976
to to
28.91 979 I
- -- ---- -----'

29.02 800
29.12 986
t 99o 600
- -
29..<4 400
29.55 300
29.87 '012
29.97 100
- -
30 08
30.19 1022
30.52 1034
to 30.85
30.85 -900
L 3096
to 31.07
O"lli 20 49 '"' 1-10
PRESS Al T 2900 FT

-- -
to 1045
Figure 44 Altimeter Setting to Pressare Altitude
FIELD ELEVATION 100 4,000 950 2,000 50
AlTIMETER SETTING 29.50" 1032mb 29.40'' 1017mb
TEMPERATURE (OAT) +50 -15 oc +59 O"G
WEIGHT (X1000)
110 100 85 95
so so 14
RUNWAY SLOPE% 1%UP 1%0N 1%UP 2%0N 15%UP
CG STATION 635.7 643.8 665.2 657 2 638.4
LEMAC STA 625.0, MAC 134.0
Figure 4-5 B737 TaktH>ff Operating Conditions
this case, enter in the row labeled -I to I (pressure altitude= 500 feet, refer to Figure 4-4) and go to
the first column which contains the temperature of +50 "F (be sure to use the Fahrenheit or
Centigrade ranges as appropriate). Go down the first column until ui the row appropriate for a flap
setting of I 5 and a gross weight of90 000 pounds. The V
speed is 120 knots, the VR speed is 121
knots and the V2 speed is 128 knots. There are two possible adjustments to make to the V
only. They are noted at the bottom of the table. According to the notes, V
should be added I knot
because of 1% up slope of the runway. That means V
is 121 knots.
Refer to Figures 4-4, 4-5 and 4-6, using operating conditions R-2. See Figure 4-6, enter in the
row labeled 3 to 5 (pressure altitude = 3 500 feet, refer to Figure 4-4) and go to the first column
which contains the temperature of -15 c (be sure to use the Fahrenheit or Centigrade ranges as
appropriate). Go down the first column until in the row appropriate for a flap setting of 5 and a
gross weight of 110 000 pounds. The V
speed is 144 knots, the VR speed is 146 knots and the V
speed is 150 knots. There are two possible adjustments to make to the V
speed only. They are noted
at the bottom of the table. According to the notes, V
should be subtracted 2 knots because of 1 o/c
down slope of the runway and 5 knots of tailwind. That means V
is 142 knots.
In Figure 4-5, other operating conditions including R-3, R-4 and R-5 can be solved by the
similar steps.
OAT -4-' .:;1zt1 :,31 s! 4 11 n sPi "" n: MP I s
c : >51JOI:t&l2uj Ts l ? .s ol s t-lj 2s 1 30j lsi ''I
- f---- f- +-
23tb.2!1p7712Z4j2.22 l219!1n2.UZ.t: 2:17204i10l2.Cr:!.O'
,..., L!!JI 2.!:..11 2..1 ,>-1H ,
c;;=.:= I
0 t.IIAI T I' A
0 W; O Pfll;t;f f.'I,IIT 1'1'
Q USE 'liE ltMAllEll Of i'lE TWO .I'JITS
ANTI-SKID ON 0 to 10 1=/
19 16 18
i to 45
Hio 21 lc B
,., ,',
-GS 1., a!1 .zn to 11 to
\0 10 87
>I to 29 ?B to 23 ?? IO 4
-65 1" IS 14 tot& tilo40
41 to 87
es 1: w;
21'1> 9
8 to
5 ,, "
,jl '" .;c
6S to 2<)
Zl I>
<3 ce 8910 IW '
t(IA o
... , li
7 toG 1 :o 3'
32 IV 3'
- ---

3to!' t->'
o (o
>1 10 8! qr, 10 \C
os 10 tr.
S1 wE 9 IO J2 Jli0411
41 lo
-t>S &?to
lo e&
8 lo 3<)
JJ w 1e
t>" tc IC11
.tt ill 41
v, vF. v q
to _l I
-- .
v" v, v 1, .,IJ. v,.. v,
.AI'j l(lS lloS
! !
0 I
'f tSC
r--m.; I"ME!l -'ELY
MT[R TA<fOFF EXr.flO.NG 15
r I'AQ, TfiiM Sf TII'I(I






:8 1
2 liZ
U'O ; l!W lo2 164
I ll<C';z 1st IS. 55
'I "0

, .. . '43 ;.7 U' SU 141

ll' tU I t;l 1.3< 1!a
l<l '14 U1 It> IH
l l -J tlfl n:. l
us 145 ,., IC4 1U Ht
> UA .,.
:r I
11 126 IX IZS 121 1A
IH Ul "'
115 111 1<%
"' u,
! 1?:



... .,
'l7 tl
2f za ,!)3
I ' D 118 125
'GD t(i;
"l'J 1)0 \ 3)
"2G 'tt ".::lJ
11- tf=" tt9
os "0!l1U
ts lSi 111t
s H71!Wl
tJ> Ill 142
121 129133
:r; tt?
to 114
llf 1,1 us
121 12.
12 Hl UO
'Ot t!\3
o' tn ':'
ll/13:1 ,.,. 14t" ,
lla uo UJ
12t 131 13)
"' 121 125
,. 1?.' l(!'t
.. tu nr
109 t1t
131 'll I J5
Ul 't!l 121
12< 12c 121
11) '" 119
114 IIQ
1C5 112

ttl 1'\5 117 '11 'U 12' 117 12.. 11& U'O 12'
uo lll 13J
111 Ill 121 IN 17&
.,,., ,,,
us 12b Qt
1\1 1P11t"
' 14'1

101 108 110 11 IOD lllt'l IIU tt2 '" Ill liS 118
:'II t;!S 1ca c to 101 o1 101 tee ,, ... 100 ,o, .,. ca
srtms \Ol VAUO-.vttOt
'ft(.JCH'I" ""

U()rWAl N"''til
9RU{ W(Ajl
h-.,,_-= ... "''-="'=----+ i ___ "__;_oso_---l
.\toO 1 <T Pt" 1!)n t fiT PEA
2' ,cr, "''l&IJW,._'D ..,. Ufl
$ .. &-fl4G1' t K'r PfR I !111 t' f44
... _,._IV__Nll ___ l!::. "-0''
Figure 4-6 8737
Airbus 320 "V'' Speeds
In many cases, the aircraft takes off at a weight lower than the maximum permissible weight
In consequence, it is possible to continue to comply with limitations regulations (runway. txt
segment. obstacle) with a decreased thrust adapted to the weight: this is called Flexible Take-oft
and the thrust is called Flexible Thrust.
Flexible take-off can be used when the actual take-off weight is lower than the maximum
permissible take-off weight for the actual temperature. As this weight decreases when temperature
increases, it is possible to assume a temperature at which actual take-off weight would be the
limiting one. This temperature is called Flexible Temperature or assumed temperature.
The Regular Take-off and Landing Weight (RTOLW) charts (see Figure 4-7) enable the crew
to determine for the corresponding runway:

TAKE-OFF 2.02.30 p 10
TORA 9840.FT 1+F
ASDA 9840.FT FWnc:c
A320 .. tAAJ ... DRY RUNWAY TOOA 10170.FT
TREF 29/TMAX- 49 600
SLOPE .08 ;. TGA
-5 0 10 20
44 15 44 29 4-4 31 4-"1 32 4-4 37
.1 .0 .6 .2 .8
156-156-156 156-156-156 156-156-155 156-156-156 168-158-158 36
9 4-4 28 4-4 31 4-4 33 4-4 34 4-4 36
.1 .1 .6 .2 .8
153-153-153 153-153153 155-155-155 156-156-156 158-158-158 37
29 4-4 29 4-4 35 4-4 37 4-4 38 4-4 4i
.5 3.9 .6 .2 .7
148-149-149 153-153-153 154-154-154 156-156-155 158-158 158 4C
34 4-4 37 4-4 39 4-"1 41 4-4 42 4-4 45
.5 .2 .6 .0 .s
149-149-149 151151-151 154-154-154 156-156-155 157-167157 43
38 4-4 41 4-4 43 4-4 44 4-4 45 4-4 48
.7 .2 .4 .!l
. ,
148-148-,48 150-150-150 154-154-154 155-155-155 155-155-155 46
42 4-4 44 4-4 47 44 48 4-4 49 4-4 49
.8 1.1 .1 .4 .7
148-148-148 150-150-150 153-153-153 153-153-153 153-153-153 49
45 4-4 48 4-4 50 4-4 51 4-4 53 4-4 49
.e .7 .8 1.1 .2
146146-146 148-149-149 151-151-151 151151-151 161151151 119
50 4-4 52 4-4 64 4-4 55 4-4 56 4-4 49
.3 .4 .s .7 .8
148-146-148 148-148-148 149-149-149 149-149-149 149-149-149 49
!:>4 4-4 56 4-4 58 4-4 69 4-4 eo 4-4 49
.:! .2 1 .2 .2
145-145-145 146-146-145 147147-147 147-147-147 147-147-147 49
58 44 59 4-4 GO 4-4 60 4-4 60 49
.0 1.0 1.9 3.1 .0
144-144-144 145-145-145 145-145-145 146-146-146 136-136-136 49
60 4-4 60 4-4 60 60 eo 4&
2.0 4.0
0 .0 0
143-143-143 144-144-144 133-133-133 133-133-133 133-133-133 49
so I
50 60 60 49
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0
130-131-131 130-131-131 13C-131-i31 130-131-131 130-131131 45
60 80 60 50 sc 49
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0
129-129-129 129 129129 1:HI129-129
80 60 so 6C 60 49
.c .0 .0 .o .0
126-127-177 126127127 126-127-127 126-127-127 128-127127
Figure 4-7 Charts
A. The maximum permissible take-off weight for the ambient pressure, temperature and
surface wind conditions, or
B. For a given aircraft weight, the maximum temperature at which a take-off would be
permitted. This temperature (corrected for QNH and airbleeds) is called the flexible
A specific chart is established for each runway. It is based on standard atmospheric pressure
and takes account of the obstacles along the specified flight path.
The configuration is indicated on top of the chart (see Figure 4-7) in the right comer. The
weight corresponding to any box is the sum of entry weight and weight increment. It is the
maximum permissible T/0 weight corresponding to the temperature shown in the box. The
temperature shown in the box is the maximum temperature at which the maximum weight
determined as above can be lifted.
The limitation indicates the nature of the limitation or the balance between two limitations as
resulting from the optimization. Limitation codes are as follows:
A. Maximum structural weight;
B. Second segment or first segment;
C. Runway;
D. Obstacle;
E. Tire speed;
F. Brake energy;
G Take-off distance 2 engines operative;
H. Final take-off.
In order to get the most out of the chart, there are two kinds of corrections: either on weight
when determining maximum take-off weight or on maximum temperature when determining the
flexible or limiting temperature.
Any QNH variation from the standard, for which the chart is calculated, will affect either the
maximum temperature or the weight. The air bleeds will affect the maximum temperature or the
weight in the same manner.
The effect of QNH variations or bleed consists of an addition or subtraction to the weight as
specified on each chart.
Correction on Weight
In order to avoid a loss in weight when the actual temperature does not appear in the chart, the
weight gradients (Grad) on both sides of the flat rating temperature are given on top of the chart
(Grad 1/Grad 2). Flat rating temperature is given, named Tref. Using the data, weight and
temperature, given in the upper box of the column selected according to the wind, add the weight
determined by multiplying the weight gradient by the difference of temperature between actual
temperature and that given in the box.
When these two temperatures (actual and maximum) are on each side of flat rating
temperature, two steps are necessary. First multiply the weight gradient given above Tref by the
difference between maximum temperature and flat rating temperature. Then multiply the weight
gradient given below Tref by the difference between flat rating temperature and actual temperature.
Add these two values to the maximum weight of the first box.
Note: Weight gradients must only be used to extrapolate above the maximum weight shown in
the RTOLW chart (upper box of chart). They do not allow to interpolate between two boxes, neither
between filled boxes, nor between one filled and one blank box.
From this maximum weight, subtract or add the weight increment equivalent to the QNH
variation from standard as indicated on the chart. Subtract bleed effect if any. The final weight is the
maximum permissible TOW for the actual environmental conditions.
Corrections on Temperature
QNH variations and bleeds affect the maximum temperature corresponding to a given weight.
The resulting temperature called flexible temperature must be checked as shown on the chart in
order to avoid: either a take-off at a higher weight than allowed by the maximum available level of
thrust when the flexible temperature is lower than Tref or actual temperature, or setting a thrust
derated by more than allowed, maximum derated thrust, i. g., maximum thrust at ISA + 46 "C for
the actual conditions.
This maximum derating corresponds to a maximum flexible temperature of lSA +46 c.
This fmal temperature called corrected temperature (CT) will be entered in the FMGS's MCDU.
Any temperature below Tref should not be set. The maximum value of CT which may be set is
ISA+46 c.
Refer to Figure 4-7 and Figure 4-8, find out the maximum take-off weight, the flexible
temperature, and corresponding Vt. VR> V
according to the conditions below.
1) Determination of maximum take-offweight.
OAT= 10;
QNH = 1 013 mb;
20 kt head wind;
Air conditioning OFF;
forward C. G.
A. Enter in 20 kt head wind column and read temperature and weight:
in first line at 32 162 800 lb
B. Use weight gradients for increase in weight capability:
between 32 and T REF = 29 2 x 600 1 200 lb
between 32 and 10 19 x 150
Total weight (Maximum capability)
2 850 lb
166 850 lb
Maximum permissible take-off weight: for example 162 000 lb (depending on version)
C. Read take-off parameters in 162 line for 20 kt bead wind config 1 + F:
VI= 158 kt
VR= 158 kt
limitation: obstacle
2) Determination of flexible temperature.
OAT = 15;
Take-off weight: 144 000 lb;
QNH= 1013mb;
No wind;
Air conditioning OFF;
A. Enter with 144 000 lb and no wind and read temperature:
47 'C
B. Check the temperature that is lower than maximum flexible temperature:
Flex temperature to be enter the FMGS's MCDU 47 c
C. Read take-off parameters in 144 000 lb line for no wind:
Vi= 153 kt
VR= 153 kt
v2 = 153 kt
TAKE..OFF 2.02.30
p 9

, .. KJttt Qrt'W orr ..... RTOLW CHARTS REV 13 I SEQ 032
to :oh at<41lm ON'i ondtor bltt<ls
flEX Off
A<!4 ONH above 1013 ml>
40 lb/lnb'
Sub Z"C/ lO onb ONH balcw 1013 mo Sui> b/mb
Sub 1'C Engi1o A/ ICE 011 Sib I>
2"C Totol A /1C! ON Sub 2300 1>
Sub 5'C Af condb>nilQ ON SUI> b

fl/.7 RATlHG TfMP. (T Rffl AND
1M hkt Cl a W.. r ... D. ISA + 46'C
CT than OAT }
C T HiQb!! :hto T REI

When eirport pressure altitude becomes negative :
- geometrical eltnude is negative or equal to 0 :
subtract 30 lblmb
- if geo:netrical eltitude is positive :
No kxblo IAu<>n poul>lc
Dt'-rmno MAX TOW
add 40 lb/mb down to 0 h pressure altJwde, then subtract 30 lo per additionoi mb.
Figure 4-8 Effect of QNH and/or Bleeds
Engine Pressure Ratio (EPR) is the thrust indication used on many turbojet aircraft. Basically
it is the ratio of the engine exhaust pressure to the intake pressure. For example, if the exhaust
pressure is exactly twice the intake pressure, the EPR is 2.00.
The EPR setting for maximum take-off thrust will vary with altitude and temperature. In
addition, reductions in EPR have to be made when bleed air from the compressor section is used for
air conditioning, engine anti-ice and internal regulation of the engine.
Boeing 737 Take-off EPR
The table at the top of Figure 4-6 is used to determine take-off EPR. Enter the table with
temperature and pressure altitude. To determine pressure altitude, use Figure 4-4.
In the table of Figure 4-6, two EPR values are found: one for temperature and one for altitude
(be sure to use the table in Figure 4-4 to determine the pressure altitude). The lower of the two is the
take-off EPR. For example, if the temperature is 50F at a pressure altitude of 500 feet, the
temperature-limited EPR is 2.04 and the altitude-limited EPR is 2.035. Since there is no listing for
this altitude in the table in Figure 4-6, it is necessary to interpolate. At sea level, the altitude-limited
EPR is 2.0 l. At 1 000 feet the corresponding value is 2.06. Since the pressure altitude in this case is
exactly halfway between 0 and 1 000, the EPR setting should be halfway between as well. The only
possible correction would be for if the air conditioning bleeds are off.
Using the data from Operating Conditions R-4 (Figure 4-5), the field elevation is 2 000 feet
and the altitude correction is - 100 feet (refer to Figure 4-4), which results in a pressure altitude of
1 900 feet. Since there is no listing for this altitude in the table in Figure 4-6, it is necessary to
interpolate. Since the altitude given (1 900 feet) is not halfway between the two table values (1 000
and 2 000 feet), it is necessary to calculate the amount the EPR changes per 1 000 feet of altitude.
Determine the difference between the EPR values at these two altitudes (2.11 - 2.06 = 0.05). That
means the EPR variation from 1 000 feet to 2 000 feet is 0.05.
The EPR variation per 1 000 feet is 0.005 (0.05/10), and the EPR decreases as altitude
decreases. To determine the EPR for 1 900 feet, subtract 0.005 from the EPR for 2 000 feet (2.11 -
0.005 = 2.1 05). The temperature-limited EPR is 2.11. So the take-off EPR for operating conditions
R-4 is 2.105.
Airbus 320 Take-off EPR
The table at Figure 4-9 is used to determine take-offEPR. Enter the table with temperature and
pressure altitude. Each intersection of temperature and airport altitude has a box with one take-off
EPR The note for EPR adjustment is located on the top of the table.
For example, with an OAT of 28 c, an airport altitude of 2 000 feet will result in an EPR
value of 1.419. If the temperature and altitude value does not appear in the table, the interpolation is
necessary. For example, if the temperature is 27 c at a pressure altitude of 1 500 feet, the EPR is
1.418. Since there is no listing for these temperature and altitude in the table in Figure 4-9, it is




-.010 -.010
lfm.r.: It( Q.OOO -.017
HACfU.E AXD lflo Cll -.007 -.024
(Cl -1000. 0. 1000. 2000. 3000. 4000. 5000. 6000. 7000. 6000.
-00.0 !. 31S !.3W 1. 412 1. 428 i. 4'3 1.458 1.1," 1. -'84 J, IS-4
8.0 1.375 \.39:' 1. 1. 3
\. "''
10.0 1.315 !.3'.17 1.4l2 1.4211 1. 3 i. 4511 1.49l,
12.0 1.375 1. 3'.17 U12 1.4211 '!.443 1. 450 1.474 1.4'>4
1.3i'S 1.3'.17 1. '12 \,3 1.458
1.484 1.4'>4
16.0 1. 3('5 \.397 l. 1.(28 1. 11a 1. ISS , .W4
18.0 1. ars 1. 397 M12 1.1:26 4SS 1.471 1. 484 1.4$ 4&-1
20.0 !.WS \. 897 1.412 1. 1,<3 1. 458 1. 471 \. 11S
1. ,,,;
22.0 1. 37;; 1. 397 1. 412 1.126 I, 1(3 1. 458 1. lOS 1.405 1.>5 1.(65
1. &75 1.397 1.412 ':.428 1. 9 \.t.SS 1. t.SS
26.0 i.37S 1.397 1. 412 1.425 1. 431 1. HO 1. 4'5
1. "s
u,s l
2B. 0 1. :llS 1.397 1.412 1.419 1.t.25 1.430 1. 43li l43b 1.43';
30.0 l.VS 1. 397 1.403 1.415 1. '21 1. i .. .;26 1. 420
32.0 1.al5 1.388 1.!95 1.401 1. (!)6 1. 412 1.417 1.4'11 1.H7 1. 4'7
1. 37& 1.330 1.31!& .:!97 1.403 \. 1.40e 1.401!
3&.0 1.W1
' .,..,
1.377 1.383 1. 354 l-399 \.399 l. 3'lCJ I 1. 3'1>
28.0 1.363 i.35S 1.a&O 1. 355 1.390 !.3$0 t.O'SO I
USI l.i!SS 1.360 1. 3!:!> ;.311 1.37(, l. 381 1.381 1.36i 1.381
1.3-41 1.?52 1.357 :.303 1.303 ;.373 1.3.."3 I 1.313
0 1.338 \.338 '\.344 1.300 1.304
!.3M l.l!$4
0 1.330 1.330 1.33&

1.356 1. 355 ;.:3$
46.0 1.322 1.323 1.329 1.S33

1.343 1. 8'8
1. 3'e
1. 346
so.o 1. 315 1.321 1.331 1.33&

52.0 1.308

r-tFs t.ail 1.328 1.333 1. 333
54.0 1.301 1.30b 1.311 1.316 1. 320

l.'.!S4 1. 2'J9 1.304 1.300 1.813
58.0 1. 2el 1.287 252 1.2'31 1.3:11
00.0 1.280 1.290

62.0 1.214 1.214 1.279
l.m 1.268
ioY!:H MJ'If m TO 8f! tlSm fOR l'LfX-TAlCEf!' CJU
Figure 4-9 Airbus 320 Tak&-otTE.PR

1. 455
1. 43&
l. 4011

necessary to interpolate. At 1 000 feet, the EPR for 26 c is 1.412. At 2 000 feet the corresponding
value is 1.428. Since the pressure altitude in this case is exactly halfway between 1000 and 2 000,
the EPR setting should be halfway between as well. Therefore the EPR for 26 c at 1 500 feet is
1.420. In the same way, the EPR for 28 c at 1 500 feet is 1.416. Since the temperature in this case
is exactly halfway between 26 c and 28 "C, the EPR setting should be halfway between as well.
So the EPR setting for 27 "C and 1 500 feet is 1.418. The possible correction would be for if the air
conditioning bleeds are on and anti-ice on.
Considering another example, the field elevation is 2 300 feet and the temperature is 16 c.
Since there is no listing for this altitude in the table in Figure 4-9, it is necessary to interpolate.
Since the altitude given (2 300 feet) is not halfway between the two table values (2 000 and 3 000
feet), it is necessary to calculate the amount the EPR changes per I 000 feet of altitude. Determine
the difference between the EPR values at these two altitudes (1.443 - 1.428 = 0.015). That means
the EPR variation from 2 000 feet to 3 000 feet is 0.015.
The EPR variation per 1 000 feet is 0.001 5 (0.015/10), and the EPR increases as altitude
increases. To determine the EPR for 2 300 feet, add 0.004 5 (0.001 5 x 3) to the EPR for 2 000 feet
(1.428 + 0.004 5 =1.433). So, the take-offEPR in this case is 1.433.
Climb performance is important from both economic and flight safety points of view. In a
climb, the potential energy of the aircraft is increased and fuel energy must be expended to achieve
this. The fuel required to climb to a given height can be minimized by the use of the correct climb
technique and optimum economy of operation can be attained. Economy, however, is not the only
criterion of operation. The safety of the aircraft depends on its ability to climb above obstructions at
all points on the flight path. Sufficient excess thrust must be available to ensure that the aircraft can
meet certain minimum gradients of climb in any of the safety critical segments of the flight.
The best speed for any airplane is the speed at which there is the greatest
difference between the power required for level flight and the power available from the engines.
The LIDMAX speed for any airplane is the one that requires the least power for level flight since it is
the lowest drag speed. Because the power output of prop-driven airplanes is relatively constant at all
speeds, L/DMAx is the best rate-of-climb speed for them.
Turbojet engines produce more power as the aircraft speed increases. Although drag increases
at speeds above L/DMAX, the engine's power output increases even more so that the maximum
difference between power required and power available is achieved at a higher airspeed. For a
turbojet, the best rate-of-climb speed is faster than LIDMAX.
The tables in Figures 4-10 and 4-11 allow you to determine the time and fuel required for a
climb to cruising altitude after take-off. The table in Figure 4-10 is for ISA temperatures, and the
table in Figure 4-11 is for ISA + 10 . Each intersection of Brake Release Weight and Cruise Altitude
has a box with four numbers. These are the time, the the distance and the TAS required to
climb from a sea level airport to cruise altitude in calm wind conditions. For example, with a brake
weight of 110 000 pounds, a climb to 33,000 feet in ISA + 10 conditions will require 26
...,;nutes, 4 100 pounds of fuel and cover a distance of 154 NM (see Figure 4-11).


37000 I).; I' l::O '!lo31l:

If, if;):
.. 'i .,,:r;,,r:.s ttlil-'t
tcJ . .,
'"" "JIJ" t.,.,.,,., 11 '\'! iCl)!_,,, a,,,, .
:Jt?DO fltlE:nJt: t.l -'1' l91'-' Ji,...::roc .::1\S:JO t;tl-O'J

I ill '
:n 1-

' .....
I< ;
""ll''- t: '"!!J


l 6c;11 J,l&t,u 24l I 1 ,.,.,.. llltl<l' I' ,,,r.)
:war ... rA!

t&U.'.YJ' "..;1 .Ji" 1 ;tJ'""

t;,aJ:, :;3tl
3ACto ,._,r.,.uh 2NI()I) 2g. . "'o lJ:><l<lo 2t3s=c I . ,- ,,,;;-< . .,- to:te;c I
t?I:Uo ''!.i iJ/6 '!t-J7t C9.')lt i'P)10
J:IGOO =:!IUOO l4l&OOJ .l21'370t f ' MIIi\l 141116?., lli;(HXt
IS:I37G ;.tS-.474 , !2.-.l73 "0:?1"\1:< 'JZIJI\ "" 3f'W (t!f,JOt
J:ttoo fl,;ll\.'l'l !6 tGW ''":'4'l:J t1t21.lto
1191)1 lcll/37! ''4,17 'CAt:r.O 8J\.J<1& ' 4/:J<;& M.'U.l W!lij7 ol JM
a1000 'r'.l.L #'l/..&C.OO 1(:!Q.:r, 14hiJ:I t.(':,:cn\J 1tt.i'JCO
CltlT ll!o37- 1 f ;.13tl 5"'0'-lEl Ml;'ln ll)',(lot> . ltl
1 t

., nw;;"tH ,:,oo rt;Jlo I -.;;;_,, - 'HilM:Q w'uto
0 ST') ... S '0.3G$ ttVI:lal liM:la' 71113 ;z.:lj.l ,r.l . $41l6J

111/rdllrl 1tl.'JE:OO , ,,,,._,_,.., :','l 1r1:. I 11'11'):: l'?ljJ 1t:l!o-:KI JOfta.t(J
1..13.:Jt.."' l 1-.&,:i'n1 5!.':'1St $J ..,!ii
1r\:.c..o t !.-'B!.'9 I I;',Uo-J u.tJ
c t"J.S , ... .,./ 7i/.>'l 11 ..s<. tr...-.G t'{Y<o> Sf:l>o
,. :b'C:.U , .. fl:v' (,.-
._ =;)"
.v;-r.,:.. ... _. j t:"2l!, ?O::J
n ........... Nr.!!-1 16 ;s3 sz:Js,:
--- I
t SO!-o tt, r.rt-L 11!-t-ml .... 1 V'::t.&t. '2JlJ';:) .. ._,.,
t ,.-;; .::: I I - !' :.:.;;
I ' , ... iS.J..a -,.-
. 25"0 I ,. z .J " .. 1. ":"l , -:: ;r.;e: - ftll.Jl J h'!":
O'!o 69'Ji: '2'3><2 1 ' "'3&' 4\ u
- - l
i nf",.;G TH!t="..:,I;L ti.IH(t(. .... ,,r::: t-a-;' I
o _ _:_::_:-..' + .. tr .w:w
'''' lifU" I <t:oo J .ufiw:1l l(U.::1: ...
O$r .. As I l t!lii!t L 7i'bJ! hH5
l il.' f-HIIr-1 ?:Get' :?.'t".t'k) I ;uj..;O I
t )

Cl l<

U : l\1

t; co j
.18t3&t JS.'JC1 ;t:va!l
---- ----
UCJ ?:eco
t:lOIJ 1'100
FY&l AOJuswe Nt t(m HtGtl neVAliON AIRPORTIO! Arfi>ORT ELEI'ATIOII I UOQ 10011 tooo IQOOO 120CO
200 100 soo 100 l 71l0
Figure 4-10 Eo Route Climb 280/.70 ISA
A headwind or tailwind component in the climb will change the distance flown. Assume that
there is an average 20-knot headwind in the climb described above. The first step is to compute the
average "no wind" GS (ground speed). A distance of 154 NM flown in 26 minutes works out to a
GS of 355.4 knots. A headwind component of 20 knots will reduce this GS to 335.4 knots. The
distance flown in 26 minutes at 335.4 knots is 145.3 NM.
Departure from an airport that is significantly above sea level will reduce the fuel required for
the climb. Notice that departure from a 2 000-foot airport will reduce the climb fuel by 100 pounds,
however the effect on time and distance flown is negligible. Notice that the adjustment values are
located at the bottom of the tables in the Figures 4-10 and 4-11.
EN ROUTE CLIMB 2801.70 tSA +10 c
... "i.'
... flflpl)(
Ulli I
VtWll I
2:-tf",...) ,




l l20-'t

1-:cl;;o 2!..'3:'..-: 1
,)f.'t,,'l.-.. ; 2j.6:.:!1 __ f3l1.>-.t-J
r .\'(,r Jl-. .c Wt .;.&,; .. L'tl ;,u;.._, >.to.lVIG r 'nJ:
!,_f1 '
A8 ,ZUfY;4 \19o:lE9 Ue: ... ..,6-t
. 4S J ' J.4M .t<t..o ,-.s.-n:.a
!1;,;:.9':_ tttf t.:!IJS6
1tiJ!,1ll. l ' ,.OOC <&uu\1 ,;;.J.OO 7'1JJ<Y.l 1 19130\l\:
13V383 tC8lt
--;-;,;;;," -;;.:;;;;.,- n.-;UJo) 'l:n140 tdl2W:
174138& 15<,3<1.) 13l!JJ62 I 11:<360

s:.coo !;!13EG-; ll!l>!l'l W:J:''"
;'JSf.itAS t3!l:J&O: &l.t.l'l>' !;:J;Zdl 129'3/IJ .u;l,
:litH. l'.fYa n JJ:'9 i!J;)J4:"A IZOf:Jt;
. ,,,4;co j ZU/340.
f:!F. f "'"'- n :tr/:!76 12;J'l7S 13:!]-J
fiV.Ftt."-'rt .t \'H..:IG
i:>b:Ji.. tHll$.1".1



"JJ/31 '
,.,21011 I

I(IIC!&'J:l I


tn. ,t;<t tlt!'C:'l l:!.'?to!':
t .:::: 1::;:
"'J&(I 11'1.'371
JCiol"..!r,.."'IO tS.,ttl H"t<'nf.
1cmco 11nco
MJ76 8ill311 tJ.Jib
12t2oo i 1Gt 171)(l
Ullll !ISJ)1('o
76/31 1011)3

17/?COO 1017r,:.

,. _


?r. ")110: lll/liO,;
lt913&J + 100$69
llo-:ISCC WlOOC l&'laO(l ' !-.'2400 "l24CO 1312200 ll/2'JOn

111.19=1 fl

l liY(!'I.H
lltF.= Fa




II :3Sl 91:06< , /ii"'fl4

;G:.-o 13!2401
7!l/364 61/3G3
:\lllif 'Jf.. c.t1100 ,.:g.-;:. .&.&:t JoiOG- .111;4
Ot- . 1GI')01 :t.JO" ..,"l.JS 113C1

J[. I Jlf>OO V6C3 2iS)C- ];sco--

1 tFrtcr o N ,, .. .,. AND et'SIAHC! _-; f!lJEt. :.u: ustMklft .1oo
Figure 4-11 En Route Climb 280/.70 ISA+lO "C

'\IIIliS ,


. ,.oc

Jt.;> ..


Using the data from operating conditions V-2 (Figure 4-12), with a brake release weight of
95 000 pounds, a climb to 27 000 feet in ISA conditions will require 13 minutes, 2 400 pounds of
fuel and cover a distance of 65 NM in calm wind conditions. There is an average 20-knot tailwind
in the climb described above. The first step is to compute the average "no wind " GS. A distance
of 65 NM flown in 13 minutes works out to a GS of300 knots. A tailwind component of20 knots
will increase this GS to 320 knots. The distance flown in 13 minutes at 320 knots is 69.3 NM.
Thus, the wind adjusted distance is 69.3 NM. In this case, departure from a 3 000-foot airport will
reduce the climb fuel by 150 pounds. Because there is no listing adjustment for this airport
elevation in the table in Figure 4-10, it is necessary to interpolate. At 2 000 feet, the reduced fuel
burned is 1 00 pounds. At 4 000 feet the corresponding value is 200. Since the airport elevation in
this case is exactly halfway between 2 000 and 4 000, the reduced-fuel should be halfway
between as well. However the effect on time and distance flown is negligible. So the fuel burned
is 2 250 pounds (2 400- 150 = 2 250). The aircraft weight at the top of climb is 92 750 pounds
(95 000 - 2 250 = 92 750).
BRK REL WEIGHT (X1 000} 110 95 85 105 75
CRUISE PRESS AL T 33,000 27.000 35,000 22,000 3l 000
AIRPORT ELEVATION 2,000 3,000 2.000 4,000 2.000
Figure 4-12 B737 En Route Climb Operating Conditions
The Maximum climb and Maximum Continuous EPR Table at the top of Figure 4-13 is similar
to the one discussed in take-off EPR. In this table two EPR values are found-one for temperature
and one for altitude. The lower of the two is the maximum climb/continuous EPR. For example, if
the temperature is +10 c at a pressure altitude of 10 000 feet, the temperature-limited EPR is 2.04
and the altitude-limited EPR is 2.30 (The altitude-limited EPR is 2.30 from 5 660 feet and up). The
maximum EPR is 2.04.
1 TAT C ------
AIR :;oNO Bl.t:Ep NC or:
1 S. l IC) S71JOO l o-1.
FINO f'JlfRS lt ... t l Fl''l
tHE BMAI I t.:> I HE
TWV L'.t "'l
BI.EI:C .V"J. v ' C
YAX Cl 'MD. t.IAX ' :J'
t.NJ MAX t:RIJISE s:-r 'GS
Figure 4-13 B737 Climb and Cruise Power
The Maximum Cruise EPR Table in Figure 4-13 supplies one EPR value for a given Total Air
Temperature (TAT) in one of two altitude ranges. The correction tables are similar to ones used
previously in Figure 4-6 and apply to both tables.
Using the data from operating conditions T-2 (see Figure 4-14), the total air temperature (TAT)
is 0C at a pressure altitude of 5 000 feet, the TAT-limited EPR is 2.10 and the altitude-limited EPR
is 2.20 (refer to Figure 4-13). The maximum continuous EPR is 2.10. According to the notes about
the adjustment to the EPR which are located at the bottom of Figure 4-13, engine and wing anti-ice
correction is -Q.l2, air conditioning off correction is+ 0.04. Therefore, the maximum continuous
EPR setting is 2.02 (2.10- 0.12 + 0.04 = 2.02).
-15 oc -30 nc +lSoC
ALTITUDE 10.000 5.000 25.000 35.000 18,000
Figure 4-14 B737 Climb and Cruise Power Operating Conditions
Refer to Figures 4-13 and 4-14, according to the operating conditions T-4, the total air
temperature (TAT) is - 30 c at a pressure altitude of 35 000 feet, the TAT-limited EPR is 2.20 and
the altitude-limited EPR is 2.30. The maximum climb EPR is 2.20. Based on the notes about the
adjustment to the EPR which are located at the bottom of Figure 4-13, engine and wing anti-ice
correction is -o.14. Therefore, the maximum climb EPR setting is 2.06 (2.20 - 0 .14 = 2.06).
Using the data from operating conditions T-3 (Figure 4-14), the total air temperature (TAT) is
-15 'C at a pressure altitude of 25 000 feet. The maximum cruise EPR is 2.02. According to the
notes about the adjustment to the EPR, engine and wing anti-ice correction is -o.12. Therefore, the
maximum cruise EPR setting is 1.90 (2.02- 0.12 = 1.90).
The tables in Figures 4-15, 4-16, 4-17 and 4-18 allow you to determine the time and fuel
required for a climb to cruise altitude after take-off The tables in Figures 4-15 and 4-16 are for ISA
temperatures, and the tables in Figures 4-17 and 4-18 are for ISA +10. Each intersection of brake
release weight and cruise altitude has a box with four numbers. These are the time, the fuel, the
distance and the TAS required to climb from a sea level airport to cruise altitude in calm wind
conditions. For example, with a brake release weight of 120 000 pounds, a climb to 31 000 feet in
ISA + 10 conditions will require 13 minutes, 2 502 pounds of fuel and cover a distance of 82 NM
(see Figure 4-17).

p 2
CliMB 250 KT I 300 KT I M. 78
FL 105 110 115 120 125 130 135
16 2522 17 2683 18 2854 19 3037 21 3234 22 3450 24 3692
100 382 107 383 115 384 123 386 132 387 143 389 t55 390
1<1 2378
, 5 2524
16 2677 17 2838 18 3010 19 3192 21 3387
89 375 95 376 101 377 108 378 115 379 123 381 i 31 382
13 2253 14 2388 15 2529 16 2677 17 2832 18 2996 19 3169
80 369 85 370 91 371 97 372 103 373 109 374 , 16 374
12 2138 13 2263 14 2394 14 2530 15 2674 16 2823 ' 17 2981
73 362 77 363 82 364 87 365 92 365 98 366 104 367
11 2024 12 2141 12 2262 13 2388. 14 2520 15 2658 16 2803
66 354 70 355 74 356 78 357 83 357 88 358 93 359
10 1901 11 2010 11 2122 12 2238 13 2360 13 2486 14 2618
59 345 62 345 66 345 69 347 73 347 78 348 82 349
9 1751 10 1849 10 1951 11 2056 11 2165 12 2278 12 2396
50 332 53 332 56 333 59 334 63 334 66 335 70 335
8 1614 9 1703 s 1795 10 1890 10 1989 11 2091
,, 2196
43 319 46 320 48 321 51 321 54 322 57 322 60 323
8 1548 8 1634 9 1721 9 1812 9 1906 10 2003 10 2103
40 313 43 314 45 314 47 315 50 3\5 52 316 55 316
7 1423 7 1500 8 1580 8 1662 8 1147 9 1835 9 1925
35 301 37 301 39 302 41 303 43 303 45 303 47 304
6 1304 7 1375 7 1447 7 1522 8 1599 8 1678 8 1760
30 289 31 289 33 290 35 290 37 291 38 291 40 291
6 1191 6 1255 6 1321 6 1389 7 1459 7 1530 7 1605
25 276 27 277 28 278 30 278 31 278 33 279 34 279
5 1082 5 1140 5 1199 6 1260 6 1323 6 1388 7 1455
22 263 23 264 24 265 25 265 27 266 28 266 29 266
4 975 5 1027 5 1080 5 1135 5 1192 6 1250 6 1310
18 250 19 250 20 251 21 252 22 252 23 252 25 252
4 869 4 916 4 963 4 1012 5 1063 5 1114 5 1168
15 235 16 236 17 236 18 237 18 237 19 237 20 238
3 695 3 732 3 770 3 809 4 849 4 891 4 934
10 207 11 208 12 209 12 209 13 210 13 210 14 210
2 452 2 475 2 500 2 524 2 550 2 577 3 605
5 169 6 170 6 171 6 171 7 171 7 172 7 172
1 281 1 295 1 309 1 324 1 340 2 356 2 373
2 119 3
, 19
3 120 3 120 3 120 3 121 3 121
6 FUEL = - 0.4 % A FUEL = + 6.0 % !:. FUEL= + 11.0%
I(GC V2500 211CI0Cl00CSL.B330 0 011690 0 0 2 1.0 500.0 300.0 1 OJ IO.OO:Z122
Figure 4-15 Climb Performance Table (1)
~ A 3 2 0
p 3
CUMB 250 KT /300 KT I M.18
FL 140 145 15D 155 160 165 170
26 3968
169 393
22 3598 24 3830 25 4086 27 4376
141 383 151 385 163 387 178 389
20 3353 21 3549 22 3759 24 3987 25 4238 27 4518 29 4838
124 376 132 377 140 378 150 380 161 382 174 384 189 387
18 3147 19 3322 20 3507 21 3704 23 3915 24 4142 25 4392
110 368 117 369 124 370 132 372 140 373 150 375 160 377
16 2954 11 3113 18 3279 19 3454 20 3640 21 3837 23 4048
98 360 104 361 110 362 116 363 123 364 131 365 139 367
15 2756 16 2899 16 3049 17 3206 18 3371 19 3544 20 3728
86 349 91 350 96 351 102 352 107 353 113 354 120 356
13 2518 14 2645 14 21n 15 2914 16 3057 17 3207 18 3364
73 336 77 337 81 337 86 338 90 339 95 340 100 341
12 2306 12 2420 13 2537 13 2659 14 2785 15 2916 15 3053
63 323 66 324 69 324 73 325 16 326 80 327 84 328
11 2207 12 2315 12 2425 13 2540 13 2659 14 2783 14 2911
58 317 61 317 64 318 67 319 70 319 74 320 77 321
10 2019 10 2115 11 2215 11 2317 12 2424 12 2533 13 2647
49 304 52 304 54 305 57 306 60 306 63 307 65 308
9 1845 9 1932 10 2021 to 2113 10 2208 11 2307 11 2408
42 291 44 29Z 46 292 49 293 51 294 53 295 56 295
a 1681 8 1760 8 1840 9 1924 . 9 2009 10 2097 10 2189
36 279 38 280 40 280 41 281 43 281 45 282 47 283
7 1524 1 1595 8 1668 8 1742 8 1819 9 1899 9 1980
31 266 32 267 34 267 35 268 37 269 38 269 40 270
6 1372 6 1436 7 1501 7 1568 7 1636 8 1707 8 1780
26 252 27 253 28 254 29 254 31 255 32 256 34 257
5 1224 6 1280 6 1338 6 1397 6 1458 7 1521 7 1586
21 238 22 238 23 239 24 240 25 240 27 241 28 242
4 978 4 1023 5 1069 5 1117 5 1165 5 1215 5 1266
15 211 15 211 16 212 17 213 18 214 18 214 19 215
3 633 3 662 3 691 3 720 3 751 3 782 3 813
8 172 8 173 8 174 9 115 9 176 10 177 10 178
2 39\ 2 408 2 426 2 444 2 462 2 480 2 499
3 121 4 122 4 122 4 123 4 124 4 125 4 127
6. FUEL "" - 0.4 %
t:. FUEL = .!. 6.0 % t:. FUEL=+ 11.0%
ltXlC .Of AJ2G.Zll v.zsoo 2 1 1 ~ o 018590 o a 2 1.0 soo.o JOO.Otll3 F ~ 1 ~ 1 2 2
Figure 4-16 Climb Performance Table (l)

p 4
CUMB 250 ICT /300 KT I M.18
FL 105 110 115 120 125 130 135
16 2648 17 2818 18 2998 20 3191 21 3399 23 3628 24 3883
105 391 113 393 121 394 129 395 139 396 150 398 163 400
16 2495 16 2649 16 2810 18 2980 19 3161 20 3353 21 3559
93 384 100 385 106 386 113 388 121 389 129 390 138 391
13 2363 14 2505 15 2653 16 2809 17 2972 18 3144 19 3327
84 378 90 379 95 380 101 381 108 382 115 383 122 384
12 2240 13 2372 14 2509 15 2653 16 2804 16 2961 17 3127
76 371 81 372 86 373 91 373 97 374 103 375 109 376
11 2119 12 2241 13 2369 13 2502 14 2641 15 2786 16 2937
69 363 73 364 77 364 82 365 87 366 92 367 97 368
10 1989 11 2103 12 2220 12 2343 13 2470 14 2603 14 2741
61 353 65 354 69 355 73 355 77 356 81 357 86 357
9 1830 10 1933 10 2039 11 2150 11 2264 12 2383 13 2506
53 340 56 341 59 341 62 342 66 343 69 343 73 344
8 1685 9 1778 9 1875 10 1975 10 2078 11 2185 11 2296
45 327 48 328 51 329 53 329 56 330 59 330 62 331
8 1616 8 1705 9 1797 9 1892 10 1990 10 2092 11 2197
42 321 44 322 47 322 49 323 52 323 55 324 58 324
7 1483 7 1565 8 1648 8 1734 9 1823 9 1915 9 2010
36 308 38 309 40 310 42 310 45 311 47 311 49 311
6 1359 7 1433 7 1508 7 1586 8 1667 8 1750 8 1836
31 296 33 297 34 297 36 298 38 298 40 298 42 299
6 1240 6 1307 6 1376 71447 7 1520 7 1595 8 1673
27 283 28 284 30 285 31 285 33 286 34 286 36 286
5 1126 5 1186 6 1248 6 1312 6 1378 6 1446 7 , 516
23 271 24 271 25 272 26 272 28 273 29 273 31 273
4 1013 5 1068 5 1124 5 1181 5 1240 6 1301 6 1364
19 257 20 258 21 258 22 259 23 259 24 259 26 260
4 903 4 951 4 1001 5 1052 5 1105 5 1159 5 1215
16 242 17 242 17 243 18 244 19 244 20 244 21 245
3 720 3 759 3 799 4 840 4 882 4 925 4 970
11 214 11 215 12 216 13 216 13 217 14 217 15 217
2 467 2 492 2 517 2 543 2 570 2 598 3 627
6 176 s tn 6 178 7 179 7 179 7 180 8 180
1 289 1 303 1 318 1 334 1 351 2 368 2 386
3 127 3 127 3 128 3 129 3 129 3 129 3 130
6. FUEL = - 0.4 % 6 FUEL = + 6.0 % 6 FUEL = + 1 1 .0 %
HXIC -04 V2SOO 21100l00CSI.Bnl 0 01ai9J o 0 2 1Jl !iOO.O 300.D I 03
Figure 4-17 Climb Performance Table (3)
p 5
REV 18 j SEQ 122
CUMB 250 KT I 300 KT I M.18
Fl 140 145 150 155 160 165 170
21 4175
178 402
23 3782 24 4027 26 4298 28 4606
148 392 159 394 172 396 187 398
20 3521 21 3728 23 3950 24 4192 26 4457 28 4754 30 5094
130 385 _138 386 148 387 158 389 170 391 183 393 199 396
iS 330:.! I 19 3487 21 3682 22 3890 23 4113 25 4354 26 4619
115 377 123 378 130 379 138 381 147 382 157 384 168 386
17 3097 I 18 3264- 19 344{) 20 3624 21 3820 22 4028 23 4252
l03 362 \09 369 115 370 122 372 129 373 137 374 146 376
15 1ses 16 3037 \7 3195 18 3361 19 3534 20 3717 21 3912
91 358 96 359 101 360 107 361 113 362 , 19 363
126 365
13 2635 14 2768 15 2907 16 3051 16 3202 17 3360 18 3526
77 344 81 345 85 346 90 347 94 348 99 349 105 350
12 2411 12 2530 13 2653 14 2781 14 2914 15 3052 16 3197
66 331 69 332 72 332 76 333 80 334 84 335 88 336
11 2306 12 2419 12 2535 13 2656 13 2781 14 2911 15 3047
61 324 64 325 67 325 70 327 74 327 17 328 81 329
10 2108 10 2209 11 2313 11 2421 12 2533 12 2648 13 2769
52 312 54 312 57 313 60 314 62 314 65 315 68 316
9 1S24 9 2016 10 2109 10 2207 tl 2307 11 2410 12 2517
44 299 46 300 49 300 51 301 53 302 56 302 58 303
8 1753 8 1835 9 1920 9 2007 g 2097
0 2190 10 2286
38 286 40 287 41 288 43 288 45 289 47 290 50 291
7 1588 7 1652 8 1738 8 18H 8 1898 9 1982 9 2068
32 274 34 274 35 275 37 275 38 276 40 277 42 278
0 1429 8 1495 7 t563 7 1634 7 1706 a 1781 8 1858
27 260 28 260 29 261 31 262 32 263 34 264 35 265
5 1273 6 1332 6 1393 6 1455 6 1520 7 1586 7 1655
22 245 23 246 24 246 25 247 27 248 28 249 29 250
4 1017 4 1064 5 1113 5 1162 5 1214 5 1267 5 1321
15 218 16 218 17 219 18 220 19 221 19 222 20 224
3 655 3 686 3 717 3 749 3 781 3 814 3 848
8 180 8 181 9 182 9 183 10 185 Hl 186 11 187
2 404 2 423 2 441 2 461 2 480 2 500 2 520
4 130 131 4 132 4 133 4 135 5 136 5 138
L FUEl. = - (I
/o !:. FUEL = + 6.0 % b. FUEL=+ 11.0%
. .
Hl3C .o.t '12500 .tl1o:nxK:Sl itn1 0 01159:l 0 G 2 1,1) SOO.O XIO.O 1 03
Figure 4-18 CJimb Performance Table (4)
The maximum climb, maximum continuous and maximum cruise EPR tables in the Figures
4-19, 4-20 and 4-21 are similar to the one discussed in A320 take-offEPR. Enter the tables with
temperature and pressure altitude. Each intersection of temperature and altitude has a box with one
take-offEPR. The note for EPR adjustment is located on the top of the tables.

REV 17 I SEQ 030


V2500A1 MAXIMUM CLIMB EPR AR COI\'O ON 250/280/.?6
IUlCall iUITH:f ()I -.018
A.'f'l"i-a At() 011 -.113:)
(0 sooo. 7000. 11000. 15000. 19000. 2$000, 27000. 31000. 35000. 59000.
-54.0 1.2&2 1. 296
1.331 1.359 1.:JS8 'U01 \. (2& 1. 'II&
-50.0 \.'262 1. '29, 1.:r.12 1.331 1.!59 1.388 1. <Sll l. ,92 1. 19&
-46.0 \.262 I. 295 1.322 1.331 1.!!88 1. '!11
-42.0 \. 21i2 1.296 1.m 1.33\
' SS'J
1.3110 1.1.01 7.423 1. ''Jib
-ss.o 1.262 1.2':16 t.m 1.3al 1.359
\. '!)1
t. , ,,
t. '"
-34.0 1.262 1. 296 1.322 t.l!31 t. 359 l.m8
,_ '211 I
I. ,s:; t. ,9;1
' l!o
-30.0 1.262
,_ 2':16
1.:22 1.331 \.1:59 1.388 I. COl
1. i

,_ (92
1. 496
-26.0 -:. 21i2 1.296 1.m 1.:!31 1.359 1.380 t. '!11 i. ue 1.@ ' \. 497 1.'96
-:22.0 1.:159
1.262 1. 296 1.m
,, 3:11

1.<50 1.497
,_ (96
-18.0 1. 21i2 1. 29S l. 3:22 '1.331 1.359 \.381 \.(01 '1.<28 I -..m 1. 4113
-14. 0 1.262 1.:1'l6 1.S22 \.331 I.JS9 1.388 l. 401
1.(50 1.<160
-10.0 1. 262 1.2':16 1.a:22 1.331 1.388 l, '!)1
,, .;so
1. 44S
1..262 1, 296 1.a:22 1.:!31 1.3$9 1.388 1. 401 1.
-2.0 1.22 1.296 1.32'2 1.331 1.m 1.388
,, '01
1. 4('.-1 \.39.> 1.1slla
2.0 1. 296 1.m 1.531 \,3S9 1.1188 1.392 t.31."' t.m l.:VS '1.!65
6.0 1.2'2 1. 296 1.322 1.331 l.!S9 1.388 1.$8 '1.3!.2 1.850 1.313
10.0 1. 262 1. Zl6 1.322 1.331 \.3$9 1.365 \.ll'-' 'I.::IY 1.330 13:8 \.32n
14.0 1.26'2 1.?36 \.322 l.:!3l \.346 \.320 \. 314 \.3(;$
18.0 '1.262 1. 2Sfj 1.322 1.330 1.324
.. ztJ'
22.0 1.262 1.320 1.309 1.!02 1.291 t. IV'l 1.'2156
20.0 '1. 26'2 1.2So t.SOO '.238 1. 2111 1. 777 l.Zl; '
30.0 1.22 \.228 1.261 '1.269 1.262 1.257 1.:235
34.0 1. 22 1. 271 1. 263
sa. o 1.251 1. 254 1.<:3' 1.221 1.221
42.0 \.ZlS 1. 238 \. T.S2 '1.218 1. 2'1C
.:&.0 1. 223 1. 218 1.203 1.220
50.0 1.205 1. 210 1.
54. 0 1.192 1.\W
Figure4-19 Maximum Climb EPR Table
REV 17 I SEQ 030
Aacootnt'o'G ct=1' .017
1\CEUE A. .. n-tf Ill -,017
NIICI3.L A/f) Ql& AIITI-tf 1)1 -.r:t!l
ct> -1000. 3000. 7000. 11000. 15000. 19000. 23000. 27000. 31000. 35000. 89000.

"' 0
-22. 0.
4&. 0
1.?78 1.311
1.?78 1.311
1.Z'8 1.311
1. 278 1.3)1
1.?18 1.311
1. 711! 1.311
l.2n 1. 311
t.m 1. 311
1.278 1.311
1.278 1.311
1.178 1.$11
1.178 1.311
1. 178 1.311
1.178 t. 311
1.178 M1l
, , 713
1. 278 1.311
,, 278
1. 278 t.3l1
1.778 1.al1
1, ?tS
t 1.278
1. 251 1.258
1.Z39 1.253
1.228 1. Z3'J
1. 364 1. ;25 1.470
1. 364 1.426 U70
1.3M 1.426
1.3M 1.470
1. 31>4 t 42!i l.QO
1.304 !. 426 1. ,70
1.426 1.470
1. 426 1.m
1. 304 1.426 '1.470
1.426 L470
1.(20 ,,,70
1. 364 i . 426 1.470
l3li4 1. ,26

1.'26 1."9
).3M 1. 422
1.31>4 1. 401
1.357 \.381 1.378
1.344 1.35?
l. 331
1.3?0 1.3Zi 1.317
l.305 1.305
1.288 1.267
Note : 1 pack operative on remaining engine.

1.464 1.439
1.464 1. <169
1.4M 1. L39 1.469
1.4M 1.\.:-9 1.469
1.4M 1.469
MM \. 469
1.4M 1 .;3';) 1. <169
1.4M t. 469
1.464 1. <457
1.464 1.13S
1. ,,,
t . .W
1.454 1. 389 1.3!1
1.430 1.35?

1.339 1.3:)$
1.382 1.318
,, 312
1.359 "..296 1.291
1.337 '\.2?0

Figure 4-20 Mnimum Continuous EPR Table
1.493 t.S09
1. '"'
1. ,93 1.509 ,,,94
1.493 1.509
1.493 1.509
1.493 1.509 1.494
1.493 1.Sll9 1.494
1.493 1.>09 1.(94
1.493 'I. SIS 1. 494
1.493 l.SOS
1. -'85 t. (77
1;473 t.

1.424 \.416
1.399 1.394 1.383
1.370 1.3?2 1.360
1.353 1."'9
1.330 1.317 '1.315

p 9
REV 17 J SEQ 030
V2500A1 !MAXIMUM CRUISE EPR CCHl ON 250/280/. 76


Alii COO!lMlS a'f' 018
IIAC8..l.f ftlffi-0: liN -. 018
IIIICS.lE AMI lmQ AIITHl! 011 -.030
!CI -1000. 3000. 7000. 11000. 15000. 19000. 23000. 27000. 91000. 35000. 39000.
I. 19:2 1. 225 1.252 1. i!6t 1.2ll'J 1..:118 1..331 1.358 \. il8D t. 426
-so.o \.19:2 1.226 1.252 '1. 261 1.21!9 \.318 1.331 1.3S8 uao
,, , 22
1. 426
-46.0 \. t. 225
}, 2&1
1.269 t.:ne 1.331 use 1.380 1.42$
-42.0 1.192 t. 226 1.252 1. 261 tm 1,3111 '1;331
1.asa \.880 \. 4'22
1. '26
-38.0 l. 192 1.226 1.252 1.21 '1. 269 \.318 USI 1.858 1.380 1.4'22 t.4:1fi
\.192 1. 226 1.252 1. :lfil 1.2e9 1..3l8 '1..331 1.351 ueo
'1. (12
-30.0 1.192 1.22S 1.25'2 \.:lfi1 1. 2a9 \. 3UI 1.331 1.358 ueo 1.422
-26.0 L 1. 226 1.252 1. 261 1.21!9 ta18 1.331 usa 1.380 1.422 1. ,26
-22.0 1.192 1. 225 1.252 1.261
' 21!9
1.318 1.331 use 1.380 tm
18.0 1.192 \,226 1.252 \.2.61 1.289 1.310 \.331 1.358 1.!80
\.'22 1. "3
I, 192 1.226 I, :152 1. 261 1.289 1.318 '1.331 1.3:S8 1.380 1. 3!19 l.:m
- 10.0 I. 192 1.226 1.252 \. 261 1. 2$ 1.318 U31 1.350 1.380 1.375 1.366
-6. 0 1.192 ), 2'26 1. 261 1. 2t19 1.3111 1.331 1. 360 1.3$1 1.842
-2.0 1.192 l. 226 1. 252 1.261 1, 28'3 1.318 1.831 1,33,
\.33i 1. Sta
2.0 1. 192 1. 226 '\.252 1. 261 1. 1.3\8 1.3'22 1. :m 1.309 1.303 1. 295
6.0 1.192 1.226 1.252 1. 2&1 1.289 1.318 1.298 t 118, 1.2110 1.?13
10. 0 1. 1!12 1.226 1,252 1.21 1. 289 1.274 1. 1.260 1.258 1. 250
1.192 1.2'1:6 1.252 1.261 1.27& 1, 272 1.250 1.2H
1.238 1.230
16.0 1.192 1.252 1.200 1,25, 1. 2,9 1.228 t.m 1. 217
22-0 1.192 \, 225 1.2:50 1.2J9 t. m '1.227 1.20& 1.201 1.196
2&.0 I. 192 t.226 1.zall t. 218 1.211 1.207 1.186 1. 180
30.0 1.192 1.218 '1.211 1.199 1.192 1.187 1.166
34.0 1. 1!12 t20t t 193 1.1110
, ,
38.0 \. 181 !. 1M t177 1.
,, 15?
-42.0 \. 165 1. 168 1. 162 1. 1'8 1. HO
46.0 1.150 1. '1$3 1. 1.\33
so.o '1.1(0 1. 13'
1. l22 1. U7
Figure 4-21 Maximum Cruise EPR Table
Since an aircraft usually spends the greater part of its mission in cruising flight, the cruise
performance has a strong influence on the overall mission performance. The cruise performance of
an aircraft is one of the fundamental building blocks of the overall mission. In the cruising segment
of the mission, both height and airspeed are essentially constant and the aircraft is required to cover
distance in the most expedient manner. Usually, the majority of the fuel carried in the aircraft will
be used during the cruise. The distance that can be flown, or the time that the aircraft can remain
aloft, on a given quantity of fuel are important factors in the assessment of the cruise performance.
[n civil transport operations, the cruise performance of the aircraft has a strong influence on
the economics of the operation of the aircraft. The cost of fuel contributes to the cost of the
operation, but so does the cost of time. The aircraft needs to be flown at a speed and in a manner
that will optimize the overall operating cost; cruise performance is important to the overall balance
between fuel consumption and the time of flight In the analysis of cruise performance, the aircraft
is considered to be in steady, level, straight, symmetric flight with no acceleration or maneuver.
The maximum range speed for an aircraft is determined by its LID curve. Propeller-driven
airplanes wiU achieve best range performance if they are flown at the speed that yields LIDMAx It is
important to find out the difference between the angle yielding L/DMAX and the best angle of climb.
Maximum range and glide distance is achieved at LIDMAX. Best angle of climb is at a high angle of
attack with both high lift and high drag coefficients, which would not result in a maximum LID
ratio. Furthermore, another term we should know is maximum endurance. It would be obtained at
the point of minimum power required, since this would require the lowest fuel flow to keep the
airplane in steady, level flight. This is not at maximum LID.
In turbojet aircraft, a somewhat more complex relationship between lift and drag determines
best range. Thrbojets always have a best range speed higher than L/DMAX Maximum range is
obtained at the aerodynamic condition which produces a maximum proportion between the square
root of the Lift coeft1cient and the drag coefficient. It occurs where the proportion between velocity
and thrust required is greatest. This point is located by a straight line from the origin tangent to the
curve, and is consequently at a higher airspeed than L!DMAX
A headwind or tailwind will affect the miles per unit of fuel burned. If an airplane is operating
at its best-range airspeed and encounters a headwind, it should speed up to minimize the time in the
adverse wind. By the same token, an airplane with a tailwind can slow down and let the wind
maintain its ground speed with a lower fuel flow. The exact amount of airspeed change that is useful
varies with airplane type. It is only necessary to consider wind velocity effect on cruise speed at
wind velocities that exceed 25 percent of the zero wind cruise speed.
Turbojet engines have a strong preference for operations at high altitudes and airspeeds. Both
lower temperatures and higher altitudes increase engine efficiency by requiring a lower fuel flow
for a given thrust. Besides increased engine efficiency, lift and drag both decrease at higher altitude,
so less thrust is required.
Turbine engines are much more efficient when operated at the upper end of their RPM range.
Generally, the optimum cruise altitude for a turbojet airplane is the highest at which it is possible to
maintain the optimum aerodynamic conditions (best angle of attack) at maximum continuous power.
The optimum altitude is determined mainly by the aircraft's gross weight at the beginning of cruise.
As an aircraft burns fuel and becomes lighter, the optimum cruise altitude slowly increases to
improve the specific fuel consumption of the engines, meanwhile, the speed and power setting that
yields the optimum cruise performance slowly decreases to maintain the optimum lJD ratio. The
optimum angle of attack does not change with changes in weight. Since it is seldom practical to
change speed and altitude constantly, it is common procedure to maintain a constant Mach cruise at
a flight level close to optimum. As fuel is burned, thrust is reduced to maintain the constant Mach
All conventional aircraft flights end at the destination with a landing. In this phase, the aircraft
is transferred from the airborne state to the ground-borne state and brought to a halt Since the
maneuver takes place in close proximity to the ground, and at low airspeed, there is relatively high
risk to the safety of the aircraft. The maneuver must be carried out in a manner that will reduce the
risk of an incident occurring to an acceptably low level of probability.
In the landing phase of the flight, the aircraft is on a descending flight path towards the runway
As it approaches the runway, the airspeed and the rate of descent are reduced in the flare so that a
touchdown is achieved at a low rate of descent. After touchdown, the nose is lowered onto the
runway and the aircraft brought to a halt. During the landing, consideration is given to the need to
ensure that the aircraft can be controlled safely and that the distances required for the maneuvers do
not exceed those available.
In this section, we will discuss landing performance considerations, which mainly includes the
definitions of some airspeeds and hydroplaning, and how to master landing performance tables and
At the beginning, it is important for us to understand some defmitions about speed.
Vs - stalling speed or the minimum steady flight speed at which the airplane is controllable.
Vso- stalling speed or the minimum steady flight speed in the landing configuration.
- stalling speed or the minimum steady flight speed in a specific configuration.
VREF- reference speed. It is normally 1.3 x V
VLE- maximum landing gear extended speed.
VLO!Mw- maximum speed for operating the landing gear.
Even with all the aircraft's high lift devices extended, a typical air carrier airplane has a hig
approach speed and a long landing roll An airplane is normally flown at 1.3 times the V so speed fc
the aircraft's weight Of course, 1.3 times V so is an indicated airspeed and the ground speed wi
vary depending on wind, altitude and temperature. A high temperature or high altitude approac
will increase an aircraft's ground speed for any given approach speed.
An airplane landing at high elevation airports with comparable conditions relative t
temperature, wind, and airplane weight has higher groundspeed than at low elevation. An aircraft <
high altitude will land at the same indicated airspeed as at sea level but, because of the reduced a
density, the true airspeed will be greater. Given the same wind conditions, this will also make th
groundspeed higher than at sea level.
Once an airplane has touched down on a runway there are 3 ways of slowing it to a stot
aerodynamic braking, use of the wheel brakes, and reverse thrust. Aerodynamic braking is not ver
effective in slowing large jet aircraft and so it is generally not used to a great extent Reverse thru:
is effective mainly at higher airspeeds. The wheel brakes are effective at all speeds and are th
primary means of stopping the aircraft.
The typical technique for stopping an aircraft on a normal landing is to apply reverse thrust(<
prop reverse) immediately upon touchdown. This takes maximum advantage of reverse thrust whe
it is most effective and it saves wear on the wheel brakes, which heat up very rapidly at high groun
speeds. Shortly after touchdown, the spoilers are deployed. This reduces lift and increases drag. A
the aircraft slows, the main wheel brakes are applied to bring it down to taxiing speed. The
are most effective when lift has been reduced (by spoilers and low airspeed) and more of tl:
aircraft's weight is carried by the landing gear.
Wheel brakes are at maximum effectiveness when the weight of the airplane is used to hold tl:
tires in contact with the runway and the rate of wheel deceleration (or slowing) is just below th:
which would induce a skid. To place the maximum weight on the tires it is necessary to reduce li
as soon as possible after touchdown by lowering the nose wheel to the runway and deploying win
spoilers. Wheel brakes become more effective as an airplane decelerates (or slows down) becam
of loss of residual lift as the airspeed decreases.
Water on a runway will increase the landing rollout because the reduced coefficient of frictio
makes the wheel brakes less effective. This is particularly true at high ground speeds.
A very dangerous possibility when landing on a wet runway is hydroplaning. Whe
hydroplaning occurs, the wheel brakes are almost totally ineffective. This not only greatly increast
the landing rollout, but also introduces the possibility of losing directional control on sliding off tt
side of the runway. There are three types of hydroplaning.
Dynamic hydroplaning occurs when a tire rolls through standing water, forms a bow wav
and then rolls up on top of the wave, losing all contact with the runway. Water about l/1 Oth
inch deep acts to lift the tire off the runway. The minimum speed at which dynamic hydroplanir
can start is related to tire pressure. As a rule of thumb, dynamic hydroplaning will start at spee<
~ v u g h l y nine times the square root of the tire pressure in pounds per square inch. The practical
!;>plication is that your nose wheel can hydroplane at a lower speed than the mains because of its
lower pressure. Once dynamic hydroplaning has started, it can continue to much lower speeds.
For example, an aircraft with main tires having a pressure of 121 PSI could encounter dynamic
hydroplaning at roughly 99 knots minimum speed (square root of 121 = 11, 11 x 9 = 99).
Viscous hydroplaning occurs when there is a thin film of water covering a smooth surface
such as a painted or rubber-coated portion of the runway. Viscous hydroplaning can occur at much
:ower speeds than dynamic hydroplaning. Either the moisture or the originally slick surface could
cause problems, and the combination is especially dangerous. Viscous hydroplaning occurs due to
the viscous properties of water. In this type, a thin film of fluid (not more than l/1 000 of an inch in
depth) cannot be penetrated by the tire and the tire rolls on top of the film. This can occur at a much
lower speed than dynamic hydroplaning but requires a smooth acting surface.
Reverted rubber hydroplaning occurs during a locked wheel skid. Water trapped between
the tire and the runway is heated by friction, and the tire rides along a pocket of steam. Reverted
rubber hydroplaning occurs when the tires of the aircraft are actually riding on a mixture of steam
and melted rubber. It would typically occur if excessive braking kept a wheel from rotating.
When landing on a water-covered runway, fly the approach as close to "on speed" as possible.
Landing at a higher than recommended speed will greatly increase the potential for hydroplaning.
After touchdown, use aerodynamic braking and reverse thrust to maximum possible extent, saving
the use of wheel brakes until the speed is low enough to minimize the possibility of hydroplaning.
Since occurrence of dynamic hydroplaning is related to speed, it is prudent to slow the aircraft
with spoilers, reverse thrust, etc., as much as possible prior to applying the brakes. If hydroplaning
is experienced on landing, the best method of speed reduction is to apply aerodynamic braking to
the fullest advantage. Otherwise, applying full main wheel braking may increase or compound the
problems associated with hydroplaning. If any brakes are used, a pumping or modulating motion
like an antiskid system can be used. Aerodynamic braking is recommended. Furthermore, abrupt
use of either the nose wheel or main wheel brakes will lock the wheels and compound the problem.
Landing at a higher-than-recommended touchdown speed will increase hydroplaning potential
regardless of braking. Hydroplaning is most likely to occur during conditions of standing water or
slush on a runway with a smooth textured surface. The higher the aircraft speed, the more likely it is
to hydroplane.
Regulations require that when a turbojet aircraft is dispatched to an airport where the runway
are forecast to be wet or slippery, the effective length of the landing runway must be 115% of what
is required under dry conditions. Since runways cannot be lengthened, the effect of this rule is to
lower the maximum allowable landing weight of aircraft on wet runways for dispatch purposes.
No person may take off in a turbojet-powered aircraft when the appropriate weather reports
and forecasts, or combination thereof, indicate that the runway at the destination airport may be wet
or slippery at the estimated time of arrival unless the effective runway length at the destination
airport is at least 115% of the runway length required for a landing on a dry runway. For the
turbopropeller aircraft, 70 percent of the actual runway available from a height of 50 feet over tt
threshold is required.
The graphs in Figures 4-22 through 4-25 are used to compare landing distances under variot
conditions. All the graphs are used in the same manner; enter at the bottom with the gross weigh
draw a vertical line to the appropriate diagonal line, and from there draw a horizontal Jine to tt
landing distance.

a: I
!$' t: 3000

V< 2000

3 1000
SEiA LEVEL 5!1 ''F
40'' FLAPS

...... V I


1. f- 1-

::::::::- ::..::::::
SN'l.t;i 'j
1\1!'\ 1 -RArjfj()N l.STAJCE
I r,IR
I l
100 110 120 130 140
Figure 4-22 B727 Normal Landing- Dry Runway
For example, refer to Figure 4-23, one typical question to use these graphs is: which of the
iollowing configurations will result in the shortest landing distance over a 50-foot obstacle to a wet
runway? 1) Brakes and spoilers at 122 500 pounds gross weight; 2) Brakes and reversers at 124 000
pounds gross weight; 3) Brakes, spoilers, and reversers at 131 000 pounds gross weight



a: I


SEA LEVEl 59 ''F


vr l.--
:<)1\\- -
cJc - C/1:1. 'f

--- I
P- 1-'\E\If:!\Sia


100 110 140
Figure 4-23 B727 Normal Landing - Wet Runway
This question asks for a comparison of a 40 -flap landing on a wet runway using three
different weights and stopping techniques. Line 1 is the distance using brakes and spoilers at a
weight of 122 500 pounds. Line 2 is the distance using brakes and reversers at a weight of 124 000
pounds. Line 3 is the distance using brakes, spoilers, and reversers at a weight of 131 000 pounds.
The graph shows that Answer 3) will have the shortest stopping distance (about 3 200 feet).
Refer to Figure 4-24, landing on an icy runway at a gross weight of 134 000 pounds, air
distance is 950 feet, air and transition distance is 1 350 feet. The transition distance is 400 feet
(1 350 - 950 = 400).

I,N ri-$Kifl OPen,\ Tl\ E
tlfil\1{5 & ,\l-'1-'U!:.I.l
.>f'I>HJP ":'IME
Figure 4-24 B727 Normal Landing -Icy Runway
The graph in Figure 4-25 is used to determine landing distances \Vith touci::c"-ri l 00( :eet
point under various flap position conditions. For example, a 0 flap landing at a .a.-.:b 1'e.; of
119 000 pounds will require about 3 500 feet landing distance and, a 15 flap !i :::e same
weight will require about 2 700 feet landing distance. So the ground roll distances are : 500 feet
(landing distance is 3 500 feet, touchdown point is 1 000 feet, ground roll eqt!a! 3 500 feet
subtracting 1 000 feet) and 1 700 feet (for the same reason) respectively.
flO CO
\T '0''3 FEE:l .f'HOM 1fJRESt<O!.P
SP<:ll..E"if. J,';:) 9PA.CES 2 '10:> ,t,rT(!l "'OUC>1::'JWi\l
RF:Vei1St: AP"LlEn J fO .C'<:)O\V'l
ZERO \'lltiO ;:,qy Rllt-'llr. Y
A.'/ll..__'::I(JO o::-;:;;ATIVE

J 8<1ME:; I I
5 SEAlE\ El STM :> .. !:AV
100 120 1.50 140 150
Figure 4-ZS B727 Normal Landing Distance Comparison
The graphs in Figures 4-26 and 4-27 are used to determine the thrust required to maintain a
given airspeed with various flap configurations with the landing gear both up and down. The graph
in Figure 4-27 is for a 110 000-pound aircraft, while the graph in Figure 4-26 is for a
140 000-pound aircraft. Notice that the solid curved lines represent the level flight and that the two
dashed lines represent a 3 glide slope.
I v
I-I- -I

I I r-- lit
100 120
- - - 3 GLIDE SLOP!:
(j) Vf'IEF
1- -

- -
/ Jf


o"z I

,. ;.r.
. '7#"-
t'L r-;--
-- r-r-

v v


P't'< '?

fc< 1- --
I" ....
r- r-t--

-!.JLA sr-
140 160
Figure 4-26 B727 Landing Thrust- 140 000 Pounds
fJ) 12
- I-
1- r-
-- . -1-1-


[;; I

---k'""VEL H l t;HT
- - - :; GLLJE :>LOPE

--1- 1-
- r-

:<Y. (9'
l j(t

I l
1.--' I I
,<; o-.61'1

. I
f r

- -
v - '> (\)'y

...-- I -

f-.- - -
_ ......
:I(J ....

t-1-1- -


i I I I I
120 ll 100 100 200
Figure 4-27 8727 Landing Thrust- 110 000 Pounds
fi,.AI'S ::-
The two graphs work in a manner similar to those in the previous questions. Enter the graph at
the bottom with the airspeed, draw a vertical line to the appropriate curved line and then draw
horizontally to the required thrust.
The two dashed lines represent an approach condition, and the VREF speed is marked with a
line and circle on each of the curves. For example, VREF for a 140 000-pound airplane with 40
flaps is 123 knots, and with 30 flaps it is 127 knots. According to these two dashed lines, it is
clear that the maximum charted indicated airspeed while maintaining a 3 glide slope at a weight
of 140 000 pounds is 156 knots. Furthermore, in this case (refer to Figure 4-26), required thrust is
16 200 pounds.
Refer to Figures 4-25 and 4-26, one typical problem is what approach speed and ground roU
will be needed when landing at a weight of 140 000 pounds if flap position is 15 . The diagonal
line for 15 flaps in Figure 4-25 states that the VREF speed is the 40 flaps VREF speed plus 15 knots.
In Figure 4-26, at 140 000 pounds, the 40 flap VREF is 123 knots, so the 15 VREF is 138 knots
(123 + 15).
Refer to Figure 4-26, another typical problem is what is the change of total drag for a
140 000-pound airplane when configuration is changed from flaps 25, gear down, to flaps 0, gear
up, at a constant airspeed of 165 knots. In level flight, total thrust and total drag are equal. So, drag
with 25 flaps, gear down is 20 300 pounds and drag with 0 flaps, gear up is 9 800 pounds. Change
in drag (thrust) is 10 500 pounds.
The main difference between Figure 4-26 and 4-27 is the gross weight. For example, refer to
Figure 4-27, the thrust required to maintain a 3 glide slope at 110 000 pounds, with gear down,
flaps 30, and an airspeed of VREF + 15 knots is 10 700 pounds (VREF + 15 = 126 knots). According
to the figure, the thrust required to maintain level flight at 110 000 pounds, with gear up, flaps 25 ,
and an airspeed of 155 knots is 14 900 pounds.
Some problems require the computation of headwind, tailwind and crosswind components.
The wind direction, wind speed and course must be known. Most often these problems are part of a
take-off or landing computation. If this is the case, the course corresponds to the runway number
(i.e., Rwy 35 = 350 magnetic), and the winds are references to magnetic north and in knots.
Determine the headwind and crosswind components for an aircraft landing on runway 35 with the
winds form 300 at 20 knots. The crosswind is -15 knots (a negative crosswind is from the left, a
positive is from the right). The headwind component is -13 knots (a negative number indicates a
headwind, a positive indicates a tailwind).
The landing speed table in Figure 4-28 is used to determine the aircraft's approach speed (VREF)
at various weights and flap settings. For example, the 100 000-pound airplane using a 30 flap
setting has a VREF of 135 knots. This speed is adjusted by adding one half of any headwind
component as noted at the bottom of the table. Gust corrections are not required on this test. If the
headwind component were 13 knots, the correction would be 7 knots (always round up) and the
corrected VREF would be 142 knots.
The go-around EPR table at the top of Figure 4-28 is similar to the one discussed for take-off
EPR. In this table there are two EPR values: one for temperature and one for altitude. The lower of
the two is the go-around EPR. For example, if the temperature is 15 c TAT at a pressure altitude
of 500 feet, the temperature-limited EPR is 2.00. The altitude-limited EPR is 2.01 (you need to
interpolate between 2.04 and 1.98). There are possible corrections for air conditioning OFF and for
engine and wing anti-ice ON. Notice that there are three different temperature scales.
Using the data from operating conditions L-3 (Figure 4-29), because of the gross weight of
90 000 poundc; and IS' flaps setting, the table value for reference speed (VREF) is 141 knots (refer to
Figure 4-28). According to Figure 4-30, the headwind is 15 knots, so the wind correction to VREF is
8 knots (one half of the headwind component is 7 .5, the correction always round up). The reference
speed is 149 knots (141 + 8 = 149). In this case, the maneuvering speed is 150 knots .
. .... - -- -- - --T----
v :c n .. 1:1\ H" I ' t.-.r. t :- f 1.i:\
A c BLEED CN " '"" , . .,, r ! ; n,.,.
f',J.t> E>'<ENS1011 SI'EE'llS

,.., .. f' . "41\Nl'!VCR I LM'
HO I t.'t$ 1
10 IC,O to
tS 150 2'\.:n
2h ... ,

o I -
___ .1 __
\"r 'r:f
;oCO.lB f'LAI' K'''nCN . l
.-.; ;o-;,;
Hl_ t!J) !$1 '
'U ,:'a t.U
00 t t 1S$. IU l!C
,1,1 II <;
1<1 1:'7 136 ,
: :
:: I :;:
.o: Iii
,.._. ' ''J
Figure 4-28 B737 Landing Performance Cbart
TEMPERATURE +15 oc ... 27 F -8"C

3.100 2,500 2,100
WEIGHT (XHXJO) 100 95 90 105
40' '
1 :;u
04 27 34
350/15 3Hl/?O 030/10
Figure 4-29 B737 Landing Operating Conditions
+55 F
Figure 4-30 Wind Component Chart
From the operating conditions L-4, the maneuvering speed is VREF (refer to Figure 4-28). In
this case, the table value for VREF is 134 knots, and wind correction is 3 knots, therefore the
corrected VREF is 137 knots. The maneuvering speed is 137 knots.
Using the data from operating conditions L-4 (Figure 4-29), the temperature scale is -I 0 c
TAT at a pressure altitude of 2 100 feet Since there is no listing for this altitude in the table in
Figure 4-28, it is necessary to interpolate. Since the altitude given (2 100 feet) is not halfway
between the two table values (2 000 and 3 000 feet), it is necessary to calculate the amount the EPR
changes per 1 000 feet of altitude. Determine the difference between the EPR values at these two
altitudes (2.15- 2.09 = 0.06). That means the EPR variation from I 000 feet to 2 000 feet is 0.06.
The EPR variation per 1 000 feet is 0.006 (0.06/1 0), and the EPR increases as altitude
increases. To determine the EPR for 2 100 feet, add 0.005 to the EPR for 2 000 feet (2.09 + 0.006
The temperature-limited EPR is 2.16. So, the go-around EPR for operating conditions L-4 is
According to the notes about the adjustment to the EPR which are located at the top of the
Figure 4-28, two engines wing anti-ice on correction is -0.04. Therefore, the go-around EPR setting
for operating conditions L-4 is 2.056 (2.096- 0.04 = 2.056).
At ftrst, we should understand two definitions of speed.
Vc- design cruising speed.
VMoiMMo - ma-ximum operating limit speed.
The Boeing 737 holding table in Figure 4-31 shows the holding EPR, indicated airspeed and
fuel flow per engine for various weights and altitudes. You will need to interpolate for conditions
between listed weights and altitudes.
Assume a Boeing 737 is holing at 34 000 feet at a weight of 112 500 pounds. What is the EPR,
IAS and fuel flow required? This problem will require interpolation both between altitudes and
weights. Let's do the steps for EPR first.
A. Since the weight of 112 500 pounds is exactly halfway between two table listed weights, it
is easiest to start by determining the required EPR at each of the two nearest altitudes. At
35 000 feet, the EPR for a 115 000-pound airplane is 2.13, and for a 110 000-pound
airplane it is 2.07. Add those two values and divide by 2. The EPR is 2.10. That means the
EPR for a 112 500 pound aircraft at 35 000 feet is 2.10. The same calculation for 30 000
feet yields an EPR of 1.84.
B. Since the altitude given (34 000 feet) is not halfway between the two table values, it is
necessary to calculate the amount the EPR changes per 1 000 feet of altitude. Detennine
the difference between the EPR values at each altitude (2.1 0 - 1.84 = 0.26), then divide
that number by 5 (0.26/5 = 0.052).
C. The EPR variation per 1 000 feet is 0.052, and the EPR decreases as altitude decreases. To
determine the EPR for 34 000 feet, subtract 0.052 from the EPR for 35 000 feet
(2.10- 0.052 = 2.048).
Similar interpolations give a holding speed of 231 knots and a fuel flow per engine of 2 790
powtds per hour.

_ II! 110_
80 _70 _H I

2' I :-07
, 0 1
1 95 1.9:;, I U!5
1 a'
::5o 2:1 I 228 22-3 21;

7630 2J60
l I >t'i I 82 I 79 I 75
I :>20
<>7o I <:dno

1 1 Gq- -; r.6
I r.3 I 6D
i!Sl' :.!Ill 2\3
, '/10 :1610 24!1q_

I SfJ 1 53 1 50 1 48
2?2 :.!17 :<11
<'7tt t :>590 24qo Rill.
1 I I' 40 I 38
15, ;2a 1 221 21s

I m
1 ;\4 i 1,33 \ 3 '
220 I 21s 21:1
... ?.7110 I 2870 Ll'SBQ
r 05.)-
"' I '" t ' " I ' " :>;>4 )I') ;>14 210
J1..70 I _?!L_
I 26 ( I ..!4 I 2:i ! 1 2?
O":i ?19 214 ' :!10
I 2850
, 57
1 <"



I 2ol

1.2 1
210 .2111

1 67 1 c.t
1.G4 1 S1 1
2 10 2111
2q80 I
1 43 I 40 I
.2_6:1 ..!!!? ..!l!!!Lj
""' 1 S7 ' I S.A I
211) l 210 110
___@(; f tzzc_j
1 n , 41
:?10 210 210 2 1n
SilO ' Hl20 lllo!U
Jb r I 2i I 24 ! 32
210 110 210 210 '21:! <'11
zq!J I

llt>O 200C
I 32 1
210 .210
. 31 .. I I 27 I :to> I
21C 21<: ' I 21C I
:? 1_40 ::o?c zo-:>0
25 ;-2 t-,.n I l.:t ]
I 23:
;>tO I


I ?ttt
:10 1,19 I 18 1 I 17
210 210 21(\
1 HI I 1
22!l.Q :>Z>o ;n :;11 I
to 1.17 I It\ I 1;
z1o :?10 ,.1o :no
2!>10 2 4 J .>
Figure 4-31 B737 Holding Performance Chart
Using the data from operating conditions 0-2 (see Figure 4-32), the method to find out the
recommend lAS, EPR settings and the approximate fuel consumed for holding is similar to the
steps described before. Refer to Figures 4-31 and 4-32, interpolation is required for FL230 and
93 000 pounds. At FL 250, the EPR value for 93 000 is 1.56. At FL200, the EPR value for 93 000 is
1.44. Interpolation for FL230 results in an EPR value of 1.51. At FL250, the lAS for 93 000 is 210
knots. At FL200, the lAS for 93 000 is 210 knots. Interpolating for FL230 results in an lAS value of
I OPERATING CONOIT!ONS 0-1 0-2 0-3 0-4 0-5
ALTITU[)E 31.G'O 23,000 17,000 8,000 4 000
WEIGn'T (X1 000) 102 93 104 113 109
HOLf)lNG TIME (MIN) 20 40 35 IG 25
Figure 4-32 B737 Holding Operating Conditions
: 10 knots. At FL250, the fuel flow per engine for 93 000 is 2 228 LBIHOUR At FL200, the fuel
:iow per engine for 93 000 is 2 278 LB/HOUR. Interpolating for FL230 results in a fuel flow per
engine value of 2 248 LB/HOUR. According to the conditions 0-2, two engines working for 40
minutes will consume fuel2 997 LB (2 248x2/60x40 = 2 997).
Certain questions are "what is the fuel burned in a particular time?" This is a fuel bum problem
identical to those covered in the flight logs section. Remember that the fuel flow rates are given per
engine. The Boeing 737 (see Figure 4-31) and the Airbus 320 are both twin-engine airplanes.
An encounter with strong turbulence can result in structural damage to an aircraft, or
inadvertent stalL The sudden changes in wind direction and speed can result in very rapid changes
in an aircraft's angle of attack. A sudden increase in angle of attack will cause the airplane to
accelerate upward, increasing both the load factor and the stalling speed.
When an airplane flying at a high speed with a low angle of attack suddenly encounters a
vertical current of air moving upward, the relative wind changes in an upward direction as it meets
the airfoil. This increases the angle of attack. A downward gust would have the effect of decreasing
the angle of attack.
For any combination of weight and altitude there will be a recommended "rough air, speed
that provides the best protection from stalls and from the possibility of overstressing the aircraft.
When clear air turbulence has been reported in the area, a pilot should adjust the speed to fly at the
recommended rough air speed upon encountering the first ripple of turbulence, since the intensity of
such turbulence may build up rapidly. Nonnally the speed should be slowed. In this case, neither
extending flaps nor extending gear is right action. Use of flaps increases the camber of the wing and
angle of attack, but does not decrease the amount of wing loading. Furthermore, extending the gear
would increase the drag, but would not change the stability of the airplane.
In severe turbulence, it may be impossible to maintain a constant airspeed or altitude. Any
attempt to maintain constant airspeed and altitude may overstress the aircraft. If this happens, the
pilot should set the power to that which would maintain the desired airspeed and maintain a level
flight attitude, accepting large variations in airspeed and altitude.
Due to the inaccuracy of the EPR gauges in turbulent air, some aircraft use an N
(low pressure
rotor speed) power setting to maintain thrust. The turbulent air penetration table in Figure 4-33
shows the N
power setting for various weights and altitudes. For example, the power setting for a
110 000-pound ai:rplane at 30 000 feet is 82.4%.
This RPM (rotation per minute) may have to be adjusted for temperature. For example, at
30 000 feet, the RPM must be changed 1.6% for every 10 c deviation from ISA (add for
temperatures above ISA and subtract for temperatures below ISA). The ISA TAT (total air
temperature) is listed for each altitude. Assume an actual TAT of -8 c. This is 15 warmer than
standard and would require adding 2.4% to the table value.
Using the data from operating conditions Q-3 (refer to Figures 4-33 and 4-34), the table value
of the turbulent air penetration N
power setting for a 90 000-pound airplane at 35 000 feet is 81.0%.
Since the actual TAT is - 16 "C, it is 20 c warmer than standard and would require adding 3.2% to
the table value. So the corrected N
is 84.2%.
eo 90 100 110
lAS/MACH 1000 FT
- ~ c
2601 70
77.1 79.0
81.0 83.4 -36
77.2 7B.2
7'3.4 81.1 82.4 23
1 6
76.7 77.5
78.3 7 ~ . ? . 80.1 -13
/4.7 75.4 76.1 77.0 77.9 -6 1.4
72.7 73.5
74.2 74.8 75.7 1
10 70.5 71.3
72.1 72.9 73.9 9 1.9
Figure 4-33 B737 Turbulent Air Penetration
WEIGHT (X1000) 110 70 90 80 100
PRESSURE AL TfTUDE 30,000 25,000 35,000 20,000 10,000
TOTAL AlA TEMP (TA1) -s c -2sc -16 c +4 c -6"C
Figure 4-34 B737 Turbulent Air RPM Operating Conditions
The tables in Figure 4-35 are used to compute the time, fuel and distance required to
descend from cruise altitude. There are four different tables representing different speed
schedules in the descent. The table at the top left is used if planning to descend at Mach 0.80 until
intercepting and lAS of 250 knots. The table at the bottom right is for a descent at Mach 0.80
until intercepting 350 knots and holding that until 10 000 feet and then slowing to 250 knots. Be
sure to use the correct table for the planned schedules. For example: Using a descent schedule of
0.80 M/250 KIAS (Knots Indicated Airspeed), if descending from FL370 at a weight of 130 000
pounds, the required time is 26 minutes, the fuel bum is 1 570 pounds and the required distance
in nautical air miles (NAM) is 125.5.
According to operating conditions S-5 (refer to Figures 4-35 and 4-36), using the descent
schedule of 0.80M/320/250KIAS, if descending from FL330 at a weight of 125 000 pounds, the
required time is 20 minutes, the fuel bum is 1 420 LB, and the required distance in nautical air
miles (NAM) is 97 miles (the interpolation is necessary, the method is similar to the ones discussed

.80M/250 KIAS
-- -
1 f:Vt; 'A II II'
n ..... l"r
AT lAN!liNCi
___ L -

410 1'27 :610
1>3 12e
:iW Z7 1600 134 136
123 I zs 1;-s
:iN (:f. 'S'tO
r '" " .,.,
116 120 1:?2
';3<; !
l __
123 f80
10:! 107 1(18
.?SO 97 100 101
27C: 21 1-1?.0 90 93 95
-- - ------
;.so 20 J'Jso
81 87 86
230 19 1360 78 60 ST
210 Ill 1320 72 74 75
190 17 1280

68 G8
16 1240
62 62
ISO 14 1100 54 56 56
1\JO I 1 40
s7n 21 24
/00 '2 12 12
.SOM/320/250 KIAS
f _- _-_-_ - -=-- "'""'D.;.;;I"'"s:;r
C,O!"Illl R J'l:aP ! 160,00iJ l
410 22 114&0 113 120 ! 12l
370 21 1460 105 1'2 llo
3&0 22 1480 II 1 '17 l 121
21 1'440 101 107
lao Tia- 1420 !ls - -i03-r 101
310 :!0 14CO 92 98 102
m ___ lL ___ I
250 18 j l350 80
230 17 1!330 75
210 17 !:lOO 71
190 Ill JI2'/C 6ti
170 , 15 , 1240 (i 1 I
050 tl 870 24
015 5 700 12
150 J 14 .l1210 SG '
100 12 1110 -IS I

.SOM/350/250 KIAS
410 21 1440 106 I 112 ill> l
390 21 1-130 10.3 1'0
3SO 20 1400 !i5 'o: 1\16
3ill 20 1420 !?9 110 I
!'33c 19 13so , 91 --08 --, 7.:2-- I
3to 19 1 1:1ao ea i j4 't.J
95 I
I 290 18 1360 8:0 !!C
270 18 1350 82 87
2SO 17 1330 78
230 17 1310 74
210 16 1290 70
i 190 16 1270 65
170 15 1240 61
150 14 1210 57
100 13 1130 -17
050 8 870 :!4
015 5 700 12

.. --1
I ...
.: 1
Figure 4-35 Descent Performance Chart
FLIGHT LEVEL 370 350 410 390 330
LANDING WEIGHT (X1000) 130 150 135 155 125
DESCENT TYPE .80M' .80MI .80MI .80MI .aorvv
250 2801250 320/250 35Ql250 320/250
Figure 4-36 Des(:ent Performance Operating Conditions
In this section, the following three speeds are important for us to understand engine-out
VMc - minimum control speed with the critical engine inoperative.
VxsE - best single engine angle-of-climb speed.
VysE - best single engine rate-of-climb speed.
When an engine fails in flight, the effect on aircraft performance is drastic. For example, the
loss of one engine on a two-engine aircraft will result in a loss of climb performance in excess of
50%. Climb performance is determined by the amount of power available in excess of that required
for level flight The one remaining engine must provide all of the power required for level flight. It
may be able to develop little or no excess power that would allow for a climb.
When an engine fails in cruise flight, the pilot should slow the aircraft to its best single-engine
rate-of-climb speed (VvsE) and apply maximum continuous power on the remaining engine. The
airplane may or may not be able to climb. If it cannot climb at the present altitude, at least it will
descend at the minimum possible rate of sink and level off at its maximum engine-out altitude. It
may be necessary to dump fuel to improve the altitude capability of the aircraft.
If an aircraft is not capable of maintaining altitude with an engine inoperative under existing
circumstances, the airspeed should be maintained within 5 knots of the engine-out best
rate--of-climb speed (VysE), in order to conserve altitude as long as possible to reach a suitable
landing area
A multi-engine airplane should never be flown below its minimum control speed (V Me) If it is
below V Me and an engine failure occurs, it may be impossible to maintain directional control with
the other engine operating at full power. VMc will vary with the aircraft's center of gravity location.
V Me will be the highest with the CG at its most rearward-allowed position because a rearward CG
decreases rudder effectiveness and increases V MC
A commercial operator of large aircraft may conduct a ferry flight of a four-engine airplane or
a turbine-engine-powered, three-engine airplane with one engine inoperative, to a base for the
purpose of repairing the engine. Several restrictions apply to such flights. These include:
A. The airplane model must have been test flown to show that such an operation is safe.
B. The operator's approved airplane flight manual must contain procedures and performance
data, which allow for the safe operation of such a flight
C. The operation weight of the aircraft must be limited to the minimum required for flight
plus any required reserve fuel.
D. Take-offs are usually limited to dry runways.
E. The computed take-off performance must be within acceptable limits (this will vary
depending on the type of aircraft).
F. The initial climb cannot be over thickly-populated areas.
G Only required flight crewmembers may be on the aircraft ..
H. Weather conditions at the take-off and destination airports must be VFR.
The table in Figure 4-37 shows the time required to dump to a given fuel weight. The column
at the left edge of the table is the initial fuel weight and the row at the top of the table is the ending
fuel weight. The intersection of any of those weights is the time required to dump from the
beginning weight to the ending weight.
1000 LB r1o_14:1a so 54 . 58 , 62.64 ,70
70 ' 28 . 20.18 17 15 13 12 10 s 5 3 I 0
26 ,25 123 21.20 18
16 15. 13 .12 ,10_ 8 5 . 3 0 :
23 23 20 1s 11 1s 13 11 10 a 1 s 3 o
21 120 1a 1 s 1s f 13 11 . 1 o" > > i o l
18 16 15113 12 110
9 7 5 3 2 o I
so 10 ! a 7 513 2 o j .. : -
46 8 7 . 5 3 2 0 ! . .
13 12 10 8 7 S 3 2 0 FUh DUMP TIME
12 10 9 7 5 3 ? 0
1ol s.7 o i
875320 t
-r 2 . o .
5 3 2 0
. . . --- -
3 2 0
,.E .. '"""'T .
2 0
Figure 4-37 Fuel Dump Time
For example, refer to Figure 4-37, how many minutes of dump time is required to reach an
aircraft weight of 144 500 pounds given an initial aircraft weight of 180 500 pounds and a zero fuel
weight of 125 500 pounds?
A. Determine the initial fuel weight by subtracting the zero fuel weight from the initial aircraft
weight: 180 500-125 500 =55 000 pounds.
B. Determine the ending fuel load by subtracting the zero fuel weight from the ending aircraft
weight: 144 500-125 500 = 19 000 pounds.
C. From the table, determine the fuel dump time to go from SS 000 pounds to 19 000 pounds.
Interpolate as necessary: Dump time= 15.25 minutes.
The tables in Figure 4-38 are used to determine the maximum altitude a Boeing 737 can
:naintain with one of its engines inoperative. The engine bleed configuration determines which of
three tables is to be used. The upper table is for all anti-ice off, the middle is for engine anti-ice
only, and the lower is for when both engine and wing anti-ice are in use. Once the correct table has
been selected, find the aircraft weight at the left-hand side and follow that row across to the
appropriate ISA temperature. The only possible adjustment to the table value for the level-off
altitude is covered by the note at the bottom of the figure. The note allows an increase of 800 feet in
the level-off altitude if the air conditioning is off and the aircraft is below 17 000 feet.
,--------------------.------------ -----
- --
1!0 71
90 86
101) 96
110 105
1'.0 114

-10 o fYI :_
25000 21700 20000
22000 20500 20000 1ASOO
20000 1!1100 1 750l1 \b4(10
18200 16600 14700 12200
::oo -'-
----'-L-----'------L-----L . --- --
GROSS WI:I(;Hf 1000 LB
10 0 10 2U
80 77 IU4
!iO 86
100 96 206
110 lOS 215
tro 114 224
----- ----
24GOO 22800 20000
21400 20000 1\'-100
16600 14700 12200
13t!O() 11800 8800 j
1940(1 18700 15jj00

10 0 10 ?0
1--FA_I_Lu_R_E_-f-_(_A_P_Pf- IO_X_)-!-S-I'_E_ED_IU_A_R-+;... _-_-
'""' """ ] ,,.;;:[
IS on: OElOW 17.000 FT., INCAI:ASE
2\600 20100 19800 18000
18000 16400 14200
10800 15100 13300 10700
14000 12200 10300 7200
-- ---- . -- -
Figure 4-38 Drift-Down Performance Chart
Assume the aircraft weights 100 000 pounds at the time of its engine failure, and the engine
anti-ice is on. If the temperature is ISA, the level-off altitude is 19 400 feet. Even if the air
conditioning were off, it would have no effect since the level-off is above 17 000 feet.
Using the data from operating conditions D-5 (refer to Figures 4-38 and 4-39) is another
example. Assume the aircraft weighs 120 000 pounds at the time of its engine failure. If the
temperature is ISA + 20 , the level-off altitude is 8 800 feet When engine bleed-air for air
conditioning is off below 17 000 feet, increase level-off altitude by 800 feet. Therefore, the level-ofi
altitude is 9 600 feet (8 800 + 800).
WT AT ENG FAIL (X1000) 100 110 90 80 120
ISA TEMPERATURE JSA + 1 0 ~ -10" -10" +:'.O
Figure 4-39 B737 Drift-Down Operating Conditions
Aircraft manufacturers publish flight planning graphs of tables that enable the flight crews to
quickly estimate the time and fuel required to fly certain trips. These table or graphs allow
adjustments for aircraft weight, wind, altitude, cruise speed and other variables.
The graph in Figure 4-40 is used to determine the time and fuel required for a planned flight It
allows for trip distance, wind, flight altitude, landing weight and temperature. This example shows
the solution for operating condition X-1 (see Figure 4-41).
Start at the bottom of the graph in Figure 4-40 with the trip distance (2 000 NM) and draw a
vertical line to the reference line representing a zero knot wind component. Condition X -1 states
that there is a 50-knot tailwind component. From the reference line follow the curved diagonal line
back to the - 50-knot line. This will result in an equivalent trip distance of 1 800 NM. From there,
draw a vertical line through both sets of diagonal lines representing cruise altitude.
To determine the trip time, find the point of intersection between the vertical line and the
diagonal in the upper set which represents the cruise altitude (27 000 feet). From there draw a
horizontal line to the reference line representing 0 deviation from ISA. Since the temperature in
condition X-1 is ISA + 10, from the reference line parallel the diagonals down and to the left to the
ISA + 10 line. From there draw a horizontal line to the trip time (3 hours, 55 minutes).
To determine the trip fuel, fmd the point of intersection (on the lower set of altitude diagonals)
between the vertical line drawn earlier and the diagonal line used for the cruise altitude. From there,
draw a horizontal line, the reference line representing a landing weight of 65 000 pounds. Since the
landing weight in condition X-1 is 70 000 pounds, parallel the diagonal lines up and to the right
until meeting the vertical 70 000-pound line. From there, draw a horizontal line to the trip fuel
(26 000 pounds).
Figure 4-40 B 737 Flight Planning 0.78 Mach Indicated
)( .. 3
X-4 X-5
2.000 l 2.'00 2.800 1 .200
50HW 20HW 50TW 30HW
20 (',()0
29.000 37000
.. jQ

-1o +10"
LANDINC1 WEIGHT {X 75 7!> 65 90

4-41 Flight Planning at 0. 78 Mach Cruise
The table in Figure 4-42 shows the time and fuel required for trips of various distances. For
example, a trip of 340 NM requires 55 minutes and consumes 5 550 pounds of fuel. A wind will
change both the time and fuel required for a given flight The notes at the bottom of the table
explain the correction factors. The formulas are:
Change in Time= Time x Wmd Component+ TAS
Change in Fuel =Fuel x Wmd Component + TAS
.2801.70 CLIMB
.74r.!201340 DESCENT
320 KTS CRUISE 10000 THAU 23000 FT.

6000. 70'J{J
16 111JU
16 19!\:)

4' 447 44
25000.2700<> #i
.s.;s 47
280002i000 443 49

2 a ooo-Z!li:OC ;14.1
281100.29000 4'.3
Si OC.
--- 2901l0-31COO

441 53

31 00033000

43! 56

_____ .9

330003SO<Xl re
:l:!OOO:iSOOIJ 433 e9
433 !ib
3300035000 433 102
33Goo.:lsooo-- -
43a 22
433 135

6. liME " 43 X 20 + 449 " &!JN. WINO COMPONENT- 20 KTS
/). FUEL 4500 X 20 = 449 = 200 LBS.

11 ;co
12: o

Figure 4-42 Abbreviated Fligbt Planning
Assume a 25-knot tailwind for the conditions above. The formulas are:
Change in Time= 55 x (-25) + 438 = -3.1 minutes
Change in Fuel = 5 550 x (-25) + 438 = -316.8 pounds
The corrected time is 51.9 minutes (55- 3.1), and the corrected fuel is 5 233.2 pounds (5 550
- 316.8). Notice that a tailwind is entered as a negative number because it reduces the required time
and fuel. A headwind should be entered as a positive number since it will increase the required time
and fuel.
The table in Figure 4-43 is used to plan for possible diversion to an alternate airport. For
example, in condition L-1 (see Figure 4-44) the alternate is 110 NAM away. It will take 29 minutes
to fly there and make an approach. It will also require 3 400 pounds of fuel, which includes an
additional 15 minutes of holding fuel.
(liST N/IM 20 30 AO 50 60 10 80 90 100 110 120
!WIM AI I ?000 3000
4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 11000 12000
TIME 1b .17 '19 '20 22 ;23 :25 :28 .28 :!9
HIH 2500 2600 2700 2800 ?900
3000 3)00 3200 3300 3400 3500 1600
m:. 283 286 289 292 ?90 300 303 306 308
OIST. NAM 150 160
170 160 190
200 210 220 230
:>o 2SO 260
17000 18000 19000 20000 21000 22000 23000
24000 25000
35 36 :38 .31l :40
:42 :43 .<15 .46 49 .so
FU!'L :1&0U a goo
4000 4100 4200 4300 4400 <1500 <4800 4/00 4800 <4900
TAS 319 323 326 330 33.4
J38 341 3<15 349
353 357 361
DISl NAM 280 290
300 310 320 330 340 360 370 380 J90
OI'TM AIT ?1000 28000
28000 29000 29000 30000 30000 31000 31000
31000 31000
liME. !>3 55 :SG :58 53 1;()()
1.02 1:03 104
105 I 07 108
HIFL 5150 5250 53 SO 5600 S/00 S800 5900 6050 6150 82!>0 63!.0
TAS 372 371! 380 385 388 392 397 397 397 397 3!H
1 Fuel inc;ludu 112 clrmb dtstance en route credit, fuel to cruise remaining distance at LRC
schedule 15 minutes holding at alternate, and 800 lbs. for descent.
2. Tim" includes 112 climb distance credit, time to crUise distance shown at LRC schedule
nnd 8 minutes lor descent. 15 minutes holding is not Included In time.
Figure 4-43 DC-9 Alternate Planning Chart
WEIGHT (START TO AL T) 85,000 70,000 86,000 76,000 82,000
DISTANCE (NAM) 110 190 330 50 240
HOLDING TIME AT ALT (MIN) 15 15 15 16 15
Figure 4-44 DC-9 Alternate Planning Operating Conditions
The conditions specify that there is 15 minutes holding at the alternate. Since Note 2 in
Figure 4-43 specifically states that 15 minutes holding is not included in the time, then we must
add the 15 minutes to the time listed in the alternate planning chart. Wind is not a factor since
both figures deal in nautical air miles (NAM), so you should disregard the wind component
provided in the operating conditions.
29 + 15 = 44 minutes
Landing weight may be calculated by subtracting fuel burn from gross weight as follows:
85 000-3 400 = 81 600 lbs
Flight logs are used to accurately plan the time and fuel required for a flight. In the following
paragraphs we describe all the steps required to complete a flight log.
A. Determine the magnetic courses for each leg and determine the leg distance.
B. Apply variations to the winds aloft.
C. Determine the temperature in relation to ISA.
D. Determine Mach number and convert to TAS.
E. Compute ground speed.
F. Calculate and record the time for each leg.
G Compute fuel flow.
H. Compute total fuel.
I. Determine the reserve fuel.
J. Compute fuel burn to alternate.
K. Add the en route, reserve, alternate, and missed approach fuel to find the total fuel required
for the flight.
Temperature is often expressed as a deviation from ISA which is the standard day temperature
(i.e., ISA - 2 c). This temperature can be computed by the following procedure:
A. Compute ISA by multiplying the altitude in thousands of feet times - 2 c and then adding
15 c. For example: ISAat27 OOOfeet=27 x (-2 c)+15 c =-39 c.
B. Apply the deviation from ISA. ISA -2 c at 27 000 feet= (- 39 c)+ (- 2 c)= - 41 c.
True airspeed (TAS) can be computed from Mach number and outside air temperature (OAT).
Using the CX-2 computer, select "plan Mach#" from the menu, then enter the OAT and the
Mach number at the appropriate prompts.
A. ln the small window labeled "Airspeed Correction" or "True Airspeed", align the arrow
labeled "Mach Number'' with the OAT on the scale adjacent the window.
B. Find the Mach number on the inner of the two main scales and then read the TAS opposite
it on the outer scale.
11 5
Note: Some "CR"-type mechanical computers have a window in which a Mach index is
aligned with a Mach number inside the window. Don't use this is designed to use indicated
temperature and will give an inaccurate TAS when OAT is used.
See the instruction manual of your individual computer for more detailed instructions.
Specific range is the term used to describe the rate of fuel burn per nautical air mile flown. It is
calculated by using TAS and fuel flow only. Wind bas no effect on specific range. To calculate
specific range in nautical air miles per 1 000 pounds, use the formula:
NAM/1 000 = TAS X 1 000-T PPH
TAS should be calculated from the Mach number as in the paragraph above. PPH can be taken
directly from the flight log.
Refer to Figure 4-45, in block 3 of the flight plan, there is the following entry: B/B747/R.
Prefixes in the aircraft type box can be T/ (TCAS equipped), HI (heavy aircraft), or B/ (heavy
aircraft and TCAS equipped). Therefore, the prefix "B" here indicates TCAS and heavy. The ''R/''
changed to "II" in February 1999. The "tr' indicates RNAV/Transponder/altitude encoding
capability. The suffix II means the aircraft is equipped with LORAN, VORIDME, or INS (RNA V),
and transponder with Mode C (altitude encoding capability).
Refer to Figure 4-46, in block 3 of the flight plan, the G following MD90/ indicates the aircraft
is equipped with GPS/GNSS that has oceanic, en route, and terminal capability. The /G indicates
Global Positioning System (GPS)/Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) oceanic, en route,
and terminal capability.
Example l
Refer to Figures 4-47, 4-48, and 4-49, we can find out the ETE from Chicago Midway Airport
to Greater Buffalo Inti, the fuel requirements for the flight according to the following steps.
To solve this problem, complete the flight log in Figure 4-47, using the information given in
the problem:
A. Change the w ~ " ' l d s aloft ofFL 190 at GU (Gipper) from true to magnetic, using the variation
from the flight log (see Figure 4-47). Note: The variation changes with each leg. Winds at
GIJ at FL 190 are 230 true at 51 knots.
230 True
+ 01 o West Variation
231 o Magnetic
B. Find the distance flown for the leg. In this case it is 19 nautical miles, since the L/0 point
is on the GIJ 270 radial at 19 NM. Distance for subsequent legs must be determined by
referring to the en route charts (see Figure 4-49).
C. Find the ground speed for the leg from L/0 to GIJ using a flight computer:
Wmd direction 231 o (calculated in Step A).
ut otftA;n.ttfTifl ttV\1'oatrr: .. 11M U'& CML\'j QPIINT QtlOJ
li'(O: ALI::t I

l ';"Ytt. . r:a .. F
-r--: .... a,.h .,... fMf , .1:"3 ' O:.,

dlt\flr: f:lloh>lt A.:, f"l Pwtk"" n-;?E:u
,1.1 '''1 .. ,
I v :J r:t
1'11 ss

I HO\. rt Cf'
n. Jl) 11.\L l'lALL SI'O
I tfSTII\.< IIO'.jk""o"' "'F
.. cJ "!Yf II tIll- U,\'LL Ofl' l'l'H I'I:N !Wl'i\

lit,\NrJSCII J)ll''l

rL ON 8:)AAI\ II AlTEMK.I-'""E 11. PU:T"t Hlollf I 1 .. U,f"liuNf .\

.. ttatl\
lfi)Uh!l MI\U1'Eft

1\ ;ol

, ... ,
COl("' or "'":,cu-r
;1\"t' P 0-5 J>tn. yr,u !t 'ft lrR fl;"' i ,...loll it ";11'111 !Ill 2,.1_ m"'t r.1'1
WI I I'Jril;
c:. ,ft,rJ Ml a r,; .r-:--J. fl.-4-td 111 lt .r1v.& t41 n-1 tf :uti S' n>. L1 n" , . ,,,, ... , ill"' ; f ""'
._.:ttf l lfSJI. .,..,.r.-11 J.i4i'? .. , ._:foot t ")" " :Ju
l'f.l\ l:tr fNFJ\ 1-l;'lt
fMFmr nJ3 110:1
fHl!f'lt l'OINTS

FRO)( 1'1.1
ITEMP i T.\5



I L'>At4
fi. JY\1
75 ,26 00

29 09:00
OTIIER liATAl lncludos Ta:ori FU\ll 'TI\11: naol PI.T.I.o tt ,...'llllt<l t.y fAib.
vse 12,000 PPH total FUAI Flow From LIO
TIUII I JllT.l. U\f
To Slari Of OescE'OI
Use I 1.000 PPH Total Fuw Flow Fer

Heosor-.e/Aitornata Requ.ircmonls
AI >R'.4 IL
A Approach Rs<;1.ues tlt'\i'! at FJe
Figure 4-45 Fligbt Plan/Fligbt Log (1)
l!: ...
fru;. tl.l'rtiJ..""" Ullililf!\lkAUi:.c,
: .... pq ........... .,...
L1! & I rtd 0:: Pi'!! :,.e..,. t'-. liar

oJ .!HI,, II'-" f I
TI.C' .. "I"" ' ' :aT . vr.
t 41 HKN.t.ff=' AI IPnfUf1;, u ... .. 1'1

: 10


A11.1'l' tm.
tJVi& 11 . ;. .. !lt,.ul' h';!"let .JDU4#'0.t 1trrr...l,tt1lft'"ltt "
''''''"''"" fl'a .:n,. t" ,.,., ... f,.,.1.ft r.-"' ... 1' .}. b , ..,d: ill.)) 'f ...... , .. IJIIIII!'J .. ft'! .. !Jt .... ,.., I
., ... tr,t.,..t" l, . , ... 11 .tc 1
t.-r ... .... .. -- -------
Figure 4-46 Flight Plan/Flight Log (2)
r.,.. II!O< ..... a. c 2tt'"
. .. . .: t; '"' . ....: >.L
SC' CN.._\'t

q "!..., .. U'1
I ;.p, .t.f..,f."C'CA."'t.l t f""lf "

I ' Hr . i
1 II'
S (lt}
AAl1Jj:f P::i"fl
G r lit \;P
.. ,._. ,,
sr:.t I
"1. 7. (
' !Fit
X ....
( Ioll lt
l oll ).!llW

I'I(;,Jrf :)r. c-,,...;.t':
fur ll:7
c;il I f:l . iJ i 'l-
w tk"'a o ... ,,....,,,
:r l w( I I
1.1l l<>-..1 fii'lf Pn- H\"r

L"nl\ 21 1!9 nu
r 't:u:or Tnmatr. lu:'l
. ,,..1. C'll I'' UU. JW. Y'\; snw

t: l'lli'l 00. BC,I.R'
A1 ;oi1NA11i 14
t n,.,,. ... w--, 1Ut 11Jfi:. 'lUV"'n ji,!Pt ...... n tt"-'\1
. ?o\!1

J 20
cant: l .Jttr r!H,NI, ,: nu: ... All
k<u .. :
:""R : 1f &J'\ ':lAt-.,.
t.'IVloi. f.l,..("qAJ.T F"aRPtt-;1 ' M L--..'*r ,.,t!.nVI !\"l'lf JI r
l:hv .. r .'Tm
*'IH &ll lt.S:f!IC. FW tt: '"lC.O"tllrH,J.flr .w11l kt ....a 'tt-.
:.o..., . .u .. T .. "-'-1 .. vrnr,.,, .,.,..." ... .. .... ,.,
fM U;
CLOSE VFR F:..IGYT WITH ___ ____ FSS CN Atlfilli r>.l.

II .!tOM ro i Ai.TITIJJIY. TAS U'IJ TOT J,r.<; T(l'f
--- -
I 'JO ''IJ
I r-!i- I
"- 27111'l

I ft 19() 1'!:->A
I ,___
lou I cR ..
.. 5':4
! Fli9U
1 C.lll jvx!.

:;SA ..
YXU IBIIIo ' '34,--
I .>.:.t\-1'2


ilUF I
. ) : 14:0:t t2l.5


i-- t--<
I V2
r-- r--
BUF ROC i ](.\i})

:?ll .JJ

'- '--
i fJTIIEk l>ATA:
no;Lces Tax j:Jtl TIM I' nd PliPL .-.qvlrM I>)
Lisa t:U) PP11 Tectt.l ual flow ::rom 1/0
Tl!>n: Y\.T.t
To Starr Cl
r::-. ROU'l'l
710 Pi'H Tcto!l Fltw
I ltl!:SEIC\t
Fio&OIVO A!'J t.nerna!u R'.'owrerre"ts.
A Mtssoo Hcqu1es 91 ->i Fulli
Figure 4-47 Flight Plao!FUght Log (3)
__ OO __ ._,_U_IN_O-, IS
Cl!'C Oft
1181 2263
MJ.r;t.IAt OH <.ON
18" 1i18U
N41"SE 84
l:J ,.:,
I l\13. I1J
Ito 8 R!IS :.:;-:
NEWiT 1\
WS$'04 58'

wit7Jti u1
NA2"0Q 11"
1 23

Chao 101
N41"4o 12 ' 1
we619. ;Q:._J
- Tn-..:.1
All aircraft expect rodor vectors to first l!nrovte fix. Expect cleorcnc;e to reque$ted
ohitudclflight level ten minute$ alter departure.
TAKE-OFF RUNWAYS 22LIR, . IC/R, 13LIC: Cli mb runway hooding to 1300'
before turning on coune.
TAKE-OFF RUNWAYS 4l/R: Northbound deporture5 assigned headings 360
(CW) thru 080, turn right climb on heading I 00 until leaving 2400. Thence via
vector ro O$Signed route
OME-EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT: Complete initially assigned turn within 4 DttoE of
Midway. Maintain 3000' or assigned lawor altitude. Expcd clearance to reqtested
altitude 1 0 minutes after deporure.
NON-DME EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT: Comple1e initially ossigned turn south of DPA
R-096, maintain 3000' or lower altitude. Exped clearance to roque$ted
altitude l 0 minutes after departure.

Figure 4-48 Midway Four Departure (Vector)
7 ..

': .
.. ( '
"' "' I

;, t.:;. 0
.. ...
;if _, .
-1- - -
Wrnd speed 51 knots (given on the flight log).
Course 090 (L/0 point is on the GIJ 270 radial).
TAS 160 knots (given in the flight plan in Figure 4-47).
Calculated GS is 196.4 knots.
D. Compute the time en route for the leg from L/0 to GIJ:
Distance 19 NM (determined in Step B).
Ground speed 196.4 (calculated in Step C).
Calculated leg time is 5 minutes, 48 seconds.
E. Since the next question asks for the fuel required for the flight, calculate the fuel burned on
this leg.
ETE is: 5:48 (calculated in Step D).
Fuel flow is 61 0 PPH (in note at the bottom of the flight log).
Fuel burned is 59.0 pounds.
F. Repeat steps for the subsequent legs to fill in the flight log:
MDW L/0 :19:00*
L/0 GIJ 090 160 196 19 :05:48 59.0
GIJ CRL 085 160 200 129 :38:58 392.8
CRL YXU 065 160 219 118 :32:20 328.7
YXU TID 101 160 215 80 :22:18 236.7
:14:oo 121.5
*(given) 2:12:04 1455.7
G. Since the fuel burned from Chicago Midway Airport to Greater Buffalo Inti has been
calculated in Step G (1 455.7 pounds), the fuel requirements are:
Fuel burned: 1 455.7
Fuel for alternate to ROC: 236.0
Fuel for reserve: + 532.5
Fuel requirements: 2 224.2
So, the fuel requirements are 2 224.2 pounds.
Furthermore, refer to Figures 4-47,4-48 and 4-49, the method to fmd out theTAS maintained
to arrive over CRL VORTAC 42 minutes after level-off should be:
A. Detennine the required ground speed using a flight calculator:
Distance flown is 148 NM (distance from L/0 to GIJ to CRL ).
Time is 42 minutes (given in the problem).
Calculated GS is 211.4 knots.
B. Detennine the required TAS:
Wmd direction is 231 magnetic (see Steps A and B of the former question).
Wrnd speed is 51 knots (given in flight log).
Course is 087 (average of the legs).
GS is 211.4 (calculated in Step A).
TAS is 172.8 knots.
Refer to Figures 4-50,4-51, 4-52,4-53,4-54, and 4-55, we can find out the ETE from LAX to
PHX at 0.78 Mach, the total fuel required at the speed according to the following steps.
To solve this problem, complete the flight log in Figure 4-51, using the information given in
:he problem:
A. Change the winds aloft at FL270 from true to magnetic, using the variation from the
airport/facility directory entries for the LAX and PHX VORTACs. Winds at IPL at FL270
are 300 true at 43 knots.
300 True
- 15 East Variation
285 Magnetic
B. Calculate theTAS for Mach 0.78.
ISA temperature at FL270 is - 39 c, i.g., 27 X(- 2 c) + 15 c.
ISA- 2 c = - 41 c.
Using a flight calculator, determine that Mach 0.78 equal 463.1 knots.
C. Find the distance flown for the leg. In this case it is 50 NM. The remarks section of the
flight plan notes that the L/0 point is on the OCN 270 radial at 50 NM. The first leg of the
IMPERIAL THREE Departure is from there to OCN. Even though only one line is used for
the cruise portion of the IMPERIAL 3 departure, each leg of it should be calculated
separately for best accuracy. The same is true of the ARLIN 9 Arrival into PHX.
D. Find the ground speed for the leg from L/0 to OCN using a flight computer:
Wmd direction 285 (calculated in Step A).
Wmd speed 43 knots (given on the flight log).
Course 090 (L/0 point is on the OCN 270 radial).
TAS 463.1 knots (calculated in Step B).
Calculated GS is 504.5 knots.
E. Compute the time en route for the leg from L/0 to OCN:
Distance 50 NM (determined in Step C).
Ground speed 504.5 (calculated in Step D).
Calculated leg time is 5 minutes, 57 seconds.
F. Since the next question asks for the fuel required for the flight, calculate the fuel burned on
this leg.
ETE is: 5:57 (calculated in Step E).
Fuel flow is 9 600 PPH (in note at the bottom of the flight log).
Fuel burned is 951.4 pounds.
G. Repeat steps for the subsequent legs to fill in the flight log:
.;. :i TFQi\ilt)oll.: ;\IISfl')lJt;A (J.U usr c.o.tTl (; 1\Ait:f<HI) QV.t!'l
llllf !><#illll

H:,li;At jVJ:a\ l.-.1
0 910fflii!R
I f'/P( 2 AIRCIW'T !\Pl
' rnue
JRf PO;IT t Tl!.lr. I

tP(CUL 1-l l'f VI1" I
I'TI l}u

I\ X
Pllt!POS>O ill .:;
!., :
LAX l.'iPMrl, W>II'IK i'WC
I 0E$TI(Ul(lj (Piwt .,

UT Tl\lf ;!,ll<lUT II
t:t = utJ ott
PI'R = l't( "'""
""'Jq3 I t.o!lluu
.. u> ,, K'N Jl.z7w54'
... \1,\('ll .ll
11 l'ltEL IIOJ!!t ll 1lTER'4lE Ali!POR!(S) 14 'CAtJI. \i.Jiill tll 'A .. tf\Af l u,\:;J

'7 otSIINllilN Orn<'oMI.I
! I
II COlOR l)f
llUlltJS f'OIIrr!l

TIMK l't!l\L
TEMP TA!I 1:11 LP.C TOT 1-Ht: 1(11'
. AX uo-
IIPi.:l iPL

ltP!"l ,P
l 0
3ZA i, )1\1
..2 3x.l41,
IA!I!n !nt
IArun 9
Radar Vf!C
1-t-- r---
v ,___
:26 'c
OTIUIR DATA: Includes laci Fuel
aacii'LIIu M r"''lm'o<l b7 l'JJI..
NOTB: Use 9600 PPI'I Total Fuel f :ow F10fTI L'O
To Start 0' Da,canl
Use 025() PPH fulal flo .. Fer
Flesurve A10 AllfiJOOiol Re<jJirll"llefllS
A Missed 11ppro1Jcl" 1&0 c;t Fijel
Figure 4-51 Flight PJan/F)jgbt Log (4)

"' ,.



.cror It> . In I
l.AX R- 160 ... __ ..
'lWI><l ()70" V cror ,
.,_., 9 _.....,.,._..,
(lPL3.IPLl {PfLCT Nl\'11
Alrrn.f1 fH1 -;; r l 2.:0 ,.,, ,:.-,..
tur!h4Jl dflaran-.:.J" t' .. f1h:n fl.Jtl ... . II'
f'lwys Sand 7: ,.10 no.t<lnQ 101
'.ertnr tn :il t 'lli Ht:;
OCN R-lli 1 lc; OC!J '/OP t
RNYI 211 :Jrtd- 2.S: ,.,, ,:'fl tlln 2
10 "'-&;1!1F'l\f lt;t
-,cc1oJ to IJ\>. Tr.r.n ,..a
r.,ti)S .!_.
jrM .U 3.0 LA X REAC
'" '''";,., '!E ,:tj

LAX RlGO ocr, i=-?7, to) (l(!H JCP
From t::Ch V0t4 vie OCN ? 053 an<J
JLI lo Jll von. t!Hn -tis Jll
Alt1 1::01 ll t () l"t V(.\R
Tnen \'iJ in:.siynoJ IC,_: tl
27.21'/IIE :no X 09o-....

1>33 t4.c wii,-i!S.l

Dlrec dla:OJIICt' Ire!'" tn>l
'> 71 to.
Stl 20 NM
Oiro<. lrocr loot- hrl
"f'N'r' 2t 2S I!!""
In of LAX A-160 OC'>I 29 NM

JULI/.>11-::-:-t,/ ..!', . :MPtklAl::-t
r.;-: H .. v 1!2.: .? .!f.L I
I "'l; '""' I C"';., ,, " ">
, - .. "' 1
078 - ..... '1153
/(IJM/M ,, :
1111 4i 7 1{( 16



Figure 4-52 Imperial Three Departure (lPL3.IPL) (PILOT NAV)
'" 'tl

"' '
;:; :
u ......

.-- )>
)'- ,..,

m ' ,....

m z r-
-c- " ,.... .,
An IFR Flight Plan (FPL) should be filed to the Air Traffic Services Reporting Office one hour
and a half prior to the desired departure time during preflight direct preparations. Items on the FPL
are as follows (Figure 6-2).
'*' oo m AA ro;
fi' * :tl

J -

I I i I I I
""'"""" ..
AI!.IIIJI.,.IS '\ll.IO!JI "\I!IU
bl4,ol I
-[I] @]
,., e:
li 6
tllllllltA mt Of AflctNt
WMl NIUUll lftl: CAt
..s I R..i
....... ....
. ....
I o,1,4, ol
1111!114 lid
IS (.V:$11$ UUO UVR
-I k 0' 'l 0
Is I 02. Dll 7>U AtH"
... . r::.o
I =
gl'fJUI" if'ti 1H+
ttofSJIMAI'lOfrt AliiOOAOMI .......
MTM .. UOC4Q'J"!
lo .21 (, o I
- IREG/ B-'.llt;o
(}SIt f> EETIZiSJ.l0740 .2.'1>1</vi
J )-
.... ,

hllltC.l ltC'YI'..I.)>?
.. fl..!: Alit
'"' ""
HR$0115 OM IONtO

0 .. PI ' ' .s.z l
Cl:ttit u:
........... ( ....


tr:Jt ti:Jt
..... " ...
..... t



-.. .. .
rMj ccwu
.. @]1 I r 40J .. @J .. I t2LLow l =
A /I
C.HlNA _/ILO}<JJi 'f.R..N
Ill It
ffi:Jtl I=
; I

4111A .. .....
A l'.. :t
Figure 6-2 Fligbt Plan
Bl VTHE TRANSITION (BLH.ARLIN9): Fran1 over BlH VOR r AC vio Blti R-089 and tWA
r- r- R-256 to ARLIN INT. Thence ..
t2A. I 1o9.9
120.9 Rwy 8R-76l
118 7 385 Rwy 8l .26R
z z MOHAI< TR_tJ:ISITION Froon ovur M011AK DME vio GBN R-247
)> and BXK R-215 lo HYORR INT, the" via IWA R-256 to ARlll'l INT. Thonto .
;lO Z . . PliOfNIX Sl<'f HARBOR INTL: Rwy 6, expo-' radar vectal'l after pos,ing
!:: z ARLIN INT to final approach course. Rwr 26, vio IWA R-256 lo TUICEE INT e>.pe<l
Z m radar vedor. prior to TUKEE INT to final approach course.
..0 . ... All SATElliTE AIRPORTS: Exp<1d radar voctors olfor ARliN INT.
126 . .5
- lOST COMMUNICATIONS: After ARliN I NT, vto IWA R-256 and PXR R- 143 to PXR
- <>

NOTE: Arlin Anivol lor turboprop ond turbojet aircraft.

__ NOTE: Blythe TronStrion for aircraft fl240 . 1U.6 PXI!. ;-::;:;..:.
Ill YTHE and above. o,,... IOJ
117 . .( 8LH :....;!; NlJ-;2598'-V/111"58 2t '\
Cha 121 ' fAlCON flflO
33"35 i4 "l5 67' PHOENIX SKY <)
l3, H-2 HYORR HARI!Olt II'ITL <0- '\... TUKEE
N33"16 . .olt>' AMBRR X N33.17 90'
1 teo WliJ"04 1s 41.1 ' ;: P0 wtl1"

\ .V"' ':' '- _, WII2200J' :J ':;> ./
II OOo '\' ;:& "/.)/ \ AIRPARK , #
(JSJ -,},'P--"6Qoo 10000 \ /\oooo- rai)" rt @ ;O li.'

.1 i500 / isoo

0 I
/' (48) ;""' !1\)f !8) \ ) CHANDlER l
SCOlE _.{ ; !'."> AlYS MUNI
N N33 "2776'Wlll"04'i1' , \ tqf<l N33"17 10 it
PlANNJNC INfORMATION tl3J"I6.3.t PAYNT f WilliE, . '
Wl13 "08 75 <> NJJ" Ib W' .;, 113.3 IWA :=-

r- r-





NAVIGATION CAllE ., '\ W11'2"02 O.ol __,. '-..
bolow Fl290.

, -v
hpoct clcoronco to cross ol or !':!':> WI

oj \ l--Chao 80
/ %
000 -----/- PlAt:lliJNG IP>iFOftMATION
z MOHAK ' Ob!>OO - 1\'2.<1- Pl>oonix-Sky Harbor J,tl : Rwy 8: 250 K
x lAS or slower, Rwy 26, 2.80K lAS or ,><
' VEitTICAL NAYIGATION N32.48,99' GILA &CND lower. )>-
clooronce to cron at or Cl>an 11 :l b
0 'b.olow H 2?0 z
l 4 l'i2 tJOTf not to Kolo )>-
Figure 4-54 ARLIN Nine Arrival (ARLIN.ARLIN9)
PKOfNfJ.OEER VAllEY MU!II 1IN'1 ;s N UTC- 1 rll.Nt."lO W\1204 93
147; ! S4 fUU 5(1, IOOLL Jr I J. OX 1, 3 li'A-Sfe f11rnarks
RW't OIR-2$1: 111l:ICI11.100 IASPtl) S-olO. D-50. OT -"JJ VIRL
1!1\'l 01R 'lt:ll. VASI(VZL :-GA 3.0 dplcd 'XlQ' Rg;ll:
lin 151.! REIL VASI(\'21} (;A 3,U" Thld asplea 920'
IIWI' Glt.m: tASPH! 2() t.IIFil
11-!C. lIL
tW1 bl!!REil PVASJIPSIL\-GA JO 40' IHT M1 RFIL 1.' Rii\I'C,
AllrOIIl(II-RU fJe: avbi (\t'I)':IU"Vl& IIUIH) 1400 I)J001 711o>Y$. 'j!IC ,4, .. ue. E SE urc
W t-Gt ,-,.-n 1>11< f,,, Vl'.lliPr ,,.,.; monl114 .llld ultralelll opr 1\'!!S'IJ' ;rpt r. .... i 01l 2!.R .!
,...., c aop'C1irn.lle 1 b"' o' 11>e !Ref
I he IC 6000 n:>r:, I" RN)' o;t-25R Rwr t -1' a13 RUL.
fho.y 11'!\Sllnd RliL.Il>oy 07l P"JASI co Mien '"T dod. 1<3+1
a"d c.e"'on '"'"'rue nri){ILCinz tP:.-250l! lOl5J 3COIII5.0. rr.<o:to er.g.tjj!
PMOUtHOl 122.; 122.2 t;"RESCOr FSS;
I'IICI.Kll ArPIO!, ttN I :>tl7
OI(RVUI(Y Willi IIR ol (f<w; 07P. 251) 12!l.? (Rw-J C.7l 11300-(}IOI)f.: CHO toM l":!l<l
CUlt btl 119 G
ClASS D , ,.u .. wve t.!OC.' -C4r.OZ ()lhor tmo<; CLASS 0
AIDS 10 UVIfoAIION r1 E P'l<'
115 e P)(ll Cl1an l:ll Nl3'25 911' WlltSd 2. J2o'l63'11\ltolfd
WI!TSOIU IOIIMl"f) SCl <1 279
NM ! <> Ud. 1101;>_\1 F LE S.JL.
Unr.Xl.:Cotl<i ,.t,n :.,.r closAia
12! 5tltltlJIIJI.'lt>Pa!!"r
li33 8 IlL IOO,l JEll. OY :, 7. 3. 4 TPA.-S4>e
l :U. ARFc 0
1!11'1 Oll2il s- :;a, 0-170, 07-:>A.'l. DOT 620
Jl'lft CS\: If tiL VASIN1LI G ... 3.0 TCI'< 5!>', Dul'atns.
00 lU! RW VASltVILI .. f.>\ "-C! TCH 60' Rcd
fft'YOU-161.: liiO.lOOXI!IO\ASPH-GRVO> S-30. 0-t'l.'lO DT <100 00"-G7(1 "IIRL
IIVfl 0111: MIIL5R. Pole Prt II<
lf'IIT 21: PEIL '/ASI(V6L) Upper M:l ?5 TCH 90' lOW\Ir GA 3 0 TCH Anlennu.
-IRfiORI llli.U.S: Allotle!td y, 1 r ainlng CIVI turbojet .;dt OJ<:ept PPil. TPII-7.133c 1000: 'tl
Olcfl arcs 26Jll.l500)he.'w dt lfloJ Un!es> by ATC lurOtrf Jdl "''d J11
J2.SOO Ita tlnO on"' ref'l :l&O ,. ;,r te 30CO' MSl ur1!1l <:"t .. ,t;lb,'"ltd on 111\a! ,: y 1e;: Of tc;)St 5 "n''l' lrom
arot 'ee. Fee lo- 1 cMtte-3 lrnvtl cMs 3nd certain re' '{l'"'-' proo.lCII18
A-S m11l.:d io68,1,)())CWT R"') FM :.heoetll or1 0::'-10-II'J
!>00,000 I)OUIIOS L-10111450.000 !Xl<'oc!S . P to OO!W DC !.OO.I)JO
;lOUI>d<. IX..IC :!0'.:0 540.000peurujs.. . lOll I r") F'wyO,R 7bl
gross ... 10,000 co.;nJs OC- 10- 30'ol0 !>10<),000 poJ'-tl5. L- 0: I I
lAJll(l om SOIIPetS A!;OS(OOT, 231-SSS'. LL\VAS.
tclll!llllltlr011Nn5 12!.Z DE" (o:l?J :1%3 U"ICOll JZ2. 95
m:swn ISS ( PRC) Tf I -BOO IIOTAM FlU P11X
PQl 122 o 1
P'!tSCOTT rss
@ _,,, O!P !14.9(053-1461 t74 1!147-2!)8 boe 5:00'1123.7 {1 47-258 af!O
IXl J l'-0 4 (R"''Y OOL blo6000' Rwy 2E.R :13>:>-uao t:!tC 05Z 5$0<J ar.ll b<llo,.)
119 l
TMI11!1.1!Rwy 06L-2611J 120.9tRwvC-8fH
6l) I:!J
HNottllil21 1>5 .Soothl MCOU lllll
Q.US ';ell VFR reJ Cnnrt
PXP Chan 101 lfl!ll !i811' 263;>:>Nid rafld
IUltl .l!l ll'Zl R:,...,26R
tUtl>liU06 3 I PHX 2:) R"'> O!IP. r.s o 1260'. LC.C ba:k cou <4
tle)'Ond 20' <O"!h ol alU'SI!
Figure 4-SS Excerpt from Airport/Facilities Diredory
LAX uo 43 :19:00* 4 sto.o
uo OCN 090 463.1 504.5 50 :05:57 951.4
OCN JLJ 083 463.1 502.7 42 :05:01 802.1
JLI KUMBA 115 463.1 505.4 35 :04:09 664.8
KUMBA IPL 078 463.1 501.0 27 :03:14 517.4
IPL BZA 074 463.1 499.4 46 :05:32 885.3
BZA Mohaklnt 075 463.1 499.0 32 :03:51 615.6
Mohak TIP 067 463.1 494.7 15 :01:49 290.7
TIP HYDRR 035 463.1 473.9 42 :05:19 850.7
HYDRR ARLIN 076 463.1 499.0 19 :02:17 365.3
ARLIN PHX :12:00

1 140.0*
*(given) 1:08:09 11 593.3
In this question, the regulation-required fuel must be calculated using the summary box at the
bottom of the flight plan:
A. Compute the fuel required to fly the flight:
Fuel required is 11 593.3 pounds (see flight plan before).
B. Compute the required reserve fuel (see Step F of the former question):
Time required is 45 minutes.
Fuel flow is 9 250 PPH (given at the bottom of flight plan in Figure 4-51).
Reserve fuel is 6 937.5 pounds.
C. Determine ETE to alternate:
ETE to alternate is 26 minutes (given in the flight log).
D. Compute fuel bum to alternate (see Step F of the former question):
Time to alternate is :26:00 (from Step C).
Fuel flow is 9 250 PPH (given in flight log).
Fuel burn to alternate is 4 008.3 pounds.
E. Add the totals ofStepsA throughD:
En route 11 593.3
Reserve 6 937.5
Alternate + 4 008.3
Total 22 539.1
Furthermore, refer to Figures 4-51, 4-52, 4-53, 4-54 and 4-55, the specific range in nautical
miles per 1 000 pounds of fuel from level-off to the ARLIN Intersection using 0.78 Mach should be
calculated as the following method:
NAM/1 000 is calculated by multiplying TAS times 1 000 and dividing the answer by the fuel
TAS is 463.1 (calculated in Step B of the former question to find out ETE).
Fuel flow is 9 600 PPH (given in the flight log).
NAM/1 000 = 48.2.
Refer to Figures 4-51, 4-52, 4-53, and 4-55. The steps how to fmd the approximated indicated
~ I a c h maintained to arrive over the BZA VORTAC 6 minutes after passing IPL VORTAC are
iiscussed as follows:
A. Determine the required GS:
Distance is 46 NM (see Figure 4-53).
Time is 6 minutes (given in the question).
GS = 460 knots.
B. Determine the required TAS:
Wmd direction is 287 magnetic (300 true from flight log, less 13 CilSt variation).
Wmd speed is 43 knots (given in flight log).
Course is 074 (see Figure 4-53).
GS is 460 knots (calculated in Step A).
Required TAS = 424.6 knots.
C. Calculate the temperature:
ISA temperature at FL270 is- 39c, ig., 27 x (- 2c) + 15c.
ISA- 2 c = - 4t c.
D. Calculate the required Mach number:
TAS is 424.6 knots (calculated in Step B).
Temperature is - 41 c (calculated in Step C).
Required Mach number is 0.715.
The correct loading of an airplane is one of the essential elements in establishing the
safety for aircraft operations. For this reason, the determination of weight and balance lin
the approval of loading procedures are an important part of the airworthiness function speo
regulations. Regulations specify the requirement for establishing each aircraft's weight at
of initial registration, and the requirement for a load data sheet and a loading system. The
system is the approved method that operating crews must use on each flight to establishi
weight and balance.
Apart from the fact that you would be contravening the regulations, if you operate an
in excess of the structural limits, it will inevitably downgrade the strength of the aircraft. C<
overweight operations could also accelerate the onset of metal fatigue induced structural fail
Aircraft loaded in excess of the maximum weight permitted by runway, altitude or tern
limitations cannot be expected to perform as required by the certification standard. Accelera
be slowed during the take-off roll with the result that more take-off run will be require
lift-off the aircraft will climb at a slower rate. In the event of an engine failure, an aircraft
be able to climb at all in the second segment. Basically, overloading erodes the safety
provided by the certification standard, particularly in the case of an emergency, such ru
In the cruise, operations at weights more than permitted by performance standards I'l
slower cruise speed for a given engine power setting. Fuel consumption will also be higher.
Finally, although an overweight landing may appear to be less of a problem, there is al'
possibility oftyres bursting, brakes failing and over-running the end of the runway.
Calculation of aircraft balance will determine whether the center of gravity position i
permitted limits. This ensures that the aircraft will remain fully controllable throughout tb
Adverse balance situations can cause marked deterioration in longitudinal stability and e<
the point where an aircraft may become uncontrollable. For example, if the CG is located too far
forward, it may be difficult to raise the nose on take-off.
An aircraft flown outside the approved weight and balance limits is being operated in an area
where compliance with the required levels of airworthiness has not been demonstrated. Such
operations clearly put the safety of both aircraft and occupants at risk.
There are some differences in weight definitions for different types of aircraft. For a Boeing
727-type aircraft, the weight and balance calculation is usual to start with the basic operating weight
(BOW). It is defined as the basic empty weight of the aircraft plus the weight of the required crew,
their baggage and other standard items such as meals and potable water. However basic weight does
not include usable fuel or payload. Payload, as the name implied, is the weight that is carried which
can generate revenue. In some sense, BOW is just the same as the dry operating weight (DOW)
defined for B737 and A320 aircraft below.
For A320 aircraft, basic weight is defined as the aircraft weight without any load. This means a
weight not including crewmembers, pantry load, fuel load and traffic load but including the
commercial arrangement of the corresponding version and the unusable fuel. But for Boeing 737,
the basic weight of the aircraft is the empty weight plus items of an operational nature otherwise.
For both of them, dry operating weight (DOW), usually as the start of the aircraft weight calculation
is the weight of the aircraft in operating configuration. It is obtained by addition of the basic weight,
crewmembers and pantry load for A320. As for B737, DOW is also referred to as adjusted basic
weight, allows for these variations such as the type and length of flight, and will have different
values for the same aircraft conducting different operations.
Take-off fuel is the weight of the inboard fuel onboard at take-off. Operating weight is defmed
as the weight obtained by addition of the dry operating weight and the take-off fuel. Total traffic
load is the weight of the payload including cargo loads, passengers and passengers' bags. Zero fuel
weight is obtained by addition of the total traffic load and the dry operating weight Take-off weight
is equal to the addition of the zero fuel weight and take-off fuel. Trip fuel is the weight of the fuel
necessary to cover the normal leg without reserves. At last, the landing weight, as the name implied,
is the weight at landing. It is equal to take-off weight minus trip fuel.
Following summary should help you remember how various weights are calculated:
Dry Operating Weight (DOW)
+Payload (Total Traffic Load)
= Zero Fuel Weight
+Take-off Fuel
= Take-off Weight
- Planned fuel burn to destination (Trip Fuel)
= Landing Weight
Dry Operating Weight (DOW)
+ Take-off Fuel
= Operating Weight
The center of gravity of an aircraft is the point about which the aircraft would balance if it
were possible to suspend it at that point The total weight can be assumed to be concentrated at, and
act through the CG, as shown in Figure 5-l.
Figure S-1 Center of Gravity
For most aircraft, the CG position will change whenever the weight of the aircraft changes or
when items are moved within an aircraft. The most common reason for a changing CG position
during a flight is the reducing weight of fuel as the flight progresses. For most modem swept-wing
transports with a large proportion of fuel stored in the wings, reducing fuel contents will concentrate
the remaining fuel toward the wing root. This result in a forward movement of the CG as fuel is
To assist in deciding where everything on and in an aircraft is positioned, and what effect each
item might have on the CG position, a reference datum is chosen arbitrarily at some point along the
length of the aircraft. The relative position of the various items to be considered is measured from
this datum. The horizontal distance from the datum to any component of the airplane or to any
object located within the airplane is called the arm, or station. In some aircraft, the datum is located
ahead of aircraft. Since there can be no components ahead of the datum plane, all items used to
compute the weight and balance of such an airplane will have positive values and usually are
referred to as inches aft the datum.
A moment is the turning effect of a force about a point, and is found by multiplying the force
-. :t:S arm. By totaling the weights and moments of all components and objects carried, the point
::;!re a loaded airplane would balance on an imaginary fulcrum can be determined. This is the
1.:... -:>lane's CG.
The center of gravity of a properly loaded airplane must always fall somewhere along the
=ean aerodynamic chord (MAC). The CG is often expressed as a percent ofMAC. If the CG were
:: the leading edge of MAC (LEMA C), it would be at 0% of MAC. If it were at the trailing edge of
.f.-\C (TEMAC), it would be at 100% of MAC. See figure 5-2. In the design and certification stage
:::e manufacturer will specify the full length of the MAC, and the actual position of the ~ C
.eading edge (LEMA C) relative to the reference datum.
-- ---- ----
~ n :;> -.J 'l>
Cl c
c c 0
0 0 ':> 0 0 C'
! O n ~ . , .
~ ~
c -::>
~ 1\.)
c 0 c
0 c
Figure 5-2 Center of Gravity Terms
- w ::: (.., o-.
8 0 0
In loading systems, a percentage MAC is generally used to defme the fmal computed aircraft
CG position, and moment index units (which will be described later) are used to calculate the
variation in CG position as fuel and payload are added.
An aircraft will have certain extreme center of gravity limits which defme the furthest points
forward and aft of the datum being used. However, quite often these limits vary as the weight of the
aircraft changes. A diagram which shows limiting CG position for various weights is called a CG
envelope, and a typical example is shown in Figure 5-3.
Such variations of CG position with weight may be for structural reasons or for purely balance
purposes. It is important to ensure that the CG position for a given weight falls within the envelope
and not merely between the fore and aft limits (known as the CG range).
In the CG envelope shown in Figure 5-3, the forward and aft limits of the CG vary from 18.4%
MAC and 33.0% MAC respectively, at a gross weight of 10 000 kg with a CG position of 20%
MAC, and then the CG position is within the envelope (position A). However, if the aircraft is
loaded so that at a weight of 18 000 kg, it has a CG position of 20.5% MAC, then the CG position is
just outside the forward limit of the CG envelope (position B). A CG position of 32% MAC at a
weight of20 000 kg is outside the aft limit of the envelope (position C).
e 1a
; 18 000
14 000
12 000
13 300
-------- -8.
12 000
1 0 0 0 0 ~ - - r - - . - - - r ~ ~ - - r - - . - - - . - - . - - - r - ~ ~ ~ - - - r - -
14 18 18 20 22 24 28 28 30 32 34 38
Location of CG u % MAC
Figure 5-3 A Typical of CG Envelope
Clearly, it is not only important to calculate the CG position but also to compare it with the CG
range. Both weight and CG position must be used together to ensure aircraft loading is within limits.
This is particularly important in large transport category aircraft where the range of CG positions
and weights vary considerably.
With very large aircraft, numerous combinations of passenger seating positions are possible
when passenger numbers are less than the number of seats (i.e. the aircraft is not full). In such
situations it would obviously be very time consuming to calculate CG position by plotting each seat
position with its weight on a complex loading sheet. Loading zones are an approved method of
calculation CG position by dividing the aircraft cabin into zones and simply adding up the weight
within each zone. This zone weight is then considered to act through a single position for that zone,
regardless of the actual zone weight.
Despite of the flexibility that loading zones provide, it is nevertheless very important to control
the center of gravity position by ensuring that zones are loaded evenly, or within the limits
permitted by the CG range of a particular aircraft. The seat allocating system of an airline is
primarily designed for this purpose.
In this section, two computation methods will be introduced, one for B727 and the other for
B737-300 and A320.
Center of Gravity Computation
For most early aircraft like B727, the first step in the solution weight and balance problem is
the calculation of the total weight of the aircraft (gross weight) and the total moment. Of course, the
actual moment is often converted to a moment index for the purpose of simplifying the computation.
The moment index is the actual moment divided by 1 000 for a Boeing 727-type aircraft in airline
transport pilot (ATP) test. To detennine the total weight and moment index, a separate weight and
moment must be calculated for the BOW, the passenger loads in the forward and aft passenger
compartments, the cargo loads in the forward and aft cargo compartments, and the fuel loads in fuel
tanks l, 2, and 3. We show the solution process with the following example.
A 8727 has a basic operating weight at 105 500 pounds and the basic operating index
(moment/1 000) is 92 837. See Figure 5-4. There are 18 passengers in the forward compartment
(FWD Comp) and 95 passengers in the aft compartment (AFT Comp ). The weight of the passengers
can be detennined by use of the passenger loading table in the upper left-hand comer of Figure 5-5.
Since neither 18 passengers for the forward compartment nor 95 passengers for the aft compartment
l.E ol
Bas.c lorl.ox
Maxtnum Ta!(eofl S'ope
Max:num Taxeoll 1 Landing Crosswind Component
Ma1:m\im Taktilof! I Tailwmd Component
B.t&IC ol)"laltng WoJtgh1
' ii!axnutn Zero Fuel Watglll
Mallimutn Taxi W11l,;n
M;.;(imum Takeoil Weight (Brake Release}
Maxurtulll '" fi1oht Wetght {Flaps .1Q)
(Flaps .:o)
Walomum "9 {Cfnp:. 301
Figure 5-4 8727-Table of Weights and Limits
180 9 Inches
860 5 l'lclles
92.837 0

32 knots
12 knols
105.500 pounds
:38.500 pounds
185.700 pounds
f 84.700 pount!s
55. 500 pouni:>
000 UOJOJ5
155 000 po1.1n.Js
143 000 pounds
are listed in the table, the weight must be calculated by multiplying the number of passengers times
the average weight per passenger. A quick examination of the table reveals that the average
passenger weight is 170 pounds. The weights are:
FWD Comp = 18 x 170 = 3 060 lbs
AFT Comp = 95 x 170 = 16 150 lbs
The Moment Index (MOM/1 000) is calculated by using the formula:
Weight x Arm/1 000 =MOM/I 000
Numbct fDOO
Walgltl MomoJ!l
Forwtud Hold At/ H<>ld
Lt>. 1000
Atm Arm
Fonvot d Compartment Lb11.
sno.o /1&6. 1)
1\J t.7CIO
1G 2.550 I 484 J.400 tt,tiJO
20 I 979
f)tiV :t.??.(t 4,(1<11
2r. 4.250 ;2 .>73 3.000 V.U40 ... o"
n 4.930 2S69 2.oon :>,3Jll
1. 000 GftO 111(;-to
AFT CC>ITtpQttmenl Cor>lrold1028.0
aoo b ..
1'J I 70U 1, 748
600 '"4tl6 10(1
211 3 4:JO 3,495 '>110 hA:I
!-i t:JO 5,24 3
401\ 4Uft
i800 6,990
!100 ?O.C .,.,20
:'.0 1$ !>00 l!,738
10 21)0
100 r.o fli"
JO 1 I 900
;l(l 1'i r,oo
90 15.:.00 15,728
17.476 NOTE: 1'ho:lle c:omputtlon ar to
110 1$700

be u .. ..s tor laallng
1:n 2(1 4100

purpo&.,. o nly.
I'J'l :!<! GIO
TANKS 1 & 3 (EACH)
1'1019/tt Arm Momonr Arm Alomt:tnl Wotghl Arm Motruml
l.b . !ODD LO::. IODO Lb. 10()(1

.. I}
917 5 7 799 914 5 l!0,57E
1 (\C)O fl.13,( 9.000
orL:? 8.255 :0!3.000
014.5 :11 ,0::.4
.... IU'J T.l :1442 9,!lOO 8 , 711 2.3,500 911 4
I:J.OC)f) ':.lih1 I \1941 10,000
916 8 9.106 24,1100
... , 3 21 ,'iM!.f
hl,5Cil vOG 4 10. 500
9 1G 6 <!,1'124 !'114.3 22,40C
lt,'.)()(J I(IC 1 1.) ()57
!l l 6 s 10 082 ;:!S,OO() \114.2 22,fl5!'.
II !.t)C"' II 63 11,500
!<16.3 Hl637 ?-!,.SOtl 914.2 23,3'2
1:::.:.oo 'Y-7.
,, 970
1:!.000 916 1 10,"'93 20,000 9 1.4 '
f-'ULl CAPACI TY "(See note at lower lettll
2 6,500 'l14 1 24.244
:u.oon n 2 4,6711
wote: "11,500 915.1 16,929 27.500 !i13.!1 2b,:3:o>
tor Tni\ 2
19 000 915.0 17.38!> 28.000 9139 ::!5,589
to, t-2 ooo tn
'9 soo
91.;.9 17,841
, ooo IbN boon pur ...
?0 000 914.9 18,21i8
29 000 '.11!..7
?t . !)/
potto')' omh'"ud
:>0 50C 914.!1 18.7:io3
1'13 1 ;l\i.'f!.-4
21000 914 7 19.209 :JO 000 913 r;
27, 403
21 500
!2l4 tl 11>.664
;>',> 000 914.6
Figure 5-5 B727-Loading Table
The arms for the passenger compartments are listed at each top of the compartment loadmg
tables after the words "Forward Compartment Centroid" and "Aft Compartment Centroid". The
az:n for the forward compartment is 582.0 inches, and the aft compartment arm is 1 028.0 inches.
:he easiest way to apply the 1 000-reduction factor is to move the decimal on the arm three places
-J the left (i.e., 582.0"/1 000 = 0.582). In the example used, the moment/! 000 for the forward and
m passengers compartments (rounded to the nearest whole number) are:
FWD Comp Moment/1 000 = 3 060 x 0.582 = 1 781
AFT Comp Moment/1 000 = 16 150 x 1.028 = 16 602
The weights for the forward and aft cargo holds are stated as follows: there is 1 500 pounds in
:..1e forward hold and 2 500 pounds in the aft hold. The moment/! 000 can be determined from the
:abies in the upper right-hand comer of Figure 5-5. For example, the moment/1 000 for 1 500
pounds in the forward cargo hold is determined by adding the moment/1 000 for 1 000 pounds (680)
and the moment/1 000 for 500 pounds (340). If necessary, the moment/! 000 can also be
determined by multiplying weight times arm (divided by 1 000). The moment/] 000 for the cargo
holds are:
FWD Hold = 1 020
AFT Hold= 2 915
Fuel tanks 1 and 3 are the wing tanks and are always loaded with the same weight of fuel.
They will always have the moment/1 000 as well. The number 2 tank is the center fuselage tank and
will often have a fuel weight different from tanks 1 and 3. It will always have a different
moment/1 000. In the example, the fuel load in tanks 1 and 3 is 10 500 pounds each and that the
load in tank 2 is 28 000 pounds. The moment/1 000 for each is determined from the table in the
bottom portion of Figure 5-5. The moment/! 000 can be calculated, if necessary, by multiplying
weight times arm (divided by 1 000). Notice that the arm varies with the fuel load in each tank. The
moment/! 000 for tanks 1, 2 and 3 respectively is:
Moment/1 000 = 10 451
Moment/1 000 = 10 451
Moment/1 000 = 25 589
The total weight and total moment/1 000 is the sum of all the items discussed above. The total
weight and moment/1 000 are:
Weight Moment/1 000
BOW 105 500 92 837
18PAXFWD 3 060 1 781
95PAXAFT 16 150 16 602
FWD Cargo 1500 1020
AFT Cargo 2 500 2915
Fuel Tank 1 10 500 10 451
Fuel Tank 3 10 500 10451
Fuel Tank2 28 000 25 589
Total 177 710 161 646
The center of gravity in inches aft of the datum line can be determined by using the formula:
CG =Total Moment I Total Weight
Since these questions use a moment index instead of moment, it is necessary to modify
fonnula by multiplying the total moment/total weight by the reduction factor (1 000). The fonnul'
then be<:omes:
CG = (Total Moment Index I Total Weight) x 1 000
Using the weight and moment/1 000 we calculated the above:
CG = {161 646/177 710) x 1 000 = 909.6 inches
The center of gravity of a properly loaded airplane must always fall somewhere along the
mean aerodynamic chord (MAC). The CG is often expressed as a percent of MAC. The CG's
percent of MAC is calculated by:
A. Determine the CG in inches aft of LBMAC the distance datum to LEMAC
from the CG in inches aft of Datum. The distance from datum to LEMAC is given ir
Figure 5-4 as 860.5 inches. This is used for all calculations of percent of MAC for tb(
B727. The CG in inches aft of datum is calculated in the previous paragraph. Using thos(
CG (inches aft ofLEMAC) = 909.6- 860.5 = 49.1 inches
B. Detennine the CG in percent of MAC by dividing the CG in inches aft ofLEMAC by the
length of MAC. The length ofMAC is the distance in inches from LEMAC to TEMAC. !1
is given in Figure 5-4 and is 180.9 inches. The fonnula is:
CG (%of MAC)= (CG in inches aft ofLEMAC I MAC) x 100%
Using the numbers from the above:
CG(% ofMAC)=(49.1 I 180.9) x 100%=27.1%
Finally, we flnd that the CG is located 909.6 incht-s aft of datum or at 27.1% MAC.
Stabilizer Trim Setting
The correct horizontal stabilizer trim setting is
very critical for proper take-off performance of jet
aircraft. The main determinants are the CG location
and possibly the flap setting. Some aircraft, such as
the DC-9, have their stabilizer trim indicators
calibrated in percent of MAC, so it is necessary to
calculate the CG to know the trim setting. Other
aircraft (such as the B737 and B727) have their trim
indicators marked off in units of nose up trim. In
such cases it is necessary to refer to the trim table to
determine the proper setting for a given CG
The stab trim setting table at the left side of
Figure 5-6 is used to determine the take-off trim
setting for a 8727. Flap setting and CG location in
---- - f-1 .,
''u Ni::>::.;F:__
111 ., J."l l , ,, 0 , .,
I >? 6 IIJ I 7 114 u
I 1 c; 1'4 ; I J.S
_!!l 7
I". I 'j 3 G. I I;/ I 1
/1) :> ,,.. & .6 t l.l
U 1 i '; ;1:4 ;;
__ j_ '> :F1
lf. 4 J) I 4 "1.'4 I :. 11'1
18 4 ,,,, 1 ;114
;w 1 ;;,.. I 4 4 1 14
'l<' l Ll ; J:4 4
;: . ; ;::u ; ::: ::
111 l li! 41 1:? ? 11;>
I<' 7 h' I I 'J <: 110!
Figure 5-6 Stab Trim Setting Table
oercent of MAC are used to determine the setting. For example, if the CG is at 28% of MAC and
the flaps are set at 15 the stab trim setting is 4-1/2 units ANU (Airplane Nose Up).
The purpose of the B737 and A320 load sheet and balance and trim chart are to provide an
orderly method of determining the aircraft weight at certain critical stages (zero fuel, taxi, brake
release and landing); and at the same time determining the corresponding CG position for each
stage. Completion of the sheet also allows the aircraft horizontal stabilizer setting for the particular
take-off flap setting to be determined. The following example uses B737-300 (148 version) as
sample aircraft. The load conditions are:
Load distribution:
FWD Hold 1 (baggage 1 500 kg, cargo 400 kg, mail 95 kg) 4 400 pounds or 1 995 kg
AFT Hold 4 (baggage 1 500 kg, cargo 300 kg, mail 195 kg) 4 400 pounds or 1 995 kg
40 passengers in FWD Passenger Compartment (6 600 pounds or 2 994 kg)
50 passengers in MID Passenger Compartment (8 250 pounds or 3 742 kg)
48 passengers in AFT Passenger Compartment (7 920 pounds or 3 592 kg)
Wmg Fuel Tanks (Fuel tanks 1 and 2)
Central Fuselage Tank
Total Fuel Weight
Taxiing Fuel
Take-off Fuel
Trip Fuel
20 087 pounds or 9 111 kg
5 696 pounds or 2 688 kg
25 783 pounds or 11 799 kg
225 pounds or 99 kg
25 558 pounds or 11 700 kg
19 800 pounds or 9 000 kg
The average passenger weight is 75 kg (165 pounds), including the hand baggage weight The
DOW is 32 930 kg, and the Balance Arm (arm) is 652.9 inches (20.3%MAC).
Load Sheet & Load Message
The load sheet is used to indicate and compute the weight loads. The weight calculation is
usual to start with the dry operating weight (DOW). If there is no adjustment to crew or panty, the
basic weight equal to the DOW, so enter the same value, in the example is 32 930 kg. in the basic
weight box in the top left hand comer of the load sheet, and the dry operating weight box
immediately under it, as shown in Figure 5-7. Then enter the take-off fuel of 11 700 kg in
corresponding box and get the operating weight of 44 630 kg.
These columns, for determining the allowable take-off weight (TOW) and allowed traffic load,
are on the top right side of the form. There are three columns titled zero fuel, take-off and landing.
which are used to calculate the maximum weight at take-off limited by maximum zero fuel weight
(MZFW), other take-off limits [such as field length, climb requirement etc, except for the MZFW
and maximum landing weight (MLDW)] and 11LDW respectively.
Usually, these maximum weights have been given before the weight and balance calculation.
IlLII! i.l i
Ofltt:IIMll)n nrc:llFfATf/tiUF tHill/.lS
1.11 H N.lwtiCHISit;JO"O<:'lf.MS Passongor Alrcrnft
Mr;Y [l.n", 'I1!SIO.'{ cmw
_:1 pj !:ll:hlll .111._: __ [ I HI! i U! I I I! lll.O[IIILi !1
J l
1;:> Toke-oil Wcoqht lind Allowed Trultic loolf Check
Crew I
\'il:ICIIl$ rcn Q ITAKEOFF

+I !

r:rip Fuel

I y
=' l:::t
1219 :31"> m iGHT f Oil
b'.4.1/ E !<JW 0 forl 17lo19
I f I I
T akc-ofl Fuel

I ()pr-,.nJb)Wtt;tc
JJ.'JJ i I I I I I I
(MVP Mli.C::itJS T AAI f't)(L)
+1 I ' T I 1 I I I
1 t4ljlii lw
/t:; 3 1717
J .
I I f T
=rr TT T J
t I , I rT
\'leioht Obt11bution
Weigh! Tol81s
OEST f M I ;.JF ICh !In!
No. Pes.. I .'leCilt No. Pc::. I Weccnt

Ttl I I I
81 1/EOt'J : //;/V) : :
cl I
. L .I/.1D
I PAP r:.l .JWJI/ I
i I

I "t5

T I I ':I; .,w,l'l.1:
.IJ:::u5. e
. .
T,f I I ! I
I ! I
1 I
b>AXtl : l .ri.rv 1
.. ,
,.1 . .: 1,; .... .. , . ;.:::.
. .
.. ........ , ,_.;. ' f!! . , .,.1
' T\
./ .41 .( .. .0/ .
lr I I I
I l
9 I I
I l
c tl
.PAXIJ I . .PIJllf I

I I I . T l I .1i .I .
. /
. n
I I j_
cl I I
.I'Mll I I

.ll ./ 4/ ./
0 , Q/

41 ,,.,95 01
4.+11 1 I
Si. , .
Total Passenger WerQht + t
TOTAL -RAFFIC LOAD _I . ' J l.d 1::1. I I JD
, .. .. : .. ,
looo0 11 iR
.:-- .
.. ...
I _, I I I
,1 IJ '.
.. .
Ory Operating Weigh!

\IIIOER\.0-'0 OHOAE LMC IHL1-'liiff.
k tfOIU
,.. _ ... utc + I I 1
Ocll I " \.'It'
\NO X .ovtEt;;HT JAIU.I SJ ..
Take-ell Feel I 1 I I I I I I
+ t
rva IJlNUS T AJCr ru;u
B>l)t-.eo ...... c;c..d..,..
t;) . 5 I I T
2fW .!1:1l!f:i. ,;
I lMC t
I I lAY 'l).
U.AX Aoj. TOW I I ! I

-:.MAC ___:fL_
Ttip Fuel

I l!

':.MACJiQ_ TOTI>I._..L2L


lMC TctJ!
! ,
by: A(lptO'ICd by.
Figure 5-7 Load Sheet for 8737-300
We can get the MZFW limited TOW of 60 007 kg by addition of the MZFW of 48 307 kg and the
:ake-off fuel of 11 700 kg in the left column, and the MLDW limited TOW of 60 709 kg by
subtracting trip fuel of 9 000 kg from MLDW of 51 704 kg in the right column. The lowest among
the three limited TOWs is the allowed weight for take-off, that is 60 007 kg in the left column. Next,
enter the operating weight of 44 630 kg which has been obtained previously, in corresponding box,
and then the allowed traffic load can be obtained by allowed weight for take-off minus operating
weight, that is 15 377 kg.
Enter the number of passengers in appropriate boxes in ''NO. OF PASS" column in the middle
left hand side of the form. The term "M", "A", "Ch" and "Inf' denote males, female adults, children
and infants respectively. In this example, all the passengers are assumed to be males and the total is
138. Then enter the cargo, baggage and mail weight in corresponding box according to the load
distribution given in the example as the sample load sheet shows.
The column in the bottom left hand comer of the load sheet is provided to enter and
determine the various weights. The total traffic load is obtained by the addition of total weight of
3 990 kg in holds and total passenger weight of 10 328 kg. In this example the weight of
14 318 kg is entered. Next, enter DOW, take-off fuel and trip fuel figures and then calculate the
actual zero fuel weight, take-off weight and landing weight for current flight, they are 47 248 kg,
58 948 kg, 49 948 kg respectively. Care must be taken to ensure each of these weights is not
greater than the corresponding maximum weight limit.
ln the "traffic load check" column at the bottom center of the sheet, enter the allowed traffic
load and the total traffic load in appropriate boxes. The "underload before LMC" is then obtained
by subtracting the total traffic load from the allowed traffic load, i.e., IS 377 minus 14 318 equals to
1 059 kg.
Finally, the boxes in the column at the bottom right hand comer will be entered later after the
CG positions are calculated on the balance and trim sheet
Balance and Trim Chart
The balance and trim chart indicates the influence of load distribution on the airplane's CG. It
serves the purpose of ensuring safe balance condition and determining the CG position at ZFW and
TOW as well as the trim setting for take-off.
The first step is to calculate the dry operation index (DOl) by the formula presented at the
bottom left comer of the load sheet, that is,
INDEX= (ann- 648.5) x DOW I 29 483
DOl = (arm- 648.5) x DOW I 29 483 + 40
where: DOW- Dry Operating Weight (given in kg);
Arm- the distance from 0 station to CG position at DOW (in inch);
648.5 - Reference Station for calculating the index, i.e., the distance from 0 station to
CG datum (in inch).
Using the number of the example:
DOl= (652.9- 648.5) X 32 930 I 29 483 + 40 = 44.9
Enter the 00144.9 in the dry operating weight box at the top left corner of the chart. If there is
no adjustment to DOl, enter the same data in ADJ. dry operating index box on the left. Once the
DOl has been computed, the next step is to find the zero fuel CG position. The influence of payload
distribution on the index movement will be given by the different scales for different compartment.
NO. BOEING 737-308
FUGHTHO.: ____ _

STATION: _______ _
;. r:r:-1'::>
TAX><S I z R:U.
IOW'r.II .. C j!J. 0

{I@ 1/// I/ Il l I I I I I I/// I I I I I// '/,
- .
:o 20 Stl !iO
Figure S-8 Balance and Trim Cbart for 8737-300
. ..s shown in Figure 5-8, enter the loads of holds and passenger numbers in corresponding
::5 :.n compartment load column at the top left hand side of the chan. Then, enter the dry
index scale line with the value of 44.9 and draw a vertical line until it intersects the first
diagonal scale line. From here, this vertical line, representing the CG position, is moved in the
:::-.::ion of the arrow at the left hand ends of the horizontal scale line, the appropriate number of
:sions in accordance with the scale of each zone. Note that the scale is different for each zone;
to be used in each zone is defined at the left end of each zone. In the first zone (FWD
-.:.d), the scale of this zone is defined as 1 division per 200 kg, i.e., each division represents 200 kg .
.: :he given example, from the point of intersection, proceed horizontally to the left as indicated by
10 divisions for 1 995 kg. You will see that each zone has an arrow pointing either to the
;::1, for a load which will move the CG forward, or to the right, for an aft movement of the CG
.-\iter the vertical line has been moved the appropriate number of scale divisions horizontally, it is
:::en extended vertically down to intercept the next zone (AFT Hold) diagonal scale line. This
becomes the starting point for movement on next zone. This process is repeated for
each zone until the last zone (AFT PASS COMPT) scale movement is finished. If in the process, a
zone has no scale arrow and scale lines for it, then the vertical is extended downward until the next
zone is reached.
From the end point of the horizontal line in the last zone, draw a vertical line down until the
line enters the CG envelop at the bottom of the chart as shown in Figure 5-8. The zero fuel line is
now extended down until it intersects the horizontal line representing the ZFW. In the example, the
ZFW is 47 248 kg, so a mark is made on the vertical line. The point where the two lines intersects
represents the zero fuel CG position, which in this case, is clearly inside the envelope. It is useful to
mark that point with a "Z" or "ZFW". For the purpose of determining the zero fuel CG in terms of
% MAC, a line should be drawn from the zero fuel CG position, upward and parallel to the nearest
MAC line radiating from the index scale at the bottom of the envelope to% MAC scale at the top of
the envelope. In this example, this gives a zero fuel CG of about 21% MAC.
The influence of fuel on the airplane CG will be determined by the total fuel index table at the
lower left side of the chart. Enter the fuel load in each tank and the total fuel weight of 11 700 kg in
the fuel load column. Using the total fuel index table for the weight of 11 700 kg, you can see the
weight falls between the 11 500 kg and 12 000 kg weight values. This means the fuel index falls
between -3.1 and - 3.9 units and it can be obtained by interpolation calculation. lt is -3.5 units in
this example.
Move horizontally fuel index units of -3.5 from the zero fuel index scale on the index scale
line just above MAC-diagram on the chart. A minus index units indicates the movement to the left
and a positive value denotes a rightward movement In a graphical sense, this movement represents
that the fuel index is added to the zero fuel to give the take-off index. From the end point,
draw a vertical line down into the CG envelope to intercept the horizontal line representing the
aircraft weight at take-off (i.e. TOW). This intercept determines the aircraft CG position at take-off,
and must be within the envelope. Mark it with ''T.O". From this point, draw a line upward and
parallel to the nearest MAC radiating line to give the take-off CG position of 19% MAC in the
From the calculated point on the MAC scale (19% in the example), a line is drawn
vertically up to the appropriate stabilizer scale for the flap setting for take-off. Note that there is
a line for 15 flap and another for 1 o and 5 flap. The take-off flap setting would be determined
during performance calculations. In the example, the flap setting used is 5, which gives a
stabilizer of 4

Finally, zero fuel CG position and take-off CG position in terms of% MAC as well as the
stabilizer setting are entered in the appropriate boxes in the lower left-hand comer of the balance
and trim chart.
The weight and balance calculation for an A320 aircraft is similar to that for a Boeing 737-300.
The load sheet is used to record and compute the weight loads and the load and trim sheet allows
the determination of aircraft CG location (% MAC) in function of dry operating weight, pantry
adjustment, cargo loads, passengers and fuel on board. Hereafter is a description of the load and
trim sheet utilization (see Figure 5-9).
Dry Operating Weight = 93 000 lb and CG = 26 %
Deviation or adjustment =200 lb in zone F
Cargo = 10 500 lb as : cargo 1 = 4 500 lb ; cargo 3 = 2 500 lb cargo 4 = 1 000 lb ; cargo 5 =
2 500 lb
Passengers (165 lb I PAX)= 156 PAX as: cabin OA = 40; cabin OB = 66; cabin OC =50
Fuel =30 000 lb
A. Report master data in CD.
B. Compute dry operating weight index using the formula indicated in and repot in@.
C. Report weight deviation in @ and read corresponding index in @.
D. Calculate corrected index and report in .
E. Report cargo weight and PAX number in (J).
F. Enter index scale with corrected index and proceed through cargo and passengers scales
as shown in. Then, from the final point (cabin OC), draw a vertical line down to the zero
fuel line @.
G. Check intersection with zero fuel line determined in table is within the Max zero fuel
weight and zero fuel operational limits, if not rearrange cargo loading.
H. Read in table @ fuel index correction and carry forward in scale @. From this point draw
a vertical line down to take-off weight line @.
I. Read take-off CG on CG scale .

AIRBus lfr'.. LOAD and TRIM SHEET A320-231
W ro
93 000
soooo .. FROM: ITo:

WT 51.9

._ ZONES 7 0, F to
f?4 WEIGHT(Ib} 1:%8:200 CABIN OA OB 'I'
2 PAX} (86 PAX) (56 PAX}
- ' . .

( 5 %: J tjj tjtJlOUlOtlltlltll O:... ... ""'.
WEIGHT // . ' ' H!
DEVIATION 0 v.%; i' !
.2oo tb .1, 1 u I
f+--1--..... 6
2001b I 1 1.3


0 ,. ?

CARGO, t/.1 4 500 vI I I I I I I I I I I I I J1NI I I I I I I I 1177 /4._ \000 LB
(.;' CARG03 2500 1\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \' \000 LS
\.:_, CAMGO 4 1 000 f\_ '\_ '\_'\_ ''\,. '\_ '\_ '\_ 1_ '\_ '\,_ '\'\_'\. '\_ '\\._'\_ \ l 000 LB
CA.nGC 5 2 5DO [\ \\\\\\\ 'i \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ SOO lB
CABIN OA 11111111111111111 .r 11111/77777 !( s PAX
C._B;N oc \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ '\\ \\\ 5 PAX ).
I lo'IDEXl>j l' I ll ,' lltft:ll!lllljll ll lllljllltllll d t llllll lt'lljtlltltlll lllll!lltl lllllj : lll
J %MI\::; 20 2, 5 3f' 35 :0
w::t::;rli \ I \ I I l B f I l/ 77.TTT77;

,,:: \\\ \\ 1, . Jl/ 1 1 1777777777;

+I 26000 2 ' "" . \ \ I I \ - I .l J.. I I I I I I I II/' / / /
90J0 +1 27000
2 \!O 1\\\ 'I ' : j i ///,
,. l.f_l7TT177jj///
G2 :: \\\ \ \[\ \ N-,.

120 \\\\ \f . I// I ,

,,o . \\\ ' II I I
18000 3 36000 8 g
:; :: <

3 39CCO 1C 80 I ' ; ' I " 11/f(//i/7777777
220C:l 3 40:100 , , I . ' . I . ., ... 'I ' .. I 'I ' I ' I " I .. I I'" : .. "I' "I " .. I
n JO 4.0 I 50 60 70 80 90 100
T.O. U$0 appro;:.ria:e RTO'SJ; cr WICK REFTA8!.E.
LOG : I.W<o CG comx:tro:: :;:1 soood ar.d
Figure 5-9 A320 - Load and Trim Sheet
Anytime weight is either added to or subtracted from a loaded airplane, both the gross
weight and the center of gravity location will change. The solution of such a problem is really a
simplified loading problem. Instead of calculating a weight and moment for every section of the
aircraft, it is only necessary to compute the original weight and moment and then the effect the
change in weight had. Often in these problems the original CG is expressed in percent of MAC
and it is necessary to convert this to an arm for the entire aircraft. Hereafter is an example for
DC-9, what is the new CG if the weight is removed from the forward compartment under
Loading Condition WS-1 (see Figure 5-10).
WS-1 WS-2 WS-3 WS-4 WS5
LOADED WEIGHT 90,000 85,000 84,500 81,700 88,300
(%MAC) 22.S":c. 28.4% 25.5%
(POUNDS) 2.500 1.600 3,000 2,100 3.300
MAC- 141.5 INCHES, LEMAC - STA 549.13, AND -.30.87 INDEX AA\4
Figure 5-10 DC-9-Weight Shift
It is sometimes necessary to convert a CG position expressed in percent of MAC to the CG in
inches aft of Datum. This is just the reverse of the process described above. This is done in two
A. Convert the CG in percent of MAC to CG in inches aft ofLEMAC. This is done by using
the fonnula:
CG (inches aft ofLEMAC) = (CG% ofMAC I 100%) x MAC
Load condition WS-1 gives a CG of 22.5 % and a length of MAC of 141.5 inches. The
formula is:
CG (inches aft of LEMA C) = (22.5% I 100%) x 141.5 = 3 I .84 inches
B. Add the CG in inches aft of LEMAC to the distance from datum to LEMAC. In Figure
5-10, LEMAC is 549.13 inches aft of datum.
CG (inches aft of Datum)= 549.13 + 31.84 = 580.97 inches
Use the original weight and CG to calculate the original moment/1 000. Next, use the weight
change and station to determine the moment/! 000 change.
Original Weight 90 000
Weight Change
New Weight
87 500
Moment/1 000
52 287.08
- 880.25
51 406.83
A reduction in weight results in a reduction in moment/! 000, while an increase in
results in an increase in moment/1 000.
Determine the new CG:
CG = (51406.83 I 87 500) x 1 000 = 587.51 inches
Convert CG to percent of MAC:
CG (inches aft ofLEMAC)= 587.51-549.13 = 38.38 inches
CG (% ofMAC)=(38.38 + 141.5) x 100%=27.1%
When a portion of an aircraft's load is shifted from one location to another, the CG of the
.oaded aircraft will change as well. Also, the CG will follow the weight That is, if weight is shifted
:earward, the CG will move rearward as well; and if weight is shifted forward, the CG will move
forward. To calculate the effect of a weight shift on CG position, three numbers must be known: the
weight shp:ted, the distance the weight was moved, and the total weight of the aircraft. The formula
used is:
Change in CG = Weight Shifted x Distance Shifted I Total Weight
Another question asks what the effect on CG is if weight is shifted from the forward to aft
cargo compartment under load condition WS-1 (see Figure 5-10). Load condition WS-1 gives the
total weight as 90 000 pounds and the weight shifted as 2 500 pounds. The distance shifted is the
difference between the forward compartment centroid (352.1 inches) and the aft compartment
centroid (724.9 inches), which is 372.8 inches (724.9- 352.1).
Note: These centroids are distances aft of the datum line. The index arms are distances from
the CG index and will be discussed in a later example. Notice however, that the difference between
the two index arms is also 372.8 inches [144.9- (-227.9) = 372.8]. The solution is:
Change in CG = 2 500 lbs x 372.8 inches I 90 000 lbs = 10.4 inches
If weight is shifted forward, the CG will move forward as well. This is expressed by writing
the distance shifted as a negative number. If weight is shifted from the aft to the forward cargo
compartment, the distance shifted is _-372.8 inches. For example, a question asks about such a shift
of 1 800 pounds with an aircraft total weight of 85 000 pounds. The formula is:
Change in CG = 1 800 lbs x (-372.8 inches) I 85 000 lbs = -1.89 inches
If require an answer in percent of MAC. The change in CG can be converted to a percent of
MAC by using the formula:
Change in CG (% ofMAC) = (Change in CG I MAC) x 100%
The CG sometimes can be expressed an index arm. Index arm is the distance, in inches, from
an index set at a point close to the normal CG location. A positive index arm is a point aft of the
index and a negative index arm is a point forward of the index. For example, Figure 5-10 shows
LEMAC as having an index arm of -30.87 inches or 30.87 inches forward of the index. The index
point for all questions on this test is 580.0 inches. The CG in index arm is calculated by the
CG (Index Arm) = CG (inches aft of Datum) -580 inches
Using the data from load condition WS-5, the formula is:
CG (Index Arm)= 585.21 - 580 = +5.21 inches
In addition to ensuring that an aircraft is loaded within its weight and balance limits, it is
important to make sure that the floor of a cargo compartment is not overloaded. The load limit of a
floor is stated in pounds per square foot The questions on the test require you to determine the
maximum load that can be placed on a pallet of certain dimensions.
For example: what is the maximum weight that may be carried on a pallet which has the
dimensions of 37 inches x 39 inches, when the floor load limit is 115 pounds per square foot, the
pallet weight is 37 pounds, and the weight of the tiedown devices is 21 pounds?
The first step is to determine the area of the floor (in square foot) covered by the pallet. This is
done by multiplying the given dimensions (which calculates the area in square inches) and dividing
by 144 (which converts the area to square foot).
37 inches x 39 inches I 144 square inches = 10.02 square feet
The next step is to determine the total weight that the floor under the pallet can support, by
multiplying the area times the floor load limit given in the question.
10.02 square feet x 115 pounds per square foot= 1 152.39 pounds
The final step is to determine the maximum weight, which can be placed on the pallet by
subtracting the weight of the pallet and the tiedown devices from the total load limit.
1 152.39 pounds -58 pounds= 1 094.39 pounds
The weight on the pallet must be equal to or less than this number (1 094.39, in this example).
If it is more than this number, the combination of cargo, pallet, and tiedown weight would exceed
the floor load limit A review of the test questions reveals that the closest answer choice is always
equal to or slightly less than the floor limit. All the calculations in this section were performed with
a calculator carrying all digits to the right of the decimal point forward for the next step of the
problem. The explanations show only two places to the right of the decimal.
A variation of the pallet loading problem is to determine the minimum floor load limit (in
pounds per square foot) required to carry a particular loaded pallet For example: what is the
minimum floor load limit to carry a pallet of cargo with a pallet dimension of 78.9 inches x 98.7
inches, and a combination weight of pallet, cargo, and tiedown devices of9 896.5 pounds?
The first step is to determine the floor area, multiplying the dimensions and dividing by 144
(78.9 x 98.7 I 144 = 54.08 square feet). The second step is to determine the minimum required floor
limit by dividing the total weight of the pallet, cargo, and tiedowns by the pallet area (9 896.5 I
54.08 = 183.00 pounds per square foot). The correct answer must be at or above this weight (183.00
pounds, in this example).
The national airspace is divided into controlled airspaces and uncontrolled airspace. The
controlled airspaces include Class A, Class B, Class C and Class D airspace, while the uncontrolled
airspace is called Class G airspace (Figure 6-1 ).
Class B
Class G
Class A
Class C

( . ....._,_.
Figure 6-1 Airspaces
The Class A airspace is high-altitude airspace, the bottom of Class A airspace is at flight level
(FL) 6 300 meters. There are altogether 28 high-altitude controlled airspaces by now. No person
may operate an aircraft within Class A airspace unless a proper authorization from ATC has been
received prior to entry. During flight within Class A airspace, you must comply with the Instrument
Flight Regulation (IFR) and obtain separation between aircrafts from ATC. In addition, you must
keep essential vertical separation from obstacles.
The Class B airspace is middle-low altitude controlled airspace, which extends from FL 600
meters to FL 6 000 meters, and divided into 37 middle-low altitude controlled airspaces by now.
Having received a clearance from ATC, you may enter the Class B airspace and keep IFR
separation between aircrafts given by the ATC. When the air condition meets Visual Flight
Regulation (VFR), the pilot could file visual flight and keep VFR separation between aircrafts after
being authorized by ATC.
The Class C airspace is approach controlled airspace, which extends from FL 600 meters up to
FL 6 000 meters and extends from tower controlled airspace to radius 50 kilometers or air corridor
laterally. No person could enter class C airspace unless he has received a clearance from the
approach controller. During flight within the approach airspace, you should comply with IFR and
keep not only the longitudinal separation between aircrafts given by the controller, but also the
vertical separation between the aircraft and the obstacles. When the meteorological condition meets
VFR. you may apply visual flight and keep visual separation if you have received the clearance
ghen by the approach controller.
The tower controlled airspace is defmed as Class D airspace, which extends from the airport
ground level to the first holding level, and includes the traffic pattern. No person may operate an
aircraft within the tower airspace unless a proper authorization from the tower controller has been
received prior to entry. The pilot should keep IFR separation between aircrafts during flight
within the tower airspace, and keep vertical separation between the aircraft and the obstacles. The
pilot could apply for VFR flight if the meteorological condition meets the minimum condition of
Except for the tower controlled airspace, the airspace between the surface and FL 600 meters is
uncontrolled airspace (Class G airspace). Prior to entering the uncontrolled airspace, pilots need
only to file flight plan. During flight within the uncontrolled airspace, pilots should keep separation
from other aircrafts by himself under IFR or VFR condition. The ATC has no responsibility for the
aircraft's safety.
The airspace management department authorized by the State Council and the Central Military
Commission sets special airspaces for political or military needs, as well as science tests. The
special airspaces include danger airspace, restricted airspace and prohibited airspace.
The danger airspace is divided from the territorial sky or the airspace above open sea abutting
to China. The airspace management department must announce the time of effectiveness of the
danger airspace by means of disseminating NOTAMs (Notices To Airmen). Civil Pilot can't fly into
the danger airspace unless a proper authorization from ATC has been received.
For some reasons of military or science tests, the airspace management department sets
restricted airspace above China's territory authorized by the State Council and the Central Military
Commission. No one may operate a civil aircraft within the restricted airspace during its effective
The prohibited airspace is set for some particular uses or the people's benefits. No person may
operate a civil aircraft into the prohibited airspace unless he has been authorized by relative airspace
management department
SECTION B NOTAMs (Notices To Airmen)
NOTAMs are time-critical information notices, which are either temporary in nature or not
known about far enough in advance to permit publication in charts and other such data. NOTAM
information includes such things as airport or runway closure due to maintenance, changes of
'":.!vigation aids and communication frequencies, radar service availability, as well as snow situation
::1 the airport and other information essential to a planned route, landing operation procedure.
'-:OTAMs are so important that pilot must read them carefully during preflight preparation. There
;:e three types ofNOTAMs altogether: Class 1, Class 2 and SNOWTAM.
Class 1 NOTAMs is more urgent than Class 2 NOTAMs generally. Class 1 NOTAMs must be
:!isseminated 7 days ago before it becomes effective. Class 1 NOTAMs includes A, C, and D three
series at present.
Series A NOTAMs is put up by ATMB (Air Traffic Management Bureau) NOTAMs Office to
some foreign international NOTAMs Office, which has set up Class 1 flight information exchange
relationship with China. In addition, it must be broadcast to international airports Flight Information
Office (FlO) and regional flight information center NOTAMs Office of China.
Series C NOTAMs is released by ATMB NOTAMs Office or regional flight information center
~ O T A M s Office to domestic airport FlO and China Civil Aviation Flight College (CCAFC).
Series D NOTAMs is issued by airport (CCAFC included) FlO to its own belonged regional
flight information center NOTAMs Office.
Series A NOTAMs uses Universal Time of Coordinate (UTC) because it is issued to foreign
NOTAMs Office, but Series C and D NOTAMs take Beijing Time because they are issued to or
from domestic airports FlO, CCAFC, and regional flight information center NOTAMs Office.
No matter what series of the NOTAMs, their identification is NOTAM, and NOTAMN is a
new NOTAM, NOTAMC is a NOTAM that will cancel an issued NOTAM, NOTAMR is a new
NOTAM that will replace a previous NOTAM.
The following NOTAMs are two typical examples of Series A NOTAMs:
ZCZC PYO 199 081039
(A 0351/97 NOTAMN
Q) LBSR/QIOASII/B/ A/000/999
C)9708291035 EST
ZCZC PY0388 081953
(A 1702/97 NOTAMC Al700/97
Class 2 NOTAMs is issued at regular intervals to relative department by international
NOTAMs Office of CAAC flight information center. Class 2 NOTAMs includes series A and series
C. Series A should be disseminated 25 days before hand to oversea's relative departments, but series
C should be disseminated to domestic regional flight information center NOTAMs Office 15 days in
SNOWTAM is a special type of NOTAMs that takes fixed fonn to reflect the snow and ice
condition on the airport surface. SNOWTAM should be put out by certain airport FlO to ATMB
NOTAMs Office, domestic regional flight information center NOTAMs Office and other relative
airports FlO. If SNOWTAM need to be issued to foreign airports, it should be transmitted by
ATMB NOTAMs"C5ffice. SNOWTAM should be disseminated hourly according to the variation of
the snow or ice on the surface, and the first SNOWTAM must be sent out one hour and a half prior
to the desired first take-off or landing time. The longest effective time of a SNOWTAM is 24 hours.
Following is an example ofSNOWTAM:
151605 ZBBYNYX
(SWZB0004 ZBAA 11151408
C) 18L F) 5/5/5 H) 5/5/5
In order to ensure the aircraft's flight safety, pilots must carry on preflight beforehand
preparations and preflight direct preparations. If pilot and dispatcher signed the dispatch release
together, the aircraft may take-off with a flied ATC clearance.
Pilot makes preflight beforehand preparations in the FlO one day prior to the departure time.
Pilot must read NOTAMs carefully and send the flight application form to Air Traffic Services
Reporting Office prior to 15:00 Beijing Time. The flight application should be authorized at least 5
hours prior to the desired departure time with an approved telegram, and if you don't receive the
telegram. you could think it has been approved. Pilots should keep in mind that you couldn't think
the flight application has been approved without an authorized telegram when you file a temporary
flight task.
An IFR Flight Plan (FPL) should be filed to the Air Traffic Services Reporting Office one hour
and a half prior to the desired departure time during preflight direct preparations. Items on the FPL
are as follows (Figure 6-2).
'*' oo m AA ro;
fi' * :tl

J -

I I i I I I
""'"""" ..
AI!.IIIJI.,.IS '\ll.IO!JI "\I!IU
bl4,ol I
-[I] @]
,., e:
li 6
tllllllltA mt Of AflctNt
WMl NIUUll lftl: CAt
..s I R..i
....... ....
. ....
I o,1,4, ol
1111!114 lid
IS (.V:$11$ UUO UVR
-I k 0' 'l 0
Is I 02. Dll 7>U AtH"
... . r::.o
I =
gl'fJUI" if'ti 1H+
ttofSJIMAI'lOfrt AliiOOAOMI .......
MTM .. UOC4Q'J"!
lo .21 (, o I
- IREG/ B-'.llt;o
(}SIt f> EETIZiSJ.l0740 .2.'1>1</vi
J )-
.... ,

hllltC.l ltC'YI'..I.)>?
.. fl..!: Alit
'"' ""
HR$0115 OM IONtO

0 .. PI ' ' .s.z l
Cl:ttit u:
........... ( ....


tr:Jt ti:Jt
..... " ...
..... t



-.. .. .
rMj ccwu
.. @]1 I r 40J .. @J .. I t2LLow l =
A /I
C.HlNA _/ILO}<JJi 'f.R..N
Ill It
ffi:Jtl I=
; I

4111A .. .....
A l'.. :t
Figure 6-2 Fligbt Plan
If the actual weather condition meets the minimum meteorological criteria, pilot-in-command
and dispatcher must sign together in the dispatch release before contacting with the ground
controller. Following is a typical dispatch release (Figure 6-3).
X )l X./!it PJ
"j. X X AIRliNES
If! "

!& It!. j$ t!::
If! -

a;f l1iJ
ilf iiT $ El 'ltll s B<t flil
tit iE
tt m e iC
fi tt t;t



s m .u;
T i6t
m f.i


4 Ff m .11

"t llll
til B1 m
l-'1- X
Figure 6-3 Dispatch Release
As we learned in section C, an alternate airport must be listed in the flight plan and the
dispatch release. In fact, pilot should select a departure alternate and (or) an arrival alternate.
If the weather conditions at the departure airport are below landing minimums and at or above
take-off minimums in the certificate holder's operations specifications, a departure alternate must be
listed in the dispatch release. Weather at alternate airports must meet the alternate weather
minimums in the operations specifications. In addition, the maximum distance to the departure
: . . . : ~ : n a t e for a two-engine airplane can't be more than 1 hour from the departure airport in still wind
;:h one engine cruising. The distance to the alternate airport for an airplane with three or more
=::gines can't be more than 2 hours from the departure airport in still air with one engine
Alternate airport for destination- Domestic Operation Air Carriers: Unless the forecast
.\'eather conditions at the destination meets following criteria, an alternate airport must be listed in
:.1e dispatch release for each destination airport; If the weather at the first listed alternate is marginal,
!t least one additional alternate must be listed. For the period from 1 hour before to 1 hour after the
estimated time of arrival:
A. The ceiling must forecast to be at least 450 meters above the MDH (or DR) or 600 meters
AGL, whichever is higher; and
B. The visibility must forecast to be 4 800 meters or 3 200 meters greater than the applicable
instrument approach visibility minimums, whichever is greater.
Weather at alternate airports must meet the alternate weather minimums in the operations
Alternate airport for destination- International Operation Air Carriers: An alternate airport
must be listed in the dispatch release for all IFR flights longer than 6 hours. An alternate airport is
not required for an international flight if it is scheduled less than 6 hours and the weather forecast
for the destination meets certain criteria. For the period from 1 hour before to 1 hour after the
estimated time of arrival:
A. The ceiling must forecast to be at least 450 meters above the visual circling approach MDA
or the mstrument approach MDA (or DA) or 600 meters AGL, whichever is higher; and
B. The visibility must forecast to be 4 800 meters or 3 200 meters greater than the applicable
instrument approach visibility minimums, whichever is greater.
Besides these conditions, an alternate airport is not required for a certain route that has been
authorized without an alternate airport, if the airplane bas sufficient fuel.
Weather at alternate airports must also meet the alternate weather minimums in the operations
The alternate weather minimums include MDH (or DH) and visibility, which could be
calculated by reference to the authorized operations minimums of the airport selected as alternate
A. For an airport with only one set of approach facility, MDH (or DH) must be added at least
120 meters, and visibility must be added at least 1 600 meters;
B. For an airport with two or more sets of precision approach facilities and with different
runways, DH must be added at least 60 meters, be added visibility must add at least 800
meters, whichever is higher from two lower runways.
Pilots must keep in mind that alternate weather minimums are for planning purposes only and
do not apply to actual operations. If an air carrier flight actually diverts to an alternate airport, the
crew must use the actual landing weather minimums shown on the instrument approach procedure
chart for that airport.
As an airline pilot, you can't operate an airplane in Class A, B, C or D airspace under IFR
condition unless you have filed an IFR flight plan and received an appropriate clearance from the
tower controller.
Usually, IFR clearances contain following items:
A. Aircraft identification (usually flight number);
B. A clearance limit (usually destination);
C. Authorized SID or transition route;
D. Route of flight;
E. Flight Level;
F. Other special information, such as SSR transponder code, fHght instructions after take-off: etc.
The following examples are two typical ATC clearances:
A. "China Southern 3403, cleared to Chengdu via BH three departure, flight planned route, FL
9 000 meters, aquawkA2101."
B. "China Southwest 4102, cleared to Chengdu via flight planned route, Flight Level9 600
meters, aquawk A0631, after departure maintain runway heading, climb and maintain 900
meters QFE. When airborne, contact (Beijing) approach 129.0."
The words "ilight planned route'' replace the route listed in the FPL. The tower controUer will
still state the destination airport, the FL, the SID and the SSR transponder number. When you
received an ATC clearance, you can't deviate from it (except in an emergency) unless an amended
clearance is received. If you are uncertain of the meaning of an ATC clearance or the clearance
appears to be contrary to a regulation, you should request a clarification immediately. When you
received a clearance, you should always read back controller's instructions quickly.
For a typical transportation airport, pilots usually apply for following several clearances from
the ground controller before take-off.
The first clearance is push back. In order to save stop time of the landing airplane, pilots
usually stop the airplane face to the waiting room. Pilots should request push back prior to the
estimated time of departure. If the ground controUer anticipates longer delay for IFR flight, he will
establish gate hold procedure. The idea is to hold airplane at the gate rather than cause congestion
and unnecessary fuel bum on the taxiways while waiting for an IFR release. Ground controller will
instruct airplane when to start engines.
The second clearance is start up. Pilots must request start up after the aircrafts have been
pushed back. Occasionally, an aircraft will be held pretaxi due to taxiways traffic heavy. If this
happens to an aircraft waiting for taxi, the ground controller should notify the pilot-in-command of
the time of take-off.
The third clearance is pretaxi. After start up, the pilot-in-command should call ground
;::1rroller for taxi. Pilots must taxi aircrafts along the given taxiways to a clearance limit, which
..,:, -uall.y is the holding point outside the take-off runway.
Following is a conversation of pilot-in-command (P) and ground controller (C).
P: Wuhan ground, CXN4308, 10 minutes before start up, destination Chengdu, request ATC
C: CXN4308 is cleared to Cbengdu via flight planned route, flight level 9 600 meters, aquawk
A3435. After departure, maintain runway heading, climb and maintain 900 meters on QFE.
Contact Wuhan approach 119 .1.
P: (read back).
C: That's correct.
P: Wuhan ground, CXN4308, request departure information.
C: CXN4308, departure runway 09, wind 80 degrees, 6 meters per second, visibility 3
kilometers, temperature 23, dew point 20, QFE 1023.
P: Runway 09, QFE1023, CXN4308.
P: Wuhan ground, CXN4308, stand 7, request push back and start up.
C: CXN4308, push back and start up approved, temperature 23.
P: Ground, CXN4308, request taxi.
C: CXN4308, taxi via taxiway C and X to holding point runway 09.
P: Taxiway C and X, runway 09, CXN4308.
P: Ground, CXN4308, approaching holding point runway 09.
C: CXN4308, contact tower 130.0.
P: Tower 130.0, CXN4308.
On 26 Feb, 2001, CAAC formally issued and enacted "The rules and regulations for aircraft
aerodrome operating minima" (Regulation No, 98) (CCAR-97FS-Rl), which provided the
principles of take-off minimums.
A. Avoidance of adverse terrain and obstacles.
B. Aircraft operating capability and performance.
C. VISual navaids available.
D. Runway condition.
E. Navaids available.
F. Malfunctions (such as engine failure).
F. Adverse weather including runway contamination, side wind etc.
Normally, take-off minimums are described only by using visibility. However, if the obstacles
must be seen and avoided during departure, take-off minimums should include visibility and ceiling
and the exact position of the obstacles should be marked out on the procedure published. Moreover,
if an SID specifies minimums climb gradient required by obstacle clearance and the aircraft can
meet the gradient, take-off minimums can be described only by visibility.
The ceiling of the take-off minimums should be at least 60 meters higher than the
controlled obstacles and be rounded to 10 meters.
For single engine aircraft, ceiling not below 100 m, visibility not less than 1 600 m.
Multi-engine transport take-off minimums:
Basic Standard
Visibility for two engine aircraft is 1 600 m; visibility for three/four engine aircraft is 800 m.
With this standard, the alternates of the selected airport should meet the following requirement:
A. The weather and equipments of alternate is supportive of landing aircraft with engine
failure, the aircraft can at least climb to the MSA of the route and maintain that altitude to
the alternate of the departure airport.
B. One/two engine aircraft, the distance to the departure airport is normally no greater than the
distance covered by the aircraft in one hour with one engine failure at cruise speed in calm
C. 1bree/four engine aircraft, the distance to the departure airport is normally no greater than
the distance covered by the aircraft in one hour with one engine failure at cruise speed in
calm wind.
The above mentioned requirements also applies to the airports with take-off minimums less
than the landing minimum of the runway available with engine failure.
Expanded Standard
For turbine aircraft with two or more engines, if the flight performance and cockpit equipments
are typically fit for low visibility operation and the flight crew qualified (see CAAC Regulation
N0.5), in accordance with the runway visual equipments, the standards specified in Figure 6-4,
which are less than the basic take-off minimums, can be employed.
The visibility required to avoid the obstacles or see them clear is the shortest from DER to
the obstacle plus 500 m or 5 000 m, which ever is smaller. But for CAT AlB aircraft, the minimums
visibility should be no less than 1 500 m, for CAT CID aircraft, the minimums visibility should be
no less than 2 000 m.
Visual NAVAJD available
high intensity r/w side lights and middle lights with 3 RVR observing point 150 200
r/w side lights and middle Lights (no RVR observing point) 200 250
r/w side lights and middle line markers (no RVR observing point) 250 300
r/w middle line markers, no light (only daytime) 500 500
Figure 6-4 Expa.nded Standard
This section is limited to rules and procedures common to most, or all approaches, or
procedures that may be used in connection with published instrument approaches.
Contact and visual approach are both lFR authorizations to proceed to an airport visually. A
visual approach may be authorized by A TC to reduce pilot or controller workload and to expedite
traffic by shortening flight paths to the airport. When requested by the aircraft and if so prescribed
by the appropriate A TS authority an arriving aircraft may be cleared to descend subject to
maintaining own separation and remaining in visual meteorological conditions if reports indicate
that this is possible. For successive visual approaches, radar or non-radar separation shall be
maintained until the pilot of a succeeding aircraft reports having the preceding aircraft in sight The
aircraft shall be instructed to follow and maintain separation from the preceding aircraft. Transfer of
communications should be effected at such a point or time that clearance to land or alternative
instructions can be issued to the aircraft in a timely manner. The weather must be VFR and the pilot
must report either the airport or the preceding aircraft in sight. Either the pilot or A TC may initiate a
visual approach. A contact approach may be initiated only by the pilot. If a pilot-in-command
reports or if it is clearly apparent to the A TC unit that he or she is not familiar with an instrument
approach procedure, the initial approach level, the point (in minutes from the appropriate reporting
point) at which procedure turn will be started, the level at which the procedure turn shall be carried
out and the final approach track shall be specified, except that only the last-mentioned need be
specified if the aircraft is to be cleared for a straight line approach. The missed approach procedure
shall be specified when deemed necessary. If visual reference to terrain is established before
completion of the approach procedure, the entire procedure must nevertheless be executed unless
the aircraft requests and is cleared for a visual approach. A particular approach procedure may be
specified to expedite traffic. The omission of a specified approach procedure will indicate that any
authorized approach may be used at the discretion of the pilot.
Succeeding aircraft shall be cleared for approach when the preceding aircraft:
A. has reported that it is able to complete its approach without encountering instrument
meteorological conditions; or
B. is in communication with and sighted by the aerodrome control tower and reasonable
assurance exists that a normal landing can be accomplished.
Separation shall be provided between an aircraft cleared to execute a visual approach arid other
arriving and departing aircraft. The weather need not be VFR but the aircraft must be clear of the
clouds, have at least 1 mile visibility and be able to proceed to the landing airport visually. An IFR
flight may be cleared to execute a visual approach provided that the pilot can maintain visual
reference to the terrain and:
A. the reported ceiling is at or above the approved initial approach level for the aircraft so
cleared; or
B. the pilot reports at the initial approach level or at any time during the instrument approach
procedure that the meteorological conditions are such that with reasonable assurance a
visual approach and landing can be completed.
When an airport bas ILS or MLS approaches to parallel runways at least 4 300 feet apart, ATC
may conduct approaches to both runways simultaneously. The pilots will be informed if
simultaneous approaches are in progress. To ensure safe separation between aircraft, radar
monitoring is provided on the tower frequency. A pilot must report any malfunctioning aircraft
receivers if he/she has been informed that simultaneous approaches are in progress.
Parallel runways may be used for simultaneous instrument operations for:
A. independent parallel approaches; or
B. dependent parallel approaches; or
C. segregated parallel operations.
Independent parallel approaches may be conducted to parallel runways provided that:
A. the runway centre lines are spaced by the distance specified in Annex 14, Volume I; and
B. instrument landing system (ILS) and/or microwave landing system (MLS) approaches are
being conducted on both runways;
C. the aircraft are making straight-in approaches;
D. the missed approach track for one approach diverges by at least 30 degrees from the missed
approach track of the adjacent approach;
E. an obstacle survey and evaluation is completed, as appropriate, for the areas adjacent to the
fmal approach segments;
F. aircraft are advised of the runway identification and ILS localizer or :MLS frequency;
G. radar vectoring is used to intercept the ILS localizer course or the MLS fmal approach
H. a no-transgression zone (NTZ) at least 610 m wide is established equidistant between
extended runway centre lines and is depicted on the radar display;
I. separate radar controllers monitor the approaches to each runway and ensure that when the
300m (1 000 ft) vertical separation is reduced;
J. if no dedicated radio channels are available for the radar controllers to control the aircraft
until landing.
As early as practicable after an aircraft has established communication with approach control,
--= :llrcraft shall be advised that independent parallel approaches are in force. This information may
:.e ?rovided through the automatic terminal information service (ATIS) broadcasts. In addition, the
shall be advised of the runway identification and the ll.-S localizer or MLS frequency to be

Independent parallel approaches to parallel runways spaced by less than 1 525 m but not less 1 035 m between their centre lines shall be suspended under certain weather conditions, as
by the appropriate A TS authority, including wind shear, turbulence, downdrafts,
::-osswind and severe weather such as thunderstorms, which might otherwise increase as localizer
:ourse and/or MLS final approach track deviations. to the extent that an unacceptable level of
.:eviation alerts would be generated.
Dependent parallel approaches may be conducted to parallel runways provided:
A. the runway centre lines are spaced by the distance specified in Annex 14, Volume I;
B. the aircraft are making straight-in approaches;
C. suitable surveillance radar with a minimum azimuth accuracy of 0.3 degrees (one sigma)
and update period of 5 seconds or less is available;
D. as and/or MLS approaches are being conducted on both runways;
E. aircraft are advised that approaches are in use to both runways (this information may be
provided through the A TIS);
F. the missed approach track for one approach diverges by at least 30 degrees from the missed
approach track of the adjacent approach; and
G. approach control has an override capability to aerodrome control.
A minimum of 300 m (1 000 ft) vertical or a minimum of 6 km radar separation shall be
provided between aircraft during turn-on to parallel ll-S localizer courses and/or MLS final
approach tracks. The minimum radar separation to be provided between aircraft established on the
as localizer course and/or MLS final approach track shall be:
A. 6 km between aircraft on the same as localizer course or MLS fmal approach track unless
increased longitudinal separation is required due to wake turbulence; and
B. 3.7 km between successive aircraft on adjacent as localizer courses or MLS final
approach tracks.
Occasionally, a pilot will be asked to fly an instrument approach to a runway and then fly a
visual "sidestep" maneuver to land on a parallel runway. This sidestep maneuver should be
executed as soon as possible after the runway environment is in sight.
If a pilot is being radar vectored when an approach clearance is received, he/she must maintain
the last assigned altitude until the aircraft is established on a segment of a published route or
approach procedure unless a different altitude is assigned by ATC. If a flight is being radar vectored
to the final approach course and intercepts a published portion of the course, the pilot may not
descend to the published altitudes until cleared for the approach. If a flight bas not been cleared for
approach while on a radar vector and it becomes apparent that the current vector will take it across
the final approach course, the pilot should advise ATC of the situation. Do not tum to intercept the
approach course unless cleared to do so.
When vectoring to intercept the ILS localizer course or MLS final approach track, the final
vector shall be such as to enable the aircraft to intercept the ILS localizer course or MLS final
approach track at an angle not greater than 30 degrees and to provide at least 2 km (1.0 NM)
straight and level flight prior to ILS localizer course or MLS final approach track intercept The
vector shall also be such as to enable the aircraft to be established on the ILS localizer course or
MLS final approach track in level flight for at least 3.7 km (2.0 NM) prior to intercepting the ILS
glide path or specified MLS elevation angle.
A minimum of 300 m (1 000 ft) vertical or a minimum of 6 km radar separation shall be
provided until aircraft is established:
A. inbound on the ILS localizer course and/or MLS final approach track; and
B. within the normal operating zone (NOZ).
A minimum of 5.6 km (3.0 NM) radar separation shall be provided between aircrafts on the
same ILS localizer course or MLS final approach track unless increased longitudinal separation is
required due to wake turbulence.
When assigning the final heading to intercept the ILS localizer course or MLS final approach
track, the aircraft shall be advised of:
A. its position relatives to a fix on the ILS localizer course or MLS final approach track;
B. the altitude to be maintained until established on the ILS localizer course or MLS final
approach track to the ILS glide path or specified MLS elevation angle intercept point; and
C. if required, clearance for the appropriate ILS or MLS approach.
When an aircraft is observed to overshoot the tum-on or to continue on a track which will
penetrate the NTZ, the aircraft shall be instructed to return immediately to the correct track.
When an aircraft is observed penetrating the NTZ, the aircraft on the adjacent ILS localizer
course or MLS fmal approach track shall be issued with appropriate beading and altitude
instructions in order to avoid the deviating aircraft. Radar monitoring shall not be terminated until:
A. visual separation is applied; or
B. the aircraft has landed, or in case of a missed approach, is at least 2 km (1.0 NM) beyond
the departure end of the runway and adequate separation with any other traffic is
Unless ATC issues a clearance otherwise, no pilot may make a procedure turn on an instrument
approach if any of the following apply:
A. The flight is radar vectored to the final approach course or fix.
B. The flight makes a timed approach from a holding fix.
C. The approach procedure specifies "No PT".
When the approach procedure involves a procedure tum, a maximum speed which is not
greater than 200 KIAS should be observed from first overheading the course reversal IAF through
the procedure turn maneuver, to ensure containment with the obstruction clearance area Except for
II and m approaches, if RVR minimums for take-off or landing are prescribed in an
=:s::ument approach procedure, but the RVR is not reported for the runway intended, the ground
-::oilities may be substituted. These may be found in FAA Legend 7.
A pilot may not continue an approach past the final approach flx or on to the flnal approach
unless the latest weather report for the airport indicates that the visibility is equal to, or
;:-eater than, the visibility required for the approach procedure. If a pilot has begun the flnal
;;:proach segment and then receives a report of below minimum conditions, he/she may continue
:.Je approach to the DH or MDA.
To descend below the published DH or MDA on an instrument approach, one of the following
::::mst be distinctly visible and identifiable to the pilot.
Approach light system, except that the pilot may not descend below 100 feet above the
:ouchdown zone elevation using the approach lights as a reference unless the recterminating bars or
red side row bars are also distinctly visible and identifiable.
A. Threshold;
B. Threshold markings;
C. Threshold lights;
D. Runway end identifier lights;
E. Visual approach slope indicator;
F. Touchdown zone or touchdown zone markings;
a Touchdown zone lights;
H. Runway or runway markings;
I. Runway lights.
A pilot must initiate a missed approach from an ILS upon arrival at the DH on the glide slope
if none of the required visual references is distinctly visible. If visual contact is lost anytime after
descending below the DH but before touchdown, the pilot must start a missed approach.
If a pilot loses visual reference while circling to land from an instrument approach, he/she
should follow the missed approach procedure published for the approach used. The pilot should
make an initial climbing turn towed the landing runway to establish the aircraft on the missed
approach course.
An Airport Surveillance Radar (ASR) approach is one in which an ATC radar controller
provides directional guidance and distance to the runway information to the pilot. The only airborne
equipment required is an operating radio receiver. The controller will tell the pilot when the aircraft
is at the missed approach point and give missed approach instructions as required. If the pilot
desires to execute a missed approach prior to the missed approach point, he/she should inform the
controller, who will then issue missed approach instructions.
All-weather category ll and m operations are based on a total system concept. The system
encompasses the need for additional and more reliable ground equipment and airborne systems
capable of guiding the airplane with greater accuracy to the decision height and, when appropriate,
through to a landing and subsequent roll out. The pilot a is part of the system and takes an active
role in the operation. To this effect the pilot bas to be furnished with the necessary information to
supervise all phases of the approach and landing and, if necessary, to assume manual control of the
aircraft in order to complete the landing or ~ a r r y out a missed approach procedure, if appropriate.
The provision of the A TS is an essential part of the system concept in category n. and ill operations.
System reliability and integrity is achieved through design features such as low failure rates,
redundancy and a monitoring capability which allows for operational alternatives. Monitoring of all
elements of the system, including both ground and airborne equipment, is essential. The pilot must
be informed of any ground equipment failures affecting the status of the system, a task that is
normally the responsibility of the air traffic controller.
Redundancy is also an important part in providing operational reliability and it is for this
reason that standby facilities are used for both ground and airborne equipment. The redundant
equipment may also operate in a monitoring mode by comparing its performance with which of the
primary operating equipment and may provide an alert if differences exceed established values.
Guidance material concerning instrument landing system (ILS) installations, operational
design and maintenance objectives as well as definitions of course structure for facility performance
categories is described in Annex lO,Volume I, Attachment C to Part I. Additional requirements for
category ll and ill operations are descneed in Dot 9365, Chapter 5. The facility performance
categories defined in Annex 10, Part I, Chapter 3 have operational objectives which are described
A. Category I: Operation down to 60 m (200 ft) decision height and with a runway visual
range (R VR) not less than a value of the order of 800 m (2 600 ft} with a high probability
of approach success. This can be regarded as a precision approach operation achieved
without the need for facilities additional to those which have been in use for several years
for the classic ILS approach.
B. Category II: Operation down to 30m (100ft) decision height and with an RVR not less
than a value of the order of 400 m (1 200 ft) with a high probability of approach success.
In this category the time available in the visual phase limits the corrections which can be
made to the aircraft's flight path. Consequently, improved quality of non-visual guidance
and aircraft equipment from that required for category I is necessary. Improved approach
and runway lighting systems are necessary to provide adequate visual cues. Carefully
considered flight deck procedures and flight crew training are called for.
C. Category IliA: Operation, with no decision height limitation, to and along the surface of
the runway with external visual reference during the final phase of the landing and with an
RVR not less than a value of the order of 200m (700ft). In practice, category IliA
operations may include a decision height below 30m (100ft) to permit pilot confirmation
that a safe automatic landing can be effected. In this operation the guidance and control
systems must have the capability to permit the aircraft to land safely on the runway
without visual reference but thereafter, during the landing roll, the pilot will normally
control the aircraft by external visual references.
D. Category IIIB: Operation, with no decision height limitation, to and along the surface of
the nmway without reliance on external visual reference, and subsequently, taxiing with
external visual reference in a visibility corresponding to an RVR not less than a value of
the order of 50 m (150 ft). This operation introduces a requirement to provide non-visual
guidance for roll-out Depending on the taxiway configuration, extensive improvements to
taxiway lighting, marking and traffic control may be required if the attainment of the
lowest limits of category IllB is intended.
E. Category IIIC: Operation, with no decision height limitation, to and along the surface of the
runway and taxiways without reliance on external visual reference. This ultimate objective
creates the need for non-visual guidance to guide the aircraft on the taxiways and on the
apron. The system will also have to be applicable to emergency services and other
essential vehicles, unless alternative means can be applied to provide them with facilities
for rapid and safe movement while performing their tasks.
The provision of aerodrome control service is considered essential when aerodromes planned
for categories IT and III operations. The information to be provided to pilots is specified in Annex
11 and in the Procedures for Air Navigation Services - Rules of the Air and Air Traffic Services
(PANS&AC, Dot 4444), Part IV. Guidance on the responsibilities of ATS regarding surface
movement guidance and control is given in ICAO Circular 148 -Surface Movement Guidance and
Control Systems. The A TS unit must ensure that pilots are kept informed of any changes in the
status of airport facilities at their destinations and at their alternate aerodromes. In some locations,
the A TS unit concerned may require a discrete frequency for communicating information to aircraft
at the commencement of an approach and during the final approach, landing and roll-out phases.
Where provided, an automatic terminal information service (A TIS) will assist operations prior to
the commencement of final approach, but may not normally be updated frequently enough to
eliminate the need to pass additional information to pilots engaged in operations lower than
category I.
Because ILS signals can be disturbed by reflections caused by aeroplanes overflying the
localizer, A TS units must ensure that when category II or III operations are being conducted,
aeroplanes do not take off from the landing runway after an aeroplane on final approach has
reached a certain point For instance, clearance for take-off should be given so as to ensure that the
departing aeroplane has overflowed the ILS localizer antenna before the arriving a e r o ~ l a n e has
descended to 60 m (200 ft). This is necessary to preserve the integrity of the precision guidance
system during the time when the landing aircraft is critically dependent on the quality of the signal
in space.
For the same reason, additional longitudinal separation may be required between successive
aircraft conducting category IT and m operations. When designing approach procedures for use in
conjunction with category IT and ill ILS facilities, it is desirable to make provisions whereby
aircraft equipped for low visibility operations will not be delayed unnecessarily by aircraft not so
equipped. Such consideration may require special holding procedures, or special radar vectoring
procedures. However, when category IT or ill operations do not prevail, all aircraft should be
afforded normal priorities by A TS units .
A TS units should recognize the need for aircraft to simulate low minima approaches in good
weather conditions so that both crew and equipment can gain practical exposure. Approval to
conduct such an exercise should be requested by the pilot and A TS units should agree to such a
request whenever traffic will pennit. While this exercise is being conducted, ATS units should,
where feasible, restrict take-offs and ground manoeuvring to the same extent as if actual low
minimal conditions existed. When this is not feasible, A TS should advise the pilot accordingly.
Except for emergencies, the landing priority of aircraft arriving at a tower-controlled airport is
on "first-come, first-served" basis. When landing at a tower control, an aircraft should exit the
runway at the first suitable taxiway and remain on the tower frequency until instructed to do
otherwise. The aircraft should not turn onto any other taxiway unless a clearance to do so has been
ATC furnishes pilots' braking action reports using the terms "good", "fair", "poor'' and "nil"
or a combination of these terms. If you give a braking action report to A TC, you should use the
same terminology.
If an aircraft requests to take off, land, or touch-and-go on a closed or unsafe runway, the pilot
will be informed that the runway is closed or unsafe by ATC as "RUNWAY 18 CLOSED or
RUNWAY 18 UNSAFE". and if you persists in your request, A TC will quote you the appropriate
parts of the NOT AM applying to the runway and inform you that a clearance cannot be issued.
Then, if you insist and in ATC's opinion the intended operation would not adversely affect other
traffic, the operation will be at your own risk.
Normally, you can receive current landing information during approach. Landing information
contained in the A TIS broadcast may be omitted if you state the appropriate ATIS code.
The "Sterile Cockpit" Rule: Regulations say only those duties required for the safe operations
of the aircraft are allowed during critical phases of flight. Critical phases of flight are defined as
climb and descent when below 3 000 meters, taxi, take-off and landing. Excluded from the
definition of critical phase of flight are any operations at or above 3 000 meters and cruise flight
below 3 000 meters. Activities, which are prohibited during critical phases of flight, include filling
out logs, ordering galley supplies, making passenger announcements or pointing out sights of
interest Activities such as eating meals or engaging in nonessential conversations are also
The following should be reported without A TC request:
A. Vacating a previously assigned altitude for a newly assigned one.
B. An altitude change when operating under a VFR-On-Top clearance.
C. When unable to climb or descend at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
D. When an approach has been missed.
E. A change in cruising true airspeed of 10 knots or 5%, whichever is greater.
F. The time and altitude (or Flight Level) upon reaching a holding fix or clearance
G. When leaving an assigned holding fix or point
H. The malfunction of navigation, approach or communication equipment.
I. Any information pertaining to the safety of flight
J. In addition to the reports listed above, when not in radar contact a pilot must report.
K. When over designated compulsory reporting points.
L. When leaving the final approach fix inbound on an instrument approach.
M. When it becomes apparent that an estimate of arrival time over a fix is in error by more
than 3 minutes.
Occasionally an A TC controller will query a pilot about the aircraft's altitude or course. For
example, a controller says "verify 3 000", meaning be/she wants confirmation that the aircraft is at
3 000 meters altitude. If the aircraft is not at that altitude, the pilot should reply, "Negative, maintain
2 700 as assigned. No climb or descent should be started unless specifically assigned by the
Pilots should notify controllers on initial contact that they have received the A TIS broadcast by
repeating the alphabetical code used appended to the broadcast. For example, "Information Sierra
A TC controllers often issue speed adjustments to radar-controlled aircraft to achieve or
maintain the desired separation. The following minimum speeds are usually observed:
Aircraft operating above 3 000 meters: not less than 250 knots or the equivalent mach number,
except the pilot is unable to do it.
Anival aircraft below 3 000 meters: Turbojet aircraft. A speed not less than 210 knots; except
20 miles from threshold, a speed not less than 170 knots. Piston and turboprop aircraft. Not less
than 200 knots; except 20 flying miles from threshold, a speed not less than 1 SO knots.
Departure aircraft: Turbojet aircraft. A speed not less than 230 knots. Piton engine and
turboprop aircraft. A speed not less than 150 knots.
Helicopters: A speed not less than 60 knots.
If an A TC controller assigns a speed, which is too fast or too slow for the operating limitations
of the aircraft under the existing circumstances, the pilot should advise A TC of the speed that will
be used. The controller will then issue instructions based on that speed.
Speed adjustments are not achieved instantaneously. Aircraft configuration, altitudes and
speed determine the time and distance required to accomplish the adjustment
Because of the great differences in speed and operating characteristics of helicopters and
airplanes, they are usually assigned different routing. Occasionally, larger/faster helicopters are
integrated with fixed-wing aircraft. These situations could occur on IFR flights, routes that avoid
noise-sensitive areas or when the helicopter is assigned runways or taxiways to avoid downwash in
congested areas.
A holding pattern is a procedure designed to keep an aircraft within a specified airspace while
awaiting further clearance from A TC. In most cases it is used as a method of delaying a flight on its
planned route.
A holding pattern involves holding fix, two turns and two straight-and-level legs as shown in
Figure 6-5. The holding fix can be a VOR, an
NDB, airway intersections, a point defined by a
specific DME distance from a VOR on a specific
radial, or an arbitrary RNA V -fix for aircraft
appropriately equipped.
A standard holding uses right hand turns and
a one minutes inbound leg. The length of the
outbound leg may vary a little to compensate for
wind drift. Above 14 000 feet the leg length is
extended to 1.5 minutes. It may also be extended
Figure 6-5 Standard Holding Pattern
by ATC. Some holding patterns, rather than being based on time, are based on DME distance
outbound. If a nonstandard pattern is to be flown, A TC will specify left turns.
At and below 14 000 feet MSL (no wind), the aircraft flies the specified course inbound to the
fiX, turns to the right 180, flies a parallel course outbound for 1 minute, again turns 180 to the
right, and flies 1 minute inbound to the fix. Above 14 000 feet MSL, the inbound leg length is 1-o.s
During turns in a holding pattern, the rate of turn or bank angle should be 3 per second or 25e
bank, whichever is less.
:be timing for outbound leg usually start at abeam or over the holding fix, which ever occur
~ If that position cannot be detennined (e.g. because the fix is a DME fix), start timing when
~ _ :omplete the turn outbound.
Entering a holding pattern sometimes requires some maneuvering, as you might be
-=;:oaching the pattern from any direction. There are three types of entrance maneuvers for a
-..:.-:em. The type of entry you use depends
::: :our heading as you approach the holding
:::_,_ Figure 6-6 shows the three sectors for a
:-.;ht-hand pattern. Entry sectors are
:s:ablished by forming angles of 70 on the
.:0lding pattern side of the holding course
~ ~ d 110 on the non-holding side. For
eft-band patterns all things discussed below
2pply in an analogous way. Entering from
sector III (D) you will use a Direct Entry,
:rom sector II(T) a Teardrop Entry, and from
sector I (P)a Parallel Entry.
Direct Entry
Sector p
Figure 6-6 Entry Sectors
The direct entry procedure is the most simple one and most published holdings are designed
such that inbound traffic can most often use
this simple method of entry (see Figure 6-7).
In a direct entry you simply fly to the
fix and start the turn to the outbound leg. If
your entry requires an outbound tum of less
than 180, start the turn with an appropriate
delay. For instance, if the required tum is
only 145, start your turn 45/ 3/s=lS
seconds after crossing the holding fix..
Without that delay your outbound leg would
be too close to the inbound leg and the
following turn at the outbound end would
carry you out of the holding area
Teardrop Entry
Figure 6-7 Direct Entry Procedure
Fly to the fix and tum to a heading which starts a 30 degree teardrop on the holding side. Fly
this heading for 1 minute and then start the turn to the inbound leg (see Figure 6-8).
Parallel Entry
After passing the holding fix, tum to the outbound heading to parallel the inbound course, then
tum inboood to the holding fix (see Figure 6-9).
Figure 6-8 Teardrop Entry Procedure
Example 1
A plane, :MH 60, receive this A TC
clearance: " ... HOLD EAST OF THE ABC
RADIAL, LEFT TURNS ... " (see Figure
What is the recommended procedure to
enter the holding pattern?
First determine the holding fix, then
dragging it on the holding radial given by
ATC, this example inbound leg 90, then
return back to fix. Then draw the pattern
from the fix with turns in the direction
specified, this example is left turns.
The entry procedure is based on the
aircraft's heading. To determine which entry
procedure to use, draw a line at 70 angle
from the holding fix. With a heading 60, a
parallel entry would be used.
A plane, MH 60, receive this ATC
clearance: "... HOLD SOUTII OF THE
ZERO RADIAL ... " (see Figure 6-11).
Figure 6-9 Parallel Entry Procedure
Hold on 090" Radllll
Left Turns
Figure 6-10 Parallel Entry
ft Parallel
Hold on 180" Radial
Standard Right Turns
Figure 6-11 Direct Entry
What is the recommended procedure to enter the holding pattern?
First determine the holding fix, then dragging it on the holding radial given by ATC, this
=x1Illple inbound leg 180, then return back to fix. Then draw the pattern from the fix with turns in
".:ie direction specified, this example is right turns.
The entry procedure is based on the aircraft's heading. To determined which entry procedure to
_ ". draw a line at 70 angle from the holding fix. With a heading 60, a direct entry would be used.
Instrument flight may be broken down into three broad phases. The departure phase takes you
from the airport to the enroute structure. The enroute phase is used to travel from one location to
another, and the arrival phase pennits you to transition from the enroute structure to your
destination. The arrival phase may begin with a published arrival procedure and usually ends with
an instrument approach.
Jeppesen Sanderson, Inc., a private firm. publishes instrument charts for each of these phases.
Most civil operators, including most air carriers, use Jeppesen charts. Therefore, it is important to
be familiar with Jeppesen charts fonnat, and as an airline pilot, you must be able to analyze
Jeppesen charts.
The standard instrument approach procedure, or lAP, allows you to descend safely from the
enroute altitude to a relatively low altitude near a runway at your destination. In the nonnal case of
a category I instrument landing system (ILS-1) approach, you typically arrive at a point located
approximately one-half mile from the runway threshold at an altitude of 200 feet above the
elevation of the touchdown zone. At this point, if certain visual requirements are met, you may
continue to a landing using visual references. If the visual requirements can't be met at this point, or
if the required visual cues are lost after passing it, you must discontinue the approach and follow the
missed approach procedure.
Although there are many different types of approaches in use, most have common procedures
and chart symbology. Therefore, your ability to read one approach chart generally means you will
be able to read others. This section is designed to help you become proficient at reading charts. An
ILS/DME approach and a NDB/DME approach chart has been selected, since this chart includes
most of the features found on other approach charts.
Approach Segments
Before looking at approach chart symbology, it is helpful to have a basic understanding of an
approach procedure. An instrument approach may be divided into as many as five segments: arrival,
initial, intermediate, fmal and missed approach segment. These segments often begin and end at
designated fixes (Figure 6-12).
Approach Fix (IF)
Figure 6-IZ Five Degments oflnstrument Approach
Arrival Routes
Arrival routes, although technically not considered as approach segments, are an integral part
of many instrument approach procedures. They provide a link between the enroute and approach
structures. Although an approach procedure may have several arrival routes, you generally use the
one closest to your enroute arrival point When a arrival route is shown, the chart provides the
course or bearing to be flown, the distance, and the minimum altitude.
Initial Approach Segment
The purpose of the initial approach segment is to provide a method for aligning your aircraft
with the approach course. This is accomplished by using an arc procedure, a course reversal, or by
following a route which intersects the fmal approach course.
An initial approach segment begins at the initial approach fix, and usually ends where it joins
the intermediate approach segment The initial approach fix is usually depicted on the chart with an
IAF. A given procedure may have several initial approach segments. Where more than one exists,
each will join a common intermediate segment, although not necessarily at the same location.
Intermediate Approach Segment
The intermediate segment is designed primarily to position your aircraft for the final descent to
the airport. During it, you typically reduce your airspeed to at or near the approach airspeed,
complete the landing checklist, and make a final review of the approach procedure and applicable
mininiiuns. Like the arrival route and initial approach segment, the chart depiction of the
intermediate provides you with course, distance, and minimum altitude information.
The intermediate segment is normally aligned within 30 of the fmal approach course, it begins
.:: ne intermediate fix (IF) or point, and ends at the beginning of the fmal approach segment In
so: ::::e cases, an IF is not shown on the approach chart In this situation, intermectiate segment begins
~ ~ point where you are proceeding inbound to the final approach fix, is properly aligned with the
:":::al course, and is located within the prescribed distance from the final approach fix (F AF) .
. =-:nal Approach Segment
The purpose of the final approach segment is to allow you to navigate safely to a point at
hicb, if the required visual references are available, you can continue the approach to a landing. If
: ou cannot see the required cues at the missed approach point (MAPt), you must execute the missed
approach procedure. The final approach segment for a precision approach begins where the glide
slope is intercepted at the minimum glide slope intercept altitude specified by the approach chart. If
A TC authorizes a lower intercept altitude, the final approach segment begins upon glide slope
interception at that altitude. For a nonprecision approach, the fmal approach segment begins either
at a designated F AF or at the point where you are aligned with the final approach course. The final
approach segment ends either at the designated missed approach point or when you land.
Although the charted fmal approach segment provides you with course and distance
information, many factors influence the minimum altitude to which you can descend. These include
the type of aircraft being flown, the aircraft's equipment and approach speed, the operational status
of navaids, the airport lighting, the type of approach being flown, and local terrain features .
. 'lfzssed Approach Segment
The purpose of the missed approach segment is to allow you to safely navigate from the MAPt
to a point where you can attempt another approach or continue to another airport Evezy instrument
approach will have a missed approach segment along with appropriate heading, course and altitude
The missed approach segment begins at the MAPt and ends at a designated point, such as an
initial approach or enroute fix. The actual location of the MAPt depends upon the type of approach
you are flying. For example, during a precision approach, the MAPt occurs when you reach a
designated altitude called the decision height (DH). For nonprecision approaches, the missed
approach point usually occurs at a fiX defined by a navaid.
Chart Layout
Jeppesen instrument approach charts portray the instrument approach procedures which are
available at a given airport. Generally, a sheet of Jeppesen chart consists of four sections: heading
section, plan view, profile view and, landing minimums (Figure 6-13).
Heading Section
On Jeppesen charts, the heading section identifies the airport, the primary approach facility,
communication frequencies, and, if available, minimum safe altitude information.
Jeppesen lists the city and state (item 1) on the upper right-hand comer where the airport is
located, followed by the airport name on the next line (item 2). The procedure name (item 3)
indicates the type of approach system used during final approach and the runway served. The
I p .R. OF C:HiNA
. . A . (PEKING)

DME Rwy 18R
*110.3 ltG
Figure 6-13 JLSIDME and NDBIDME Approach
minimum equipment required to fly the approach is indicated by the procedure name and notes on
the approach chart This approach chart uses an ILS DME and a NDB DME to serve runway 18R at
CAPITAL. If your aircraft is capable of flying an ILS DME or a NDB DME approach, you may use
this chart
The minimum safe altitude (MSA) provides I 000 feet of obstruction clearance within 25
nautical miles of the indicated facility (unless some other distance is specified). The MSA may be
divided into several sectors which are defined by radials or bearings to the navaid. For Beijing
CAPITAL, there are altogether four sectors, the MSA is 7 100 feet from 96 to 21 0, 5 500 feet 210
to 276, 2 800 feet 276 to 30, and the sector from 30 to 96 is a prohibited area (item 7). The four
sectors are divided by reference to LG NDB. There are several important features of the MSA. First,
it provides only obstruction clearance within the sector. Neither navigation nor communication
coverage is guaranteed. Second, the MSA is designed only for use in an emergency or during VFR
flight, such as during a VFR approach at night And third, MSA is not listed for every approach. Its
omission may be due to the lack of ari easily identifiable facility upon which to orient the MSA
Jeppesen approach charts present communication frequencies in the sequence in which you
normally use them. For example, your first contact is with Beijing Approach on frequency 129.0,
followed by Beijing Tower 118.1, then Ground 121.7. In addition, you may receive arrival
information on the frequency of ATIS 127.6 (item 11).
Jeppesen charts normally present the publish date and the effective date if a chart is issued
before it can be used. In this situation, you should continue to use the previous chart until the
effective date (item 9). If there is no effective date, you may use the chart upon receipt
Plan View
The plan view displays an overhead presentation of the entire approach procedure. Since
approach charts are intended for use during instrument weather conditions, they show only limited
terrain and obstruction information. However, when the procedure is flown as depicted, obstruction
clearance is provided throughout the approach.
Navaid facility boxes identify various navaids which appear on the approach chart. On
Jeppesen charts, a rectangular box is used to depict a NDB, VOR, or LOM facility, while an oval
shape is used to depict an ILS facility. No matter what shape of the box, it mainly provides
frequency and Morse code identification. Jeppesen uses shading around the primary facility upon
which the approach is based. In this case, the primary facilities are an ILS localizer and a NDB. The
ILS localizer is aligned on a course of 179 with frequency 110.3 MHz (item 16), while the NDB 's
frequency is 325kHz with the identifier LG (item16). The letter "f' is used to indicate an ILS
On the plan view, various types of initial approach segment are depicted according to
associated arrival chart In this case, the announced initial approach segment is base tum with IAF
at LG NDB. Category A and B aircra.fts should follow the course of019 to a distance of7.3 DME,
while category C and D aircrafts should follow the course of 030 to a distance of 8.5 DME (item
17). The identifier of the DME is ILG. If you received a holding clearance rather than an approach
clearance during arrival, you could join the holding pattern depicted on the plan view. For this
example, you could join LG or OB holding pattern according to the arrival route and the ATC
clearance. The minimum holding altitude of the LG holding pattern is 3 070 feet, and its outbound
course is 17()0.
The missed approach path and the associated holding pattern also are shown on the plan view.
The details of the missed approach procedure are described on the profile view. In this case, the
holding pattern is shown on LG along with its minimum holding altitude, inbound and outbound
Occasionally, there is an altitude and height conversion table. For an ILS approach, the height
of certain point equals to the altitude minuses the runway threshold elevation. Because the elevation
of runway 18R is 115 feet, the LG IAF altitude is 3 070 feet and its height is 2 955 feet (item 18) ..
Profile View
The profile view displays descent path, facilities and minimum altitudes in feet MSL. On
Jeppesen charts, an additional height is shown in parentheses and it can be either a height above the
threshold (HA 1) elevation or height above the airport (HAA) elevation. The HAT is measured from
the threshold elevation of the runway served by the approach, while the HAA is measured from the
airport elevation. On the profile view of Jeppesen charts, HAT values are presented in the
parentheses when a runway threshold elevation is given. If the runway threshold elevation is not
given, the numbers in parentheses represent HAA.
For CAPITAL approach, pilot should descend from 3 070 feet MSL to 1 920 feet MSL along
the outbound course of030 until 08.5 ILG if the aircraft belongs to category Cor category D (item
21). After completing base turn, and when ;rou established on the inbound course, you must keep
the minimum altitude of 1 920 feet and intercept the glide slope, then descend along the final
approach segment (item 22).
Pilot could use the DME-altitude relationship table shown on the profile view to keep the glide
path if a NDB or LOC (when GS failures) approach is being implemented (item 20). For example,
the minimum altitude should be 1 060 feet when you descend to DME 3.0 nautical miles ILG.
Landing Minimums
The landing minimums section is an extremely important part of an approach chart. Minimums
have been established for each approach at a given airport and can vary from runway to runway.
Factors which affect these minimums include the type of approach equipment installed, runway
lighting and obstructions in the approach or missed approach path. Landing minimums are also
affected by the equipment on board your aircraft and your approach speed. Approach minimums
contain both minimum visibility and minimum altitude requirements.
1) Visibility Requirements. To continue your approach past the missed approach point, the
visibility must be equal to or greater than that listed on the approach chart. In addition, you must be
able to clearly identify at least one of the above mentioned visual references for the intended
\\ben the visibility is expressed in meters of VIS, it is usuall) a prevailing visibility that is
by an accredited observer (tower or weather personnel). When the visibility is expressed in
-==:s ofRVR, it is determined through the use of runway visual range (RVR) equipment. On the
.:..:...,:_ Jeppesen provides both the RVR and the VIS in the approach minimums section. For
!:U.-:lple, the minimum visibility is R VR 600 meters or VIS 800 meters when you implement an full
C5 approach (item 33).
2) Minimum Descent Requirements. The descent limits shown in the minimums section
bow low you are permitted to descend in an attempt to identify the required visual
--::;;rences. This can either be a decision height (DH) or a minimum descent height (MDH)
:-:pending on the type of approach. For precision approaches, the point where you must make the
:;;dsion to continue the approach or execute a missed approach is referred to as DA (or DR)
.,em 32). Jeppesen refers to this MSL altitude as the decision altitude or DA. The figure in
:arentheses on Jeppesen charts is the height above touchdown (HAT) if the runway threshold
-::evation is given on the profile view. For the ILS DME runway 18R approach at CAPITAL, the
'.:-west MSL altitude you can descend to is 318 feet, which equals to 203 feet height above the
:ouchdown zone elevation. For nonprecisions, the point where you make a decision to continue
or execute a missed approach procedure is defmed as MDA, which referred to the mean
sea level. Jepessen also present MDH m parentheses if the runway elevation is given. For
CAPITAL, the MDA is 420 feet and the MDH is 305 feet when you are executing a NOB DME
When the ILS glide slope is inoperative, the procedure becomes a nonprecision, localizer
approach. Nonprecision approaches use a minimum descent altitude 1\tiDA. Upon crossing the final
approach fix or down fix, as appropriate, you descend to the MDA. You can remain ryf thi!:
altitude until you reach the missed approach point However, you may not descend below the MDA
unless the visual requirements can be mel In this case, the missed approach point is detennined by
LMM and the MDA ofLOC approach is 420 feet (item 24).
The conversion table at the bottom of the Jeppesen charts also provides the glide slope angle
and a recommended rate of descent to maintain the glide slope during an ILS approach (item 35).
For example, if your groundspeed is 140 knots, your rate of descent shouid be 753 feet per minute
to follow the glide slope.
Jeppesen charts also give the landing minimum criteria of visual circling approach in the
landing minimums table. In this case, the minimum visibility of circle-to-land is 3 600 meters anc
the MDA is 820 feet (item 34).
Jeppesen usually provides a full-page airport diagram for selected airport to assist the
movement of ground traffic where complex runway and taxiway configurations exist. If the surface
of the airport is too complex, the airport chart may be divided into two pages. No :1atter hO\\ tl.'l:t!
pages are there, a ai::port chart usually consists of heading section, plan view, additional
runway infounation and take-off minimums.
Heading Section
The heading section (,f the Jeppesen airport chart identifies the airport, its location, elevation,
chart effective date, and outbouno communication frequencies. You will notice many similarities
between this section and the heading section of a Jeppesen approach chart (see Figure 6-14).
CAPITAL airport geographic location is given in the fonnat of latitude and longitude
coordinates. The a'1d longitude coordinates of the official airport location are N40 04.4 and
E116 35.7 (item l). The airport elevation and the chart effective date are included on the Jeppesen
airport chart. In tlus case, the elevation of the CAPITAL airport is 115 feet (item 2), and the chart
'!ffective is 16 May, 2003 (item 3).
The communications section (item 4) lists the frequencies in the order they are nonnally used
when you depart the airpon. In this case, you frrst contact Ground Control on the frequency of
121.7 from 1201 to 2400, but from 0001 to 1200, you should contact Ground Control on the
frequency of 121.9 when you are being west or 121.7 when you are being east. When you are being
at the hold point outside the runway, you should contact Tower on 118.1, and then followed by
119.7 Departure Control.
Plan View
The plan view portrays an overhead view of the airport. Its purpose is to provide you with
infonnation about the airport, such as its runways and lighting systems (Figure 6-14).
Jeppesen airport charts usually list the elevation of each end of the runway. This alJows you to
estimate the average runway slope or gradient. For instance, the threshold elevation of runway 18R
is 115 feet (item 5), and at other end of this runway, the threshold elevation is 108 feet, so, the
gradient of runway 18R is about 0.0667 %. Jeppesen shows not only the width of the stopway (item
6) associated with a runway, but also the runway length (item 7). In this case, the length of runway
18R is 3 200 meteN, and runway 18L 3 800 meters. The airport reference point, or ARP, (item 8) is
where the official latitude and longitude coordinates are derived.
The location of the airport's control tower (item 9) may be shown on the plan view, along
with the Ioca1ion of aprons (item 10). Runway numbers (item 11) are located at the end of each
runway. Jeppesen also I:sts the actual magnetic direction of the runway (item 12). This
information allowf. you to make a final cross-check of the magnetic compass and heading
indicator orior to flight.
On the upper comer ofthe chart, tlle magnetic variation is shown (item 13). This
infonnation is usually used to depict the runway direction. At the bottom of the chart, there is a
scale of the chart (item 15), which may be used to measure the length of two points. Occasionally,
5ome important notes about the airport are also shown at the bottom of the plan view. In this case,
''DO NOT MISTAKE LIGHTED ROAD FOR RUNWAY'' reminds that some lighted road around
the airport may be thought to be the runway during night approach (item 1 4).
Apt Elev 115' 16 MAY 03 (@])
I .
1. 121.9 ll
Ground (0001 1100) J \
I 121.7 I 1
11201. 2001 l 1
--------- 1
SEE 1091

OU Ell6 35.7

Let 0
A9 E5

1"' 6Ctr.
Figure 6-14 Beading Section and Plan View of Airport Chart
Additional Runway Information
Runway and approach lighting systems, as well as PAPI installations, arc shown on Jeppesen,
and which includes tllis intbrmation in the additional runway information section. This section
contains other data, such as grooved runways, RVR equipmen4 usable runway lengths and runway
widths (Figure 6-15).

16MAYOJ (10-9A)

Rwy 36!t 1$ approv-.d for CAT U operatrons, !:podol airct"ew end odl cerllf1cation rquired.
Rwy 18R & 361l rlghtbend circuit.
...., Throahold 1 Glide Slopo TAI<EOFF

036RlHIRL0CL0HIAlS SFl TOZ PAPI-!,.(_3.0" 0 RVR I:..'Jm 6Dm
0 l!wy grootd botwoon 656'/200m ll937'/1200m from thresh 36R.
0 peeing GOon
0 white/ pclno 15m
o 1ur E(, es
0 H$TE2,
18R SFL TOZ PAPIl 3.0 0 nvR
/94&5' 711Sm I
36l HIRLO ClO HIAlS PAPIl(3.0"} ORVR Slim
0 'P'I''7 60"'
0 while opacing 30m
Rwy tBl/3611
"II llwy1
LV,. must bo in
Ill endRCU4

2 TUtti lno 8 tvt700m IMI250m
Of" 3' ''""
0 ltVI 250m tMI.100m
o ....

Figure 6-15 Runway Information and Take-off Minimums
For CAPITAL airport, its ruJlway lighting system consists of HW.L and CL (item 1). The
::-;.::e of the CL system is 60 meters. The approach lighting system of four direction of two
IS (item 2). The light space of runway 18L and runwa" 36R is 15 meters with white colort
:n: le runway 18R and 36 L is 30 meters with the same color. The landing useable length of rLJnwa;
;p after glide slope is J 488 meters or 11444 feet (item 3). The width of runway 36R/1 81 is 60
r::eters (item 4). and Alternate Minimums
CAAC has estahlishect airport operation zules which provide tak.. .... off minimums or all
.:1:nmercial operated aircrafl.. Although legal, it is unwise to initiate a take-off in weathe1 conditions
-"'at would keep a commercial flight g,LOUilO<!d. CAAC has also established dh;patcn rules for
electing an altemate airport for an lFR lf the forecast weafr1cr at your time of
.:.rrival or mmusing one hour, can not meet followmg condithms, ycu rnust Jist :m alternate
.lirport on your IFR .flight pian.
A. The ceiling must w be nr least 450 T11eters above the MDH (or DH) o- 600 me1ers
AGL, whichever is higner; t.nd
B. The visibility must forecast to be 4 800 meters or 3 200 meter., greater i:han the applicable
instrument approach visibility minimums. whichever is greater.
To qualify as an alternate, the airport you and the forecast weather must meet certain
conditions. Although the rules tor take-off and alternate minimums have been explained in
greater detail in SECTION D, you should be familiar with the related infonnation presented on
IFR charts.
Jeppesen lists the take-off minimums for each airpo1t which are based on the number of
engines on the aircraft. lf your aircraft is equipped with one or two engines. the standard take-off
minimum is a visibility of one statute mile. For aircraft wnh three or more engines, the
requirement is one-half smtui\: mile. Besides the engine number on the airplanf:, the runway
lighting systern also influence the Take-off minimums of the airport. Generally, the takc:-off
minimums of certain airport may be listed with nmway visibility range (RVR) or visibility (VIS)
(Figure 6-15).
For two turbo-powered and three or more engines airplane. the take-off minimum of runway
18U36R is RVR 200 meters with HTRL and CL operating, if the airplane belongs to category A, B,
and C (item 5). For categoT) D airplane, its take-off minimum is R.fR 250 meters (item 6). t"lere
is only RL, the take-off miniRWTl is RVR 400 meters no matter what category the akplane beiungs
to (item 7). If the airplane is one or two propel-powered, its take-otlmmimum is VIS 1 600 mere:s
no matter what category it belongs to and wbat lighting system of the runway (item 8).
This section presents an overview of the idonnation and symbo!cg) contained on enroute and
area charts. Enroute charts are primarily usea for IFR cross-countrj flights and contain essential
information that helps you keep track of your position, as well as maintain obstacle clearance and
navigation signal reception.
Area charts portray more detail than enroute charts and are primarily used during the transition
to or from the enroute structure. In some cases, the symbols appear in the margin with an
explanation in the accompanying text
For China airways, 6 300 meters MSL is the altitude that separates the national airway system
from Class A airspace. Therefore, it is a convenient place to establish the division between the low
and high altitude airway structures. Airways located below 6 300 meters MSL are depicted on low
altitude enroute charts and those at or above 6 300 meters MSL are shown on high altitude enroute
Jeppesen enroute charts of China combined the low altitude and the high altitude airways on a
sheet of chart. This section concentrates on Jeppesen high/low enroute charts, since these charts
display vast amounts of information about the airways, routes of flight, radio facilities used for
enroute navigation, identification of instrument fixes, airport information, communications
available, altitudes that guarantee proper reception of navigation signals, and terrain clearance.
Front Panel
At the top of the Jeppesen front panel, the name of the chart, as well as the series number and
the scale are presented. In this case, CH (HIL) 2 is the naine of CHINA IDGHILOW ALTITUDE
ENROUTE CHARTS with a scale of 1 inch equals to 80 nautical miles (Figure 6-16).
Following the name of the chart, Jeppesen presents a specification of airways, routes and
airspaces on the chart and some other notes of flying. On the middle of the Jeppesen front panel, the
limits and classifications of designated airspace table is given. For example, the vertical separation
from the ground to FL 6 100 meters is the former USSR lower airspace (item 5). Usually, there is a
specification of revision data behind the table of limits and classifications of designated airspace
(item 6).
Jeppesen portrays the area covered by each enroute chart with squares on the front panel,
which contains valuable information concerning the use of the chart. The effective date at the top
(item 8) tells you when the old chart becomes obsolete for navigation and the information on the
new chart becomes effective. A square within the bold outline is used to indicate the chart you are
holding, as well as its coverage area. The locations of major cities are included to help you find the
appropriate chart quickly.
Jeppesen uses a bold city name and a blue shading to show where area charts are available
(item 9). Time zone boundaries are included on Jeppesen charts. Jeppesen includes the formula to
convert both standard and daylight time to Coordinated Universal Time on the front panel (item
Navigation Aids and Communications
On the Jeppesen charts for China, there are mainly four types of navaids: VORIDME, NDB, as
well as ILS (Figure 6-17).

Flying outside of ATS routs wltflln P R of China, D' R of t<oru and formtco 1s prcfllbltacl.

Fl118 FL 397
FL 39- FL 397
FL.WWmFL/2/00m FLI200mFL12!00r.t
Airspace classification not spe<:if<ed.
CHART C.H(HIL) 1 5 MAR 93 Mullan VOR frequency changed. Numerous radio alds Within Cluna
commissioned/decommissionedlchanQed. Pingzhou VOA deoomm1ssioned. ATS sySIAm and
airspace within China revised.
CHART CH(HIL) 2 5 MAR 93 Pyongyang VOADME ident changed. Vledivoslol< Loe&tors
commissioned. Numerous rad1o ads within China commfsslonedldecomm!sslo$clldlanged. Pingzl\Ou VOA
decommissioned. ATS system and restrictive airspace within China revised.
Figure 6-16 Front Panel ofEnroute Chart

1'!0- --. --. -+
--- llz
., ....
. I), -.
.. 3 ........
' "".!.

-'"--- ..
' r
----- . -- \ . --
Figure 6-17 Enroute Chart
A VOR is represented as a compass rose oriented to magnetic north. The center of the compass
-0se shows the location of the VOR station. Jeppesen charts use the symbol itself to indicate a VOR
:'acility and use a serrated circle to portray Dl'v1E facilities. A collocated VOR and DME is called a
\ 'OR!Dl'v1E. Since VORIDME is functionally identical for civil aircraft, Jeppesen uses a single
symbol to indicate this type of facility. The information in a VOR or VORIDME facility box
provides you with the facility's name, frequency, and identifier (both three-letter and Morse code).
The letter ''D" preceding the frequency in the Jeppesen excerpt indicates DME information is
available (item 1).
The nondirectional radio beacon (NDB) is a low frequency navaid used for instrument
approaches, as well as for enroute navigation. On Jeppesen charts, a nondirectional radio beacon is
shown as a circle of dots (item 2). The arrow extending out of the top is aligned with magnetic
north, which makes it possible to measure the magnetic bearing with a plotter. This symbol is also
similar to the ones used to depict compass locators. On Jeppesen charts, they are shown only when
the facility provides an enroute function. The facility box for an NDB includes the name, frequency,
and identification code. Jeppesen often groups NDB information with an adjacent VORIDME if it
has the same name (item 3).
Jeppesen shows the availability of ILS approaches with a locaJjzer symbol. On the chart, the
front course of an ILS is depicted an arrow with the right triangle filled short lines (item 4). The
information ofiLS is shown on the ILS approach chart.
The boundary of an air traffic control center (ACC) is designated by a line, along with the
name of the controlling center. If the control area is not divided into several sectors, Jeppesen uses
only one rectangle to present the ACC's name, communication frequency, as well as the service
time (item 7). In order to provide adequate communications coverage throughout the area served by
certain control center, the area with heavy traffic is usually divided into several sectors. If the
control area is divided into several sectors, Jeppesen lists the name, frequency, and the service time
of each sector respectively. For example, the frequency of south sector of Beijing control is 132.70
MHz. In addition, jeppesen uses a thin-line box to provide the communication frequency of the
approach control office (item 9).
Pilots could use the frequencies shown in the ellipse box to listen weather information (item 8)
during flight In China, there are only two such stations situated at Beijing and Guangzbou.
The asterisk preceding the navaid or communication frequency indicates this service is
available on a part-time basis (item 7).
Airways on Jeppesen charts for China are marked with a letter and a series of number. The
first letter should be A,B or G which means that foreign countries' aircrafts may operate on the
airway. The width of an airway is normally 4 nautical miles on each side of its centerline. This
provides a total airway width of 8 nautical miles (Figure 6-17).
All distances on IFR Jeppesen enroute charts are expressed in nautical miles and kilometers,
and nautical miles usually situates above or prior to kilometers. On Jeppesen charts for China, a
number enclosed within an outlined box indicates total distance between navaids and/or compulsory
reporting points. A number that is not enclosed in an outlined box indicates the distance between
compulsory reporting points, intersections, navigation aids, or airway direction break points.
An airway break point is shown on a chart by a small "x" on the airway. Generally, this
symbol indicates a point on the airway where the course changes direction and where an
intersection is not designated.
Intersections are checkpoints along an airway that provide a means for you and ATC to check
the progress of a flight. They are often located at the points where the airway turns or where you
need a positive means of establishing your position. Intersections are given letter names above
the latitude and longitude (item 11 ). Intersections are designated as either compulsory or
noncompulsory reporting points. A compulsory reporting point is identified by a solid triangle. In a
non radar environment, you are required to make a position report when you pass over this point.
Noncompulsory reporting points are identified by open triangles, and position reports are not
required, unless requested by A TC.
For the convenience of flight, Jeppesen enroute charts for China present four types of altitude
along airway. They are maximum authorized altitude (MAA), flight level (FL), minimum safe
altitude (MSA) and minimum off-route altitude (MORA).
Occasionally, it is necessary to establish a MAA for a route segment. MAA is the highest
altitude you can fly based on the transmitting distance of VOR or VORIDME stations which use the
same frequency. The MAA is established when the distance between two stations using the same
frequency is such that both signals can be received at the same time, giving you an unreliable
navigation signal. An MAA is shown with the letters "MAA" followed by the altitude. In the
excerpt, MAA FL394 (item 15) above FL 12 000 m means that the maximum authorized altitude is
39 400 feet, which equals to 12 000 meters. It is for the convenience of ATC to do so.
The flight level (FL) is usually the aircrafts cruising altitude. The FL for the
route in this excerpt is 29 500 feet, which equals to 9 000 meters (item 12). In practical operation,
pilots must comply with the A TC clearance.
The minimum safe altitude (MSA) is shown for some route segments. On Jeppesen charts, it is
identified by the letter ''T", which follows the altitude number. ln the following excerpt, the MSA
for the route segment from BAOTOU to LIANGCHENG is 9 700 feet or 2 937 meters MSL (item
13). When you are not following an airway such as during a direct segment of an IFR flight, you are
responsible for determining the minimum safe altitude. Basically, you must remain at least 400
meters above the highest obstacle within a horizontal distance of 25 kilometers from the course to
be flown. In designated mountainous areas, the minimum altitude is increased to 600 meters and the
distance from the course remains the same. You should also consider the range limitations of the
navigation facilities and communications requirements when you establish your minimum altitude.
The last altitude at the bottom of the altitude series is MORA, which is the abbreviation of
minimum altitude (item 14). The MORA is the MSA within the segment from the middle
:vint to the end of the route. In this case, the MORA is 10 000 feet or 3 100 meters.
~ rports and Airspaces
Airports are divided into two basic categories- those with a published instrument approach
?rocedure and those without such a procedure. If an airport has a published instrument approach,
: eppesen provides basic information about each airport. The basic information includes the airport
a:1d city name in capital letters, as well as the frequencies and identifiers ofNDB navaids located at
:he terminal. For example, Wusu TAIYUAN has set up instrument approach procedures, and its
airport elevation is 2 566 feet or 782 meters. There are altogether three NDB navaids with operation
frequencies of 228, 413 and 373 kHz, and their identifiers are B, C and BG separately (item 5)
(Figure 6-17).
Above FL 600 meters, the airspace is controlled airspace in China. Aircrafts may operate under
VFR or IFR below FL 6 000 meters, while the air carrier must operate under IFR at or above the FL
6 300 meters. Special use airspace is designated and identified on enroute charts as either prohibited,
restricted, or danger areas. On Jeppesen charts, all special use airspace is outlined by a green border.
Information concerning each area is listed in or near the airspace, or it can be found on a chart panel.
Information of the special use airspace usually includes its serial number, the upper and lower limit
The capital letter enclosed in the parentheses of the serial number indicates the type of the special
airspace, ''P" represents prohibited area, "R". represents restricted area and "D" represents restricted
area. For example, item 10 on the following excerpt is a prohibited area, which extends from the
ground to aloof.
Area Charts
On Jeppesen enroute charts, a heavy blue dashed line signifies that an area chart is published
for that terminal area. The information within the outlined area is normally limited to that necessary
for through flights. If your departure or destination airport is within the boundary, you should refer
to the appropriate area chart for complete information. Most of the symbology on area charts is
identical to that of the enroute charts. Because of the scale used, more detail is possible, and
readability is improved. In this case, Beijing terminal is enclosed with a heavy dashed line and it
means an area chart has been depicted (Figure 6-17).
Departure and arrival charts are published to help simplify complex clearances, reduce
frequency congestion, and control the flow of traffic around an airport In some cases, they help
reduce fuel consumption and often include noise abatement procedures. The standard instrument
departure (SID) is used after take-off to provide a transition between the airport and the enroute
structure. The standard terminal arrival route (STAR) performs the opposite function. It provides
a standard method for departing the enroute structure and navigating to your destination. STAR
usually terminate with an instrument or visual approach procedure. This section analyzes both
SID and STAR charts to help you become better acquainted with the symbols and information
they contam.
Jeppesen publishes SIDs and STARs for airports with procedures authorized by the Civil
Aviation Administration of China (CAAC). Jeppesen includes the applicable departure and
arrival charts in the basic approach chart subscription and these charts are filed with the airport's
approach charts.
When you accept a SID or STAR in a clearance, or you file for one in your flight plan, you are
required to have a graphic or, at least, a textual description of the procedure in your possession. If
you don't have the appropriate charts or don't want to use them, you should include the notation
"NO SID -NO STAR" in the remarks section of your lFR flight plan. This advises A TC not to
issue a clearance which contains one of these procedures.
To illustrate how these procedures can be used to simplify a complex clearance and reduce
frequency congestion, consider the following departure clearance issued to a pilot who was about to
depart from CAPITAL, BEIJING, "AIR China 4102, cleared to Chengdu via VM 12 departure,
flight planned route, FL 9 000 meters, aquawk A21 01 ".
Standard Instrument Departure
Any clearance you are issued that contains SID takes precedence over any IFR departure
procedures published for the airport. Since you are obligated to comply with the provisions listed
for the SID, you must ensure your aircraft is capable of achieving the performance requirements.
Some SIDs requires you to cross a ftx at or above a specified altitude. If the climb performance of
your aircraft does not allow you to reach the altitude by the fix, you can't use the SID. Your
responsibility as pilot-in-command is to review each SID, make sure your aircraft can comply with
the procedures, and refuse any SID that is beyond the limits of your aircraft.
CAAC disseminates pilots navigation SIDs by now. Pilot navigation SIDs are designed to
allow you to navigate along a specified route with minimal communications with A TC. The SIDs
usually contain an initial set of instructions that apply to an aircraft followed by one or more
transition routes that require you to navigate to the appropriate fix within the enroute structure.
The symbols used on Jeppesen SIDs are very similar to those used on other charts. Jeppesen
SIDs include a textual description of the initial take-off and transition procedures, and a plan
view of the routing. In some cases, a textual description may not be provided for a simple
transition (Figure 6-18).
At the top of the chart, Jeppesen usually lists the airport name served by the procedure (item I),
the effective date of the chart (item 2), as well as the name of the chart (item 3) and the city name
(item 4). In this case, it is CAPITAL airport in BEIJING, PROF CHINA. The effective date of this
chart is 24 January 2003, and this chart is a pilot nav SID.
The airport elevation (item 5) is shown at the upper left-hand comer of the plan view, which
could be used to help pilot calculate the height of the airplane because the altimeter displays altitude.
For instance, when the airplane takes off from runway 36L, it must climb to altitude 1 970 feet at

714 JAN o3 (1 o-3A) 11 ll:B
Apt Elev
Trans level : FL 118 Trans all : 9850'
VM 10
RWY 18l
Fl118 Fl3600m
Fll38 Fl4200m
FL 148 Fl4500m
FL 187 Fl5700m
FL 197 Fl6000m
Fl236 Fl7200m
Gnd speed- KT 75
5At 304' per NM 380
4.6% 280' per NM 349
B 10830' QNH 1031 hPl!l or above
8860' QNH 979 hPa or below
VM 20
VYK 20
RWY 36l
VM 110
VYK 110

I t.!.l E.'!'!:!<
1139 11.5 E 116 34.3
I *489 YK I
N39 lt.S E116 34.3
CAT C, 0
At or above FL236
At FL 138
CAT C, 0 below
CAT B below fl138
150 200 250 300
760 1013 1266 1519
699 932 1165 1398
VM 120
VYK 120
. / H39 IS . O E06 54.0
VM 10, 20, 110, 120
At or above FL197
At Fl138
CAT A & acft
below FLI38
At enroute Al T
CHANCES: o .. wangrhuang V0R & NOB coordin"""-
Figure 6-18 Standard Instrument Departure Cbart
distance of7 nautical miles to PEK VOR, the height of this point is 1 855 feet. For the convenience
of pilot correcting altimeter, Jeppesen lists Transition Level (TL) and Transition Altitude (T A) at
the top of the plan view (item 6). If QNH greater than 979 hPa and less than 1 031 hPa, pilot must
not correct altimeter to 1 013 hPa until it indicates 9 850 feet altitude. The MSA of different sectors
within 25 nautical miles to PEK VOR is depicted at the upper right-hand corer of the plan view
(item 7), which is same of the approach chart
The runway number served by the SIDs is listed at the top of the plan view (item 8). For
CAPITAL SID, when the airplane takes off from runway 36R and departures to south, the SID may
be VM 120 or VYK 120, while if the airplane takes off from runway 36L, the SID may be VM 20
The plan view of the SID mainly depicts runways served by different departure routes, as well
as navaids and intersections. Besides these factors, altitudes, magnetic course, mileage between two
intersections or navaids and sometimes the climb gradient of certain segment are portrayed on the
graphic. Navaids are similar to those we discussed in other charts, for example, the frequency of
HUAIRONG VOR/O:ME is 113.6 MHz with an identifier ofHUR, its geographical coordinates are
north latitude 40 degrees 19.8 minutes and east longitude 116 degrees 44.9 minutes (item 9).
Jeppesen SID provides the latitude and longitude coordinates of intersections (item 10), mileage
break points to certain navigation facility and the outbound course. In this case, the mileage from
XILIUHETUN to SHIGEZHUANG is 39 nautical miles (item 11), and the outbound magnetic
course is 184 (item 12). Because of the large area covered, most SIDs are not usually drawn to
scale. When this is the case, the notation ''NOT TO SCALE" is printed on the chart (item 13).
Typically, when cleared to departure to SHIGEZHUANG via VM 120, pilots are expected to
maintain the runway heading 359 that corresponds with the extended runway centerline and drift
angle should not be applied. The initial take-off procedure applies to all runways. The graphic, or
plan view of the departure route portrays the radial and altitude from CAPITAL to the initial tum
point (item 14). On Jeppesen charts, this route is shown by a bold line. Thin lines are used to
indicate the appropriate radial for navigating or identifying fixes. The actual mileage between a
given runway and the intersection varies with aircraft performance and pilot technique. Therefore,
Jeppesen includes the direct distance of 13 n.m. from the tum point to the intersection of OME 3
n.m. along HUAIROU radial 212 (item 15). After turning right, the airplane must fly to
XILIUHETUN at or above 4 930 feet MSL along 206 (item 16).
If your planned route allows you to follow one of the transitions, it is usually to your benefit to
file for the transition. For example, suppose your route of flight takes you over the
SHIGEZHUANG VORIDME. In this case, you can include the SHIGEZHUANG transition in your
flight plan. The distance from XILIUHETUN to the SIUGEZHUANG VORIDME is 39 n.m., and
the course follows the 184 radial from XILIUHETIJN (184 outbound). Notice that there are two
different way points may transition via SlllGEZHUANG, one is CG and another is BTO.
According to airplane's category and the departure direction, Jeppesen lists the minimum altitude o:
the airplane via transition SlllGEZHUANG in tbe rectangle (item 17). In this case, the minimun:
altitude of category C and D airplanes must be at or above FL187 (5 700 meters) when the airplane
departures to CG, while category A and other aircrafts bellow FL148 and at the enroute altitude
filed in the flight plan (item 18).
When you file for this transition, the first part of your routing should list the A TC code VM.
This tells ATC you plan to fly the VM Departure and the SHIGEZHUANG transition. Listing the
code exactly as it appears on the SID helps ATC enter it into the computer and reduce the time
required to process your flight plan. The remainder of your route, starting at SHIGEZHUANG, is
entered following this code.
For the convenience of converting meter to feet, Jeppesen lists a feet and meter conversion
table at the left of the chart (item 19). For example, if you are cleared to climb to altitude 5 700
meters via SHIGEZHUANG, you could easily determine that the altitude is FL 18 700 feet from the
In order to climb to the minimum altitude of 4 930 feet, Jeppesen gives out a ground speed
(GS) and ratio of climb (R.C) relationship table at the lower left-hand corner of the plan view (item
20). If you are cleared to departure from runway 18R, because the minimum climb gradient is 4.6%
from DK NDB to WF NDB, you must keep at least the RC of 699 feet per minute with GS 150
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
The standard terminal arrival route (STAR) uses symbols similar to those found on a SID chart.
Since the procedure may begin at more than one enroute fix, several transitions may join into one
common arrival route. The arrival routes normally terminate at an initial approach fix (IAF). On the
accompanying CAPITAL arrival chart, four transitions are portrayed from DA W ANGZHUANG
VORIDME, while VYK 3A and KM lA coverage at the intersection ofDME 16 n.m. and QDR
277 from HUAIROU (Figure 6-19).
Like SIDs, STARs include the name of the airport served (item 1) and the name of the
procedure (item 2) near the top of the chart. The LR 1A transition (item 3) begins at the
GUBEIKOU NDB and follows the magnetic course of 277 to the HUAIROU VOR/D:ME. The
minimum altitude of approach for this route segment is 4 930 feet MSL (item 4), and the distance is
25 n.m .. The altitude that the airplane descends from enroute altitude to GUBEIKOU is different,
and it yields to the category of the airplane. Category B, C and D airplanes should descend to
certain FL between FL118 and FL148 by ATC (item 5). Category A airplane and other aircrafts
should keep their enroute altitude below FL118.
The arrival route VYK lA begins from DA W ANGZHUANG and ends at HUAIROU, it is
divided into two segments by the hold fix which locates at D:ME 25 from BEIJING VORID:ME
along QDR 187 (item 6). The outbound course for the first segment is 007 (item 7), and the
inbound course for the second segment is 016 (item 8) to HUAIROU. The first segment is 27 n.m.
long and the second segment is altogether 42 n.m.. If you received an approach clearance along
*A TIS Apt Eft1v

All Sel. hPa
Trans level : FL 118
Trans all: 9850'
127.6 115'
10830' QNH I 031 hPo or above
8860' QNH 979 hPo or below
KM lA, LR lA
038 HUll 0 II HUll
N40 20. S N40 20.0
EllS SS.2 O:U HUll E 116 24.0
I J.!
N40 38.0 Ell7 05.0
CAT B, C & 0
FLUS & Fl118
CAT A & aclt
below FL 118
enroute Al T
' 7910']
9J"-D.J4 /
-/K;;f 1A""'( X

X 4 X -R277""---
7880 ...,, 013 SZY
X - X H40 18.2 116 21.6
CAT 8, C & D
on HUll "930')
H\JAil.AI :-1 "'
*360 1 v-
N40 23 6 EllS 29 S '?


N40 19.8 E 116 44.9
[At 4930']
Fl187 & Fl148
CAT B below
FL138 & CAT A
. , ...
N40 06. 1 E116 27.7 1""
( ....... ) r
14.7 I
Oil it if 36.0
enroute ALT
North arrival sector :
Ill q
r-:0,..-0-e- vi_a_l i_on _ w_e-51..,
of SZY R-180 ...
not permitted. PROHIBITED

Available below 5910'
operation hours by ATC.
..,. ""c;
025 PEK II
N39 38.0 Elt6 3S.S

112.7 VYK -o - Ill
,,_ --- -- X D29 PEK 1111
N39 ll.S Ell6 34.3
Fl187 Fl5700m
Fl148 Fl4500m
Fl138 Fl4200m
Fll28 Fl3900m
Hl9 ll.S E 116 lU
FLIIS Fl3600m
CAT 8, C & 0
Fll87 & FL 148
10830' 3300m
AI Fl 138
9850' 3000m
or ar Fl I 28
8860' 2700m

7880' 2400m
CAT A & acft
6890' 2100m
below fll
5910' !BOOm
4930' ISOOm
enroute Al T
Figure 6-19 Standard Terminal Arrival Chart
VYK lA, you frrst descend to 6 890 feet to D25 PEK, then turn right and descend to 5 910 feet to
Dl8 HUR (item 9). If you are cleared to hold at D25 PEK, the minimum hold altitude of this
procedure is 6 890 feet, and the coverage of the procedure is between DME 25 n.m. and 29 n.m. to
PEK (item 1 0). Since the minimum hold altitude of another two hold procedures is not shown on
the chart, you should maintain enroute altitude until you are assigned a lower hold altitude by ATC
(item 11).
The textual explanation at the left side of the chart is a description of the VYK 3A arrival route
(item 12). If you are cleared to fly to AHAZIYING along the VYK 3A arrival route, you must keep
in mind that you can't deviate to the west side ofSZY Rl80, because the BEUING prohibited area
is located at the west side of szy R180. 1f the enroute portion of your flight ends at the
DA WANGZHUANG VOR/DME, you shopld add the code VYK to the end of the route description
in your IFR flight plan. There are two arrival routes after DA W ANGZHUANG, you can't file VYK
l A or VYK 3A on your flight plan because the arrival route is given by the ATC upon arrival
The Pilot/Controller Glossary divides emergencies into two categories: distress and urgency.
Distress is a condition of being threatened by serious and/or imminent danger and of requiring
immediate assistance. Distress conditions include fire, mechanical failure or structural damage. An
urgency condition is one of being concerned about safety and of requiring timely but not immediate
assistance. At least an urgency condition exists the moment a pilot becomes doubtful about position,
fuel endurance, weather or any other conditions that could adversely affect the safety of flight. A
pilot should declare an emergency when either an urgency or a distress condition exists.
Pilots who become apprehensive for their safety for any reason should request assistance
immediately. Ready and willing help is available in the form of radio, radar, direction finding
stations and other aircraft. Delay causes accidents and costs lives. Safety is not a luxury! Take
When a distress or urgency condition exists, the pilot should set the radar beacon transponder
to code 7700.If an aircraft is being hijacked or illegally interfered with, the pilot can alert ATC to
that fact by setting the transponder to code 7500. If an ai.rt;raft has experienced a two-way
communications radio failure, the pilot should set the transponder to code 7600. The pilot should
also conform to the radio failure procedures (IFR operations: Two-way radio communications
failure). In order to avoid false alarms, pilots should take care not to inadvertently switch through
codes 7500, 7600 and 7700 when changing the transponder.
A pilot who encounters a distress or urgency condition can obtain assistance simply by
contacting the air traffic facility or other agency in whose area of responsibility the aircraft is
operating, stating the nature of the difficulty, pilot's intentions and assistance desires. Distress and
urgency communications procedures are prescribed by the International Civil Aviation
Organization (ICAO), however, and have decided advantages over the informal procedure
described above.
Distress and urgency communications procedures discussed in the following paragraphs
related to the use of air ground voice communications.
A. The initial communication and, if considered necessary, any subsequent transmissions by
an aircraft in distress should begin with the signal MAYDAY, preferably repeated three
times. The signal PAN-PAN should be used in the same manner for an urgency condition.
B. Distress communications have absolute priority over aU other communications, and the
word MAYDAY commands radio silence on the frequency in use. Urgency
communications have priority over aU other communications except distress and the word
PAN-PAN warns other stations not to interfere will urgency transmissions.
C. Normally, the station addressed will be the air traffic facility or other agency providing air
traffic services on the frequency in use at the time. If the pilot is not communicating and
receiving services, the station to be called will normally be the air traffic facility or other
agency in whose area of responsibility the aircraft is operating on the appropriate assigned
frequency. If the station addressed does not respond, or if time or the situation dictates, the
distress or urgency message may be broadcast, or a collect call may be used, addressing
"Any Station (Tower, Radio, Radar)".
D. The station addressed should immediately acknowledge a distress or urgency message,
provide assistance, coordinate and direct the activities of assisting facilities, and alert the
appropriate search and rescue coordinator if warranted. Responsibility will be transferred
to another station only if better handling will result.
E. All other stations, aircraft and ground, will continue to listen until it is evident that
assistance is being provided. If any station becomes aware that the station being called
either has not received a distress or urgency message, or can't communicate with the
aircraft in difficulty, it will attempt to contact the aircraft and provide assistance.
A pilot in any distress or urgency condition should immediate take the following action, not
necessarily in the order listed, to obtain assistance:
A. Climb, if possible, for improved communications, and better radar and direction finding
detection. However, it must be understood that unauthorized climb or descent under IFR
conditions within controlled airspace is prohibited, except as permitted by CCAR Part 91.3.
B. If equipped with a radar beacon transponder:
Continue squawking assigned MODE A/3discrete codeNFR code and MODE C altitude
encoding when in radio contact with an air traffic facility or other agency providing air
traffic services, unless instructed to do otherwise.
If unable to immediately establish communications with an air traffic facility/agency,
squawk MODE A/3, Code 7700/Emergency and MODE C.
C. Transmit a distress or urgency message consisting of as many as necessary of the following
elements, preferably in the order listed:
If distress, MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY; if urgency PAN-PAN, PAN-PAN,
Name of station addressed.
Aircraft identification and type.
Nature of distress or urgency.
Pilots intentions and request.
Present position, and heading; or if lost last known position, time, and heading since that
Altitude or flight level.
Fuel remaining in minutes.
Number of people on board.
Any other useful information.
After establishing radio contact, comply with advice and instructions received. Cooperate. Do
not hesitate to ask questions or clarify instructions when you do not understand or if you can't
comply with clearance. Assist the ground station to control communications on the frequency in use.
Silence interfering radio stations. Do not change frequency or change to another ground station
unless absolutely necessary. If you do, advise the ground station of the new frequency and station
name prior to the change, transmitting in the blind if necessary. If two-way communications can't
be established on the new .frequency, return immediately to the frequency or station where two-way
communications last existed.
When in a distress condition with bailout, crash landing or ditching imminent, take the
following additional actions to assist search and rescue units:
A. Time and circumstances permitting, transmit as many as necessary of the message
elements in subparagraph mentioned C and any of the following that you think might be
ELT status.
Visible landmarks.
Aircraft color.
Number of persons on board.
Emergency equipment on board
B. Actuate your ELT if the installation permits
C. For bailout, and for crash landing or ditching if risk of fire is not a consideration, set your
radio for continuous transmission.
D. If it becomes necessary to ditch, make every effort to ditch near a surface vessel.
E. After a crash landing unless you have good reason to believe that you will not be located by
searching aircraft or ground teams, it is best to remain with your aircraft and prepare means
for signaling search aircraft.
It is virtually impossible to provide regulations and procedures applicable to all possible
situations associated with two-way radio communications failure. During two-way radio
communication failure, when confronted by a situation not covered in the regulation, pilots are
expected to exercise good judgment in whatever action they elect to take. Should the situation so
dictate, they should not be reluctant to use the emergency action contained in CCAR Part 91.3.
Whether two-way communications failure constitutes an emergency depends on the
circumstances, and in any event, it is a determination made by the pilot. CCAR Part 91.3 authorizes
a pilot to deviate from any rule in Subparts A and B to the extent required to meet an emergency.
In the event of two-way radio communications failure, ATC service will be provided on the
basis that the pilot is operating in accordance with CCAR Part 91.185. A pilot experiencing
two-way communications failure should (unless emergency authority is exercised) comply with
CCAR Part 91.185 quoted below:
A. General. Unless otherwise authorized by ATC, each pilot who has two-way radio
communications failure when operating under IFR Shall comply with the rules of this
B. VFR conditions. If the failure occurs in VFR conditions, or if VFR conditions are
encountered after the failure, each pilot shall continue the night under VFR and land as
soon as practicable.
NOTE: This procedure also applies when two-way radio failure occurs while operating in
Class A airspace. The primary objective of this provision in FAR Pad 91.185 is to preclude
extended IFR operation in the A TC system in VFR weather conditions. Pilots should recognize that
operation under these conditions may unnecessarily as well as adversely affect other users of the
airspace, since ATC may be required to reroute or delay other users in order to protect the failure
aircraft. However, it is not intended that the requirement to "land as soon as practicable" be
construed to mean "as soon as possible" the pilot retains his prerogative of exercising his best
judgment and is not required to land at an unauthorized airport, at an airport unsuitable for the type
of aircraft flown or to land only minutes short of his destination.
C. IFR conditions. If the failure occurs in IFR conditions, or if paragraph 2 of this section
can't be complied with, each pilot shall continue the flight according to the following:
1) By the route assigned in the last ATC clearance received;
2) If being radar vectored, by the direct route from the point of radio failure to the fix, route,
or airway specified in the vector clearance;
3) In the absence of an assigned route, by the route that A TC has advised may be expected
in a further clearance; or
4) In the absence of an assigned route or a route that ATC has advised may be expected in a
further clearance by the route tiled in the night plan.
Altitude. At the IDGHEST of the following altitudes or Flight Levels FOR THE ROUTE
1) The altitude or flight level assigned in the last A TC clearance received;
2) The minimum altitude (converted, if appropriate, to minimum night level as prescribed in
CCAR Part 91.121) for 1FR operations; or
3) The altitude or flight level ATC has advised may be expected in a further clearance.
NOTE: The intent of the rule is that a pilot who has experienced two-way radio failure should
select the appropriate altitude for the particular route segment being flown and make the necessary
altitude adjustments for subsequent mute segments. If the pilot received an "expect further
clearance" containing a higher altitude to expect at a specified time or fix, he/she should maintain
the highest of the following altitudes until that time/fix: (1) His/her last assigned altitude, or (2) the
minimum altitude/flight level for IFR operations.
Upon reaching the time/fix specified, the pilot should commence his/her climb to the altitude
h e / s ~ e was advised to expect If the radio failure occurs after the time/fix specified, the altitude to
be expected is not applicable and the pilot should maintain an altitude consistent with I or 2 above.
If the pilot receives an "expect further clearance (EFC)", containing a lower altitude, the pilot
should maintain the highest of I or 2 above.
Example 1
A pilot experiencing two-way radio failure at an assigned altitude of7 000 feet is cleared along
a direct route which will require a climb to a minimum 1FR altitude of 9 000 feet, should climb to
reach 9 000 feet at the time or place where it becomes necessary (see CCAR Part 91.177). Later
while proceeding along an airway with an MEA of 5 000 feet, the pilot would descend to 7 000 feet
(the last assigned altitude), because that altitude is higher than the MEA.
A pilot experiencing two-way radio failure while being progressively descended to lower
attitudes to begin an approach is assigned to 2 700 feet until crossing the VOR and then cleared for
the approach. The MOCA along the airway is 2 700 feet and MEA is 4 000 feet. The aircraft is
within 22NM of the VOR The pilot should remain at 2 700 feet until crossing the VOR because
that at the altitude is the minimum IFR altitude for the route segment being flown
The MEA between A and B -5 000 feet. The MEA between Band C - S 000 feet. The MEA
between C and D - II 000 feet The MEA between D and E - 7 000 feet. A pilot had been cleared
via A B, C, D, to E. While flying between A and B his assigned altitude was 6 000 feet and he was
told to expect a clearance to 8 000 feet at B. Prior to receiving the higher altitude assignment, he
experienced two-way failure. The pilot would maintain 6 000 to B, then climb to 8 000 feet (the
altitude he was advised to expect) He would maintain 8 000 feet, then climb to 1I 000 at C, or prior
to C if necessary to comply with an MCA at C. (CCAR Part 91.177). Upon reaching D, the pilot
would descend to 8 000 feet (even though the MEA was 7 000 feet), as 8 000 was the highest of the
altitude situations stated in the rule (CCAR Part 91. 185).
Leave clearance limit:
1) When the clearance limit is a fix from which an approach begins, commence descent or
descent and approach as close as possible to the expect further clearance time if one has
been received, or if one has not been received, as close as possible to the Estimated Time
of Arrival (ETA) as calculated from the filed or amended (with ATC) Estimated Time en
Route (ETE).
2) If the clearance limit is not a fix from which an approach begins, leave the clearance limit
at the expect further clearance time if one has been received, or if none has been received,
upon arrival over the clearance limit, and proceed to a fix from which an approach begins
and commence descent or descent and approach as close as possible to the estimated time
of arrival as calculated from the filed or amended (with ATC) estimated time en route.
A near mid-air collision is defined as an occurrence in which the possibility of a collision
existed as the result of two aircraft coming within 500 feet or less of each other.
A high percentage of near mid-air collision occur below 8 000 feet AGL and within 30 miles of
an airport. When operating VFR in these highly congested areas, whether you intend to land at an
airport within the area or are just flying through, it is recommended that extra vigilance be
maintained and that you monitor an appropriate control frequency. Normally the appropriate
frequency is an approach control frequency. By such monitoring action you can "get the picture" of
the traffic in your area When the approach controller has radar, radar traffic advisories may be
given to VFR pilots upon request. .
A minimum fuel advisory is used by a pilot to inform ATC that the fuel supply has reached a
state where the pilot can't accept any undue delay upon arrival at the destination. The minimum fhel
advisory is not a declaration of an emergency, nor is it a request for priority. It does indicate that an
emergency situation may develop if any undue delay occurs during the rest of the flight
Pilot/Controller roles and responsibilities:
A. Pilot:
Advise ATC of your minimum fuel status when your fuel supply has reached a state
where, upon reaching destination, you can't accept any undue delay.
Be aware this is not an emergency situation, but merely an advisory that indicates an
emergency situation is possible should any undue delay occur.
On initial contact the tern "minimum fuel", should be used after stating call sign.
Be aware a minimum fuel advisory does not imply a need for traffic priority.
If the remaining usable fuel supply suggests the need for traffic priority to ensure a safe
landing, you should declare an emergency account low fuel and report fuel remaining in
minutes (Reference-Pilot/Controller Glossary, Fuel Remaining).
B. Controller:
When an aircraft declares a state of minimum fuel, relay this information to the facility to
whom control jurisdiction is transferred.
Be alert for any occurrence that might delay the aircraft.
Some airports have a number of wind indicators located around the perimeter of the field as
well as a center field windsock. When there is a significant difference in speed or direction between
the center field windsock and one or more of the boundary wind indicators, the tower can report
that a w4td shear condition exists.
A safety alert will be issued to pilots being controlled by A TC in either of two circumstances.
A controller will issue a safety alert when, in the controller's opinion, the aircraft's altitude will put
it in unsafe proximity to the surface or an obstacle. A controller will also issue an alert if he/she
becomes aware of another aircraft, not controlled by him/her, that will put both aircraft in an unsafe
proximity to each other.
Pilot/Controller roles and responsibilities:
A. Pilot:
Initiates appropriate action if a safety alert is received from A TC.
Be aware that this service is not always available and that many factors affect the ability
of the controller to be aware of a situation in which unsafe proximity to terrain,
obstructions, or another aircraft may be developing.
B. Controller:
Issues a safety alert if he is aware an aircraft under his control is at an altitude which, in
the controller's judgment, places the aircraft in unsafe proximity to terrain, obstructions
or another aircraft. Types of safety alerts are:
1) Terrain or Obstruction Alert-Immediately issued to an aircraft under his control if he is
aware the aircraft is at an altitude believed to place the aircraft in unsafe proximity to
terrain or obstructions.
2) Aircraft Conflict Alert-Immediately issued to an aircraft under his control if he is
aware of an aircraft not under his control at an altitude believed to place the aircraft in
unsafe proximity to each other. With the alert, he offers the pilot an alternative, if
Discontinues further alerts if informed by the pilot that he is taking action to correct the
situation or that he has the other aircraft in sight.
Every aircraft generates a wake while in flight Initially, when pilots encountered this wake in
flight, the disturbance was attributed to ''prop Wash" It is known, however, that this disturbance is
caused by a pair of counter rotating vortices trailing from the wing tips. The vortices from larger
aircraft pose problems to encountering aircraft. For instance, the wake of these aircraft can impose
toning moments exceeding the roll-control authority of the encountering aircraft. Further,
turbulence generated within the vortices can damage aircraft components and equipment if
encountered at close range. The pilot must learn to envision the location of the vortex wake
generated by larger (transport category) aircraft and adjust the night path accordingly.
During ground operations and during take-off, jet engine blast (thrust stream turbulence) can
cause damage and upsets if encountered at close range. Exhaust velocity versus distance studies at
various thrust levels have shown a need for light aircraft to maintain an adequate separation behind
large turbojet aircraft. Pilots of larger aircraft should be particularly careful to consider the effects
of their "jet blast'', on other aircraft, vehicles, and maintenance equipment during ground
Lift is generated by the creation of a pressure differential over the wing surface. The lowest
pressure occurs over the upper wing surface
and the highest pressures under the wing.
This pressure differential triggers the rollup
of the airflow aft of the wing resulting in
swirling air masses trailing downstream of
the wing tips. After the roll up is completed,
the wake consists of two counter rotating
cylindrical vortices. (See Figure 7-1 ). Most
of the energy is within a few feet of the
center of each vortex, but pilots should avoid
a region within about 100 feet of the vortex
Vortex Strength
Figure 7-1 Vortex Generation
The strength of the vortex is governed by the weight, speed, and shape of the wing of the
generating aircraft. The vortex characteristics of any given aircraft can also be changed by
extension of naps or other wing configuring devices as well as by change in speed. However, as the
basic factor is weight, the vortex strength increases proportionately. Peak vortex tangential speeds
exceeding 300 feet per second have been recorded. The greatest vortex strength occurs when the
generating aircraft is HEAVY, CLEAN, and SLOW.
In rare instances a wake encounter could cause in-night structural damage of catastrophic
proportions. However, the usual hazard is associated with induced rolling moments which can
exceed the roll-control authority of the encountering aircraft. In flight experiments, aircraft have
been intentionally flown directly up trailing vortex cores of larger aircraft's was shown that the
capability of an aircraft to counteract the roll imposed by the wake vortex primarily depends on the
wingspan and counter-control responsiveness of the encountering aircraft.
Counter control is usually effective and induced roil minimal in cases where the wingspan and
ailerons of the encountering aircraft
extend beyond the rotational now field of
the vortex. It is more difficult for aircraft
with short wingspan (relative to the
generating aircraft) to counter the
imposed roll induced by vortex now.
Pilots of short span aircraft, even of the
high performance type, must be especially
alert to vortex encounters (See Figure 7-2
Wake Vortex Flow Field).
The wake of larger aircraft requires
the respect of all pilots.
Vortex Behavior
Figure 7-2 Wake Vortex Flow Field
Trailing vortices have certain behavioral characteristics which can help a pilot visualize the
wake location and thereby take avoidance precaution.
Vortices are generated from the moment aircraft leave the ground, since trailing vortices are a
by-product of wing lift. Prior to take-off or touchdown pilots should note the rotation or touchdown
point of the preceding aircraft (See Figure 7-3 Wake Begins/Ends).
~ ~ : . ~ /
~ t l ~
Wake Ends Wake Begins
Figure 7-3 Wake Begins/Ends
The vortex circulation is outward, upward and around the wing tips when viewed from either
ahead or behind the aircraft. Tests with large aircraft have shown that the vortices remain spaced a
bit less, than a wingspan apart, drifting with the wind, at altitudes greater than a wingspan from the
ground. In view of this, if persistent vortex turbulence is encountered, a slight change of altitude
and lateral position (preferably upwind) will provide a night path clear of the turbulence.
Flight tests have shown that the vortices from larger (transport category) aircraft sink at a rate
of several hundred feet per minute, slowing their descent and diminishing in strength with time and
distance behind the generating aircraft. Atmospheric turbulence hastens breakup. Pilots shodd fly
at or above the preceding aircraft's night path, altering course as necessary to avoid the area behind
and below the generating aircraft (see Figure7-4). However vertical separation of 1 000 feet may be
consider safe.
Figure 7-4 Vortex Flow Field
When the vortices of larger aircraft sink close to the ground (within-I 00 to 200 feet), they tend
to move laterally over the ground al airspeed of2 or 3 knots (see Figure 7-5) .
Vnrtl'x Mnvcm{ml Grourl - \o 1\'i nd
Figure 7-5 Vortex Sink Rate
A crosswind will decrease the lateral movement of the upwind vortex and increase the
movement of the downwind vortex. Thus a light wind with across runway component of 1 to 5
knots could result in the upwind vortex remaining in the touch-down zone for a period of time and
hasten the drift of the downwind vortex to ward another runway (see Figure 7-6). Similarly, a tail
wind condition can move the vortices of the preceding aircraft forward into the touchdown zone.
alert to large aircraft upwind from their approach and take-off flight paths (see Figure 7 -7).
6J( r- y/1 r
- t:i-K __ ,_.,__.,...,,---
Figure 7-6 Vortex Movement in Ground
Effect (No Wind)
Figure 7-7 Vortex Movement in Ground Effect (Wind)
Operations Problem Areas
A wake encounter can be catastrophic. In 1972 at Fort Worth a DC-9 got too close to DC-10
(two miles back), rolled, caught a wingtip, cartwheel coming to rest in an inverted position on the
runway. All aboard were killed. Serious and even fatal GA accidents induced by wake vortices are
not uncommon. However, a wake encounter is not necessarily hazardous. It can be one or more
jolts with varying severity depending upon the direction of the encounter, weight of the generating
aircraft, size of the encountering aircraft, distance from the generating aircraft, and point of vortex
encounter. The probability of induced roll increases when the encountering aircraft's heading is
generally aligned with the flight path of the generating aircraft.
COULD BE HAZARDOUS. This is not easy to do. Some accidents have occurred even though the
pilot of the trailing aircraft had carefully noted that the aircraft in front was at a considerably lower
altitude. Unfortunately, this does not ensure that the night path of the lead aircraft will be below that
of the trailing aircraft.
Pilots should be particularly alert in calm wind conditions and situations where the vortices
A. Remain in the touchdown area.
B. Drift from aircraft operating on a nearby runway.
C. Sink into the take-off or landing path from a crossing runway.
D. Sink into the traffic pattern from other airport operations.
E. Sink into the night path of VFR aircraft operating on the hemispheric altitude 500 feet below.
Pilots of all aircraft should visualize the location of the vortex trail behind larger aircraft and
use proper vortex avoidance procedures to achieve safe operation. It is equally important that pilots
oflarger aircraft plan or adjust their night paths to minimize vortex exposure to other aircraft.
Vortex Avoidance Procedures
Under certain conditions, airport traffic controllers apply procedures for separating IFR aircraft.
The controllers will also provide to VFR aircraft, with whom they are in communication and which
in the tower's opinion may be adversely affected by wake turbulence from a larger aircraft, the
position, altitude and direction of Iright of larger aircraft followed by the phrase
The following vortex avoidance procedures are recommended for the various situations:
A. Landing behind a larger aircraft-same runway: Stay at or above the larger aircraft's final
approach night path-note its touchdown point- land beyond it.
B. Landing behind a larger aircraft-when parallel runway is closer than 2 500 feet: Consider
possible drift to your runway. Stay at or above the larger aircraft's final approach Iright
path-note its touchdown point
C. Landing behind a larger aircraft-crossing runway: Cross above the larger aircraft's night
D. Landing behind a departing larger aircraft-same runway: Note the larger aircraft's rotation
point-land well prior to rotation point.
E. Landing behind a departing larger aircraft-crossing runway: Note the larger aircraft's
rotation point-if past the intersection - continue the approach-land prior to the
intersection. If larger aircraft rotates prior to the intersection, avoid night below the larger
aircraft's night path. Abandon the approach unless a landing is ensured well before
reaching the intersection.
F. Departing behind a larger aircraft: Note the larger aircraft's rotation point-rotate prior to
larger aircraft's rotation point-continue climb above the larger aircraft's climb path until .
turning clear of his wake. A void subsequent headings which will cross below and behind a
larger aircraft. Be alert for any critical take-off situation which could lead to a vortex
G. Intersection take-offs -same runway: Be alert to adjacent larger aircraft operations,
particularly upwind of your runway. If intersection take-off clearance is received, avoid
subsequent heading which will cross below a larger aircraft's path.
H. Departing or landing after a larger aircraft executing a low approach, missed approach or
touch-and-go landing: Because vortices settle and move laterally near the ground, the
vortex hazard may exist along the runway and in your night path after a larger aircraft has
executed a low approach, missed approach or a touch-and-go landing, particular in light
quartering wind conditions. You should ensure that an interval of at least 2 minutes has
e 1 apsed before your take-off or landing.
I. En route VFR (thousand-foot altitude plus 500 feet): A void night below and behind a large
aircraft's path. If a larger aircraft is observed above on the same track (meeting or
overtaking) adjust your position laterally, preferably upwind.
In a slow hover taxi or stationary hover near the surface, helicopter main rotor(s) generate
downwash producing high velocity outwash vortices to a distance approximately three times the
diameter of the rotor. When rotor downwash hits the surface, the resulting outwash vortices have
behavioral characteristics similar to wing tip vortices produced by fixed wing aircraft. However, the
vortex circulation is outward, upward, around, and away from the main rotor(s) in all directions.
Pilots of small aircraft should avoid operating within three rotor diameters of any helicopter in a
slow hover taxi or stationary hover. In forward night, departing or landing helicopters produce a
pair of strong, high-speed trailing vortices similar to wing tip vortices of larger fixed wing aircraft.
Pilots of small aircraft should use caution when operating behind or crossing behind landing and
departing helicopters.
Pilot Responsibility
Government and industry groups are making concerted efforts to minimiu or eliminate the
hazards of trailing vortices. However, the flight disciplines necessary to ensure vortex avoidance
during VFR operations must be exercised by the pilot Vortex visualization and avoidance procedures
should be exercised by the pilot using the same degree of concern as in collision avoidance.
Wake turbulence may be encountered by aircraft in night as well as when operating on the
airport movement area (Reference - Pilot/Controller Glossary, Wake Turbulence).
Pilots are reminded that in operations conducted behind all aircraft, acceptance of instructions
from ATC in the following situations is an acknowledgment that the pilot will ensure safe take-off
and landing intervals and accepts the responsibility of providing his own wake turbulence
A. Traffic information,
B. Instructions to follow an aircraft, and
C. The acceptance of a visual approach clearance.
For operations conducted behind heavy aircraft ATC will specify the word ''heavy" when this
information is known. Pilots of heavy aircraft should always use the word "heavy" in radio
Air Traffic Wake Turbulence Separations
Because of the possible effects of wake turbulence, controllers are required to apply no less
than specified minimum separation for aircraft operation behind a heavy jet and, in certain instances,
behind large non-heavy aircraft.
A. Separation is applied to aircraft operating directly behind a heavy jet at the same altitude or
less than 1 000 feet below:
Heavy jet behind heavy jet - 4 miles.
Smal1/large aircraft behind heavy jet- 5 miles.
B. Also, separation, measured at the time preceding aircraft is over the landing threshold, is
provided to small aircraft:
Small aircraft landing behind heavy jet- 6 miles.
Small aircraft landing behind large aircraft- 4 miles.
C. Additionally, appropriate time or distance intervals are provided to departing aircraft. Two
minutes or the appropriate 4 or 5 miles radar separation when take-off behind a heavy jet
will be:
from the same threshold;
on a crossing runway and projected night paths will cross;
from the threshold of a parallel runway when staggered ahead of that of the adjacent
runway by less than 500 feet and when the runways are separated by less than 2 500 feet
NOTE: Pilots, after considering possible wake-turbulence effects, may specifically request
waiver of the 2-minutes interval by stating, "request waiver of 2-minute interval" or a similar
statement Controllers may acknowledge the statement as pilot acceptance of responsibility for
wake turbulence separation and, if traffic pennlts, issue take-off clearance.
A 3-minute interval will be provided when a small aircraft will take-off:
A. From an intersection on the same runway (same or opposite direction) behind a departing
large aircraft;
B. In the opposite direction on the same runway behind a large aircraft take-off or low/missed
NOTE: This 3-minutes interval may be waived upon specific pilot request
A 3-minutes interval will be provided for all aircraft taking off when the operation are as
described A and B above, the preceding aircraft is a heavy jet, and the operations are on either the
same runway or parallel runway separated by less than 2 500 feet Controllers may not reduce or
waive this interval.
Pilots may request additional separation i.e., 2 minutes instead of 4 or 5 miles for wake
turbulence avoidance. This request should be made as soon as practical on ground control and at
least before taxiing onto the runway.
Controllers may anticipate separation and need not withhold a take-off clearance for an aircraft
departing behind a large/heavy aircraft if there is reasonable assurance the required separation will
exist when the departing aircraft starts take-off roll.
Many fight accidents show that pilots are the most important element in the aircraft's systems.
How well pilots' body and mind work have a direct influence on flight operation, and then
influencing on flight safety. As a pilot, we must understand the characteristic of our body functions
and our mind, know how they react to the various environment situations encountered during flight
In order to take measures actively to prevent and overcome corresponding disadvantageous, which
may affect flight safety.
What we learn in this chapter can help we deal with the limitations of both our body and the
environment in which we operate. At first, we will discuss how our vision work in bright sunlight
and at night It also covers some of the common visual illusions and how we can deal with them.
Then we will discuss spatial disorientation and some of the confusing sensory inputs encountered in
flight, study the effects of flying in reduced atmospheric pressure and what happens when your
normal respiration is changed. At last, we will discuss how alcohol and drugs affect human
Vision is the most important sense that we have and nearly everything that we perceive is
visual or heavily supplement by it In collision avoidance and depth perception, especially in the
visual flight, the vision sense is by far most important When we perceive the outside world through
our vision system, the visual illusions and blind spot are inevitable for the limitations of our mind
information processing and vision sensor's structure. The more we know the vision system and how
it functions, the easier it will be to compensate for these illusions and blind spot
Structure and Function of the Eye
The cornea is a transparent film through which light first enters the eye. It can be thought as a
"windshield" which protects the rest of the eye from the outside world. The cornea is supported and
held in shape by a perfectly transparent fluid called aqueous humour. The iris is the colored part of
the eye which changes its shape in response to the intensity of the light, causing the pupil - the
black aperture which forms at the centre of the iris, to become larger or smaller thereby admitting
more or less of the light through to the lens. The ciliary muscles alter the shape of the flexible lens
allowing it to focus objects at various distances onto the retina.
The retina has special receptor cells which convert light energy into nerve impulses. The
interior surface of the retina is covered with many millions of light-sensitive cells called cones
and rods.
Figure 7-8 The Anatomy of tbe Eye
The cones are centrally located around the center of the retina They gradually diminish in
number as the distance from the center increases. The cones specialize in color perception and fine
detail. Directly behind the lens on the retina is a small, notched area called the fovea, which is the
most sensitive area on the retina which contains a large number of cone receptors. When we look
directly at an object, the image is focused mainly on it. however, The cones require bright light they
function poorly in dim light. That is why we can't see color as vividly at night as we can in the day.
The rods are located in the periphery of the retina, arranged concentrically around the cones.
The rods are our dim light and night receptors and can "see" only in black and white, but it is about
10 000 times more sensitive to light than the cones, which make it best in low light and are chiefly
:-esponsible for night vision.
Since the cones do not see well in the dark, so we may not be able to see an object if the image
is focused mainly on the fovea This is so-called night blind spot Using the rods in low light
intensity by look slightly to one side of objects, for example, 5 to 10 off center of the subject, rather
than directly at them, can help us compensate for the night blind spot in the center of our vision.
In the eye, there is a spot known as the blind spot at which nothing can be seen. The blind spot
is the place in the retina at which the optic nerve enter the eye. At this point there are neither rods
nor cones, and so no vision is possible. This can be demonstrated by the following experiment.
Covering the left eye, hold the book at ann's length and using the right eye to look at the right
aircraft in Figure 7-9. Move the book slowly closer to the face while fixing your gaze on the right
aircraft, the right aircraft will disappear from your vision when its image falls on the blind spot. In
general, the blind spot will be overcome when both eyes are used, but if pilot's visual field is
blocked partly, or one of his eyes does not work well, this phenomena may take place.
1 ----.
............... .
-"'4",4' I
Figure 7-9 Blind Spot
Night Vision
Night vision is derived from the rods in the retina. The cones in our eyes adapt quite rapidly to
changes in light intensities, but the rods do not. This is the problem of dark adaptation. Dark
adaptation is the process by which the eyes adapt for optimal night visual acuity under conditions of
low ambient illumination. The eyes require between 30 and 45 minutes to fully adapt to minimal
lighting conditions. The lower the starting level of illumination, the more rapidly complete dark
adaptation is achieved.
There are some ways we can do to minimize the time necessary to achieve complete dark
adaptation and to avoid losing it
A. avoid exposure to bright lights before and during the flight;
B. use sunglasses if you will be flying from daylight into an area of increasing darkness;
C. keep the instrument panel and interior lights turned up no higher than necessary.
Furthermore, our diet and general physical health have an impact on how well we can see in
the dark. Deficiencies in vitamins A and C have been shown to reduce night acuity. Other factors,
such as carbon monoxide poisoning, smoking, alcohol, certain drugs, and a lake of oxygen also can
greatly decrease our night vision.
Empty Field Myopia and Night Myopia
Empty field myopia, also called the empty visual field effect, this may occur when looking
out of the cockpit at a featureless sky and that is devoid of objects, contrasting colors, or patterns.
Because there is nothing for the eye to focus between the cockpit and infinity, the lens takes up its
rest position for ciliary muscle relaxed, producing a focal distance between one and two meters
from the eye. This is aggravated by the windscreen frame and other parts of the aircraft structure
which attract the focusing point in from infinity. As a result the eyes appear to search the
surrounding area, but in fact, it is focused at a very close distance. If an aircraft enters the pilot's
field of vision, it may not be seen. Focusing on ground objects at frequent intervals, or in low
visibility to focus on the wing tips from time to time, empty field myopia can be alleviated to
some extent
Night myopia, is also called night-induced nearsightedness. It is similar to empty field myopia,
but is more pronounced because the visual references at night are more scarce that those of in
daytime. At night, there is nothing to observe out of the aircraft, our eyes automatically focus on a
point one to two meters in front of us. Searching out and focusing on distant light sources, no matter
how dim, will help prevent the onset of it
Scanning Techniques
Scanning the sky for other aircraft is important in avoiding mid-air collisions, particularly
when flying under visual flight rules. In a airspace which flight conflict may be happened, we may
can not see the aircraft, not to say avoiding the potential mid-air collisions because our vision
system has some limitations, our mind information processing and specific operation, and flight
path change, all need time. Some investigations show that less than 10% of mid-air collisions occur
between air craft approaching head-on. Therefore, it is essential to develop and practice a scanning
technique that allows the efficient monitoring of the surrounding air space as well as the cockpit
When developing a technique for effective visual scanning in day light, it is necessary to
perform a series of short, regularly spaced eye movements which bring successive areas of sky
into the fovea. Scan from right to left or left to right, beginning a scan at the top of the visual field
in front of you and then moving the eyes inward towards the bottom. Each movement should be
10 at most, and each area should be observed for at least I second but not longer than 2 ~ 3
seconds. The alternating movement and stopping of the eyes during the scan is known as the
saccade/rest cycle.
Unlike day scanning however, off-center viewing is used to focus objects on the rods rather
than the fovea blind spot in night or in low visibility, moving our eyes slowly and in small sectors,
using off-center viewing and avoid staring in one place for too long. Avoid looking directly at an
object for more than 2-3 seconds because the retina will become accustomed to the light intensity
and the image begin to fade. To keep it clearly visible, new areas in the retina must be exposed to
the image. Small, circular eye movements help eliminate the fading. We also need to move our eyes
more slowly from sector to sector than during the day to prevent blurring. So, we should use the
off-centre viewing that consists of search movements of the eyes, 10 above, below, or to either
side, to locate an object, and small eye movements to keep the object in sight. Switching the eyes
from one offset point to another every 2 - 3 seconds will enable the object to be detected in the
peripheral field of vision.
Maintaining a constantly updated situational awareness of what is going on in the sky around
us, is the best chance of avoiding mid-air collision. Knowing where to look during the various
phases of flight wilJ considerably improve lookout. This particularly applies when entering an
aerodrome traffic zone or flying close to ground based navigation aids where one expects a greater
concentration of traffic. In addition, the information available from radio calls made by other
aircraft should be intelligently used to assess when extra vigilance is required and which areas of
the sky to search.
An effective scan pattern is necessary to ensure that a pilot will see other aircraft in time to
avoid potential mid-air collisions. Studies show that the time a pilot spends on visual tasks inside
the cabin should represent no more than 1/4 to 113 of the scan time outside, or no more than 4 to 5
seconds on the instrureent panel for every 16 seconds outside. This means pilots should spend the
majority of scan time outside the airplane, and outside scanning is necessary when in radar
contact in VFR conditions, that is to say, 2/3 to 3/4 of a pilot's time should be spent scanning
outside the aircraft, the best method for effective collision avoidance would be to look outside for
about 15 seconds, and then inside for about 5 seconds, then repeat. It is much easier to see an
aircraft which is moving relative to the observer. Unfortunately, aircraft which present a collision
hazard are usually on the horizon with little or no apparent horizontal or vertical movement. The
image only grows larger as the threat aircraft gets closer. So, there are something we must
understand, and special vigilance must be exercised in these situations. An airplane which is
ahead of you and moving from Left to right, or from right to left, should pass in front of you. An
aircraft that appears to have no relative motion and stays in one scan quadrant is likely to be on a
collision bourse. If a target shows no lateral or vertical motion, but increases in size, we must take
evasive action.
We live and work in a one-G environment Standing on the ground, our orientation is not
difficult with surroundings. However, flying is in three-dimensional realm, when we enter it, some
conflict between our see and feel may turn up, even produce some illusions. Everyone is subject to
spatial disorientation; even experienced pilots have felt its effects in one form or another and in
varying degrees. Some situations are more disorienting than others. Understanding how they are
created and what illusions are produced is to help to us to deal effectively with these unrealistic
Three Mai n Senses
A pilot awareness of his body's position is a result of input from three main senses: vision,
vestibular, and kinesthetic. That is to say, we get information, which is used to determine
orientation, from the body's sense organs- the eyes, the hearing and vestibular organs of the inner
ear, the kinesthetic of nerve endings in the skin, muscles and joints and pass to the brain.
VISual Sense
As we have discussed in Section A, vision helps us maintain balance and our position relative
to objects around us. When other sensory input is contradictory or confusing, the brain relies
primarily upon sight to determine orientation. In darkness or limited visibility, when few out-side
visual references are available, pilots need to rely heavily on their visual sense to interpret the flight
instruments for accurate information.
Vestibular Sense
The vestibular organs are composed of the semicircular canals and static organ, which are
located-in our inner ear. They are easily deceived by slow or gradual movement Our vestibular
sense is primarily due to this sense tells pilot when he are turning, climbing, descending, speeding
up, or slowing down. It also senses gravity and G-loads created by centrifugal force.
The semicircular canals sense angular acceleration such as roll, pitch, and yaw. The three
semicircular canals are filled with fluid and are located so that each canal lies along a specific axis.
At the base of each canal are small hair cells that detect movement when they are displaced. When
you maneuver the airplane or move your head, the semicircular canals move too, while the fluid
remains temporarily stationary. This deflects tile sensory hairs and sends a nerve impulse to the
brain, which interprets the "movement" as motion around an axis.
The semicircular canals may not be able to sense a slow rate of rotation. They also are unable
to sense movement after prolonged periods of uniform movement.
The static organ is responsible for the perception of linear acceleration, which is movement
forward and back, side to side, and up and down. One of the major problems with this sensory
organ is its inability to tell the difference between gravity caused by the earth and G-loads caused
by centrifugal force.
J(jnesthetic Sense
When your awareness of position is obtained from the nerves in your skin, joints and
muscles, it is called the kinesthetic sense. Using this sense is sometimes called ''flying by the seat
of your pants", and this is literally what you are doing. Kinesthetic sense is unreliable, however,
because the brain can't tell the difference between input caused by gravity and that of
maneuvering G-loads.
Visual Illusion and Vestibular Illusion
An illusion can be defined as a false impression or unreal vision formed when sensory
information is misinterpreted by the brain. Spatial disorientation is also called disorientation or
flight illusion. it is a false perception of orientation of the aircraft, with respect to spatial references
such as flight path and altitude, or reference to objects with respect to expected shape or size. These
may occur when the sensory organs send conflicting information to the brain.
In the absence of powerful visual information. complex and interactive forces can create
specific illusions. In the absence of external visual reference, e.g. flying in cloud, conditions of poor
visibility or at night, the c o ~ c t i n g sensory information can be overcome by reference to the flight
instruments. All pilots who fly 1n instrument conditions or at night may be subject to spatial
disorientation, understanding the various types and how they occur, and taking preventative
measures when appropriate, rely on the indications of the flight instruments, are help to overcome
its passive effects. The best method to prevent or overcome spatial disorientation is to rely entirely
on the indications of the flight inst11Jments.
There are two kinds of spatial disorientation: visual illusion and vestibular illusion.
Visual Illusions
There are many different types of visual illusions that we can experience during flight, such as
auto-kinesis, false horizon. oculogravic illusion. and some other landing illusions. They commonly
occur in pilots of all levels of skill and experience.
Impulses from the sensory organs of the eye, are conducted along the optic nerve to the brain
for interpretation. The eye is very reliable for orientation as long as adequate reference points are
available. However, in flight, objects seen from the air often look quite different from when seen
on the ground thus causing difficulty in interpreting visual cues. The problems are compounded
in conditions of poor visibility and visual illusions can lead to spatial disorientation or to landing
1) Auto-kinesis. In the dark, when we stared at a stationary light for several seconds, the light
will appear to move about. The apparent movement will increase if the light source is allowed to
become the prime focus of attention.
This visual illusion is caused by staring at a single point of light against a dark background,
such as a ground light or bright star, for more than a few seconds. After a few moments, the light
will appear to move on its own. If pilot attempt to align the aircraft in sole relation to the light, he
may lose control of the airplane. To avoid the effects of this visual illusion, when flying at night it is
important to shift the gaze so as not to stare at a single light source.
2) False Horizons. In the absence of a clearly defined horizon. the pilot may mistakenly
choose another line as a reference and, for example, may fly parallel to a sloping cloud bank instead
of the earth's surface. We called it false horizon.
False horizon is another kind of visual illusion, which occurs when the natural horizon is
obscured or not readily apparent It can be generated by confusing bright stars and city lights. It
may occur when we are flying toward the shore of an ocean or a large lake, for the relative darkness
of the water, the lights along the shoreline may be mistaken for the stars in the sky.
3) Oculogravic IDusions. The oculogravic illusion can be considered as the visual component
of the somatogravic illusion that we will discuss subsequently. When an aircraft accelerates and
there is a backward rotation of the resultant force vector, the pi lot may experience an illusion of
pitch up. This may be accompanied by an apparent upward movement and displacement of objects,
such as a line of lights, within the visual field.
4) Landiug IDusions. Landing illusions occur in many forms. Elements that cause any type
of visual obscuration such as rain, haze, or a dark runway environment can cause low-than
normal approaches. Bright runway light, steep surrounding terrain, and a wide runway can
produce the illusion of being too low, and there is the tendency to fly a higher-than normal
approach. There are a variety of atmospheric and terrain conditions can produce landing illusions
(Figure 7-1 0). When we encounter these situations, we must be: able to recognize them and use all
the resources available to counteract them.
Situation illusion Result
Ups! oping Runway or Terrain Greater Height Lower Approaches
Downsloping Runway or Terrain Less Height Higher Approaches
Narrower-Than-Usual Rtmway Greater Height Lower Approaches
Bright Runway and Approach Lights Less Distance Higher Approaches
Wider-Than-Usual Runway Less Height Higher Approaches
Featureless Terrain Greater Height Lower Approaches
Rain on Wmdscreen Greater Height Lower Approaches
Haze Greater Height Lower Approaches
Penetration of Fog Pitching Up Steeper Approaches
Figure 7-10 Atmospheric and Conditions Can Produce Visual Wusions
5) Runway and Terrain Slope musion. An upsloping runway or terrain, or both, can create
the illusion that the aircraft is at a higher altitude than it actually is. This can lead to a lower than
normal approach being flown. The runway or approach terrain which slopes down can have the
opposite effect.
It's common that airports have run':"ays with a slope, some of them having three percent or
more, which may give you a strong landing illusion. If you know why and how it is happened,
you will be able to identify them long before they become problems. Read the aeronautical chart
and Airport/Facility Directory for your destination airport, take advantage of a visual approach
slope indicator system to verify your approach height and descent rate, look for other clues, such
as steep or featureless surrounding terrain, all contribute to eliminate these illusions (Figure
6) Runway Width musion. When approaching a runway that is narrower than usual, the
illusion may appear that the aircraft is higher than it actually is. This illusion may lead a pilot
descends too low on approach. This can lead to a low approach being flown (Figure 7-12).
Conversely runways significantly wider than those normally used will give a pilot the impression of
being too low on glide slope, may result in higher than desired approaches
Figure 7-11 IUusion Created during Approach Caused by Sloping Runway
Normal approach
Figure 7-11 Dlusion Created during Approach Caused by Change in Runway Width (Broken Line
Runway Is Normal)
7) Featureless Terrain Dlusion. An absence of visible ground feature, such as when landing
over water, darkened areas or terrain made featureless by snow, can create the illusion that the
aircraft is at a higher altitude than is the case, which may lead a pilot descends too low on approach.
"Black hole" Effect and "White hole" Effect are two types of it. When landing at night at an
aerodrome with no surrounding lights, pilots face what bas become known as the "black hole".
There is nothing to provide the dimension of scale leading to false perception of distance and
angle if the runway edge lights are the only visible cue, which may lead to an excessively low
approach being flown with the risk of undershooting the runway. When landing at an
runway , which surrounding is covered by snow, no other reference objects to use, pilots feel that
it is difficult to find the runway, or the aircraft is at a high altitude than is the case. This is called
"black bole" Effect. The first one is called ''Black bole" Effect, and the second one is called
"White hole" Effect.
8) Atmospheric Dlusions. Atmospheric haze, mist or fog, or rain on the windscreen, may lead
to refraction of light. Haze may make pilot think that the aircraft is farther from the runway than it
actually is. Rain on the windscreen can create an illusion of being at a higher altitude than you are.
When penetrating mist or fog , an illusion of pitching up can occur leading to the approach being
steepened abruptly.
9) Ground Lighting Dlusion. It refers to lights on a straight path such as a road, and even
lights on moving vehicles, and that can be mistaken for runway or approach lights. Bright runway
and approach landing systems, especially where few lights illuminate the surrounding terrain, may
create the illusion of there being less distance to the runway threshold. Flying over terrain which
has few lights to provide height cues may lead to a lower than normal approach being flown.
Vestibular Illusions
In general, we get our orientation primarily through our vision, but we can not ignore the
role of the vestibular and kinesthetic senses. In fact, when we work at night or in marginal
weather conditions, seat on an unstable moving platform at altitude with our vision cut off from
the earth, horizon or other fixed reference, the visual cues are fewer, they provide much
information for our orientation. However, these senses are not reliable, they can give false cues
about our orientation. Especially in flying, we are susceptible to misinterpreting certain body
sensations caused by aircraft's angular acceleration. The probability of spatial disorientation
occurring is quite high if our orientation is depended on them. These illusions are called
vestibular illusion. These illusions are most common at night and during the time of restricted
visibility. Relying on the instruments and believing what they tell you, regardless of"how it feels",
are the keys to avoid vestibular illusion.
1) Coriolis Dlusion. An abrupt head movement while making a prolonged constant rate turn,
can produce a strong sensation of rotation or movement in an entirely different axis. The
phenomenon is known as Corio lis Illusion. Coriolis illusion is considered to be one of the most
deadly. It is an illusion of turning in a different axis, which is produced by the
response arising from the stimulation of the semi-circular canals by the interaction of angular
motion in different planes. In a prolonged, constant-rate turn, if a pilot tilt his bead down to
change a fuel tank or pick up a pencil, the rapid head movement puts the fluid in motion in more
than one semicircular canal. This creates an overwhelming sensation of rotating, turning, or
accelerating along an entirely different plane. An attempt to stop the sensation by maneuvering
the airplane may put it into a dangerous attitude.
Not moving your head too fast in limited visibility or darkness is the best way to avoid it.
218 219
2) Leans. This is one of the most common types of spatial disorientation also called illusion of
level flight. This illusion often occurs when an abrupt recovery or a rapid correction is made, that is
to say, an abrupt correction of a banked angle can create the illusion of banking in the opposite
direction. In straight and level flight the fluid in the semicircular canals of the ear is stationary and
the hair detectors are not deflected. Any movement of the head, for example result of aircraft roll or
pitch, will cause a reaction in the appropriate pair of canals and this is perceived as movement in the
appropriate direction. The signal to the brain is the result of the sensory hairs being deflected by the
relative movement of the fluid, but continuing the motion at a steady rate will allow the fluid to
catch up with the aircraft and the hairs will revert to their original upright position, which leads to a
false perception that the aircraft is once again flying straight and level.
So, when a aircraft is in an abrupt recovery or a rapid correction, if the pilot makes such a
recovery, his semicircular canals sense a roll in the opposite direction. This may cause he to
reenter the original attitude. When be return the aircraft to a Wing-level condition, he wiJJ tend to
lean in the direction of the incorrect bank until the semicircular canal fluids return to normal.
From the information mentioned above, we can know that if we are in this state for some reasons,
maintaining a level attitude for a minute or two generally, this illusion will be stopped.
3) Somatogravic IDusion. A rapid acceleration or deceleration can cause a somatogravic
illusion. An acceleration can produce the illusion that you are in a nose-high attitude, even though
you are still in straight-and-level flight. This may prompt you to lower the nose and enter a dive. A
deceleration, such as rapidly retarding the throttle, produces the opposite effect. You may think you
are in a dive and raise the nose. If you raise the nose too far, a stall may be produced.
4) Inversion IDusion. An abrupt change from a climb to straight and level flight can create the
illusion of tumbling backwards. The effect may cause you to lower the nose abruptly, which may
intensify the illusion.
Our respiration relates to the construction of the atmosphere closely. The atmosphere is a
mixture of gasses, oxygen possess about 21%, while 78% is nitrogen and 1% is other gasses, such
as carbon dioxide and argon. Although the percentage of nitrogen, carbon dioxide and oxygen in the
atmosphere remains constant with changes in altitude, the pressure or density of the air is less.
It is well know that the tissues in our body can receive enough oxygen, but for some reasons,
our normal respiration cycle may be interrupted or broken down, the body may can not get enough
oxygen. In this condition, pilot's judgment may be impaired and flight skills may be cut down.
Eventually, there is loss of consciousness and ultimately death. The symptoms are insidious at first
and develop slowly, but progressive and more marked at altitudes above 10 000 ft. In all cases night
vision is impaired from approximately 5 000 ft upwards.
Hypoxia occurs when our brain and other tissues can not receive enough oxygen for some
reasons. The mixture of air you breathe remains relatively uniform as attitude increases, but the
pressure or density of the air is less. That is to say, there is less oxygen reaching the cells in our
body as plane climb. hypoxic hypoxia and anemic hypoxia are two typical types of hypoxia in
Hypoxic Hypoxia
Hypoxic hypoxia occurs when there is a lack of available oxygen in the atmosphere. It is
considered to be the most lethal factor of all physiological causes of accidents. It can occur very
suddenly at high altitudes during rapid decompression, such as loss of cabin pressure. It can also
occur slowly at lower altitudes when we are exposed to insufficient oxygen over an extended period
of time. The symptoms of hypoxia vary with the individual. Some of the common symptoms
A. Anincrease in breathing rate;
B. Lightheaded or dizzy sensation;
C. Headache;
D. Sweating;
E. Tmgling or warm sensation;
F. Blue fingernails and lips;
G Reduced visual field;
H. Sleepiness or frequent yawning;
I. Impaired judgment;
J. Aslowing of decision-making processes;
K. Afeeling of euphoria;
L. Changes in personality traits.
Anemic Hypoxia
When our blood is not able to carry a sufficient amount of oxygen to the cells in your body, a
condition called anemic hypoxia occurs. Its symptoms are very similar to hypoxic hypoxia and can
produce the loss of muscle power, a headache, and dizziness. If the poisoning is severe enough, it
can result in death. This type of hypoxia is a result of a deficiency in the blood (anemia), rather than
a lack of inhaled oxygen. Anemia can occur as a result of excessive bleeding, a stomach ulcer, or a
diet deficiency. It also can occur when oxygen is not able to attach itself to hemoglobin.
For pilots, the most common cases of anemic hypoxia come from carbon monoxide
poisoning. Carbon monoxide (CO) is produced by incomplete combustion of carbonaceous
material and is also presented in the exhaust fumes of piston engines and tobacco smoking.
Hemoglobin has an affinity for carbon monoxide 200 times greater than its affinity for oxygen, it
prevents oxygen from attaching to the hemoglobin and can produce anemic hypoxia. The
symptoms are progressive starting with headache, nausea, dizziness and a reduction in vision.
Continuing inhalation of carbon monoxide eventually leads to vomiting, loss of muscular power,
unconsciousness and death.
Susceptibility to carbon monoxide poisoning increases as altitude increases because of the
reduction in oxygen partial pressure. Tobacco smoking also increases susceptibility, which causes a
mild case of CO poisoning. The effects of cigarette smoke are especially apparent by a reduction in
visual acuity during a night flight. Smoking three cigarettes during a night flight can dramatically
reduce the sharpness of your vision. Carbon monoxide poisoning can result from a faulty aircraft
heater. If you suspect carbon monoxide poisoning, you should tum off the heater immediately, open
the fresh air vents or windows, and use supplemental oxygen if it is available.
The Time of Useful Consciousness (fUC)
The time of useful consciousness (IUC) is the maximum time that pilot bas to make a rational, decision and carry it out following a lack of oxygen at a given altitude. Some people say
that life expectancy at high altitudes without oxygen is a mailer of minutes, and the time of useful
consciousness is even less. If pilot goes beyond this time, he may not be able to place an oxygen
mask over his face, even if he tries.
The time of useful consciousness is affected by many factors, such as flight altitude, climbing
rate, pilot's activity level, pilot's health, and whether the pilot smoking or not (Fignre7-13).
Altitude While sitting quietly During moderate activity
40000 ft 12200m 30s 18 s
35 000 ft 10670m 45 s 30s
30 OOOFt 9140m 1 min and 15 s 45 s
25 000 ft 7620m 3 min 2min
22 OOOft 6710m !Omin Smin
20000 ft 6100m 12min 5min
18 000 ft 5490m 30min 20min
Figure 7-13 The Altitude and the Amount of Exertion Can Affect the Time of Useful Consciousness
Supplemental Oxygen
Recovery from hypoxia usually occurs rapidly after a person bas been given oxygen. If
someone has suffered severe hypoxia, his mental and physical performance may be reduced for
several hours.
There are something we should pay attention to, although it is possible to learn the early
symptoms of hypoxia It is not to say, we can take corrective action certainly whenever they occur.
An early symptom is impaired judgment. When the onset of hypoxia is rapid, our judgment may be
impaired before you have a chance to recognize other symptoms. So, to avoid the effects of hypoxia,
prevention is the best way. For civil aviation pilots, using supplemental oxygen may be the most
effective way to prevent hypoxia. Federal regulations specify when pilot must use supplemental
oxygen. As a general rule, when we fly above 10 000 feet (3 050 meters) during the day or above
5 000 feet (1 525 meters) at night, we should use supplemental oxygen.
Hyperventilation is caused by a reduction of carbon dioxide in the blood, usually due to rapid
breathing in a stressful situation. It is the term used to describe a breathing rate that is too rapid and
too deep. This process forces too much carbon dioxide from our body and creates a chemical
imbalance in the blood.
The symptoms associated with hyperventilation are:
A. dizziness;
B. tingling sensation in the fingers and toes;
C. increased heart rate;
D. blurring of vision;
E. Muscle spasms;
F. increased sensation of body heat;
G Apprehension and mental confusion;
H. loss of consciousness.
Hyperventilation usually is an involuntary response to a stressful situation, such as tense,
anxious, apprehensive, fearful, or overworked. The symptoms of hyperventilation are similar to
hypoxia. It is not easy to discriminate between hyperventilation and hypoxia. It is dangerous that we
inhale more oxygen when falling into hyperventilation, but we think incorrectly that we were
hypoxia. How to diagnose it correctly? If we still feel breathless after we used supplemental oxygen,
we should know that we are hyperventilation.
Ensuring that the supplemental oxygen equipment is work in proper flow rate, when we use it,
maintaining a normal breathing rate when we are in a stressful situation are help to prevent it.
Slowing the breathing rate, reducing breathing depth, talking aloud, or breathing into a paper bag of
carbon dioxide slowly, are all treatments for hyperventilation. Recovery is usually rapid when the
rate of breathing is brought under control.
It is well known that pilot's physical and mental skills must be in high-point when he is at the
controls, but alcohol and some drugs, even these drugs are used to treat a disease be is suffering,
may dull these senses and can reduce his performance to a dangerous level. In this section, we will
discuss the hazardous effects of alcohol and the way seemingly harmless drugs can sometimes
cause serious problems in the flying environment.
Alcohol, such as wine, beer or spirits, is a form of ethyl alcohol which acts as a depressant on
the central nervous system. One of the characteristics of alcohol is the amazing speed with which it
is absorbed into the body. Unlike most other substances, it does not require digestion, but passes
directly into the blood stream. There is some reduction in the rate of absorption if the stomach
already contains some foods, especially fatty foods. Once in the blood stream, it is carried almost
immediately to the brain where it acts as a depressant Often there is a sense of euphoria,
accompanied by a false impression that performance is above average. In fact, the individual who
has consumed alcohol will become more relaxed and less prone to worry, leading to a decrease in
alertness. The alcohol then affects the area of the brain which controls speech and muscular activity,
resulting in impairment of speech and muscular coordination. Continuing absorption of alcohol
eventually affects all areas of the brain which can lead to coma
The adverse effect of alcohol is greatly multiplied when a person is exposed to altitude It has
been shown that two drinks on the ground are equivalent to three or four at altitude. Alcohol
reduces the amount of oxygen absorbed into our bloodstream. When we drink, our "physiological
altitude" is much higher than our actual altitude. The effect of alcohol on physiological altitude is
much greater than that of smoking. Also, the body can not metabolize alcohol as easily at higher
altitudes, At sea level, the average person takes about three hours to metabolize an ounce of alcohol.
After consuming one ounce (31.1 03 g) of alcohol at 12 000 feet, the average person will take nearly
four times, longer to metabolize it as compared to sea level.
An individual can't speed up the rate at which alcohol leaves the body. Although drinking
while taking food reduces the rate at which alcohol may be absorbed into the bloodstream, it does
not affect the rate at which the alcohol is metabolized and removed from the bloodstream. The use
of black coffee, steam baths or fresh air will not change the rate of oxidation, and sleeping off the
effects of alcohol may actually slow the rate of oxidation because all body functions slow down
during sleep. In addition, alcohol also effects the semi-circular canals, which leads to an increase in
susceptibility to disorientation and motion sickness.
Considering have an adverse effect on pilots' reaction and judgment, this effect is magnified
as altitude increases, the FARs require that pilot blood alcohol be less than 0.04% and that eight
hours pass between drinking alcohol and piloting an aircraft. If a pilot has a blood alcohol level
of 0.04% or greater after eight hours, he can't fly until his blood alcohol falls below that amount.
Even though his blood alcohol may be well below 0.04%, you can't fly sooner than eight hours
after drinking alcohol. CCAR 121 also order that no person may act or attempt to act as a
crewmember of a civil aircraft within 8 hours after the consumption of any alcoholic beverage,
or having a blood alcohol level of. 0.04% or higher. So, it is illegal for a crew member to operate
when under the influence of alcohol.
Drugs are used to treat fight illnesses, diseases, or to reduce the severity of their symptoms,
but at the same time, almost every drugs has side effects. For example, many stomach medicines
contain sedatives which can cause blurred vision and reduce our ability to respond and function
in a fully alert state. Some analgesics available for the relief of pain, may cause mental confusion,
dizziness, a headache, nausea, and vision problem. It is obviously that these drugs may affect
flight safety.
So, when you are not feeling well or are taking medication, you should ask yourself several
key questions to determine your flying status. If yon have an illness, does the condition present a
hazard to safe flight? If you are taking a drug for an illness and it wears off during a flight, will it
cause an unsafe condition? If you are taking a drug, can the drug produce any side effect that
would influence your motor, perceptual, or psychological condition? If the answer to any of these
questions is "Yes" or "I don't know'', consult with an aviation medical examiner (AME) before
Furthennore, many pilots prefer to drink coffee or tea to ''pick-me-up" in flight, even heavy
coffee or tea. But both of them have caffeine, a typical stimulant, which can stimulate the central
nervous system and produce an increase in alertness and activity, produce anxiety and drastic mood
swings at one time. The later is very dangerous to fly.
The speed of caffeine absorbed into the body is quickly, it begins to show up in the
bloodstream within five minutes of ingestion, and its effects can last for as long as 14 hours. Too
much caffeine can lead to nervousness and sleep disturbances. Other symptoms of a caffeine
overdose are increased mental fatigue, muscle tremors, and occasional stomach irritation. Although
caffeine use is not prohibited by the CCAR and FARs, we should use it in moderation to avoid the
side effects.
Human error has been cited as a major factor in the majority of aviation accidents and
incidents in the past two decades. Investigations into the causes of air operator accidents have
shown that human error is a contributing factor in 60 to 80 percent of all air operator incidents and
accidents. Long term research has demonstrated that these events share common characteristics.
Many problems encountered by flight crews have very little to do with the technical aspects of
operating in a multi-person cockpit. Instead, problems are associated with situation awareness loss,
poor group decision making, ineffective communication, inadequate leadership, and poor task or
resource management. In 1979. Resource Management on the Flight deck sponsored by the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration. This conference was the outgrowth of NASA
research into the causes of air transport accidents. The research presented at this meeting identified
the human error aspects of the majority of air crashes as failures of interpersonal communications,
decision making, and leadership. At this meeting, the label Cockpit Resource Management (CRM)
was applied to the process of training crews to reduce .. pilot error" by making better use of the
human resources on the flight deck. In this section, we will discuss some basic questions about
CRM, such as situation awareness, communication, leadership. and decision making.
CRM is the abbreviation for Cockpit Resource Management or Crew Resource Management.
The application of team management concepts in the flight deck environment was initially
known as Cockpit Resource Management As CRM training programs evolved to include cabin
crews, maintenance personnel and others, the phrase Crew Resource Management has been
adopted. Briefly defined, crew resource management is a process using all available information
and resources, i.e. equipment, procedures and people, to achieve a safe and efficient flight
operation. CRM training is one way of addressing the challenge of optimizing the human/machine
interface and accompanying interpersonal activities. These activities include team building and
maintenance, information transfer, problem solving, decision making, maintaining situation
awareness, and dealing with automated systems.
Effective CRM has the following characteristics:
1) CRM is a comprehensive system of applying human factors concepts to improve crew
2) CRM embraces all operational personnel.
3) CRM can be blended into all forms of aircrew training.
4) CRM concentrates on crew members' attitudes and behaviors and their impact on safety.
5) CRM uses the crew as the unit of training.
6) CRM is training that requires the active participation of all crew members. It provides an
opportunity for individuals and crews to examine their own behavior, and to make decisions on
how to improve cockpit teamwork.
Situational Awareness (SA) is a new, but an important, concept in CRM. It is the key
component of safe flight. Some study shows that many accidents are owing to pilot's SA falling or
losing, on the other hand, good SA can increase safety, reduce workload, enhance pilot performance,
expand the range of pilot operations, and improve decision making. Pilots need to perceive relevant
information, integrating various pieces of data in conjunction with operator goals provides an
understanding of the meaning of that information. Based on this understanding, future events and
system states can be predicted, allowing for timely and effective decision making.
What Is Situational Awareness
There are two good definitions about SA. At the 1989 Fifth International Symposium on
Aviation Psychology, Douglas Szchwartz stated: "Situation awareness is the accurate perception of
the factors and conditions that affect an aircraft and its flight crew during a defined period of time.
In simplest terms, it is knowing what is going on around you- a concept embraced to the need to
think ahead of the aircraft". In 1993, Mica Endsley gave it a scholarly definition: "Situation
awareness is the perception of the elements in the environment within a volume of time and space,
the comprehension of their meaning and the projection of their status in the near future."
From these definitions, we can see that building and maintaining better SA is the key to
increasing cockpit safety. In general, SA covers five areas:
The fJ.rst area gives status information - the physical state or condition of the airplane, e.g. the
amount of flaps or spoilers, the amount of power being drawn from the engines, the flue states, or
the position of the landing gear or flaps.
The second area is the position of the airplane in respect to the flight plan, to any natural or
man made obstructions, or to any other airplane of interest from an avoidance point of view.
The third area is the total external environment, including the present and future weather and
details of the aviation infrastructure.
The fourth area involves: the time the airplane will meet its next navigational fix; the time it
will reach its destination; the time available for holding or diversion; the time limit for the fuel
available; the time before the weather will change, etc.
The fifth area is the state of the other members of the operating team( the cockpit and cabin
crew), the passengers, and even the cargo that might be aboard.
Three Levels of SA
In a highly successful effort to better analyze SA incidents, Mica Endsley developed a 3-level
taxonomy in 1995. the three levels are:
Level 1 - Failure to correctly perceive the situation;
Level2- Failure to comprehend the situation;
Level 3 -Failure to comprehend the situation into the future.
Using the taxonomy, ASRS reviewed 113 SA incidents that were reported it and found 169 SA
errors. In the 113, 80.2% were classified as Levell errors, 16.9% as Level2 errors, and only 2.9%
were classified as Level 3 errors. These findings strongly suggest that Level 1 errors (failure to
correctly perceive the situation) need the most attention. There can be several reasons for these
errors. One is that the information may be known but temporarily forgotten. The cause may be a
shortcoming in the system design, a failure in the communication process or because of inadequate
training. The date may have been available but difficult to detect or perceive; or it may have been
clearly available but simply missed. The date may have been missed because of distractions,
complacency, the narrowing of perception, because of concentration in other areas, or because of a
too high task load. SA is not a simple process, and is not the safe and efficient operation of an air
transport a simple process.
In the past ten years or more, pilot and flight crew' s SA has been studied widely, such as how
to measure our SA, the clues of SA weaken or loss, and how to set up and holding our good SA. In
this section, we will give you 10 clues to loss of SA and 10 tips for good SA management
10 Clues to Loss of SA
These clues can warn of an "error chain" in progress - a series of events that may lead to an
accident. Most accidents involving human error include at least four of these clues.
1) Ambiguity-information from two or more sources that doesn't agree.
2) Fixation-focusing on any one thing to the exclusion of everything else.
3) Confusion-uncertainty or bafflement about a situation (often accompanied by anxiety or
psychological discomfort).
4) Failure to fly the p l a n ~ everyone is focused on non-flying activities.
5) Failure to look outside-everyone heads down.
6) Failure to meet expected checkpoint on flight plan or profile-ETA, fuel burn, etc.
7) Failure to adhere to standard operating procedures.
8) Failure to comply with limitations, minimums, FARs, etc.
9) Failure to resolve discrepancies- contradictory data or personal conflicts.
10) Failure to communicate fully and effectively- vague or incomplete statements.
10 Tips for Good SA Management
1) Predetermine crew roles for high-workload phases of flight.
2) Develop a plan and assign responsibilities for handling problems and distractions.
3) Solicit input from all crew members including cabin, A TC, maintenance, dispatch, etc.
4) Rotate attention from plane to path to people - don't fixate.
5) Monitor and evaluate current status relative to your plan.
6) Project ahead and consider contingencies.
7) Focus on the details and scan the big picture.
8) Create visual and/or aural reminders of interrupted tasks.
9) Watch for clues of degraded SA.
1 0) Speak up when you see SA breaking down.
Effective communication is the most important of all CRM elements, it is critical to the safe
operation of the flight. Human factors issues related to interpersonal communication have been
implicated in approximately 70% to 80% of all accidents over the past 20 years. To some extent,
communication is the center of all CRM.
Communication is the exchange of ideas, information and instruction in an effective and
timely manner, so messages are correctly received and clearly understood. Communication is a
process of some information transferring, which is possible in many different forms. Through the
spoken or written word, through body language, through symbols and gestures and through art and
music. No matter what it is, a communication consists of a sender, a massage, and a receiver. For an
effective communication, it is important that the receiver can interpret the message and respond
accordingly. In this section, we will mainly discuss the spoken word, a form of communication,
which is used almost exclusively during flight
A Communication Model
Before a communication can take place, a purpose expressed as a message to be conveyed is
needed. It passes between a sender and a receiver. The message is encoded (converted to symbolic
form) and is passed by way of some medium (channel) to the receiver, who retranslates (decodes)
the message initiated by the sender. The result is a transference of meaning from one person to
Figure 7-14 depicts the communication process. The model is made up of seven parts: the
communication source (sender), encoding, message, the channel, decoding, the receiver and
Figure 7-14 Communication Model
The sender sends a message to the receiver, he/she initiates a message by encoding a thought,
four conditions have been described, which affect the encode message: skill, attitudes, knowledge,
and the social culture system. The message is the actual physical product from the sender's
encoding. It is affected by the code or group of symbols we used to transfer meaning, the content
of the message itself, and the decisions we make in selecting and arranging both codes and
content. The channel is the medium through which the message travels. it is selected by the
sender. The receiver is the object to whom the message is directed. But before the message can be
received, the symbols in it must be translated into a form that can be understood by the receiver.
This is the decoding of the message. Just as the encoder was limited by his/her skill, attitudes,
knowledge, and the social culture system, the receiver is equally restricted. The feedback loop is
the final link in the communication process. Feedback is the check on how successful we have
been in transferring our message as ordinary intended. It determines whether understanding has
been achieved. That's to say, we can use it to put the message back into the system as a check
against misunderstanding.
Verbal and Non-verbal Communication
In general, there are two types of communication, verbal and non-verbal communication.
Verbal communication is the use of words and language to give and receive information.
Language is inextricably linked with the cognitive or thinking processes as well as with
communication. Interpersonal relationships are influenced by the manner of speech as well as by
the content. The manner or paralanguage includes voice pitch, word stress, timing and pauses. This
can cause difficulties when communicating in a language which is not native language to the
speaker, such as may occur ewe in the use of English as the international aviation language.
Non-verbal communication is also known as body language. This involves communication
using eye contact, facial expression, touch, body orientation and posture, hand and head movement,
and physical separation.
Communication Barriers
Whether a communication is available or not is not only depending on the characteristic of the
information itself, but also lying communicators' mental trait, such as apperception, memory,
thinking, personality, and etc. The background of the communication affect its validity too. Factors
that can inhibit effective communication can be external or internal. External factors are the most
obvious, they include high environmental noise levels, distractions of a busy work environment or
physical discomfort, and poor enunciation or an unfamiliar accent Internal factors are mainly
associated with the perception of what is said. A message spoken with perfect enunciation and
clarity can still be misunderstood if the receiver misinterprets its intended meaning. One of the most
common internal factors is the error of expectancy. This occurs when the receiver assumes that he
has heard what he expects to hear rather than what has actually been said. In some cases the
receiver listens to part of the message which says what is expected, but fails to register other
information that may be relevant
"Authority gradient'' is an important factor that can have an effect on communication in a
multi-crew environment. This concept is used to describe the composing of flight crew. Authority
gradient refers to the difference of rank, ability, longevity and status between the captain and the
other members of the flight crew. No matter authority gradient is too steep or too shallow, it is not
beneficial to flight safety. If the authority gradient too steep, the captain may assume total command
leaving the first officer out of the "loop''. The first officer may be unlikely to contribute anything to
the decision making process- even when he is sure that the captain has made a mistake! If the
authority gradient too shallow, the caption may consult the first officer on every issue and may
never take command. In an emergency it is likely that no clear cut decision will be made. In a flight
crew, an apt arranging is the caption's power, ability, longevity and status is higher than the other
members of the flight crew in some short. In this arrangement, the captain can assume overall
command but involves the first officer as a useful member of a team which he leads. The first
officer respects the captain's command status but feels :free to contribute.
Effective Communication
Poor crew communication can lead to misunderstandings that may result in crew error. In
order to ensure flight safety, we must know how to avoid misunderstanding, and make an effective
communication. Generally speaking, an effective communication requires skill in inquiry, advocacy
and an awareness of potential communication barriers. Using of standard phrases, thinking before
you speak, keeping control over the pace and clarity of speech, avoiding the effect of motion, are
helpful for effective communication.
Moreover. fight crew is matched reasonable, the captain has good leadership. the other flight
crew member can recognize his/her role in assuring the flight safety. these are all benefit to enhance
communication effective.
In modem civil aviation, most flight operations should be a team activity. A flight crew is a
team, although it is small, it still has leader and followers. According to the rules, the captain takes
charge the aircraft, he /she will be the leader of the flight deck group by virtue of status, the other
flight members should be the followers.
A leader in a given situation is a person whose ideas and actions influence the thought and
behavior of others. A leader uses example and persuasion combined with a personal understanding
ofthe goals and desires of the group be/she happens to be leading as well as those of the employer.
A leader feels responsible for trying to implement these goals, he should take the initiative to
promote teamwork and professionalism, foster a productive staff climate, mentor other staff
members to improve their skills and abilities, demonstrate standards of professionalism and resolve
Authoritative and Participatory
There are many different definitions of leadership. Authoritative and participatory are the more
broadly accepted types of leadership. Authoritative is derived from the word "authority" . An
authoritative leader tends to make all team decisions and controls all resources because the team is
structured as a hierarchy. A hierarchical structure is one in which many levels of management exist
and there is a clearly defined boss. But true leadership is not equal to authority. Whereas authority is
usually assigned, true leadership is acquired. The status of authority has effect immediately it is
assigned, but the quality of leadership takes time to develop. People who are leaders will be
automatically granted authority by the group, while people in authority often show no trace of
A participatory leader allows each team member to have a say and to participate in team
processes. The team leader is more egalitarian, or equal, under participatory leadership than with an
authoritative leader. The participatory leader may, however, ultimately decide the team's actions,
but takes into consideration the team members' experience, knowledge, and preferences.
Whether one form of leadership is better than another form? The answer to that question_
usually depends on the organization of the team and the task being performed. For example, a fully
participative team where a vote is taken and every team member surveyed on every little detail of
the workday would be unable to perform their duties in a timely manner. However, an overly
authoritative supervisor or manager who fails to request input from anyone may suppress the free
flow of ideas and dictate team activities that negatively impact safety. Good leadership is a
balancing act between the two, he should recognize different behavioral styles and balance concern
for people with concern for performance.
In summary, a good leader should:
A. Lead by example. Set high standards of performance by demonstrating a high level
personal performance.
B. Advise intent Communicate with the team and keep them informed of intentions before
acting on those decisions.
C. Delegate. Delegate appropriate duties to team members to allow time for the leader to
perform a monitoring or supervising roll.
D. Motivate. One of the most effective means of motivation is to offer praise for good
performance (Positive reinforcement).
E. Consult. Involve the team in most decision making processes.
F. Set priorities. The most efficient use of resources is achieved when energy is directed to
tasks in a logical order of priority. Most students have heard it summed up by the slogan
"aviate, navigate, communicate."
Management Styles
Management styles, is another good description of leader's behavior. A leader may be task-
oriented or relationship-oriented, or may combine elements of both depending on individual
A leader at the extreme of task orientation will show a style which may be dominant,
opinionated, aggressive and stubborn. Conversely, a leader at the relationship extreme of orientation
will demonstrate a style which is practical, trusting, friendly, accommodating, but does not voice
Blake and Mouton integrated the ideas of task and relationship orientations into a grid with
five main styles. It is based on the concept that leaders vary (from 1 to 9) in their concern for people
(relationships) and their concern for getting things done (tasks) (See Figure 7 -15).
Concern for production
Figure 7-15 Managerial Grid
9.1 Authority-Obedience: The leader's maximum concern is for task completion and is
combined with a minimum concern for people, i.e., dictation to followers what they
should do and how they should do it.
1.9 "Country Club" Management: The leader shows a minimum concern for getting tasks
completed, but a maximum concern for people.
1.1 Impoverished Management: The leader has a minimum concern for both production and
people and puts forth only the least effort required to remain in the organization.
5.5 "Organization Man" Management: The leader does what is minimally ex.-pected, which
results in conformity to the status quo.
9.9 Team Management: The leader integrates the concern for production and the concern for
people at a high lever; is goal centered; and seeks results through the participation,
involvement and commitment of all those who can contribute.
This model of leadership was developed as a guide for managers who deal with multiple
subordinates. The ideal leader will have a style which combines the extremes of either orientation
and will be confident and relaxed, communicate and involve others, accept criticism, and be
technicaUy competent. Powers of command will be exercised in a way which gains the respect and
commitment of all crew members, generating an atmosphere in which all members of the team feel
that they are actively and positively contributing to the achievement of the goal.
Followers hip
Any team must have both a leader and followers. A follower is a member of the team that is
being led. In a flight crew, a follower should be anyone except the captain. Followership is a new
term, which covers the ability to be a good team player and the ability to effectively help a
recognized leader. A leader displays leadership by directing operations \Vith confidence, gaining
trust and cooperation, and inviting initiatives from the other crew members while ensuring task
completion. A follower displays followership by inquiring, advocating. critiquing and through
practices such as planning ahead to preclude surprises, anticipating requirements and being ready to
provide input to support the leader.
A survey conducted in the UK revealed that 93% of first officers and 74% of captains admitted
that there were other pilots with whom they preferred not to work. As a team member, you may not
always has the luxury of working only with those that you genuinely like. To be an effective team
member, you must be able to put personality differences aside and still contribute effectively to the
task goals.
A good team member will not agree with a plan of action just to ''keep the peace" if he/she is
feeling uneasy about it. On the other hand, once an appropriate plan of action has been decided
upon, a good term member will fully support it if he/she might personally prefer a different plan.
The degree of assertiveness displayed by a particular team member is controlled to a very great
extent by that person's personality, however if you are convinced that a particular course of action
is incorrect or dangerous. It is vital that you put your opinion forward for consideration. Just as we
have discussed, decision making is the key to safety. The leader, in general, has final responsibility
and authority for decision making, but all other members must participate in the decision-making
;:rocess as necessary and time permitting. Many of the worlds worst aviation disasters may have
:)een avoided if the first office or other crew member had strongly voiced their objections to a bad
There are something we should notice that the position of leader and the follower may be
changed in some special conditions. Captains can become followers, and followers can become
captains. While remaining overall leader of the flight crew, the captain might not be the leader in
a specific circumstance in which another member of the team has great knowledge. For example,
the first office has a great deal of experience with a particular airport as compared to the captain.
Soliciting inputs and utilizing this experience from other crewmembers can be a
confidence-building situation for all concerned, yet it does not mean that the captain has
relinquished his command. More precisely, the captain is making good use of the resources in the
cockpit It might also be mentioned that this type of leadership behavior by the captain is radically
different from that of the stereotypic autocratic captain. So, it is right that some people say a good
leader also has the ability to act as a good follower.
Decision making is the process of determining and implementing a course of action and
evaluating the outcome. Act as a special conveyance, flying is a combination of events which
requires pilots to make a continuous stream of decisions. Especially, when we find that something
has changed or that an expected change did not occur, it is needed. The decision making process is
shaped by the type of problem, degree of threat, time available and resources. During any job there
are many opportunities for decision making, ranging from simple to complex. and from short-term
to long-term. Experience plays a large part in our decision making process by enhancing our ability
to define possible threats and generate a safe course of action. The decision making process also
encompasses the ability to handle errors that we may or may not have experience handling.
Decision making can be known in two ways:
On the one hand, it is an ability to search for and establish the relevance of all available
information regarding a flight situation, to specify alternative courses of action. and to determine
expected outcomes from each alternative. From it, we can see that pilots decision making refers to
intellectual capabilities, it relies on our abilities to sense, store, retrieve, and integrate information.
This part of decision making is purely rationaL
On the another hand, it is a motivation to choose and authoritatively execute a suitable course
of action within the time frame permitted by the situation, which implies that, in part, our decisions
are based on tendencies to use other than safety-related information when choosing courses of
action. For example, pilots might consider such items as job demands, convenience, monetary gain,
and self-esteem before taking action.
The decision-making process is quite complex; however, it can be condensed into six elements,
using the acronym DECIDE. The steps in the DECIDE process are as follows:
D -Detect the fact that a change has occurred;
E -Estimate the need to counter or react to the change;
C-Choose a desirable outcome for the success of the flight;
I-Identify actions which could successfully control the change;
D -Do the necessary action to adapt to the change;
E-Evaluate the effect of the action.
Hazardous Attitudes
There are five hazardous attitudes which affect pilot decision making
Anti-authority: "Don't tell me what to do, I'll do it my way!" - People with this attitude
may refuse to listen to the advice or suggestions of others, or they may just regard rules, regulations,
and procedures as silly or unnecessary.
Impulsivity: ''Do something quickly!"- This is the thought pattern of people who frequently
feel the need to do something immediately. They do not stop to consider what they are about to do
So they can select the best alternative, they do the first thing that comes to mind.
Invulnerability: "It won't happen to me!"- Many people feel that accidents happen to
others but never to them. Pilots who think this way are more likely to take chances and run
unnecessary risks.
Macho: "There's nothing I can't do", "there's nothing I won't try!" - These people are
always trying to prove that they are better than anyone else by taking risks and by trying to impress
Resignation: "What's the use?"- This is an unwillingness to take control of a situation and
do something different when the unexpected happens. People with this attitude do not see
themselves as making a great deal of difference in what happens to them. When things go well, they
~ ' ' T h a t ' s good luck." When things go badly, they attribute it to bad luck or feel that someone is
"out to get them" They have the action to others for better or worse.
Antidotes for Hazardous Attitudes
There are ways to overcome the five major hazardous attitudes which contribute to poor pilot
decision making. One way is to become thoroughly aware of them by studying the preceding
paragraphs, another is to use antidotes. By telling yourself something to counteract the hazardous
attitude, you' re ''taking an antidote". Learn to recognize a hazardous attitude, correctly label the
thought, and then say its antidote to yourself(See Figure 7-16).
The False Hypothesis
One of the most common contributors to human error in the decision making process is the
false hypothesis or mistaken assumption. No pilot would deliberately commence a take-off without
a clearance, however there are countless cases on record when the pilot bas falsely assumed that a
clearance has been given.
Anti-authority "Don't tell me what to do!" "Follow the rules, they are usually right."
Impulsivity "Do something- quickly!"
"Not so fast, think first."
Invulnerability "It won't happen to me!" "it could happen to me."
Macho "There's nothing I can't do!" "taking chances is foolish."
Resignation "What's the use?" "I'm not helpless, I can make a difference."
Figure 7-16 _To Overcome Hazardous Attitudes
High expectancy: A good example of this is provided by the world's worst aviation accident
occurred when two Boeing 747s collided on the runway at Tenerife in 1977 after one of the captains
made such an assumption. Analysis of a number of aviation and railway accidents shows that there
are certain situations in which the false hypothesis is most likely to occur.
Diverted attention: When the pilot is preoccupied with one problem, a false assumption is
made about the status of other systems. Many a pilot has grappled with a radio problem in
controlled airspace only to end up landing with the wheels up. There is one case of an airline crew
who run out of fuel while trying to solve a problem with an undercarriage warning light!
When it serves as a defense: This involves accepting the assumption which promises the
happiest outcome and ignoring or evading the truth. A pilot accepts any evidence that the weather is
likely to improve while rejecting any evidence to the contrary.
Following a period of high concentration: After coping with a demanding or dangerous
in-flight situation there is a tendency to relax. A pilot who bas just landed after coping with an
engine failure in a light twin turns off the runway and taxies into a ditch!
As a result of the effects of a motor memory: An action involving the operation of a lever or
switch which selects the wrong one or operates it in the incorrect sense. The pilot of a light twin
was asked to make the best possible speed on approach to assist in traffic separation. He obliged by
retracting the undercarriage and increasing the approach speed. He then proceeded to land with the
gear still up.
Weather - the state of the atmosphere, at any given time and place strongly influences our
daily routine as well as our general life patterns. VIrtually all of our activities are affected by
weather, but in all man' s endeavors, none is influenced more intimately by weather than aviation.
Weather is one in the most important factors that influence airplane performance and flying safety.
Heat and Temperature
The primary cause of all the Earth's weather is the variation in solar radiation received at the
surface. The amount of solar energy received by any region varies with time of day, with seasons,
and with latitude. These differences in solar energy create temperature variations. Temperatures also
vary with differences in topographical surface and with altitude. These temperature variations create
forces that drive the atmosphere in its endless motions. Our restless atmosphere is constantly in
motion as it strives to reach equilibrium. These never-ending air movements set up chain reactions
which culminate in a continuing variety of weather.
When two surfaces are heated unequally, they heat the overlying air unevenly. The warmer air
expands and becomes lighter or less dense than the cool air. The more denser, cool air is drawn to
the ground by its greater gravitational force lifting or forcing the warm air upward much as oil is
forced to the top of water when the two are mixed: The rising air spreads and cools, eventually
descending to complete the convective circulation. Convection of both large and small scales
accounts for systems ranging from hemispheric circulations down to local eddies.
Vertical Structure
We classify the atmosphere into layers, or spheres, by characteristics exhibited in these
layers -temperature lapse rate. The decrease of temperature with altitude is defmed as lapse rate.
Figure 8-1 shows one division. The atmosphere was divided into four layers: troposphere (A),
stratosphere (B), mesosphere (C) and thermosphere (D). All air carrier flights take place in the two
low-levels of the atmosphere. These are the troposphere and the stratosphere. The troposphere is the
layer from the surface to an average altitude of about 7 miles. It is characterized by an overall
decrease of temperature with increasing altitude- at an average in two degrees Celsius per one
thousand feet of altitude. The height of the troposphere varies with latitude and seasons. It slopes
from about 20 000 feet over the poles to about 65 000 feet over the equator; and it is higher in
summer than in winter. The stratosphere is typified by relatively small changes in temperature with
height except for a warming trend near the top. The stratosphere extends from the top of the
troposphere to about 26 to 29 miles altitude. At the top of the troposphere is the tropopause, a very
thin layer marking the boundary between the troposphere and the layer above. An abrupt change in
the temperature lapse rate characterizes the tropopause. It acts as a lid to confme most of the water
vapor. This, in tum, keeps most of the weather below the tropopause. The height of the tropopause
and certain weather phenomena are related. Temperature and wind vary greatly in the vicinity of the
tropopause affecting efficiency, comfort, and safety of flight. Maximum winds generally occur at
levels near the tropopause. These strong winds create narrow zones of wind shear which often
generate hazardous turbulence. Preflight knowledge of temperature, wind, and wind shear is
important to flight planning.
Figure 8-1 Vertical Structure of Atmosphere
Atmospheric pressure is the force per unit area exerted by the weight of the atmosphere.
Pressure varies with altitude and temperature of the air as well as other minor influences. Five
pressure systems are defined as follow:
A. LOW- a center of pressure surrounded on all sides by higher pressure; also called a
B. HIGH- a center of pressure surrounded on all sides by lower pressure; also called a
C. TROUGH- an elongated area of low pressure with the ; owest pressure along a line
marking maximum cyclonic curvature.
D. RIDGE- an elongated area of high pressure with the highest pressure along a line
marking maximum anticyclonic curvature.
E. COL- the neutral area between two highs and two lows. It also is the intersection of a
trough and a ridge.
Pressure differences must create a force, which drives the
wind. This force is the pressure gradient force. The force is
from higher pressure to lower pressure and is perpendicular to
isobars or contours. Another major influence in the wind
direction is a phenomenon known as Coriolis effect. The fo:-ce
deflects air to the right in the Northern Hemisphere and to the
left in the Southern Hemisphere as showed in Figure 8-2.
Coriolis force is at a right angle to wind direction and directly
proportional to wind speed. As wind speed increases, Coriolis
force increases. At a given latitude, double the wind speed and
Figure 8-2 Coriolis Force
you double the Coriolis force. Coriolis force varies with latitude from zero at the equator to a
maximum at the poles. It influences wind direction everywhere except immediately at the equator;
but the effects are more pronounced in middle and high latitudes. The instant air begins moving,
Coriolis force deflects it to the right. Soon the wind is deflected a full 90 and is parallel to the
isobars or contours. At this time, Coriolis force exactly balances pressure gradient force. As the air
tries to blow outward from the high pressure, it is deflected to the right by the Coriolis force. Thus,
the wind around a high blows clockwise.
The high pressure with its associated wind
system is an anticyclone. The wind around a
low is counterclockwise. The low pressure
and its wind system is a cyclone. Wmd flow
patterns aloft follow isobars or contours
where friction has little effect, showed in
Figure 8-3. We cannot, however, neglect
Figure 8-3 Wind Flow Patterns Aloft
t:ction near the surface. As frictional force slows the windspeed, Corio lis force decreases. However,
::':iction does not affect pressure gradient force. Pressure gradient and Coriolis forces are no longer
.:1 balance. The stronger pressure gradient force turns the wind at an angle across the isobars toward
.ower pressure until the three forces balance. Frictional forces and Coriolis forces combine to just
::oalance pressure gradient force. You can determine wind direction from a weather map. If you face
along an isobar or contour with lower pressure on your left, wind will be blowing in the direction
you are facing. On a surface map, wind will cross the isobar at an angle toward lower pressure; on
:m upper air chart, it will be parallel to the contour.
Because of uneven heating of the Earth, surface pressure is low in warm equatorial regions
and high in cold polar regions. A pressure gradient develops from the poles to the equator. As air
is forced aloft at the equator and begins its high-level trek northward, the Coriolis force turns it to
the right or to the east. Wind becomes westerly at about 30latitude temporarily blocking further
northward movement. Similarly, as air over the poles begins its low-level journey southward
toward the equator, it likewise is deflected to the right and becomes an east wind, halting for a
while its southerly progress. As a result, air literally "piles up" at about 30and latitude in both
hemispheres. The added weight of the air increases the pressure into semipermanent high
pressure belts. The high pressure belt at about 30north latitude forces air outward at the surface
to the north and to the south. The northbound air becomes entrained into the midlatitude storms.
The southward moving air is again deflected by the Coriolis force becoming the well-known
subtropical northeast trade winds. In
midlatitudes, high level winds are
predominantly from the west and are
known as the prevailing westerlies.
Polar easterlies dominate low-level
circulation north of about 60latitude.
Northeasterly trade winds carry
tropical storms from east to west. The
prevailing westerlies drive midlatitude
storms generally from west to east (see
Figure 8-4).
34 --- // / _.,
- / / /
Figure 8-4 The General Circulation in the Northern
Hemisphere and Surface Wind Belts
Anytime air moves upward, it expands because of decreasing atmospheric pressure. Conversely,
downward moving air is compressed by increasing pressure. But as pressure and volume change,
temperature also changes. When air expands, it cools; and when compressed, it warms. These changes
are adiabatic, meaning that no heat is removed from or added to the air. The adiabatic rate of change of
temperature is virtually fixed in unsaturated air but varies in saturated air.
Unsaturated air moving upward and downward cools and warms at about 3.0 c per 1 000 feet.
This rate is the "dry adiabatic rate of temperature change" and is independent of the temperature of
the mass of air through which the vertical movements occur. When the air flows downslope, the air
is no longer saturated; it will heat at the nonnal dry rate. An example of this is the "katabatic wind"
which becomes warmer and dryer.
Condensation occurs when saturated air moves upward. Latent heat released through
condensation partially offsets the expansionary cooling. Therefore, the saturated adiabatic rate of
cooling is slower than the dry adiabatic rate. The saturated rate depends on saturation temperature
or dew point of the air.
When moist air is forced upward, the temperature and the dew point converge on each other at
a rate of about 2.5 c per 1 000 feet. At the altitude where the dew point lapse rate and the dry
adiabatic rate meet, cloud bases will form.
If the upward moving air becomes colder than surrounding air, it sinks. The air is said to be
stable, but if it remains warmer, it is accelerated upward as a convective current. If this happens, the
air is said to be unstable. Whether it sinks or rises depends on the ambient or existing temperature
lapse rate. The difference between the existing lapse rate of a given mass of air and the adiabatic
rates of cooling in upward moving air determines if the air is stable or unstable. An easy way to
judge is: if the temperature drops rapidly as the altitude increases, the air is unstable; if the
temperature remains unchanged or decreases only slightly as altitude is increase, the air mass is
stable. If the temperature actually increases as altitude increases, a temperature inversion exists.
This is the most stable of weather conditions. A stable atmosphere resists any upward or downward
displacement. An unstable atmosphere allows an upward or downward disturbance to grow into a
vertical or convective current.
Clouds, to almost everyone, have some meaning. But to you, a pilot, clouds are your weather
"signposts in the sky". They give you an indication of air motion, stability, and moisture. Clouds
help you visualize weather conditions and potential weather hazards you might encounter in flight.
For identification purposes, you need be concerned only with the more basic cloud types,
which are divided into three ''families". The families are: high clouds, middle clouds, low cloud.
The first two families are further classified according to the way they are formed. The third family
includes with extensive vertical development clouds. These clouds formed vertical currents in
unstable air are cumulus meaning accumulation or heap; they are characterized by their lumpy,
billowy appearance. Clouds formed by the cooling of a stable layer are stratus meaning stratified or
layered; they are characterized by their uniform, sheet-like appearance.
In addition to the above, the prefix nimbus or the suffix nimbus means rain cloud. Thus,
stratified clouds from which rain is falling are nimbostratus. A heavy, swelling cumulus type cloud
which produces precipitation is a cumulonimbus. Clouds broken into fragments are often identified
by adding the suffix fractus; for example, fragmentary cumulus is cumulus fractus.
High Clouds
The high cloud family is cirriform and includes cirrus, cirrocumulus, and cirrostratus. They are
composed almost entirely of ice crystals. The height of the bases of these clouds ranges from about
16 500 to 45 000 feet in middle latitudes.
Middle Clouds
The middle cloud family are the altostratus and the altocumulus clouds. These clouds are
primarily water, much of which may be supercooled. The height of the bases of these clouds ranges
from about 6 500 to 23 000 feet in middle latitudes.
Low Clouds
The low cloud family are the stratus, stratocumulus, nimbostratus clouds and fair weather
cumulus clouds and extensive vertical development clouds. Low clouds are almost entirely water,
but at times the water may be supercooled Low clouds at subfreezing temperatures can also contain
snow and ice particles. The bases of these clouds range from near the surface to about 6 500 feet in
middle latitudes.
The vertically developed family of clouds includes towering cumulus and cumulonimbus.
These clouds usually contain supercooled water above the freezing level. But when a cumulus
grows to great heights, water in the upper part of the cloud freezes into ice crystals forming a
cumulonimbus. The heights of cumuliform cloud bases rang from 1 000 feet or less to above
10 000 feet
Signposts in the Sky
Cirrus are thin, feather-like ice crystal clouds in patches or narrow bands. Larger ice crystals
often trail downward in well-defined wisps called "mares'tail". Wispy, cirrus-like, these contain no
significant icing or turbulence. Dense, banded cirrus, which often are turbulent, are associated with
jet stream. See Appendix Figure 1.
Cirrocumulus are thin clouds, the individual elements appearing as small white flakes or
patches of cotton. They may contain highly supercooled water droplets, some turbulence and icing.
See Appendix Figure 2.
Cirrostratus is a thin whitish cloud layer appearing like a sheet or veil. Cloud elements are
diffuse, sometimes partially striated or fibrous. Due to their ice crystal makeup, these clouds are
associated with halos-large luminous circles surrounding the sun or moon. No turbulence and little
if any icing .The greatest problem flying in cirriform clouds is restriction to visibility. They can
make the strict use of instruments mandatory. See Appendix Figure 3.
Altocumulus are composed of white or gray colored layers or patches of solid cloud. The cloud
elements may have a waved or roll-like appearance. Some turbulence and small amounts of icing.
See Appendix Figure 4.
Altostratus is a bluish veil or layer of clouds. It is often associated with altocumulus and
sometimes gradually merges into cirrostratus. The sun may be dimly visible through it. Little or no
turbulence with moderate amounts of ice. See Appendix Figure 5.
Altocumulus castellanus are middle level convective clouds. They are characterized by their
billowing tops and comparatively high bases. They are a good indication of mid-level instability.
Rough with some icing.
Standing lenticular altocumulus clouds are formed on the created by barriers in the wind flow.
The clouds show little movement, hence the name standing. Wind, however, can be quite strong
blowing through such clouds. They are characterized by their smooth, polished edges. The presence
of these clouds is a good indication of very strong turbulence and should be avoided. See Appendix
Figure 6
Nimbostratus is a gray or dark massive cloud layer, diffused by more or less continuous rain,
snow, or ice pellets. It may merge into very low stratus or stratocumulus. But very little
turbulence can pose a serious icing problem if temperatures are near or below freezing. See
Appendix Figure 7.
Stratus is a gray, uniform, sheet-like cloud with relatively low bases. When associated with
fog or precipitation, the combination can become troublesome for visual flying. Little or no
turbulence, but temperatures near or below freezing can create hazardous icing conditions. See
Appendix Figure 8.
Stratocumulus bases are globular massed or rolls unlike the flat ,sometimes indefinite, bases of
stratus. They usually form at the top of a layer mixed by moderate surface winds. Sometimes, they
form from the breaking up of stratus or the spreading out of cumulus. Some turbulence, and
possible icing at subfreezing temperatures. Ceiling and visibility usually better than with low stratus.
See Appendix Figure 9.
Fair weather cumulus clouds form in convective currents and are characterized by relatively
flat bases and dome-shaped tops. Fair weather cumulus do not show extensive vertical development
and do not produce precipitation. More often, fair weather cumulus indicate a layer of instability.
Some turbulence and no significant icing. See Appendix Figure 10.
Towering cumulus signifies a relatively deep layer of unstable air. It shows considerable
vertical development and has billowing cauliflower tops. Showers can result from these clouds.
Very strong turbulence; some clear icing above the freezing level. See Appendix Figure 11.
Cumulonimbus are the ultimate manifestation of instability. They are vertically developed
clouds of large dimensions with dense boiling tops often crowned with thick veils of dense
cirrus(the anvil). Nearly the entire spectrum of flying hazards are contained in these clouds
including violent turbulence. They should be avoided at all times! This cloud is the thunderstorm
cloud and is discussed in detail in SECTION H, ''Thunderstorms". See Appendix Figure 12.
Precipitation is an all inclusive term denoting drizzle, rain, snow, ice pellets, hail, and ice
crystals. Precipitation occurs when these particles grow in size and weight until the atmosphere no
longer can suspend them and they fall.
Precipitation forming and remaining liquid falls as rain or drizzle. Sublimation forms
snowflakes, and they reach the ground as snow if temperatures remain below freezing.
Precipitation can change its state as the temperature of its environment changes. Falling snow
may melt in warmer layers of air at lower altitudes to form rain. Rain falling through colder air may
become supercooled, freezing on impact as freezing rain; or it may freeze during its descent, falling
as ice pellets. Ice pellets always indicate freezing rain at higher altitude.
To produce significant precipitation, clouds usually are 4 000 feet thick or more. The heavier
the precipitation, the thick the clouds are likely to be. When arriving at or departing from a terminal
reporting precipitation of light or greater intensity, expect clouds to be more than 4 000 feet thick.
Air Mass
When a body of air comes to rest or moves slowly over an extensive area having fairly
uniform properties of temperature and moisture, the air takes on those properties. Thus, the air over
the area becomes somewhat of an entity and has fairly uniform horizontal distribution of its
properties. The area over which the air mass acquires its identifying distribution of moisture and
temperature is its "source region''. Just as air mass took on the properties of its source region, it
tends to take on properties of the underlying surface when it moves away from its source region,
thus becoming modified. The degree of modification depends on the speed with which the air mass
moves, and the temperature difference between the new surface and the air mass. Cool air moving
over a warm surface is heated from below, generating instability and increasing the possibility of
showers. Warm air moving over a cool surface is cooled from below, increasing stability. If air is
cooled to its dew point, stratus and/or fog forms. Stability of an air mass determines its typical
weather characteristics. When one type of air mass overlies another, conditions change with height.
Characteristics typical of an unstable are: 1) cumuliform clouds, 2) showery precipitation, 3) rough
air (turbulence), 4) good visibility, except in blowing obstructions; characteristics typical of an
stable are : 1) stratiform clouds and fog, 2) continuous precipitation, 3) smooth air, 4) fair to poor
visibility in haze and smoke.
As air masses move out of their source regions, they come in contact with other air masses
of different properties. The zone between two different air masses is a frontal zone or front.
Across this zone, temperature, humidity and wind often change rapidly over short distances. The
formation of a front is called frontogenesis. When a front dissipates, the area experiences
frontolysis. A front lies in a pressure trough, and pressure generally is higher in the cold air. Thus,
when you cross a front directly into colder air, pressure usually rises abruptly. When you
approach a front toward warm air, pressure generally falls until you cross the front and then
remains steady or falls slightly in the warm air. Wmd always changes across a front. Wind flows
around a front more or less parallel to the front, and in a counterclockwise direction. As an
aircraft flies toward a front in the northern hemisphere, the pilot will notice a decreasing pressure
and a wind from the left of the aircraft. After passing through the front, the pilot will note a wind
shift to the right and increasing air pressure.
Types of Fronts
The leading edge of an advancing cold air mass is a cold front. At the surface, cold air mass is
a cold front. At the surface, cold air is overtaking and replacing warmer air. Cold fronts move at the
speed of the wind component perpendicular to the front just above the frictional layer.
The edge of an advancing warm air mass is a warm front- warmer air is overtaking and
replacing colder air. Since the cold air is denser than the warm air, the cold air hugs the ground. The
warm air slides up and over the cold air and lacks direct push on the cold air. Thus, the cold air is
slow to retreat in advance of the warm air. This slowness of the cold air to retreat produces a frontal
slope that is more gradual than the cold frontal slope. Consequently, warm fronts on the surface are
seldom as well marked as cold fronts, and they usually move about half as fast when the general
wind flow is the same in each case.
When neither air mass is replacing the other, the front is stationary. The opposing forces
exerted by adjacent air masses of different densities are such that the frontal surface between them
shows little or no movement In such cases, the surface winds tend to blow parallel to the frontal
zone. Slope of a stationary front is normally shallow, although it may be steep depending on wind
distribution and density difference.
Stationary fronts or slow moving cold fronts can form frontal waves and low pressure areas. A
small disturbance can cause a bend in the frontal line that induces a counterclockwise flow of air
around a deepening low pressure area The wave forms into a warm front followed by a cold front.
The cold front can then overtake the warm front and force the warm air between the two aloft. This
is called an occluded front or an occlusion.
Most fronts mark the line between two air masses of different temperature. However, this is
not always the case. Sometimes, air masses with virtually the same temperatures will form a front.
The only difference between the two is the moisture content. The front formed in such conditions is
called point front or a dry line.
The surface position of a front often marks the line where an arctic and a tropical air mass
meet at the surface.
Frontal Weather
In fronts, flying weather varies from virtually clear skies to extreme hazards including hail,
turbulence, icing, low clouds, and poor visibility. Weather occurring with a front depends on 1) the
amount of moisture available, 2) the degree of stability of the air that is forced upward, 3) the slop
of the front, 4) the speed of frontal movement, and 5) the upper wind flow.
1) Cold Front In the northern hemisphere, cold fronts are usually oriented in a northeast to
southwest line and may be several hundred miles long. Movement is usually in an easterly direction.
:be speed of a cold front usually dictates the type of weather associated with the front However,
:here are some general weather characteristics that are found in most cold fronts. These include: 1)
cumulus cloud; 2) turbulence; 3) showery precipitation; 4) strong, gusty winds; 5) clearing skies
and good visibility after the front passes.
Fast-moving cold fronts are pushed along by intense high pressure systems located well behind
the front. Surface friction acts to slow the movement of the front, causing the leading edge of the
front to bulge out and to steepen the front's slope. These fronts are particularly hazardous because
of the steep slop and wide differences in moisture and temperature between the two air masses, as
showed in Figure 8-5. When a cold front
pushes into extremely moist, unstable air,
a squall lines often forms ahead of the
front itself. It contains weather more
severe than that found along the front The
weather usually clears quickly behind a
cold front You will often notice reduced
cloud cover, improved visibility, lower
temperatures, and gusty surface winds
following the passage of a fast-moving
cold front.
Figure 8-5 A Faster Moving Cold Front Underruning
Warm, Moist, UllStable Air.
The leading edge of a slow-moving cold front is much shallower than that of a fast-moving
front. This produces clouds which extend far behind the surface front. A slow-moving cold front
meeting stable air usually causes a broad area of stratus clouds to form behind the front. When a
slow-moving cold front meets unstable air, large numbers of vertical clouds often form at and just
behind the front Fair weather cumulus clouds are often present in the cold air, well behind the
surface front.
2) Warm Fronts The slope of a warm front is very gradual, and the warm air may extend
up over the cool air for several hundred miles ahead of the front. Some of the common weather
patterns found in a typical warm front include: 1) stratus clouds, if the air is moist and stable; 2)
little turbulence, except in an unstable air mass; 3) precipitation ahead of the front; 4) poor
visibility with haze or fog; 5) wide area of precipitation. The stability and moisture content of the
air in a warm front determines what type of clouds will form. If the air is warm, moist, and stable,
stratus cloud will develop, showed in Figure 8-6. If the air is warm, moist, and unstable, cumulus
clouds will develop.
3) Other Fronts The weather in a stationary front is usually light, somewhat like a warm
front. If the air lifted by front is stable and the temperature in clouds does not suit for icing, the
weather in a stationary front is very good for flight training in complex weather conditions. Since an
occluded front develops when a cold front overtakes a warm front, weather with an occluded front
is a combination of both warm and cold frontal weather. So it is even worse than the weather in a
single cold front or warm front
Figure 8--6 A Warm Front with Overrunning Moist, Stable Air.
Pressure Systems and Weather
At the surface when air converges into a low, it can neither go outward against the pressure
gradient, nor can it go downward into the ground; it must go upward. Therefore, a low or trough is
an area of rising air. Rising air is conducive to cloudiness and precipitation; thus we have the
general association of low pressure-bad weather.
By the similar reason, air moving out of a high or ridge depletes the quantity of air. Highs and
ridges, therefore, are areas of descending air. Descending air favors dissipation of cloudiness; hence
the association, high pressure-good weather.
Many times weather is more closely associated with an upper air pattern than with features
shown by the surface map. Although features on the two charts are related, they are seldom